2007 Infiniti G35 Sedan Owners Manual

2007 Infiniti G35 Sedan Owners Manual
Foreword
Your INFINITI represents a new way of
thinking about vehicle design. It integrates advanced engineering and superior craftsmanship with a simple, refined
aesthetic sensitivity associated with traditional Japanese culture.
Additionally, a separate Customer Care
and Lemon Law Information Booklet will
explain how to resolve any concerns you
may have with your vehicle, as well as
clarify your rights under your state’s
lemon law.
The result is a different notion of luxury
and beauty. The car itself is important,
but so is the sense of harmony that the
vehicle evokes in its driver, and the
sense of satisfaction you feel with the
INFINITI — from the way it looks and
drives to the high level of dealer service.
INFINITI is dedicated to providing a satisfying ownership experience for as long as
you own your car. Should you have any
questions regarding your INFINITI or your
INFINITI dealer, please contact our Consumer Affairs department at:
For U.S. customers
1-800-662-6200
For Canadian customers
1-800-361-4792
To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to
the fullest, we encourage you to read this
Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains
all of the features, controls and performance characteristics of your INFINITI; it
also provides important instructions and
safety information.
A separate Warranty Information Booklet is included in your Owner’s literature portfolio. The
INFINITI Service and Maintenance Guide explains details about maintaining and servicing
your vehicle. Always carry it with you when you
take your vehicle to an INFINITI dealer. The
Warranty Information Booklet contents provide complete information about all warranties
covering this vehicle, the requirements to keep
the warranties in effect as well as the INFINITI
Roadside Assistance program.
The Consumer Affairs Department will ask
for the following information:
— Your name, address, and telephone
number
You can write to INFINITI with the information at:
For U.S. customers
INFINITI Division
Nissan North America, Inc.
Consumer Affairs Department
P.O. Box 685003
Franklin, TN 37068-5003
For Canadian customers
INFINITI Division
Nissan Canada Inc.
5290 Orbitor Drive
Mississauga, Ontario L4W 4Z5
READ FIRST — THEN DRIVE SAFELY
Before driving your vehicle, read your
Owner’s Manual carefully. This will ensure familiarity with controls and maintenance requirements, assisting you in the
safe operation of your vehicle.
— Vehicle identification number (attached to the top of the instrument
panel on the driver’s side)
— Date of purchase
— Current odometer reading
— Your INFINITI dealer’s name
— Your comments or questions
WARNING
IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION
REMINDERS FOR SAFETY!
Follow these important driving rules to help
ensure a safe and comfortable trip for you and
your passengers!
OR
w 06.9.14/V36-D X
O
O
O
O
O
O
NEVER drive under the influence of alcohol or drugs.
ALWAYS observe posted speed limits and
never drive too fast for conditions.
ALWAYS give your full attention to driving
and avoid using vehicle features or taking
other actions that could distract you.
ALWAYS use your seat belts and appropriate child restraint systems. Pre-teen
children should be seated in the rear
seat.
ALWAYS provide information about the
proper use of vehicle safety features to all
occupants of the vehicle.
ALWAYS review this Owner’s Manual for
important safety information.
MODIFICATION OF YOUR VEHICLE
This vehicle should not be modified. Modification could affect its performance,
safety or durability, and may even violate
governmental regulations. In addition,
damage or performance problems resulting from modification will not be covered under the INFINITI warranties.
WHEN READING THE MANUAL
This manual includes information for all
options available on this model. Therefore, you may find some information that
does not apply to your vehicle.
All information, specifications and illustrations in this manual are those in effect
at the time of printing. INFINITI reserves
the right to change specifications or design at any time without notice.
IMPORTANT INFORMATION ABOUT
THIS MANUAL
You will see various symbols in this
manual. They are used in the following
ways:
WARNING
This is used to indicate the presence of a
hazard that could cause death or serious
personal injury. To avoid or reduce the risk,
the procedures must be followed precisely.
SIC0697
If you see the symbol above, it means
“Do not do this” or “Do not let this happen”.
If you see a symbol similar to those
above in an illustration, it means the
arrow points to the front of the vehicle.
CAUTION
This is used to indicate the presence of a
hazard that could cause minor or moderate
personal injury or damage to your vehicle.
To avoid or reduce the risk, the procedures
must be followed carefully.
Arrows in an illustration that are similar
to those above indicate movement or action.
Arrows in an illustration that are similar
to those above call attention to an item
in the illustration.
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
CALIFORNIA PROPOSITION 65
WARNING
WARNING
Gracenote is a registered
trademark of Gracenote, Inc.
The Gracenote logo and logo
type, and the “Powered by
Gracenote” logo are trademarks of Gracenote.
Engine Exhaust, some of its constituents,
and certain vehicle components contain or
emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other
reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids
contained in vehicles and certain products of
component wear contain or emit chemicals
known to the State of California to cause
cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm.
CALIFORNIA PERCHLORATE
ADVISORY
Some vehicle parts, such as lithium batteries, may contain perchlorate material.
The following advisory is provided: “Perchlorate Material - special handling may
apply, See www.dtsc.ca.gov/
hazardouswaste/perchlorate.”
BLUETOOTH is a trademark
owned by Bluetooth SIG,
Inc., U.S.A. and licenced to
Xanavi Informatics Corporation.
© 2007 NISSAN MOTOR CO., LTD.
All rights reserved. No part of this Owner’s
Manual may be reproduced or stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted in any form, or by
any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording or otherwise, without the prior
written permission of Nissan Motor Co., Ltd.
w 07.2.6/V36-D X
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
Table of
Contents
Illustrated table of contents
0
Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
1
Instruments and controls
2
Pre-driving checks and adjustments
3
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
4
Starting and driving
5
In case of emergency
6
Appearance and care
7
Maintenance and do-it-yourself
8
Technical and consumer information
9
Index
10
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
0
Illustrated table of contents
Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint
system (SRS) ....................................................
Exterior front ....................................................
Exterior rear .....................................................
Passenger compartment ...................................
0-2
0-3
0-4
0-5
Cockpit............................................................. 0-6
Instrument panel .............................................. 0-8
Meters and gauges........................................... 0-9
Engine compartment ....................................... 0-10
VQ35HR engine.......................................... 0-10
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
SEATS, SEAT BELTS AND SUPPLEMENTAL
RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS)
1. Supplemental front-impact air bags
(Page 1-35)
2. Front seat belts (P.1-8)
3. Front head restraints (P.1-5)
4. Supplemental side-impact air bags
(P.1-35)
5. Supplemental curtain side-impact air
bags (P.1-35)
6. Rear seat belts (P.1-8)
7. Rear head restraints (P.1-5)
8. Child restraint anchor points (for top
tether strap child restraint) (P.1-16)
9. Occupant classification sensor (pattern
sensor) (P.1-41)
10. Front seats (P.1-2)
11. Pre-tensioner seat belt system (P.1-48)
12. Rear seats (P.1-7)
— Child restraints (P.1-16)
13. LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for
CHildren) system (P.1-18)
SSI0258
0-2 Illustrated table of contents
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
EXTERIOR FRONT
5. Power windows (P.2-52)
6. Recovery hook (P.6-14)
7. Tires
— Wheel and tires (P.8-28, P.9-8)
— Flat tire (P.6-2)
— Tire pressure monitoring system
(TPMS) (P.2-16, P.5-3)
8. Outside mirrors (P.3-25)
9. Doors
— Keys (P.3-2)
— Door locks (P.3-5)
— Intelligent Key system (P.3-8)
— Remote keyless entry system
(P.3-14)
SSI0259
1. Hood (P.3-17)
2. Headlight and turn signal
— Operation (P.2-34)
— Bulb replacement (P.8-25)
— Adaptive Front lighting System (AFS)
(if so equipped) (P.2-37)
— Fog light (P.2-39)
3. Windshield wiper and washer
— Operation (P.2-32)
— Blade replacement (P.8-19)
4. Sunroof (if so equipped) (P.2-54)
Illustrated table of contents 0-3
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
EXTERIOR REAR
6. Fuel-filler door
— Operation (P.3-20)
— Fuel recommendation (P.9-3)
7. Rear view camera (if so equipped)
(P.4-21)
8. Trunk
— Intelligent Key system (P.3-8)
— Remote keyless entry system
(P.3-14)
— Trunk lid (P.3-18)
9. Child safety locks (P.3-7)
SSI0260
1. High-mounted stop light (model with a
rear spoiler) (Bulb replacement)
(P.8-25)
2. High-mounted stop light (model
without a rear spoiler) (Bulb replacement) (P.8-25)
3. Rear window defroster switch (P.2-33)
4. Rear combination light (Bulb replacement) (P.8-25)
5. Satellite antenna (if so equipped)
(P.4-32)
0-4 Illustrated table of contents
w 07.2.6/V36-D X
PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
8. Sunroof (if so equipped) (P.2-54)
9. Map light (P.2-56)
10. Sunglasses holder (P.2-48)
11. Inside rearview mirror
— Anti-glare adjustment (P.3-24)
— HomeLink (P.2-59)
— Compass (P.2-9)
12. Trunk pass-through (P.1-7)/Rear armrest (P.1-7)
13. Rear cup holders (P.2-46)
14. Console box
— Power outlet (P.2-44)
— Auxiliary input jacks (P.4-57)
15. Front cup holders (P.2-46)
SSI0261
1. Coat hooks (P.2-51)
2. Rear personal light (P.2-56)
3. Seats (P.1-2)
4. Power windows (P.2-52)
5. Outside mirror remote control switch
(P.3-25)
6. Automatic drive positioner switch (if so
equipped) (P.3-26)
7. Sun visors (P.3-23)
Illustrated table of contents 0-5
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
COCKPIT
6. Headlight, fog light and turn signal
switch (P.2-34)
7. Paddle shifter (if so equipped) (P.5-13)
8. Steering-wheel-mounted controls (Left
side)
— ENTER or tuning switch
(P.4-7, P.4-55)
— BACK switch (P.4-55)
— TALK switch (P.4-81)/Phone switch
(P.4-58)
— Volume control switches (P.4-55)
— Source select switch (P.4-55)
9. Trip computer switch (P.2-21)
10. Windshield wiper and washer switch
(P.2-32)
SSI0262
1. Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF
switch (P.2-42)
4. Instrument brightness control switch
(P.2-38)
2. Trunk lid release switch (P.3-18)
5. TRIP/RESET switch for twin trip odometer (P.2-7)
3. Adaptive Front lighting System (AFS)
switch (if so equipped) (P.2-37)
11. Steering-wheel-mounted controls
(Right side)
— Cruise control switches (P.5-17)
— Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC)
switches (if so equipped) (P.5-19)
12. Hood release handle (P.3-17)
13. Intelligent Key port (P.5-8)
14. Electric tilting/telescopic steering
wheel switch (if so equipped) (P.3-22)
15. Manual tilting/telescopic steering
wheel switch (if so equipped) (P.3-22)
0-6 Illustrated table of contents
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
16. Steering wheel
— Horn (P.2-40)
— Driver supplemental
(P.1-35)
air
bag
Illustrated table of contents 0-7
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
INSTRUMENT PANEL
— Bluetooth Hands-Free Phone
System (if so equipped) (P.4-58)
— Audio system (P.4-32)
7. Center display (P.4-3)/Navigation system* (if so equipped)
8. Hazard warning flasher switch
(P.2-40)
9. Front passenger supplemental air bag
(P.1-35)
10. Fuse box cover (P.8-22)
11. Parking brake
— Parking (P.5-44)
12. Push-button ignition switch (P.5-7)
13. Automatic climate control system
(P.4-25)
14. Cigarette lighter and ashtrays
(P.2-45)
SSI0263
16. SNOW mode switch (if so equipped)
(P.2-42)
1. Side ventilator (P.4-25)
5. Clock (P.2-43)
2. Meters and gauges (P.2-6)
6. Center multi-function control panel
— Navigation system* (if so
equipped)
— Vehicle information and setting
buttons (P.4-9)
3. Center ventilator (P.4-25)
4. Audio system (P.4-32)
15. Heated seat switch (if so equipped)
(P.2-41)
17. CompactFlash card slot (if so
equipped) (P.4-44)
0-8 Illustrated table of contents
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
METERS AND GAUGES
18. Rear window and outside mirror (if so
equipped) defogger switch (P.2-33)
19. Glove box lid release handle (P.2-48)
20. Trunk release power cancel switch
(P.3-18)
*: Refer to the separate Navigation System
Owner’s Manual.
SSI0264
1. Tachometer (P.2-8)
2. Warning/Indicator lights (P.2-13)
3. Speedometer (P.2-7)
5. Dot matrix liquid crystal display/
Odometer/twin trip odometer (P.2-21)
6. Fuel gauge (P.2-9)
4. Engine coolant temperature gauge
(P.2-8)
Illustrated table of contents 0-9
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
7. Power steering fluid reservoir (P.8-12)
8. Air cleaner (P.8-18)
9. Radiator filler cap (P.8-8)
10. Drive belts (P.8-17)
11. Coolant reservoir (P.8-8)
12. Engine oil dipstick (P.8-9)
SSI0265
VQ35HR ENGINE
4. Brake fluid reservoir (P.8-13)
1. Fuse/fusible link holder (P.8-22)
5. Clutch fluid reservoir (Manual Transmission models) (P.8-14)
2. Battery (P.8-15)
3. Engine oil filler cap (P.8-9)
6. Window washer fluid reservoir
(P.8-14)
0-10 Illustrated table of contents
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
1 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental
restraint system
Seats ................................................................ 1-2
Front seats................................................... 1-2
Head restraint .............................................. 1-5
Armrest........................................................ 1-7
Seat belts ......................................................... 1-8
Precautions on seat belt usage.................... 1-8
Child safety................................................ 1-10
Pregnant women ......................................... 1-11
Injured persons........................................... 1-11
Three-point type seat belt .......................... 1-12
Seat belt extenders .................................... 1-15
Seat belt maintenance................................ 1-15
Child restraints................................................ 1-16
Precautions on child restraints ................... 1-16
Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren
system (LATCH) .......................................... 1-18
Top tether strap child restraint .................. 1-20
Child restraint installation using LATCH...... 1-21
Child restraint installation using the seat
belts ..........................................................
Booster seats ..................................................
Precautions on booster seats ....................
Booster seat installation ............................
Supplemental restraint system ........................
Precautions on supplemental restraint
system .......................................................
INFINITI advanced air bag system (front
seats) .........................................................
Supplemental side-impact air bag and
curtain side-impact air bag system ............
Pre-tensioner seat belt system (front
seats) ........................................................
Supplemental air bag warning labels.........
Supplemental air bag warning light ...........
Repair and replacement procedure ............
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
1-24
1-31
1-31
1-33
1-35
1-35
1-41
1-46
1-48
1-49
1-49
1-50
SEATS
children could become involved in serious accidents.
FRONT SEATS
Front power seat adjustment
Operating tips:
SSS0133
WARNING
O
O
Do not ride in a moving vehicle when the
seatback is reclined. This can be dangerous. The shoulder belt will not be
against your body. In an accident, you
could be thrown into it and receive neck
or other serious injuries. You could also
slide under the lap belt and receive serious internal injuries.
For the most effective protection when
the vehicle is in motion, the seat should
be upright. Always sit well back in the
seat with both feet on the floor and adjust the seat belt properly. See “Precautions on seat belt usage” later in this
section.
O
The seat motor has an auto-reset overload protection circuit. If the motor
stops during operation, wait 30 seconds, then reactivate the switch.
O
Do not operate the power seat for a
long period of time when the engine is
off. This will discharge the battery.
See “Automatic drive positioner” in the
“3. Pre-driving checks and adjustments”
section for automatic drive positioner operation.
O
After adjustment, gently rock in the seat
to make sure it is securely locked.
O
Do not leave children unattended inside
the vehicle. They could unknowingly activate switches or controls. Unattended
1-2 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
SSS0682
Forward and backward:
1 forward or backMoving the switch q
ward will slide the seat forward or backward to the desired position.
on seat belt usage” later in this section.)
The seatback may also be reclined to
allow occupants to rest when the vehicle
is parked.
SSS0673
Seat lifter:
Push the front or rear end of the switch
up or down to adjust the angle of the
front portion or height of the seat.
Reclining:
2 backward
Move the recline switch q
until the desired angle is obtained. To
bring the seatback forward again, move
2 forward.
the switch q
The reclining feature allows adjustment of
the seatback for occupants of different
sizes for added comfort and to help obtain proper seat belt fit. (See “Precautions
Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-3
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
Type A
Lumbar support (if so equipped):
SSS0707
The lumbar support feature provides to
the driver.
Type B
Type B
SSS0684
Side support (if so equipped):
1 up or down to adjust
Move the lever q
the seat lumbar area.
Type A
1 or back q
2 end of the
Push the front q
switch to adjust the seat lumbar area.
SSS0685
The side support feature provides thigh
and torso supports. Push the switch in1 or outside q
2 to adjust the thigh
side q
3 or outarea. Push the switch inside q
4 to adjust the torso area.
side q
1-4 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
HEAD RESTRAINT
WARNING
Head restraints should be adjusted properly
as they may provide significant protection
against injury in an accident. Do not remove
them. Check the adjustment after someone
else uses the seat.
SSS0686
SSS0288
Thigh extension (if so equipped):
Adjustment
The front portion of the front seats can be
extended forward for seating comfort. Pull
1 to extend the
up and hold the lever q
front portion to the desired position.
To raise the head restraint, pull it up.
1 and push
To lower, push the lock knob q
the head restraint down.
Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-5
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
prevent all injuries in any accident.
O
SSS0287
Adjust the head restraint so the center is
level with the center of your ears.
SSS0508
Active head restraint (front seats)
Do not attach anything to the head restraint stalks. Doing so could impair active head restraint function.
The active head restraint moves forward
utilizing the force that the seatback receives from the occupant in a rear-end
collision. The movement of the head restraint helps support the occupant’s head
by reducing its backward movement and
helping absorb some of the forces that
may lead to whiplash type injuries.
Active head restraints are effective for collisions at low to medium speeds in which
it is said that whiplash injury occurs
most.
WARNING
O
Always adjust the head restraints properly as specified in the previous section.
Failure to do so can reduce the effectiveness of the active head restraint.
O
Active head restraints are designed to
supplement other safety systems. Always wear seat belts. No system can
Active head restraints operate only in certain rear-end collisions. After the collision, the head restraints return to their
original positions.
Properly adjust the active head restraints
as described in the previous section.
1-6 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
the “3. Pre-driving checks and adjustments” section.
Make sure that the mechanical key is removed from the trunk pass-through lid
key cylinder before opening or closing the
lid. Otherwise the lid and the rear armrest
may be damaged.
SSS0678
SSS0677
ARMREST
Trunk pass-through
Rear armrest
The rear center seatback can be folded to
allow trunk access from inside of the vehicle.
Pull the armrest forward until it is horizontal.
To access the trunk, pull down the rear
center armrest and pull out the trunk
1 .
pass-through lid q
To lock the lid, use the mechanical key
2 . To
and turn it to the LOCK position q
unlock, turn the mechanical key to the
3 . For the mechanical
UNLOCK position q
key usage, see “Keys (Intelligent Key)” in
Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-7
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
SEAT BELTS
PRECAUTIONS ON SEAT BELT
USAGE
If you are wearing your seat belt properly
adjusted, and you are sitting upright and
well back in your seat with both feet on
the floor, your chances of being injured or
killed in an accident and/or the severity
of injury may be greatly reduced. INFINITI
strongly encourages you and all of your
passengers to buckle up every time you
drive, even if your seating position includes a supplemental air bag.
Most U.S. states and Canadian provinces
or territories specify that seat belts be
worn at all times when a vehicle is being
driven.
SSS0136A
WARNING
O
O
Every person who drives or rides in this
vehicle should use a seat belt at all
times. Children should be properly restrained in the rear seat and, if appropriate, in a child restraint.
The seat belt should be properly adjusted to a snug fit. Failure to do so may
reduce the effectiveness of the entire restraint system and increase the chance
or severity of injury in an accident. Serious injury or death can occur if the seat
belt is not worn properly.
O
Always route the shoulder belt over your
shoulder and across your chest. Never
run the belt behind your back, under
your arm or across your neck. The belt
should be away from your face and neck,
but not falling off your shoulder.
1-8 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
O
Position the lap belt as low and snug as
possible AROUND THE HIPS, NOT THE
WAIST. A lap belt worn too high could increase the risk of internal injuries in an
accident.
O
Be sure the seat belt tongue is securely
fastened to the proper buckle.
O
Do not wear the seat belt inside out or
twisted. Doing so may reduce its effectiveness.
O
Do not allow more than one person to
use the same seat belt.
O
Never carry more people in the vehicle
than there are seat belts.
O
If the seat belt warning light glows continuously while the ignition is turned ON
with all doors closed and all seat belts
fastened, it may indicate a malfunction
in the system. Have the system checked
by an INFINITI dealer.
O
Once the pre-tensioner seat belt has activated, it cannot be reused and must be
replaced together with the retractor. See
an INFINITI dealer.
SSS0134A
O
Removal and installation of the pretensioner seat belt system components
should be done by an INFINITI dealer.
O
All seat belt assemblies, including retractors and attaching hardware, should
be inspected after any collision by an
INFINITI dealer. INFINITI recommends
that all seat belt assemblies in use
during a collision be replaced unless the
collision was minor and the belts show
no damage and continue to operate
properly.
Seat belt assemblies not in use during a
collision should also be inspected and
replaced if either damage or improper
operation is noted.
O
All child restraints and attaching hardware should be inspected after any collision. Always follow the restraint manufacturer’s inspection instructions and replacement recommendations. The child
restraints should be replaced if they are
damaged.
Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-9
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
CHILD SAFETY
Children need adults to help protect them.
They need to be properly restrained.
In addition to the general information in
this manual, child safety information is
available from many other sources, including doctors, teachers, government
traffic safety offices, and community organizations. Every child is different, so be
sure to learn the best way to transport
your child.
SSS0016
SSS0014
There are three basic types of child restraint systems:
O
Rear facing child restraint
O
Front facing child restraint
O
Booster seat
The proper restraint depends on the
child’s size. Generally, infants (up to
about 1 year and less than 20 lb (9 kg))
should be placed in rear facing child restraints. Front facing child restraints are
available for children who outgrow rear
facing child restraints and are at least 1
year old. Booster seats are used to help
position a vehicle lap/shoulder belt on a
child who can no longer use a front facing
child restraint.
WARNING
Infants and children need special protection.
The vehicle’s seat belts may not fit them
properly. The shoulder belt may come too
close to the face or neck. The lap belt may
not fit over their small hip bones. In an accident, an improperly fitting seat belt could
cause serious or fatal injury. Always use appropriate child restraints.
All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or
territories require the use of approved
child restraints for infants and small children. (See “Child restraints” later in this
section.)
Also, there are other types of child restraints available for larger children for
additional protection.
INFINITI recommends that all pre-teens
and children be restrained in the rear seat.
According to accident statistics, children
are safer when properly restrained in the
rear seat than in the front seat. This is especially important because your vehicle
has a supplemental restraint system (air
bag system) for the front passenger. See
1-10 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
“Supplemental restraint system” later in
this section.
Infants
Infants up to at least one year old should
be placed in a rear facing child restraint.
INFINITI recommends that infants be
placed in child restraints that comply with
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards or
Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards.
You should choose a child restraint which
fits your vehicle and always follow the
manufacturer’s instructions for installation and use.
Small children
Children that are over one year old and
weigh at least 20 lb (9 kg) can be placed
in a forward facing child restraint. Refer to
the manufacturer’s instructions for
minimum and maximum weight and
height recommendations. INFINITI recommends that small children be placed in
child restraints that comply with Federal
Motor Vehicle Safety Standards or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards. You
should choose a child restraint that fits
your vehicle and always follow the manufacturer’s instructions for installation and
use.
Larger children
Children who are too large for child restraints should be seated and restrained
by the seat belts which are provided. The
seat belt may not fit properly if the child
is less than 4 ft 9 in (142.5 cm) tall and
weighs between 40 lb (18 kg) and 80 lb
(36 kg). A booster seat should be used to
obtain proper seat belt fit.
INFINITI recommends that a child be
placed in a commercially available
booster seat if the shoulder belt in the
child’s seating position fits close to the
face or neck or if the lap portion of the
seat belt goes across the abdomen. The
booster seat should raise the child so
that the shoulder belt is properly positioned across the top, middle portion of
the shoulder and the lap belt is low on
the hips. A booster seat can only be used
in seating positions that have a threepoint type seat belt. The booster seat
should fit the vehicle seat and have a
label certifying that it complies with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards or
Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards.
Once the child has grown so the shoulder
belt is no longer on or near the face and
neck, use the shoulder belt without the
booster seat.
WARNING
Never let a child stand or kneel on any seat
and do not allow a child in the cargo areas
while the vehicle is moving. The child could
be seriously injured or killed in an accident
or sudden stop.
PREGNANT WOMEN
INFINITI recommends that pregnant
women use seat belts. The seat belt
should be worn snug, and always position
the lap belt as low as possible around the
hips, not the waist, and place the
shoulder belt over your shoulder and
across your chest. Never run the
lap/shoulder belt over your abdominal
area. Contact your doctor for specific recommendations.
INJURED PERSONS
INFINITI recommends that injured persons
use seat belts, depending on the injury.
Check with your doctor for specific recommendations.
Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-11
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
THREE-POINT TYPE SEAT BELT
WARNING
O
Every person who drives or rides in this
vehicle should use a seat belt at all
times.
O
Do not ride in a moving vehicle when the
seatback is reclined. This can be dangerous. The shoulder belt will not be
against your body. In an accident, you
could be thrown into it and receive neck
or other serious injuries. You could also
slide under the lap belt and receive serious internal injuries.
O
For the most effective protection when
the vehicle is in motion, the seat should
be upright. Always sit well back in the
seat with both feet on the floor and adjust the seat belt properly.
Front seat
SSS0292
Fastening the seat belts
1. Adjust the seat. See “Seats” earlier in
this section.
2. Slowly pull the seat belt out of the retractor and insert the tongue into the
buckle until it clicks.
O
The retractor is designed to lock during
a sudden stop or on impact. A slow
pulling motion will permit the belt to
move, and allow you some freedom of
movement in the seat.
O
If the seat belt cannot be pulled from
its fully retracted position, firmly pull
SSS0293
Rear seat
the belt and release it. Then smoothly
pull the belt out of the retractor.
1-12 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
WARNING
When fastening the seat belts, be certain
that seatbacks are completely secured in
the latched position. If they are not completely secured, passengers may be injured
in an accident or sudden stop.
SSS0290
Front seat
3. Position the lap belt portion low and
snug on the hips as shown.
4. Pull the shoulder belt portion toward
the retractor to take up extra slack.
Make sure the shoulder belt is routed
over your shoulder and across your
chest.
The front passenger and rear seat belts
have a locking mechanism for child restraint installation. It is referred to as the
automatic locking mode or child restraint
mode.
SSS0291A
Rear seat
activated the seat belt cannot be extended again until the seat belt tongue is
detached from the buckle and fully retracted. Once retracted, the seat belt is in
the emergency locking mode. For additional information, see “Child restraints”
later in this section.
The automatic locking mode should be
used only for child restraint installation.
During normal seat belt use by an occupant, the locking mode should not be activated. If it is activated it may cause uncomfortable seat belt tension.
When the automatic locking mechanism is
Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-13
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
To increase your confidence in the seat
belts, check the operation as follows:
O
grasp the shoulder belt and pull forward quickly. The retractor should lock
and restrict further belt movement.
If the retractor does not lock during this
check or if you have any question about
belt operation, see an INFINITI dealer.
SSS0326
SSS0687
Unfastening the seat belts
Center of rear seat
To unfasten the belt, push the button on
the buckle. The seat belt will automatically retract.
Selecting correct set of seat belts:
Checking seat belt operation
Your seat belt retractors are designed to
lock belt movement by two separate
methods:
O
when the belt is pulled quickly from
the retractor.
O
when the vehicle slows down rapidly.
The center seat belt buckle is identified
A . The center seat
by the CENTER mark q
belt tongue can be fastened only into the
center seat belt buckle.
1-14 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
Shoulder belt height adjustment
(front seats)
may be used for either the driver or front
passenger seating position. See an
INFINITI dealer for assistance if the extender is required.
The shoulder belt anchor height should
be adjusted to the position best for you.
See “Precautions on seat belt usage” earlier in this section.
O
O
WARNING
WARNING
O
After adjustment, release the adjustment button and try to move the
shoulder belt anchor up and down to
make sure it is securely fixed in position.
Only INFINITI belt extenders, made by
the same company which made the
original equipment seat belts, should be
used with the INFINITI seat belts.
O
Adults and children who can use the
standard seat belt should not use an extender. Such unnecessary use could result in serious personal injury in the
event of an accident.
O
Never use seat belt extenders to install
child restraints. If the child restraint is
not secured properly, the child could be
seriously injured in a collision or a
sudden stop.
The shoulder belt anchor height should
be adjusted to the position best for you.
Failure to do so may reduce the effectiveness of the entire restraint system and
increase the chance or severity of injury
in an accident.
SSS0294A
A , and then
To adjust, push the button q
move the shoulder belt anchor to the desired position, so that the belt passes
over the center of the shoulder. The belt
should be away from your face and neck,
but not falling off of your shoulder. Release the button to lock the shoulder belt
anchor into position.
SEAT BELT EXTENDERS
If, because of body size or driving position, it is not possible to properly fit the
lap-shoulder belt and fasten it, an extender is available. The extender adds approximately 8 in (200 mm) of length and
SEAT BELT MAINTENANCE
O
To clean the seat belt webbings, apply a
mild soap solution or any non-caustic
solution recommended for gently
cleaning cloth upholstery or carpets.
Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-15
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
CHILD RESTRAINTS
Then brush it, wipe with a cloth and allow it to dry in the shade. Do not allow
the seat belts to retract until they are
completely dry.
O
If dirt builds up in the shoulder belt
guide of the seat belt anchors, the
seat belts may retract slowly. Wipe the
shoulder belt guide with a clean, dry
cloth.
O
Periodically check to see that the seat
belt and the metal components such as
buckles, tongues, retractors, flexible
wires and anchors work properly. If
loose parts, deterioration, cuts or
other damage on the webbing are
found, the entire belt assembly should
be replaced.
SSS0099
SSS0100
PRECAUTIONS ON CHILD
RESTRAINTS
for even the strongest adult to resist the
forces of a severe accident. The child
could be crushed between the adult and
parts of the vehicle. Also, do not put the
same seat belt around both your child
and yourself.
WARNING
O
O
Infants and small children should always be placed in an appropriate child
restraint while riding in the vehicle. Failure to use a child restraint can result in
serious injury or death.
Infants and small children should never
be carried on your lap. It is not possible
O
Even with the INFINITI Advanced Air Bag
System, never install a rear-facing child
restraint in the front seat. An inflating
supplemental front air bag could seriously injure or kill your child. A rearfacing child restraint must only be used
in the rear seat.
1-16 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
O
INFINITI recommends that the child restraint be installed in the rear seat. According to accident statistics, children
are safer when properly restrained in the
rear seat than in the front seat. If you
must install a front facing child restraint
in the front seat, see “Child restraint installation using the seat belts” in this
section.
O
Improper use or improper installation of
a child restraint can increase the risk or
severity of injury for both the child and
other occupants of the vehicle and can
lead to serious injury or death in an accident.
O
Follow all of the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions for installation and
use. When purchasing a child restraint,
be sure to select one which will fit your
child and vehicle. It may not be possible
to properly install some types of child restraints in your vehicle.
O
If the child restraint is not anchored
properly, the risk of a child being injured
in a collision or a sudden stop greatly increases.
O
Child restraint anchor points are designed to withstand only those loads imposed by correctly fitted child restraints.
Under no circumstances are they to be
used for adult seat belts or harnesses.
O
Adjustable seatbacks should be positioned to fit the child restraint, but as
upright as possible.
O
After attaching the child restraint, test it
before you place the child in it. Push it
from side to side while holding the seat
near the LATCH attachment or by the
seat belt path. Try to tug it forward and
check to see if the belt holds the restraint in place. The child restraint
should not move more than 1 in (25 mm).
If the restraint is not secure, tighten the
belt as necessary, or put the restraint in
another seat and test it again. You may
need to try a different child restraint. Not
all child restraints fit in all types of vehicles.
O
When your child restraint is not in use,
keep it secured with the LATCH System
or a seat belt to prevent it from being
thrown around in case of a sudden stop
or accident.
CAUTION
Remember that a child restraint left in a
closed vehicle can become very hot. Check
the seating surface and buckles before placing your child in the child restraint.
This vehicle is equipped with a universal
child restraint lower anchor system, referred to as the Lower Anchors and
Tethers for CHildren System or LATCH.
Some child restraints include two rigid or
webbing-mounted attachments that can
be connected to these lower anchors. For
details, see “Lower Anchors and Tethers
for CHildren System (LATCH)” in this section.
If you do not have a LATCH compatible
child restraint, the vehicle seat belts can
be used. See “Child restraint installed using the seat belts” later in this section. In
general, child restraints are also designed
to be installed with the lap portion of a
lap/shoulder seat belt.
Several manufacturers offer child restraints for infants and small children of
various sizes. When selecting any child
Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-17
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
restraint, keep the following points in
mind:
Lower Anchors and Tethers for
CHildren SYSTEM (LATCH)
O
Choose only a restraint with a label
certifying that it complies with Federal
Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213 or
Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213.
O
Check the child restraint in your vehicle to be sure it is compatible with
the vehicle’s seat and seat belt
system.
Your vehicle is equipped with special anchor points that are used with Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren System
(LATCH) compatible child restraints. This
system may also be referred to as the
ISOFIX or ISOFIX compatible system. With
this system, you do not have to use a vehicle seat belt to secure the child restraint.
O
If the child restraint is compatible with
your vehicle, place your child in the
child restraint and check the various
adjustments to be sure the child restraint is compatible with your child.
Choose a child restraint that is designed for your child’s height and
weight. Always follow all recommended procedures.
The LATCH anchor points are provided to
install child restraints in the rear outboard seating positions only. Do not attempt to install a child restraint in the
center position using the LATCH anchors.
All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or
territories require that infants and small
children be restrained in an approved child
restraint at all times while the vehicle is
being operated.
LATCH label location
SSS0710
LATCH lower anchor point
locations
The LATCH anchors are located at the rear
of the seat cushion near the seatback. A
label is attached to the seatback to help
you locate the LATCH anchors.
1-18 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
O
SSS0637
WARNING
O
Attach LATCH compatible child restraints only at the locations shown in
the illustration. If a child restraint is not
secured properly, your child could be seriously injured or killed in an accident.
O
Do not secure a child restraint in the
center rear seating position using the
LATCH anchors. The child restraint will
not be secured properly.
Child restraint anchor points are designed to withstand only those loads imposed by correctly fitted child restraints.
Under no circumstance are they to be
used for adult seat belts or harnesses.
SSS0643
LATCH webbing-mounted attachment
Installing child restraint LATCH
anchor attachments
LATCH compatible child restraints include
two rigid or webbing-mounted attachments that can be connected to two anchors located at certain seating positions
in your vehicle. With this system, you do
not have to use a vehicle seat belt to secure the child restraint. Check your child
restraint for a label stating that it is compatible with LATCH. This information may
also be in the instructions provided by
the child restraint manufacturer.
Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-19
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
seat belts or harnesses.
Top tether anchor point locations
Anchor points are located on the rear parcel shelf.
Installing top tether strap
First, secure the child restraint with the
seat belt or LATCH (rear outboard seat positions only), as applicable.
SSS0644
LATCH rigid attachment
LATCH child restraints generally require
the use of a top tether strap. See “Top
tether strap child restraint” in this section
for installation instructions.
When installing a child restraint, carefully
read and follow the instructions in this
manual and those supplied with the child
restraint. See “Child restraint installation
using LATCH” in this section.
SSS0675
TOP TETHER STRAP CHILD
RESTRAINT
If the manufacturer of your child restraint
requires the use of a top tether strap, it
must be secured to an anchor point.
WARNING
Flip up the anchor cover from the anchor
point which is located directly behind the
child seat. Position the top tether strap
over the top of the seatback and secure it
to the tether anchor bracket that provides
the straightest installation. Tighten the
strap according to the manufacturer’s instructions to remove any slack.
If you have any questions when installing
a top tether strap child restraint on the
rear seat, consult your INFINITI dealer for
details.
Child restraint anchor points are designed to
withstand only those loads imposed by correctly fitted child restraints. Under no circumstances are they to be used for adult
1-20 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
CHILD RESTRAINT INSTALLATION
USING LATCH
WARNING
O
Attach LATCH compatible child restraints only at the locations shown. For
the LATCH lower anchor locations, see
“Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren
System (LATCH)” in this section. If a
child restraint is not secured properly,
your child could be seriously injured or
killed in an accident.
O
The LATCH anchors are designed to
withstand only those loads imposed by
correctly fitted child restraints. Under no
circumstance are they to be used for
adult seat belts or harnesses.
O
Inspect the lower anchors by inserting
your fingers into the lower anchor area
and feeling to make sure there are no obstructions over the LATCH anchors, such
as seat belt webbing or seat cushion material. The child restraint will not be secured properly if the LATCH anchors are
obstructed.
Front facing — step 2
SSS0645
Front-facing
Follow these steps to install a front-facing
child restraint using LATCH:
1. Position the child restraint on the
seat. Always follow the child restraint
manufacturer’s instructions.
SSS0646
Front facing − step 2
2. Secure the child restraint anchor attachments to the LATCH lower anchors.
3. The back of the child restraint should
be secured against the vehicle seatback. If the seating position does not
have an adjustable head restraint and
it is interfering with the proper child
restraint fit, try another seating position or a different child restraint.
Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-21
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
straint. Not all child restraints fit in all
types of vehicles.
7. Check to make sure the child restraint
is properly secured prior to each use.
If the child restraint is loose, repeat
steps 3 through 6.
SSS0647
Front facing − step 4
4. For child restraints that are equipped
with webbing mounted attachments,
remove any additional slack from the
anchor attachments. Press downward
and rearward firmly in the center of
the child restraint with your knee to
compress the vehicle seat cushion and
seatback while tightening the webbing
of the anchor attachments.
5. If the child restraint is equipped with
a top tether strap, route the top tether
strap and secure the tether strap to
the tether anchor point. See “Top
tether strap child restraint” in this
section.
SSS0638
Front facing − step 6
6. Before placing the child in the child
restraint, hold child restraint near the
LATCH attachment and use force to
push the child restraint from side to
side, and tug it forward to make sure
that it is securely held in place. It
should not move more than 1 in (25
mm). If it does move more than 1 in
(25 mm), pull again on the anchor attachments to further tighten the child
restraint. If you are unable to properly
secure the restraint, move the restraint to another seating position and
try again, or try a different child re-
1-22 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
Rear facing − step 2
SSS0648
Rear-facing
Follow these steps to install a rear-facing
child restraint using LATCH:
1. Position the child restraint on the
seat. Always follow the child restraint
manufacturer’s instructions.
SSS0649
Rear facing − step 2
2. Secure the child restraint anchor attachments to the LATCH lower anchors.
SSS0639
Rear facing − step 3
3. For child restraints that are equipped
with webbing mounted attachments,
remove any additional slack from the
anchor attachments. Press downward
and rearward firmly in the center of
the child restraint with your hand to
compress the vehicle seat cushion and
seatback while tightening the webbing
of the anchor attachments.
Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-23
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
straint. Not all child restraints fit in all
types of vehicles.
5. Check to make sure the child restraint
is properly secured prior to each use.
If the child restraint is loose, repeat
steps 3 through 4.
SSS0650
Rear facing − step 4
4. Before placing the child in the child
restraint, hold the child restraint near
the LATCH attachment and use force to
push the child restraint from side to
side, and tug it forward to make sure
that it is securely held in place. It
should not move more than 1 in (25
mm). If it does move more than 1 in
(25 mm), pull again on the anchor attachments to further tighten the child
restraint. If you are unable to properly
secure the restraint, move the restraint to another seating position and
try again, or try a different child re-
SSS0100
CHILD RESTRAINT INSTALLATION
USING THE SEAT BELTS
WARNING
O
Even with the INFINITI Advanced Air Bag
System, never install a rear-facing child
restraint in the front passenger seat.
Supplemental front air bags inflate with
great force. A rear-facing child restraint
could be struck by the supplemental
front air bag in a crash and could seri-
1-24 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
ously injure or kill your child.
O
INFINITI recommends that child restraints be installed in the rear seat.
However, if you must install a forward
facing child restraint in the front passenger seat, move the passenger seat to
the rearmost position. Also, be sure the
front passenger air bag status light is illuminated to indicate the passenger air
bag is OFF. See “Front passenger air bag
and status light” in this section for details.
O
The three-point seat belt in your vehicle
is equipped with an automatic locking
mode retractor which must be used
when installing a child restraint.
O
O
Failure to use the retractor’s locking
mode will result in the child restraint not
being properly secured. The restraint
could tip over or otherwise be unsecured
and cause injury to the child in a sudden
stop or collision.
A child restraint with a top tether strap
should not be used in the front passenger seat.
The instructions in this section apply to
child restraint installation using the vehicle seat belts in the rear seat or the
front passenger seat.
SSS0640
Front facing (front passenger seat) — step 1
Front-facing
Follow these steps to install a front-facing
child restraint using the vehicle seat belt
in the rear seat or in the front passenger
seat:
1. If you must install a child restraint in
the front seat, it should be placed in a
front-facing direction only. Move the
seat to the rearmost position. Child restraints for infants must be used in the
rear-facing direction and therefore
must not be used in the front seat.
2. Position the child restraint on the
Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-25
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
seat. Always follow the child restraint
manufacturer’s instructions.
The back of the child restraint should
be secured against the seatback. If
necessary, adjust or remove the head
restraint (front passenger seat only) to
obtain the correct child restraint fit.
See “Head restraint” in this section.
If the head restraint is removed, store
it in a secure place. Be sure to install
the head restraint when the child restraint is removed. If the seating position does not have an adjustable head
restraint and it is interfering with the
proper child restraint fit, try another
seating position or a different child restraint.
SSS0360B
Front facing — step 3
3. Route the seat belt tongue through the
child restraint and insert it into the
buckle until you hear and feel the
latch engage. Be sure to follow the
child restraint manufacturer’s instructions for belt routing.
SSS0651
Front facing — step 4
4. Pull the shoulder belt until the belt is
fully extended. At this time, the seat
belt retractor is in the automatic locking mode (child restraint mode). It reverts to emergency locking mode
when the seat belt is fully retracted.
1-26 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
SSS0652
Front facing — step 5
5. Allow the seat belt to retract. Pull up
on the shoulder belt to remove any
slack in the belt.
SSS0653
Front facing — step 6
6. Remove any additional slack from the
seat belt; press downward and rearward firmly in the center of the child
restraint with your knee to compress
the vehicle seat cushion and seatback
while pulling up on the seat belt.
7. If the child restraint is equipped with
a top tether strap, route the top tether
strap and secure the tether strap to
the tether anchor point (rear seat installation only). See “Top tether strap
child restraint” in this section. Do not
install child restraints equipped with a
top tether strap to seating positions
that do not have a top tether anchor.
SSS0641
Front facing — step 8
8. Before placing the child in the child
restraint, hold the child restraint near
the seat belt path and use force to
push the child restraint from side to
side, and tug it forward to make sure
that it is securely held in place. It
should not move more than 1 in (25
mm). If it does move more than 1 in
(25 mm), pull again on the shoulder
belt to further tighten the child restraint. If you are unable to properly
secure the restraint, move the restraint to another seating position and
try again, or try a different child re-
Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-27
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
straint. Not all child restraints fit in all
types of vehicles.
9. Check that the retractor is in the automatic locking mode by trying to pull
more seat belt out of the retractor. If
you cannot pull any more belt webbing out of the retractor, the retractor
is in the automatic locking mode.
10. Check to make sure the child restraint
is properly secured prior to each use.
If the seat belt is not locked, repeat
steps 3 through 8.
SSS0676
Front facing — step 11
11. If the child restraint is installed in the
front passenger seat, push the ignition switch to the ON position. The
front passenger air bag status light
should illuminate. If this light is
not illuminated, see “Front passenger
air bag and status light” in this section. Move the child restraint to another seating position. Have the
system checked by an INFINITI dealer.
After the child restraint is removed and
the seat belt is fully retracted, the automatic locking mode (child restraint mode)
is canceled.
SSS0100
Rear-facing
Follow these steps to install a rear-facing
child restraint using the vehicle seat belt
in the rear seat:
1. Child restraints for infants must be
used in the rear-facing direction and
therefore must not be used in the front
seat. Position the child restraint on
the seat. Always follow the restraint
manufacturer’s instructions.
1-28 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
SSS0654
Rear facing — step 2
2. Route the seat belt tongue through the
child restraint and insert it into the
buckle until you hear and feel the
latch engage. Be sure to follow the
child restraint manufacturer’s instructions for belt routing.
SSS0655
Rear facing — step 3
3. Pull the shoulder belt until the belt is
fully extended. At this time, the seat
belt retractor is in the automatic locking mode (child restraint mode). It reverts to emergency locking mode
when the seat belt is fully retracted.
SSS0656
Rear facing — step 4
4. Allow the seat belt to retract. Pull up
on the shoulder belt to remove any
slack in the belt.
Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-29
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
all types of vehicles.
7. Check that the retractor is in the automatic locking mode by trying to pull
more seat belt out of the retractor. If
you cannot pull any more seat belt
webbing out of the retractor, the retractor is in the automatic locking
mode.
8. Check to make sure that the child restraint is properly secured prior to
each use. If the belt is not locked, repeat steps 3 through 6.
SSS0657
Rear facing — step 5
5. Remove any additional slack from the
child restraint; press downward and
rearward firmly in the center of the
child restraint with your hand to compress the vehicle seat cushion and
seatback while pulling up on the seat
belt.
SSS0658
Rear facing — step 6
6. Before placing the child in the child
restraint, hold the child restraint near
the seat belt path and use force to
push the child restraint from side to
side, and tug it forward to make sure
that it is securely held in place. It
should not move more than 1 in (25
mm). If it does move more than 1 in
(25 mm), pull again on the shoulder
belt to further tighten the child restraint. If you are unable to properly
secure the restraint, move the restraint to another rear seating position
and try again, or try a different child
restraint. Not all child restraints fit in
After the child restraint is removed and
the seat belt fully retracted, the automatic
locking mode (child restraint mode) is
canceled.
1-30 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
BOOSTER SEATS
forces of a severe accident. The child
could be crushed between the adult and
parts of the vehicle. Also, do not put the
same seat belt around both your child
and yourself.
O
SSS0099
PRECAUTIONS ON BOOSTER SEATS
O
A booster seat must only be installed in
a seating position that has a
lap/shoulder belt. Failure to use a threepoint type seat belt with a booster seat
can result in a serious injury in sudden
stop or collision.
O
Improper use or improper installation of
a booster seat can increase the risk or
severity of injury for both the child and
other occupants of the vehicle and can
lead to serious injury or death in an
accident.
WARNING
O
O
Infants and small children should always be placed in an appropriate child
restraint while riding in the vehicle. Failure to use a child restraint or booster
seat can result in serious injury or death.
Infants and small children should never
be carried on your lap. It is not possible
for even the strongest adult to resist the
INFINITI recommends that the booster
seat be installed in the rear seat. According to accident statistics, children
are safer when properly restrained in the
rear seat than in the front seat. If you
must install a booster seat in the front
seat, see “Booster seat installation” in
this section.
O
Do not use towels, books, pillows or
other items in place of a booster seat.
Items such as these may move during
normal driving or a collision and result
in serious injury or death. Booster seats
are designed to be used with a
lap/shoulder belt. Booster seats are designed to properly route the lap and
shoulder portions of the seat belt over
the strongest portions of a child’s body
to provide the maximum protection
during a collision.
O
Follow all of the booster seat manufacturer’s instructions for installation and
use. When purchasing a booster seat, be
sure to select one which will fit your
child and vehicle. It may not be possible
to properly install some types of booster
seats in your vehicle.
O
If the booster seat and seat belt is not
used properly, the risk of a child being
injured in a collision or a sudden stop
greatly increases.
O
Adjustable seatbacks should be positioned to fit the booster seat, but as up-
Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-31
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
right as possible.
O
After placing the child in the booster
seat and fastening the seat belt, make
sure the shoulder portion of the belt is
away from the child’s face and neck and
the lap portion of the belt does not cross
the abdomen.
O
Do not put the shoulder belt behind the
child or under the child’s arm. If you
must install a booster seat in the front
seat, see “Booster seat installation”
later in this section.
LRS0455
When your booster seat is not in use,
keep it secured with a seat belt to prevent it from being thrown around in case
of a sudden stop or accident.
Booster seats of various sizes are offered
by several manufacturers. When selecting
any booster seat, keep the following
points in mind:
O
O
CAUTION
Remember that a booster seat left in a
closed vehicle can become very hot. Check
the seating surface and buckles before placing your child in the booster seat.
Choose only a booster seat with a
label certifying that it complies with
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard
213 or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety
Standard 213.
LRS0453
O
Check the booster seat in your vehicle
to be sure it is compatible with the vehicle’s seat and seat belt system.
O
Make sure the child’s head will be
properly supported by the booster
seat or vehicle seat. The seatback
must be at or above the center of the
child’s ears. For example, if a low back
1 is chosen, the vehicle
booster seat q
seatback must be at or above the center of the child’s ears. If the seatback
is lower than the center of the child’s
2
ears, a high back booster seat q
should be used.
1-32 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
or the front passenger seat.
BOOSTER SEAT INSTALLATION
WARNING
INFINITI recommends that booster seats be
installed in the rear seat. However, if you
must install a booster seat in the front passenger seat, move the passenger’s seat to
the rearmost position.
LRS0464
O
If the booster seat is compatible with
your vehicle, place your child in the
booster seat and check the various
adjustments to be sure the booster
seat is compatible with your child. Always follow all recommended procedures.
All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or
territories require that infants and small
children be restrained in an approved child
restraint at all times while the vehicle is
being operated.
CAUTION
SSS0640
Do not use the lap/shoulder belt automatic
locking mode when using a booster seat
with the seat belts.
Follow these steps to install a booster
seat in the rear seat or in the front passenger seat:
1. If you must install a booster seat in the
front seat, adjust the seatback so that
it is uplight and then move the seat to
the rearmost position. Do not move the
seat with the booster seat attached to
it.
2. Position the booster seat on the seat.
Only place it in a front facing direction. Always follow the booster seat
manufacturer’s instructions.
The instructions in this section apply to
booster seat installation in the rear seats
Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-33
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
LRS0451
Center position
3. The booster seat should be positioned
on the vehicle seat so that it is stable.
If necessary, adjust or remove the
head restraint to obtain the correct
booster seat fit. See “Head restraint”
earlier in this section. If the head restraint is removed, store it in a secure
place. Be sure to install the head restraint when the booster seat is removed. If the seating position does
not have an adjustable head restraint
and it is interfering with the proper
booster seat fit, try another seating
position or a different booster seat.
LRS0452
Outboard position
4. Position the lap portion of the seat
belt low and snug on the child’s hips.
Be sure to follow the booster seat
manufacturer’s instructions for adjusting the belt routing.
LRS0454
Front seat
6. Follow the warnings, cautions and instructions for properly fastening a seat
belt shown in the “Three-point type
seat belt” earlier in this section.
5. Pull the shoulder belt portion of the
seat belt toward the retractor to take
up extra slack. Be sure the shoulder
belt is positioned across the top,
middle portion of the child’s shoulder.
Be sure to follow the booster seat
manufacturer’s instructions for adjusting the belt routing.
1-34 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM
PRECAUTIONS ON SUPPLEMENTAL
RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SSS0676
7. If the booster seat is installed in the
front passenger seat, push the ignition switch to the ON position. The
front passenger air bag status light
may or may not illuminate depending on the size of the child and
the type of booster seat used. See
“Front passenger air bag and status
light” in this section.
inflate on the side where the vehicle is
impacted.
This Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
section contains important information
concerning the driver and passenger front
impact supplemental air bags (INFINITI
Advanced Air Bag System), front seat
side-impact supplemental air bags, curtain side-impact air bags and front seat
pre-tensioner seat belts.
Supplemental front air bag system: The
INFINITI advanced air bag system can help
cushion the impact force to the head and
chest of the driver and front passenger in
certain frontal collisions.
Supplemental side-impact air bag system:
This system can help cushion the impact
force to the chest and pelvis area of the
driver and front passenger in certain side
impact collisions. The front seat sideimpact supplemental air bags are designed to inflate on the side where the vehicle is impacted.
Supplemental curtain side-impact air bag
system: This system can help cushion the
impact force to the head of occupants in
front and rear outboard seating positions
in certain side impact collisions. The curtain side-impact air bags are designed to
These supplemental restraint systems are
designed to supplement the crash protection provided by the driver and passenger
seat belts and are not a substitute for
them. Seat belts should always be correctly worn and the occupant seated a
suitable distance away from the steering
wheel, instrument panel and door finishers. (See “Seat belts” earlier in this
section for instructions and precautions
on seat belt usage.)
The supplemental air bags operate only
when the ignition switch is in the ON position.
After pushing the ignition switch to the ON
position, the supplemental air bag
warning light illuminates. The supplemental air bag warning light will turn off
after about 7 seconds if the systems are
operational.
Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-35
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
WARNING
O
The supplemental front air bags ordinarily will not inflate in the event of a
side impact, rear impact, rollover, or
lower severity frontal collision. Always
wear your seat belts to help reduce the
risk or severity of injury in various kinds
of accidents.
O
The front passenger air bag will not inflate if the passenger air bag status light
is lit or if the front passenger seat is unoccupied. See “Front passenger air bag
and status light” later in this section.
O
The seat belts and the supplemental
front air bags are most effective when
you are sitting well back and upright in
the seat. The front air bags inflate with
great force. Even with the INFINITI advanced air bag system, if you are unrestrained, leaning forward, sitting sideways or out of position in any way, you
are at greater risk of injury or death in a
crash. You may also receive serious or
fatal injuries from the supplemental
SSS0131B
SSS0132B
1-36 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
front air bag if you are up against it when
it inflates. Always sit back against the
seatback and as far-away as practical
from the steering wheel or instrument
panel. Always use the seat belts.
O
steering wheel. Placing them inside the
steering wheel rim could increase the
risk of injury if the supplemental front air
bag inflates.
The driver and front passenger seat belt
buckles are equipped with sensors that
detect if the seat belts are fastened. The
advanced air bag system monitors the
severity of a collision and seat belt
usage then inflates the air bags. Failure
to properly wear seat belts can increase
the risk or severity of injury in an accident.
O
The front passenger seat is equipped
with an occupant classification sensor
(pattern sensor) that turns the front passenger air bag OFF under some conditions. This sensor is only used in this
seat. Failure to be properly seated and
wearing the seat belt can increase the
risk or severity of injury in an accident.
See “Front Passenger air bag and status
light” later in this section.
O
Keep hands on the outside of the
SSS0007
SSS0006
Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-37
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
WARNING
SSS0008
SSS0009
O
Never let children ride unrestrained or
extend their hands or face out of the
window. Do not attempt to hold them in
your lap or arms. Some examples of dangerous riding positions are shown in the
illustrations.
O
Children may be severely injured or
killed when the supplemental front air
bags, side air bags or curtain sideimpact air bags inflate if they are not
properly restrained. Pre-teens and children should be properly restrained in
the rear seat, if possible.
O
Even with the INFINITI Advanced Air Bag
System, never install a rear facing child
restraint in the front seat. An inflating
supplemental front air bag could seriously injure or kill your child. See “Child
restraints” earlier in this section for details.
SSS0099
SSS0100
1-38 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
SSS0059A
SSS0140
SSS0159
WARNING
Supplemental side air bag and curtain sideimpact air bag:
O
SSS0188A
SSS0162
The supplemental side air bag and curtain side-impact air bag ordinarily will
not inflate in the event of a frontal impact, rear impact, rollover or lower severity side collision. Always wear your
seat belts to help reduce the risk or severity of injury in various kinds of accidents.
Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-39
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
O
The seat belts, the supplemental side air
bags and curtain side-impact air bags
are most effective when you are sitting
well back and upright in the seat. The
side air bag and curtain side-impact air
bag inflate with great force. Do not allow
anyone to place their hand, leg or face
near the side air bag on the side of the
seatback of the front seat or near the
side roof rails. Do not allow anyone sitting in the front seats or rear outboard
seats to extend their hand out of the
window or lean against the door. Some
examples of dangerous riding positions
are shown in the previous illustrations.
O
When sitting in the rear seat, do not hold
onto the seatback of the front seat. If the
supplemental side air bag inflates, you
may be seriously injured. Be especially
careful with children, who should always
be properly restrained. Some examples of
dangerous riding positions are shown in
the illustrations.
O
Do not use seat covers on the front seatbacks. They may interfere with supple-
mental side air bag inflation.
1-40 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
8. Diagnosis sensor unit
9. Satellite sensors
10. Seat belt pre-tensioner retractor
INFINITI ADVANCED AIR BAG
SYSTEM (front seats)
This vehicle is equipped with the INFINITI
advanced air bag system for the driver
and front passenger seats. This system is
designed to meet certification requirements under U.S. regulations. It is also
permitted in Canada. However, all of the
information, cautions and warnings in this
manual still apply and must be followed.
SSS0683
1. Crash zone sensor
2. Supplemental front air bag modules
(INFINITI advanced air bags)
3. Supplemental side air bag modules
4. Occupant classification sensor (pattern sensor)
5. Occupant classification system control
unit
6. Supplemental curtain side-impact air
bags
7. Supplemental curtain side-impact air
bag modules
The driver supplemental air bag is located
in the center of the steering wheel; the
front passenger supplemental air bag is
mounted in the instrument panel above
the glove box. The front air bags are designed to inflate in higher severity frontal
collisions, although they may inflate if the
forces in another type of collision are
similar to those of a higher severity
frontal impact. They may not inflate in
certain frontal collisions. Vehicle damage
(or lack of it) is not always an indication
of proper supplemental air bag operation.
The INFINITI advanced air bag system has
dual stage air bag inflators. The system
Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-41
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
monitors information from the crash zone
sensor, the diagnosis sensor unit, seat
belt buckle sensors and the occupant
classification sensor (pattern sensor). Inflator operation is based on the severity
of a collision and seat belt usage for the
driver. For the front right passenger, the
occupant classification sensor is also
monitored. Based on information from the
sensors, only one front air bag may inflate in a crash, depending on the crash
severity and whether the front occupants
are belted or unbelted. Additionally, the
front passenger air bag may be automatically turned OFF under some conditions,
depending on the information provided by
the occupant classification sensor. If the
front passenger air bag is OFF, the passenger air bag status light will be illuminated (if the seat is unoccupied, the light
will not be illuminated, but the air bag
will be off). See “Front passenger air bag
and status light” later in this section for
further details. One front air bag inflating
does not indicate improper performance
of the system.
If you have any questions about your air
bag system, contact INFINITI or an INFINITI
dealer. If you are considering modification
of your vehicle due to a disability, you
may also contact INFINITI. Contact information is contained in the front of this
Owner’s Manual.
bag inflating can increase the risk of injury if the occupant is too close to, or is
against, the air bag module during inflation.
When a supplemental front air bag inflates, a fairly loud noise may be heard,
followed by release of smoke. This smoke
is not harmful and does not indicate a
fire. Care should be taken not to inhale it,
as it may cause irritation and choking.
Those with a history of a breathing condition should get fresh air promptly.
The air bag will deflate quickly after a collision.
Supplemental front air bags, along with
the use of seat belts, help to cushion the
impact force on the head and chest of the
front occupants. They can help save lives
and reduce serious injuries. However, an
inflating front air bag may cause facial
abrasions or other injuries. Front air bags
do not provide restraint to the lower
body.
The supplemental front air bags operate
only when the ignition switch is in the ON
position.
After pushing the ignition switch to the ON
position, the supplemental air bag
warning light illuminates. The supplemental air bag warning light will turn off
after about 7 seconds if the system is operational.
Even with INFINITI advanced air bags, seat
belts should be correctly worn and the
driver and passenger seated upright as
far as practical away from the steering
wheel or instrument panel. The supplemental front air bags inflate quickly in order to help protect the front occupants.
Because of this, the force of the front air
1-42 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
Front passenger air bag:
follow all instructions in this manual concerning the use of seats, seat belts and child
restraints can increase the risk or severity of
injury in an accident.
Status light:
The front passenger air bag status light
is located above the ashtray. The
light operates as follows:
O
Unoccupied passenger seat: The
is OFF and the front passenger
air bag is OFF and will not inflate in a
crash.
O
Passenger seat occupied by a small
adult, child or child restraint as outlined in this section: The
illuminates to indicate that the front passenger air bag is OFF and will not inflate in a crash.
O
Occupied passenger seat and the passenger meets the conditions outlined
in this section: The light
is OFF to
indicate that the front passenger air
bag is operational.
SSS0676
Front passenger air bag status light
Front passenger air bag and
status light
WARNING
The front passenger air bag is designed to
automatically turn OFF under some conditions. Read this section carefully to learn
how it operates. Proper use of the seat, seat
belt and child restraints is necessary for
most effective protection. Failure to
The front passenger air bag is designed to
automatically turn OFF when the vehicle is
operated under some conditions as described below as permitted by U.S. regulations. If the front passenger air bag is
OFF, it will not inflate in a crash. The
driver air bag and other air bags in your
vehicle are not part of this system.
The purpose of the regulation is to help
reduce the risk of injury or death from an
inflating air bag to certain front passenger
seat occupants, such as children, by requiring the air bag to be automatically
turned OFF.
The occupant classification sensor (pattern sensor) is in the front passenger seat
cushion and is designed to detect an occupant and objects on the seat. For example, if a child is in the front passenger
seat, the advanced air bag system is designed to turn the passenger air bag OFF
in accordance with the regulations. Also,
if a child restraint of the type specified in
the regulations is on the seat, the occupant classification sensor can detect it
and cause the air bag to turn OFF.
Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-43
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
Front passenger seat adult occupants who
are properly seated and using the seat
belt as outlined in this manual should not
cause the passenger air bag to be automatically turned OFF. For small adults it
may be turned OFF, however, if the occupant does not sit in the seat properly (for
example, by not sitting upright, by sitting
on an edge of the seat, or by otherwise
being out of position), this could cause
the sensor to turn the air bag OFF. Always
be sure to be seated and wearing the seat
belt properly for the most effective protection by the seat belt and supplemental air
bag.
INFINITI recommends that pre-teens and
children be properly restrained in a rear
seat. INFINITI also recommends that appropriate child restraints and booster
seats be properly installed in a rear seat.
If this is not possible, the occupant classification sensor is designed to operate
as described above to turn the front passenger air bag OFF for specified child restraints. Failing to properly secure child
restrains and to use the automatic locking
mode (child restraint mode) may allow the
restraint to tip or move in an accident or
sudden stop. This can also result in the
passenger air bag inflating in a crash instead of being OFF. See “Child restraints”
earlier in this section for proper use and
installation.
If the front passenger seat is not occupied, the passenger air bag is designed
not to inflate in a crash. However, heavy
objects placed on the seat could result in
air bag inflation, because of the object
being detected by the occupant classification sensor. Other conditions could also
result in air bag inflation, such as if a
child is standing on the seat, or if two
children are on the seat, contrary to the
instructions in this manual. Always be
sure that you and all vehicle occupants
are seated and restrained properly.
Using the passenger air bag status light,
you can monitor when the front passenger air bag is automatically turned OFF
with the seat occupied. The light will not
illuminate when the front passenger seat
is unoccupied.
If an adult occupant is in the seat but the
passenger air bag status light is illuminated (indicating that the air bag is OFF),
it could be that the person is a small
adult, or is not sitting on the seat properly.
If a child restraint must be used in the
front seat, the passenger air bag status
light may or may not be illuminated, depending on the size of the child and the
type of child restraint being used. If the
air bag status light is not illuminated (indicating that the air bag might inflate in a
crash), it could be that the child restraint
or seat belt is not being used properly.
Make sure that the child restraint is installed properly, the seat belt is used
properly and the occupant is positioned
properly. If the air bag status light is still
not illuminated, reposition the occupant
or child restraint in a rear seat.
If the passenger air bag status light will
not illuminate even though you believe
that the child restraint, the seat belts and
the occupant are properly positioned, the
system may be sensing an unoccupied
seat (in which case the air bag is OFF).
Your INFINITI dealer can check that the
system is OFF by using a special tool.
However, until you have confirmed with
your dealer that your air bag is working
properly, reposition the occupant or child
restraint in a rear seat.
The INFINITI advanced air bag system and
passenger air bag status light will take a
few seconds to register a change in the
passenger seat status. However, if the
seat becomes unoccupied, the air bag
1-44 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
status light will remain off.
If a malfunction occurs in the front passenger air bag system, the supplemental
, located in the
air bag warning light
meter and gauges area will blink. Have
the system checked by an INFINITI dealer.
bag system and result in serious personal injury.
O
Do not use water or acidic cleaners (hot
steam cleaners) on the seat. This can
damage the seat or occupant classification sensor. This can also affect the operation of the air bag system and result
in serious personal injury.
O
Immediately after inflation, several front
air bag system components will be hot.
Do not touch them; you may severely
burn yourself.
O
No unauthorized changes should be
made to any components or wiring of the
supplemental air bag system. This is to
prevent accidental inflation of the
supplemental air bag or damage to the
supplemental air bag system.
O
Do not make unauthorized changes to
your vehicle’s electrical system, suspension system or front end structure. This
could affect proper operation of the
supplemental front air bag system.
Other supplemental front air bag
precautions
WARNING
O
O
Do not place any objects on the steering
wheel pad or on the instrument panel.
Also, do not place any objects between
any occupant and the steering wheel or
instrument panel. Such objects may become dangerous projectiles and cause
injury if the supplemental front air bag
inflates.
Do not place objects with sharp edges
on the seat. Also, do not place heavy objects on the seat that will leave permanent impressions in the seat. Such objects can damage the seat or occupant
classification sensor (pattern sensor).
This can affect the operation of the air
O
Tampering with the supplemental air
bag system may result in serious personal injury. Tampering includes
changes to the steering wheel and the
instrument panel assembly by placing
material over the steering wheel pad and
above the instrument panel or by installing additional trim material around the
air bag system.
O
Modifying or tampering with the front
passenger seat may result in serious
personal injury. For example, do not
change the front seats by placing material on the seat cushion or by installing
additional trim material, such as seat
covers, on the seat that is not specifically designed to assure proper air bag
operation. Additionally, do not stow any
objects under the front passenger seat
or the seat cushion and seatback. Such
objects may interfere with the proper operation of the occupant classification
sensor.
O
No unauthorized changes should be
made to any components or wiring of the
seat belt system. This may affect the
Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-45
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
supplemental front air bag system. Tampering with the seat belt system may result in serious personal injury.
O
O
O
Work on and around the supplemental
front air bag system should be done by
an INFINITI dealer. Installation of electrical equipment should also be done by an
INFINITI dealer. The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) wiring should not
be modified or disconnected. Unauthorized electrical test equipment and probing devices should not be used on the air
bag system.
When selling your vehicle, we request
that you inform the buyer about the
supplemental front air bag system and
guide the buyer to the appropriate sections in this Owner’s Manual.
A cracked windshield should be replaced immediately by a qualified repair
facility. A cracked windshield could affect the function of the supplemental air
bag system.
The SRS wiring harness connectors are
yellow and orange for easy identification.
SSS0521
SUPPLEMENTAL SIDE-IMPACT AIR
BAG AND CURTAIN SIDE-IMPACT
AIR BAG SYSTEM
The supplemental side-impact air bags
are located in the outside of the seatback
of the front seats. The supplemental curtain side-impact air bags are located in
the side roof rails. These systems are designed to meet voluntary guidelines to
help reduce the risk of injury to out-ofposition occupants. However, all of the information, cautions and warnings in this
manual still apply and must be followed.
The supplemental side air bags and cur-
1-46 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
tain side-impact air bags are designed to
inflate in higher severity side collisions,
although they may inflate if the forces in
another type of collision are similar to
those of a higher severity side impact.
They are designed to inflate on the side
where the vehicle is impacted. They may
not inflate in certain side collisions on the
side where the vehicle is impacted.
Vehicle damage (or lack of it) is not always an indication of proper supplemental side air bag and curtain sideimpact air bag operation.
When the supplemental side air bag and
curtain side-impact air bag inflate, a fairly
loud noise may be heard, followed by release of smoke. This smoke is not harmful
and does not indicate a fire. Care should
be taken not to inhale it, as it may cause
irritation and choking. Those with a history of a breathing condition should get
fresh air promptly.
Supplemental side air bags, along with
the use of seat belts, help to cushion the
impact force on the chest and pelvis of
the front occupants. Curtain side-impact
air bags help to cushion the impact force
to the head of occupants in the front and
rear outboard seating positions. They can
help save lives and reduce serious inju-
ries. However, an inflating side air bag
and curtain side-impact air bag may
cause abrasions or other injuries. Supplemental side air bags and curtain sideimpact air bags do not provide restraint
to the lower body.
The seat belts should be correctly worn
and the driver and passenger seated upright as far as practical away from the
supplemental side air bag. Rear seat passengers should be seated as far away as
practical from the door finishers and side
roof rails. The side air bags and curtain
side-impact air bag inflate quickly in
order to help protect the out-of-position
occupants. Because of this, the force of
the side air bag and curtain side-impact
air bag inflating can increase the risk of
injury if the occupant is too close to, or is
against, these air bag modules during inflation. The side air bag and curtain sideimpact air bag will deflate quickly after
the collision is over.
After pushing the ignition switch to the ON
position, the supplemental air bag
warning light illuminates. The air bag
warning light will turn off after about 7 seconds if the systems are operational.
WARNING
O
Do not place any objects near the seatback of the front seats. Also, do not
place any objects (an umbrella, bag,
etc.) between the front door finisher and
the front seat. Such objects may become
dangerous projectiles and cause injury if
the supplemental side air bag inflates.
O
Right after inflation, several side air bag
and curtain side-impact air bag system
components will be hot. Do not touch
them; you may severely burn yourself.
O
No unauthorized changes should be
made to any components or wiring of
this side air bag and curtain air bag
system. This is to prevent accidental inflation of the side air bag and curtain
side-impact air bag or damage to the
side air bag and curtain side-impact air
bag system.
O
Do not make unauthorized changes to
your vehicle’s electrical system, suspension system or side panel. This could affect proper operation of the supple-
Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-47
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
mental side air bag and curtain sideimpact air bag system.
O
O
*
Tampering with the supplemental air
bag system may result in serious personal injury. For example, do not change
the front seat by placing material near
the seatback or by installing additional
trim material, such as seat covers,
around the side air bag.
Work around and on the side air bag and
curtain side-impact air bag system
should be done by an INFINITI dealer. Installation of electrical equipment should
also be done by an INFINITI dealer. The
SRS wiring harnesses* should not be
modified or disconnected. Unauthorized
electrical test equipment and probing
devices should not be used on the sideimpact air bag system.
The SRS wiring harnesses connectors
are yellow and orange for easy identification.
When selling your vehicle, we request
that you inform the buyer about the sideimpact air bag and curtain side-impact air
bag system and guide the buyer to the
appropriate sections in this Owner’s
Manual.
O
Work around and on the pre-tensioner
system should be done by an INFINITI
dealer. Installation of electrical equipment should also be done by an INFINITI
dealer. Unauthorized electrical test
equipment and probing devices should
not be used on the pre-tensioner seat
belt system.
O
If you need to dispose of the pretensioner or scrap the vehicle, contact
an INFINITI dealer. Correct pre-tensioner
disposal procedures are set forth in the
appropriate INFINITI Service Manual. Incorrect disposal procedures could cause
personal injury.
PRE-TENSIONER SEAT BELT
SYSTEM (front seats)
WARNING
O
The pre-tensioner seat belt cannot be reused after activation. It must be replaced
together with the retractor and buckle
as a unit.
O
If the vehicle becomes involved in a frontal collision but the pre-tensioner is not
activated, be sure to have the pretensioner system checked and, if necessary, replaced by an INFINITI dealer.
O
No unauthorized changes should be
made to any components or wiring of the
pre-tensioner seat belt system. This is to
prevent accidental activation of the pretensioner seat belt or damage to the pretensioner seat belt operation. Tampering with the pre-tensioner seat belt
system may result in serious personal
injury.
The front seat pre-tensioner seat belt system activates in conjunction with the
supplemental air bag systems. Working
with the seat belt retractor, it helps
tighten the seat belt when the vehicle becomes involved in certain types of collisions, helping to restrain front seat occupants.
The pre-tensioner is encased with the
seat belt’s retractor. These seat belts are
used the same as conventional seat belts.
1-48 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
When the pre-tensioner seat belt activates, smoke is released and a loud noise
may be heard. The smoke is not harmful,
and it does not indicate a fire. Care
should be taken not to inhale it as it may
cause irritation and choking. Those with a
history of a breathing condition should
get fresh air promptly.
If any abnormality occurs in the pretensioner system, the supplemental air
bag warning light
will not come on,
will flash intermittently or will turn on for
7 seconds and remain on after the ignition switch has been pushed to the ON
position. In this case, the pre-tensioner
seat belt may not function properly. They
must be checked and repaired. Take your
vehicle to the nearest INFINITI dealer.
When selling your vehicle, we request
that you inform the buyer about the pretensioner seat belt system and guide the
buyer to the appropriate sections in this
Owner’s Manual.
SSS0330
SPA1097
SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG WARNING
LABELS
SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG WARNING
LIGHT
Warning labels about the supplemental
front air bag and supplemental sideimpact air bag systems are placed in the
vehicle as shown in the illustration.
The supplemental air bag warning light,
displaying
in the instrument panel,
monitors the circuits of the supplemental
front air bag, supplemental side-impact
air bag and curtain side-impact air bag
systems, and pre-tensioner seat belt. The
circuits monitored by the supplemental
air bag warning light are the diagnosis
sensor unit, satellite sensors, crash zone
sensor, front air bag modules, side air
bag modules, curtain side-impact air bag
1 SRS air bag
q
The warning labels are located on the surface of the sun visors.
2 SRS side-impact air bag
q
The warning label is located on the side
of the passenger’s side center pillar.
Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-49
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
modules, and all related wiring, and pretensioner seat belt.
After pushing the ignition switch to the
ON position, the supplemental air bag
warning light illuminates. The supplemental air bag warning light will turn off after
about 7 seconds if the system is operational.
If any of the following conditions occur,
the supplemental front air bag, supplemental side air bag and curtain sideimpact air bag systems, and pre-tensioner
seat belt need servicing:
O
The supplemental air bag warning
light remains on after approximately 7
seconds after pushing the ignition
switch to the ON position.
O
The supplemental air bag warning
light flashes intermittently.
O
The supplemental air bag warning
light does not come on at all.
Under these conditions, the supplemental
front air bags, supplemental side air
bags, curtain side-impact air bags and/or
pre-tensioner seat belt may not operate
properly. They must be checked and repaired. Take your vehicle to the nearest
INFINITI dealer.
seat belt should be pointed out to
person conducting the maintenance.
ignition switch should always be in
LOCK position when working under
hood or inside the vehicle.
WARNING
If the supplemental air bag warning light is
on, it could mean that the supplemental
front air bag, supplemental side air bag, curtain side-impact air bag systems and/or pretensioner seat belt will not operate in an accident. To help avoid injury to yourself or
others, have your vehicle checked by a
dealer as soon as possible.
the
The
the
the
WARNING
O
Once a supplemental front air bag, side
air bag or curtain side-impact air bag has
inflated, the air bag module will not
function again and must be replaced.
Additionally, if any of the supplemental
front air bags inflate, the activated pretensioner seat belt must also be replaced. The air bag module and pretensioner seat belt system should be replaced by an INFINITI dealer. The air bag
modules and pre-tensioner seat belt
system cannot be repaired.
O
The supplemental front air bag, side air
bag and curtain side-impact air bag systems and pre-tensioner seat belt system
should be inspected by an INFINITI
dealer if there is any damage to the front
end or side portion of the vehicle.
REPAIR AND REPLACEMENT
PROCEDURE
The supplemental front air bags, supplemental side air bags, curtain side-impact
air bags and pre-tensioner seat belt are
designed to activate on a one-time-only
basis. As a reminder, unless it is damaged, the supplemental air bag warning
light will remain illuminated after inflation
has occurred. Repair and replacement of
these systems should be done only by an
INFINITI dealer.
When maintenance work is required on
the vehicle, the supplemental front air
bags, side air bags, curtain side-impact
air bags, related parts and pre-tensioner
1-50 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
O
If you need to dispose of the supplemental air bag, pre-tensioner seat belt
system or scrap the vehicle, contact an
INFINITI dealer.
Correct supplemental air bag and pretensioner seat belt system disposal procedures are set forth in the appropriate
INFINITI Service Manual. Incorrect disposal procedures could cause personal
injury.
Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-51
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
2 Instruments and controls
Cockpit ........................................................... 2-2
Instrument panel .............................................. 2-4
Meters and gauges........................................... 2-6
Speedometer and odometer ........................ 2-7
Tachometer ................................................. 2-8
Engine coolant temperature gauge .............. 2-8
Fuel gauge .................................................. 2-9
Compass (if so equipped)................................. 2-9
Warning/indicator lights and audible
reminders........................................................ 2-13
Checking bulbs .......................................... 2-13
Warning lights ........................................... 2-14
Indicator lights .......................................... 2-18
Audible reminders ..................................... 2-20
Dot matrix liquid crystal display...................... 2-21
Indicators for operation ............................. 2-23
Indicators for maintenance ........................ 2-25
Trip computer ............................................ 2-27
Security systems ............................................ 2-29
Vehicle security system ............................. 2-29
INFINITI Vehicle Immobilizer System........... 2-31
Windshield wiper and washer switch .............. 2-32
Rear window and outside mirror defroster
switch............................................................. 2-33
Headlight and turn signal switch ....................
Xenon headlights ......................................
Headlight switch........................................
Turn signal switch .....................................
Fog light switch.........................................
Hazard warning flasher switch........................
Horn ...............................................................
Heated seats (if so equipped) .........................
SNOW mode switch (if so equipped)...............
Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) off switch .......
Clock ..............................................................
Adjusting the time.....................................
Power outlet ...................................................
Cigarette lighter and ashtrays.........................
Front..........................................................
Rear ..........................................................
Storage ..........................................................
Cup holders ..............................................
Sunglasses holder ...................................
Glove box..................................................
Console box ..............................................
Rear armrest pocket ..................................
Card holder ...............................................
Coat hooks ................................................
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
2-34
2-34
2-35
2-39
2-39
2-40
2-40
2-41
2-42
2-42
2-43
2-43
2-44
2-45
2-45
2-45
2-46
2-46
2-48
2-48
2-49
2-50
2-50
2-51
Cargo net ...................................................
Trunk net for extra window washer fluid
(Canada only).............................................
Windows .........................................................
Power windows .........................................
Sunroof (if so equipped) .................................
Automatic sunroof .....................................
Interior lights ................................................
Map lights.................................................
Personal lights ..........................................
Interior light control switch........................
Vanity mirror lights.........................................
2-51
2-51
2-52
2-52
2-54
2-54
2-56
2-56
2-57
2-57
2-58
Trunk light ......................................................
HomeLink Universal Transceiver....................
Programming HomeLink ...........................
Programming HomeLink for Canadian
customers..................................................
Operating the HomeLink Universal
Transceiver ................................................
Programming trouble-diagnosis .................
Clearing the programmed information .......
Reprogramming a single HomeLink
button .......................................................
If your vehicle is stolen .............................
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
2-58
2-59
2-59
2-61
2-61
2-61
2-62
2-62
2-62
COCKPIT
6. Headlight, fog light and turn signal
switch (P.2-34)
7. Paddle shifter (if so equipped) (P.5-13)
8. Steering-wheel-mounted controls (Left
side)
— ENTER or tuning switch
(P.4-7, P.4-55)
— BACK switch (P.4-55)
— TALK switch (P.4-81)/Phone switch
(P.4-58)
— Volume control switches (P.4-55)
— Source select switch (P.4-55)
9. Trip computer switch (P.2-21)
10. Windshield wiper and washer switch
(P.2-32)
SSI0262
1. Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF
switch (P.2-42)
4. Instrument brightness control switch
(P.2-38)
2. Trunk lid release switch (P.3-18)
5. TRIP/RESET switch for twin trip odometer (P.2-7)
3. Adaptive Front lighting System (AFS)
switch (if so equipped) (P.2-37)
11. Steering-wheel-mounted controls
(Right side)
— Cruise control switches (P.5-17)
— Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC)
switches (if so equipped) (P.5-19)
12. Hood release handle (P.3-17)
13. Intelligent Key port (P.5-8)
14. Electric tilting/telescopic steering
wheel switch (if so equipped) (P.3-22)
15. Manual tilting/telescopic steering
wheel switch (if so equipped) (P.3-22)
2-2 Instruments and controls
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
16. Steering wheel
— Horn (P.2-40)
— Driver supplemental
(P.1-35)
air
bag
Instruments and controls 2-3
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
INSTRUMENT PANEL
— Bluetooth Hands-Free Phone
System (if so equipped) (P.4-58)
— Audio system (P.4-32)
7. Center display (P.4-3)/Navigation system* (if so equipped)
8. Hazard warning flasher switch
(P.2-40)
9. Front passenger supplemental air bag
(P.1-35)
10. Fuse box cover (P.8-22)
11. Parking brake
— Parking (P.5-44)
12. Push-button ignition switch (P.5-7)
13. Automatic climate control system
(P.4-25)
14. Cigarette lighter and ashtrays
(P.2-45)
SSI0263
16. SNOW mode switch (if so equipped)
(P.2-42)
1. Side ventilator (P.4-25)
5. Clock (P.2-43)
2. Meters and gauges (P.2-6)
6. Center multi-function control panel
— Navigation system* (if so
equipped)
— Vehicle information and setting
buttons (P.4-9)
3. Center ventilator (P.4-25)
4. Audio system (P.4-32)
15. Heated seat switch (if so equipped)
(P.2-41)
17. CompactFlash card slot (if so
equipped) (P.4-44)
2-4 Instruments and controls
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
18. Rear window and outside mirror (if so
equipped) defogger switch (P.2-33)
19. Glove box lid release handle (P.2-48)
20. Trunk release power cancel switch
(P.3-18)
*: Refer to the separate Navigation
System Owner’s Manual.
Instruments and controls 2-5
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
METERS AND GAUGES
*: The needle indicators in the speedometer, tachometer, engine coolant temperature gauge and fuel gauge may
move slightly after the ignition switch is
pushed to the LOCK position. This is not
a malfunction.
SSI0264
1. Tachometer* (P.2-8)
2. Warning/Indicator lights (P.2-13)
3. Speedometer* (P.2-7)
5. Dot matrix liquid crystal display/
Odometer/twin trip odometer (P.2-21)
6. Fuel gauge* (P.2-9)
4. Engine coolant temperature gauge*
(P.2-8)
2-6 Instruments and controls
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
panel changes the display as follows:
TRIP A → TRIP B → TRIP A
Resetting the trip odometer:
3 for
Push the TRIP A/B RESET switch q
more than 1 second to reset the currently
displayed trip odometer to zero.
Speedometer
SIC3253
Odometer/twin trip odometer
SIC3259
SPEEDOMETER AND ODOMETER
Odometer/twin trip odometer
Speedometer
1 and twin trip odometer
The odometer q
2 are displayed on the dot matrix crystal
q
display when the ignition switch is in the
ON position.
The speedometer indicates vehicle speed.
Average fuel economy and distance to
empty information is also available. Refer
to “DOT MATRIX CRYSTAL DISPLAY” later
in this section and “How to use STATUS
button” in the “4. Monitor, climate, audio,
phone and voice recognition systems”
section later in this manual.
The odometer records the total distance
the vehicle has been driven.
The twin trip odometer records the distance of individual trips.
Changing the display:
3 at
Pushing the TRIP A/B RESET switch q
the bottom left of the combination meter
Instruments and controls 2-7
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
CAUTION
SIC3254
TACHOMETER
The tachometer indicates engine speed in
revolutions per minute (RPM). Do not rev
1 .
the engine into the red zone q
CAUTION
When engine speed approaches the red
zone, shift to a higher gear. Operating the
engine in the red zone may cause serious engine damage.
SIC3255
If the gauge indicates engine coolant temperature near the hot (H) end of the normal
range, reduce vehicle speed to decrease
temperature. If gauge is over the normal
range, stop the vehicle as soon as safely
possible. If the engine is overheated, continued operation of the vehicle may seriously
damage the engine. See “If your vehicle
overheats” in the “6. In case of emergency”
section for immediate action required.
ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE
GAUGE
The gauge indicates the engine coolant
temperature.
The engine coolant temperature is normal
when the gauge needle points within the
1 shown in the illustration.
zone q
The engine coolant temperature will vary
with the outside air temperature and driving conditions.
2-8 Instruments and controls
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
COMPASS (if so equipped)
fuel tank is getting low. Refuel as soon as
it is convenient, preferably before the
gauge reaches “E”. There will be a small
reserve of fuel in the tank when the fuel
gauge needle reaches “E”.
indicates that the fuel-filler door
The
is located on the passenger’s side of the
vehicle.
CAUTION
O
SIC3256
FUEL GAUGE
The gauge indicates the approximate fuel
level in the tank.
The gauge may move slightly during braking, turning, acceleration, or going up or
down hill.
The gauge needle returns to E (Empty) after the ignition switch is pushed to LOCK.
O
If the vehicle runs out of fuel, the
malfunction indicator light (MIL)
may come on. Refuel as soon as possible. After a few driving trips, the
light should turn off. If the light remains on after a few driving trips, have
the vehicle inspected by an INFINITI
dealer.
SIC3181
When the ignition switch is pushed to the
B will
ON position, the compass display q
indicate the direction of the vehicle’s
heading.
For additional information, see “Malfunction indicator light (MIL)” later in
this section.
Refill the fuel tank before the gauge registers “E” (Empty).
The low fuel warning
appears on the
dot matrix liquid crystal display when the
Instruments and controls 2-9
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
If the display reads “C”, calibrate the
compass by driving the vehicle in 3 complete circles at less than 5 MPH (8 km/h).
You can also calibrate the compass by
driving your vehicle on your everyday
route. The compass will be calibrated
once it has tracked 3 complete circles.
To turn on and off the compass manually,
A while the ignipush the
switch q
tion switch is in the ON position.
2-10 Instruments and controls
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
Zone variation change procedure
The difference between magnetic north
and geographical north is known as variance. In some areas, this difference can
sometimes be great enough to cause
false compass readings. Follow these instructions to set the variance for your particular location if this happens:
1. Push the
switch for more than 3
seconds. The current zone number will
appear in the display.
2. Find your current location and variance number on the zone map.
3. Push the
switch repeatedly until
the new zone number appears in the
display, then release the switch. After
you release the switch, the display
will show a compass direction within a
few seconds.
Zone map
SIC0611B
O
If the compass deviates from the correct indication soon after repeated adjustment, have the compass checked
at an INFINITI dealer.
O
The compass may not indicate the correct compass point in tunnels or while
driving up or down a steep hill.
(The compass returns to the correct
compass point when the vehicle
Instruments and controls 2-11
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
moves to an area where the geomagnetism is stabilized.)
CAUTION
O
Do not install a ski rack, antenna, etc.,
which are attached to the vehicle by
means of a magnet. They affect the operation of the compass.
O
When cleaning the mirror, use a paper
towel or similar material dampened with
glass cleaner. Do not spray glass
cleaner directly on the mirror as it may
cause the liquid cleaner to enter the mirror housing.
2-12 Instruments and controls
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
WARNING/INDICATOR LIGHTS AND
AUDIBLE REMINDERS
All-Wheel Drive (AWD) warning light (AWD
models)
Intelligent Key warning light
Front passenger air bag status light
or
Low tire pressure warning light
High beam indicator light (Blue)
Automatic transmission check warning light
Master warning light
Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
or
Preview Function warning light (Orange; if so
equipped)
Slip indicator light
Charge warning light
Seat belt warning light
Turn signal/hazard indicator lights
Engine oil pressure warning light
Supplemental air bag warning light
Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) off indicator
light
Four-Wheel Active Steer (4WAS) warning light
(if so equipped)
Adaptive Front lighting System (AFS) indicator
light (if so equipped)
Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) system warning
light (Orange; if so equipped)
Automatic transmission position indicator
light
Anti-lock Braking System (ABS)
warning light
Brake warning light
CHECKING BULBS
Apply the parking brake and push the ignition switch to the ON position without
starting the engine. The following lights
will come on:
,
,
or
,
,
,
,
,
The following lights come on briefly and
then go off (if so equipped):
,
or
,
,
,
,
,
,
Some indicators and warnings are also
displayed on the dot matrix crystal display between the speedometer and tachometer. See “Dot matrix crystal display” later in this section.
If any light does not come on, it may indicate a burned-out bulb or an open circuit
in the electrical system. Have the system
checked by an INFINITI dealer.
Instruments and controls 2-13
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
WARNING LIGHTS
All-Wheel Drive (AWD)
warning light (AWD models)
The
warning light comes on when
the ignition switch is pushed to ON. It
turns off soon after the engine is started.
If the AWD system malfunctions, or the diameter of the front and the rear wheels
are different, the warning light will either
remain illuminated or blink. See “AllWheel Drive (AWD)” in the “5. Starting
and driving” section.
CAUTION
O
O
If the warning light comes on while driving there may be a malfunction in the
AWD system. Reduce the vehicle speed
and have your vehicle checked by an
INFINITI dealer as soon as possible.
If the AWD warning light blinks on when
you are driving:
- blinks rapidly (about twice a second):
Pull off the road in a safe area, and
may indicate the ABS is not functioning
properly. Have the system checked by an
INFINITI dealer.
idle the engine. The driving mode will
change to 2WD to prevent the AWD
system from malfunctioning. If the
warning light turns off, you can drive
again.
If an ABS malfunction occurs, the antilock function is turned off. The brake system then operates normally, but without
anti-lock assistance. See “Brake system”
in the “5. Starting and driving” section.
- blinks slowly (about once every 2 seconds):
Pull off the road in a safe area, and
idle the engine. Check that all tire
sizes are the same, tire pressure is
correct and tires are not worn.
O
Automatic transmission
check warning light
If the warning light is still on after the
above operations, have your vehicle
checked by an INFINITI dealer as soon as
possible.
or
When the ignition switch is pushed to the
ON position, the light comes on for 2 seconds. If the light comes on at any other
time, it may indicate the transmission is
not functioning properly. Have your
INFINITI dealer check and repair the transmission.
or
Anti-lock Braking
System (ABS)
warning light
When the ignition switch is in the ON position, the Anti-lock Braking System (ABS)
warning light illuminates and then turns
off. This indicates the ABS is operational.
If the ABS warning light illuminates while
the engine is running, or while driving, it
Brake warning
light
This light functions for both the parking
brake and the foot brake systems.
Parking brake indicator:
When the ignition switch is in the ON position, the light comes on when the parking brake is applied.
2-14 Instruments and controls
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
Low brake fluid warning light:
When the ignition switch is in the ON position, the light warns of a low brake fluid
level. If the light comes on while the engine is running with the parking brake not
applied, stop the vehicle and perform the
following:
1. Check the brake fluid level. Add brake
fluid as necessary. See “Brake fluid” in
the “8. Maintenance and do-it-yourself”
section.
2. If the brake fluid level is correct, have
the warning system checked by an
INFINITI dealer.
Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) warning
indicator:
When the parking brake is released and
the brake fluid level is sufficient, if both
the brake warning light and the Anti-lock
Braking System (ABS) warning light illuminate, it may indicate the ABS is not
functioning properly. Have the brake
system checked, and if necessary repaired, by an INFINITI dealer promptly.
Avoid high-speed driving and abrupt
braking. (See “Anti-lock Braking System
(ABS) warning light” earlier in this section.)
light remains on, see an INFINITI dealer
immediately.
WARNING
O
O
O
Your brake system may not be working
properly if the warning light is on.
Driving could be dangerous. If you judge
it to be safe, drive carefully to the
nearest service station for repairs. Otherwise, have your vehicle towed because
driving it could be dangerous.
Pressing the brake pedal with the engine stopped and/or low brake fluid
level may increase your stopping distance and braking will require greater
pedal effort as well as pedal travel.
If the brake fluid level is below the
minimum or MIN mark on the brake fluid
reservoir, do not drive until the brake
system has been checked at an INFINITI
dealer.
Charge warning light
If the light comes on while the engine is
running, it may indicate the charging system is not functioning properly. Turn the
engine off and check the alternator belt. If
the belt is loose, broken, missing or if the
CAUTION
Do not continue driving if the alternator belt
is loose, broken or missing.
Four-Wheel Active Steer
(4WAS) warning light (if so
equipped)
If the light comes on while the engine is
running, it may indicate that there is a
malfunction with the Four-Wheel Active
Steer (4WAS) portion of the steering
system. Push the ignition switch to the
OFF position and then to the ON position.
If the light does not turn off after cycling
the engine, have the system checked by
an INFINITI dealer.
For further information about the FourWheel Active Steer system, see “FourWheel Active Steer (4WAS) system” in the
“5. Starting and driving” section.
If a malfunction occurs in the system, the
Four-Wheel Active Steer (4WAS) function
will cease but driving can be continued.
Instruments and controls 2-15
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
However, the steering wheel is slightly
turned even when driving on a straight
road. Drive carefully to the nearest
INFINITI dealer.
Engine oil pressure warning
light
This light warns of low engine oil pressure. If the light flickers or comes on during normal driving, pull off the road in a
safe area, stop the engine immediately
and call an INFINITI dealer or other authorized repair shop.
The engine oil pressure warning light is
not designed to indicate a low oil level.
Use the dipstick to check the oil level. See
“Engine oil” in the “8. Maintenance and
do-it-yourself” section.
CAUTION
Running the engine with the engine oil pressure warning light on could cause serious
damage to the engine almost immediately.
Such damage is not covered by warranty.
Turn off the engine as soon as it is safe to do
so.
Intelligent Cruise Control
(ICC) system warning light
(Orange; if so equipped)
tors the tire pressure of all tires except
the spare.
This light comes on if there is a malfunction in the Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC)
system.
Intelligent Key warning
light
The low tire pressure warning light warns
of low tire pressure or indicates that the
TPMS is not functioning properly.
After the ignition switch is turned ON, this
light illuminates for about 1 second and
turns off.
Low tire pressure warning:
After the ignition switch is pushed to the
ON position, this light comes on for about
2 seconds and then turns off.
This light warns of a malfunction with the
electrical steering lock system or the Intelligent Key system.
If the light comes on while the engine is
stopped, it may be impossible to free the
steering lock or to start the engine. If the
light comes on while the engine is running, you can drive the vehicle. However
in these cases, contact an INFINITI dealer
for repair as soon as possible.
Low tire pressure warning
light
Your vehicle is equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) that moni-
If the vehicle is being driven with low tire
pressure, the warning light will illuminate.
When the low tire pressure warning light
illuminates, you should stop and adjust
the tire pressure to the recommended
COLD tire pressure shown on the Tire and
Loading Information label. The low tire
pressure warning light does not automatically turn off when the tire pressure is adjusted. After the tire is inflated to the recommended pressure, the vehicle must be
driven at speeds above 16 MPH (25 km/h)
to activate the TPMS and turn off the low
tire pressure warning light. Use a tire
pressure gauge to check the tire pressure.
For additional information, see “Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS)” in the “5.
Starting and driving” section and in the
“6. In case of emergency” section.
2-16 Instruments and controls
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
TPMS malfunction:
pressure to the recommended COLD tire
pressure shown on the Tire and Loading
Information label to turn the low tire
pressure warning light OFF. If the light
still comes on while driving after adjusting the tire pressure, a tire may be flat. If
you have a flat tire, replace it with a
spare tire as soon as possible.
If the TPMS is not functioning properly,
the low tire pressure warning light will
flash for approximately 1 minute when the
ignition switch is pushed ON. The light
will remain on after the 1 minute. Have
the system checked by an INFINITI dealer.
For additional information, see “Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS)” in the “5.
Starting and driving” section.
O
WARNING
O
O
If the light does not illuminate with the
ignition switch pushed ON, have the vehicle checked by an INFINITI dealer as
soon as possible.
If the light illuminates while driving,
avoid sudden steering maneuvers or
abrupt braking, reduce vehicle speed,
pull off the road to a safe location and
stop the vehicle as soon as possible. Serious vehicle damage could occur and
may lead to an accident and could result
in serious personal injury. Check the tire
pressure for all four tires. Adjust the tire
O
regular tire pressure check. Be sure to
check the tire pressure regularly.
When a spare tire is mounted or a wheel
is replaced, tire pressure will not be indicated, the TPMS will not function and
the low tire pressure warning light will
flash for approximately 1 minute. The
light will remain on after the 1 minute.
Contact your INFINITI dealer as soon as
possible for tire replacement and/or
system resetting.
Replacing tires with those not originally
specified by INFINITI could affect the
proper operation of the TPMS.
If the vehicle is being driven at speeds of
less than 16 MPH (25 km/h), the TPMS
may not operate correctly.
O
Be sure to install the specified size of
tires to the front and rear.
Master warning light
When the ignition switch is in the ON position, the master warning light illuminates if any of the following are displayed
on the dot matrix liquid crystal display:
O
No key warning
O
Low fuel warning
O
Low washer fluid warning
O
Parking brake release warning
O
Door/trunk open warning
See “Dot matrix crystal liquid display”
later in this section.
CAUTION
O
O
The TPMS is not a substitute for the
Instruments and controls 2-17
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
Preview Function warning
light (Orange; if so
equipped)
The light comes on if there is a malfunction in the Brake Assist (with Preview
Function) system.
Seat belt warning light and
chime
The light and chime remind you to fasten
seat belts. The light illuminates whenever
the ignition switch is pushed to the ON
position, and will remain illuminated until
the driver’s seat belt is fastened. At the
same time, the chime will sound for about
6 seconds unless the driver’s seat belt is
securely fastened.
The seat belt warning light for the front
passenger will illuminate if the seat belt
is not fastened when the front passenger’s seat is occupied. For 5 seconds after
the ignition switch is in the ON position,
the system does not activate the warning
light for the front passenger.
See “Seat belts” in the “1. Safety —
Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system” section for precautions on
seat belt usage.
Supplemental air bag
warning light
tensioner seat belt may not function properly.
After pushing the ignition switch to the
ON position, the supplemental air bag
warning light will illuminate. The supplemental air bag warning light will turn off
after about 7 seconds if the supplemental
front air bag and supplemental side air
bag, curtain side-impact air bag systems
and/or pre-tensioner seat belt are operational.
For additional information, see “Supplemental restraint system” in the “1. Safety
— Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system” section.
If any of the following conditions occur,
the supplemental front air bag, supplemental side air bag, supplemental curtain
side-impact air bag and pre-tensioner
seat belt needs servicing and your vehicle
must be taken to your nearest INFINITI
dealer.
O
The supplemental air bag warning
light remains on after approximately 7
seconds.
O
The supplemental air bag warning
light flashes intermittently.
O
The supplemental air bag warning
light does not come on at all.
Unless checked and repaired, the Supplemental Restraint Systems and/or the pre-
WARNING
If the supplemental air bag warning light is
on, it could mean that the supplemental
front air bag, supplemental side air bag, curtain side-impact air bag systems and/or pretensioner seat belt will not operate in an accident. To help avoid injury to yourself or
others, have your vehicle checked by a
dealer as soon as possible.
INDICATOR LIGHTS
Adaptive Front lighting
System (AFS) indicator light
(if so equipped)
When the ignition switch is pushed to the
ON position, the Adaptive Front lighting
System (AFS) indicator light will illuminate. The light will turn off in about 1 second if the AFS is operational.
2-18 Instruments and controls
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
This light also comes on when the AFS is
turned off by pushing the OFF side of the
AFS switch.
If the AFS indicator light blinks, it may indicate the AFS is not functioning properly.
Have the system checked by an INFINITI
dealer.
See “Adaptive Front lighting System
(AFS)” later in this section.
Automatic transmission
position indicator light
When the ignition switch is pushed to the
ON position, the indicator shows the automatic selector shift position. See
“Driving with automatic transmission” in
the “5. Starting and driving” section.
Front passenger air bag
status light
The front passenger air bag status light
(
) will be lit and the passenger front
air bag will be OFF depending on how the
front passenger seat is being used.
For front passenger air bag status light
operation, see “INFINITI advanced air bag
system” in the “1. Safety — Seats, seat
belts and supplemental restraint system”
section of this manual.
High beam indicator light
(Blue)
This light comes on when the headlight
high beam is on and goes out when the
low beam is selected.
Malfunction Indicator Light
(MIL)
If the malfunction indicator light comes
on steady or blinks while the engine is
running, it may indicate a potential emission control malfunction.
The malfunction indicator light may also
come on steady if the fuel-filler cap is
loose or missing, or if the vehicle runs out
of fuel. Check to make sure the fuel-filler
cap is installed and closed tightly, and
that the vehicle has at least 3 US gallons
(14 liters) of fuel in the fuel tank.
After a few driving trips, the
light
should turn off if no other potential emission control system malfunction exists.
If this indicator light remains on for 20
seconds and then blinks for 10 seconds
when the engine is not running, it indicates that the vehicle is not ready for an
emission control system inspection/
maintenance test. See “Readiness for
inspection/maintenance (I/M) test” in the
“9. Technical and consumer information”
section of this manual.
Operation
The malfunction indicator light will come
on in one of two ways:
O Malfunction indicator light on steady
— An emission control system malfunction has been detected. Check the
fuel-filler cap. If the fuel-filler cap is
loose or missing, tighten or install the
cap and continue to drive the vehicle.
The
light should turn off after a
few driving trips. If the
light does
not turn off after a few driving trips,
have the vehicle inspected by an
INFINITI dealer. You do not need to
have your vehicle towed to the dealer.
O Malfunction indicator light blinking —
An engine misfire has been detected
which may damage the emission control system.
To reduce or avoid emission control
system damage:
a) Do not drive at speeds above 45
MPH (72 km/h).
b) Avoid hard acceleration or deceleration.
Instruments and controls 2-19
w 06.9.20/V36-D X
c) Avoid steep uphill grades.
d) If possible, reduce the amount of
cargo being hauled or towed.
The malfunction indicator light may
stop blinking and remain on.
Have the vehicle inspected by an
INFINITI dealer. You do not need to
have your vehicle towed to the dealer.
CAUTION
Continued vehicle operation without having
the emission control system checked and repaired as necessary could lead to poor driveability, reduced fuel economy, and possible
damage to the emission control system.
Security indicator light
The light blinks when the ignition switch
is in the LOCK position. This function indicates the security system equipped on
the vehicle is operational.
If the security system is malfunctioning,
this light will remain on while the ignition
switch is in the ON position. For additional information, see “Security system”
later in this section.
Slip indicator light
This indicator will blink when the VDC
system or the traction control system is
operating, thus alerting the driver to the
fact that the road surface is slippery and
the vehicle is nearing its traction limits.
Turn signal/hazard indicator
lights
The light flashes when the turn signal
switch lever or hazard switch is turned
on.
Vehicle Dynamic Control
(VDC) off indicator light
The light comes on when the vehicle dynamic control off switch is pushed to OFF.
This indicates that the vehicle dynamic
control system and traction control
system are not operating. When the vehicle dynamic control off indicator light
and slip indicator light come on with the
vehicle dynamic control system turned on,
this light alerts the driver to the fact that
the vehicle dynamic control system’s failsafe mode is operating, for example the
vehicle dynamic control system may not
be functioning properly. Have the system
checked by an INFINITI dealer. If an abnor-
mality occurs in the system, the vehicle
dynamic control system function will be
canceled but the vehicle is still driveable.
For additional information, see “Vehicle
Dynamic Control (VDC) system” in the “5.
Starting and driving” section of this
manual.
AUDIBLE REMINDERS
Key reminder chime
A chime will sound if the driver side door
is opened while the ignition switch is
pushed to the ACC position or pushed to
the OFF or LOCK position with the Intelligent Key left in the Intelligent Key port.
Make sure the ignition switch is pushed
to the OFF position, and take the Intelligent Key with you when leaving the vehicle.
Light reminder chime
A chime will sound when the driver side
door is opened with the light switch in
the
or
position, and the ignition switch is pushed to the ACC position.
Turn the light switch off when you leave
the vehicle.
2-20 Instruments and controls
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
DOT MATRIX LIQUID CRYSTAL DISPLAY
Parking brake reminder chime
gent Key system” in the “3. Pre-driving
checks and adjustments” section.
The chime will sound if the vehicle is
driven with the parking brake applied.
Stop the vehicle and release the parking
brake.
Brake pad wear warning
The disc brake pads have audible wear
warnings. When a brake pad requires replacement, it will make a high pitched
scraping sound when the vehicle is in motion whether or not the brake pedal is depressed. Have the brakes checked as soon
as possible if the warning sound is heard.
SIC3252
1 is
The dot matrix liquid crystal display q
located between the tachometer and the
speedometer, and it displays the automatic transmission position indicator, the
Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) system (if
so equipped) information, the Intelligent
Key operation information and other
warnings and information.
For details about the automatic transmission position indicator, see “Indicator
lights” earlier in this section. For details
about the ICC system, see “Intelligent
cruise control system” in the “5. Starting
and driving” section. For the details about
the Intelligent Key system, see “Intelli-
Instruments and controls 2-21
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
SIC3280
2-22 Instruments and controls
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
INDICATORS FOR OPERATION
1. Engine start operation indicator
(Automatic Transmission models)
This indicator appears when the selector
lever is in the P position.
This indicator means that the engine will
start by pushing the ignition switch with
the brake pedal depressed.
2. Steering lock release
malfunction indicator
This indicator appears when the steering
wheel cannot be released from the LOCK
position.
If this indicator appears, push the pushbutton ignition switch while lightly
turning the steering wheel right and left.
3. Intelligent Key insertion
indicator
This indicator appears when the Intelligent Key needs to be inserted into the Intelligent Key port. (For example, the Intelligent Key battery is discharged.)
If this indicator appears, insert the Intelligent Key into the Intelligent Key port in
the correct direction. See “Push-button ig-
nition switch” in the “5. Starting and driving” section.
4. Intelligent Key removal
indicator
This indicator appears when the driver’s
door is opened with the ignition switch in
the LOCK position and the Intelligent Key
placed in the Intelligent Key port. A key
reminder chime also sounds.
If this indicator appears, remove the Intelligent Key from the Intelligent Key port
and take it with you when leaving the vehicle.
5. NO KEY warning
This warning appears in either of the following conditions.
No key inside the vehicle:
The warning appears when the door is
closed with the Intelligent Key left outside
the vehicle and the ignition switch in the
ACC or ON position. Make sure that the
Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle.
Unregistered Intelligent Key:
The warning appears when the ignition
switch is pushed from the LOCK position
and the Intelligent Key cannot be recog-
nized by the system. You cannot start the
engine with an unregistered key. Use the
registered Intelligent Key.
See “Intelligent Key system” in the “3.
Pre-driving checks and adjustments” section for more details.
6. SHIFT “P” warning (Automatic
Transmission models)
This warning appears when the ignition
switch is pushed to stop the engine with
the selector lever in any position except
the P position.
If this warning appears, move the selector
lever to the P position or push the ignition switch to the ON position.
An inside warning chime will also sound.
See “Intelligent Key system” in the
“3. Pre-driving checks and adjustments”
section.
7. “PUSH” warning (Automatic
Transmission models)
This warning appears when the selector
lever is moved to the P position with the
ignition switch in the ACC position after
the SHIFT “P” warning appears.
Instruments and controls 2-23
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
To push the ignition switch to the OFF position, perform the following procedure:
SHIFT “P” warning → (Move the selector lever to “P”) → PUSH warning →
(Push the ignition switch → ignition
switch position is turned to ON) →
PUSH warning → (Push the ignition
switch → ignition switch position is
turned to OFF)
8. Intelligent Key battery
discharge indicator
This indicator appears when the Intelligent Key battery is running out of power.
If this indicator appears, replace the battery with a new one. See “Intelligent Key
battery replacement” in the “8. Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section.
9. Engine start operation indicator
(Manual Transmission models)
This indicator appears when the shift
lever is in the N position.
This indicator means that the engine will
start by pushing the ignition switch with
the clutch pedal depressed.
10. Parking brake release warning
14. “Time to rest” indicator
This warning appears when the vehicle
speed is above 4 MPH (7 km/h) and the
parking brake is applied.
This indicator appears when the set “time
to rest” indicator activates. You can set
the time for up to 6 hours. (See “Trip
Computer” later in this section.)
11. Low fuel warning
This warning appears when the fuel level
in the tank is getting low. Refuel as soon
as it is convenient, preferably before the
fuel gauge reaches the empty (E) position.
There is a small reserve of fuel remaining
in the tank when the fuel gauge reaches
the empty (E) position.
12. Low washer fluid warning
This warning appears when the washer
tank fluid is at a low level. Add washer
fluid as necessary. See “Window washer
fluid” in the “8. Maintenance and do-ityourself” section.
13. Door/trunk open warning
(ignition switch is in the ON
position)
15. Low outside temperature
warning
This warning appears if the outside temperature is below 37°F (3°C). The warning
can be set not to be displayed. (See “Trip
Computer” later in this section.)
16. Cruise indicator
Cruise main switch indicator:
The indicator is displayed when the cruise
control main switch is pushed. When the
main switch is pushed again, the indicator disappears. When the cruise control
main switch indicator is displayed, the
cruise control system is operational.
Cruise set switch indicator:
This warning appears if any of the doors
and/or the trunk lid are open or not
closed securely. The vehicle icon indicates which door or the trunk lid is open
on the display.
The indicator is displayed while the vehicle speed is controlled by the cruise
control system. If the indicator blinks
while the engine is running, it may indicate that the cruise control system is not
functioning properly. Have the system
2-24 Instruments and controls
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
checked by an INFINITI dealer.
INDICATORS FOR MAINTENANCE
See “CRUISE CONTROL” in the “5. Starting
and driving” section for details.
1. Engine oil replacement indicator
This indicator appears when the set time
comes for changing the engine oil. You
can set or reset the distance for changing
the engine oil. (See “Trip Computer” later
in this section.)
17. Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC)
system indicator (if so equipped)
Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) system
MAIN switch indicator:
2. Oil filter replacement indicator
The indicator is displayed when the Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) system main
switch is pushed. When the main switch
is pushed again, the indicator disappears.
While the main switch indicator is displayed, the ICC system is operational.
This indicator appears when the set time
comes for replacing the oil filter. You can
set or reset the distance for replacing the
oil filter. (See “Trip Computer” later in
this section.)
Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) system set
switch indicator:
3. Tire replacement indicator
The indicator is displayed on while the vehicle speed is controlled by the Intelligent
Cruise Control (ICC) system. If the indicator blinks while the engine is running, it
may indicate that the ICC system is not
functioning properly. Have the system
checked by an INFINITI dealer.
This indicator appears when the set time
comes for replacing tires. You can set or
reset the distance for replacing tires. (See
“Trip Computer” later in this section.)
4. “OTHER” indicator
See “INTELLIGENT CRUISE CONTROL (ICC)
SYSTEM” in the “5. Starting and driving”
section for details.
SIC3281
This indicator appears when the set time
comes for replacing items other than the
engine oil, oil filter and tires. You can set
or reset the distance for replacing the
items. (See “Trip Computer” later in this
section.)
Instruments and controls 2-25
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
More maintenance reminders are also
available on the center display. See “How
to use INFO button” in the “4. Monitor,
climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems” section.
SIC3282
2-26 Instruments and controls
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
A is pushed,
switch q
Each time the
the display will change as follows:
Current fuel consumption → Average fuel
consumption and speed → Elapsed time
and trip odometer → Distance to empty
(dte) → Outside air temperature (ICY) →
Setting → Warning check
1. Current fuel consumption
The current fuel consumption mode
shows the current fuel consumption.
SIC3264
TRIP COMPUTER
Switches for the trip computer are located
on the right side of the combination
meter panel. To operate the trip computer, push the side or front of the
switches as shown above.
A
q
B
q
switch
switch
When the ignition switch is pushed to the
ON position, modes of the trip computer
can be selected by pushing the
A .
switch q
2. Average fuel consumption (MPG
or l (liter)/100 km) and speed
(MPH or km/h)
Fuel consumption:
The average fuel consumption mode
shows the average fuel consumption
since the last reset. Resetting is done by
B
pushing the
switch q
for longer
than 1 second. (The average speed is also
reset at the same time.)
The display is updated every 30 seconds.
At about the first 1/3 mile (500 m) after a
reset, the display shows “——”.
age vehicle speed since the last reset. Resetting is done by pushing the
B for longer than 1 second.
switch q
(The average fuel consumption is also
reset at the same time.)
The display is updated every 30 seconds.
The first 30 seconds after a reset, the display shows “——”.
3. Elapsed time and trip odometer
(mls or km)
Elapsed time:
The elapsed time mode shows the time
since the last reset. The displayed time
can be reset by pushing the
switch
B for longer than 1 second. (The trip
q
odometer is also reset at the same time.)
Trip odometer:
The trip odometer mode shows the total
distance the vehicle has been driven
since the last reset. Resetting is done by
B
pushing the
switch q
for longer
than 1 second. (The elapsed time is also
reset at the same time.)
Speed:
4. Distance to empty (dte — mls
or km)
The average speed mode shows the aver-
The distance to empty (dte) mode pro-
Instruments and controls 2-27
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
vides you with an estimation of the distance that can be driven before refueling.
The dte is constantly being calculated,
based on the amount of fuel in the fuel
tank and the actual fuel consumption.
The display is updated every 30 seconds.
The dte mode includes a low range warning feature. If the fuel level is low, the
warning is displayed on the screen.
When the fuel level drops even lower, the
dte display will change to “——”.
O
If the amount of fuel added is small,
the display just before the ignition
switch is pushed to the OFF position
may continue to be displayed.
O
When driving uphill or rounding
curves, the fuel in the tank shifts,
which may momentarily change the
display.
5. Outside air temperature (ICY —
°F or °C)
The outside air temperature is displayed
in °F or °C in the range of −22 to 131°F
(−30 to 55°C).
The outside air temperature mode includes a low temperature warning feature.
If the outside air temperature is below
37°F (3°C), the warning is displayed on
the screen.
O
BACK
Select this submenu to return to the
top page of the setting mode.
The outside temperature sensor is located
in front of the radiator. The sensor may be
affected by road or engine heat, wind directions and other driving conditions. The
display may differ from the actual outside
temperature or the temperature displayed
on various signs or billboards.
O
TIME TO REST
Select this submenu to specify when
the “time to rest” indicator activates.
O
ICY
Select this submenu to display the low
outside temperature warning.
6. Setting
Setting cannot be made while driving. A
message “Setting can only be operated
when stopped” is also displayed on the
dot matrix crystal display.
A and
B
The
switch q
switch q
are used in the setting mode to select and
decide a menu.
MAINTENANCE:
There are 5 submenus under the maintenance menu.
O
BACK
Select this submenu to return to the
top page of the setting mode.
O
ENGINE OIL
Select this submenu to set or reset
the distance for changing the engine
oil.
O
OIL FILTER
Select this submenu to set or reset
the distance for replacing the oil filter.
O
TIRE
Select this submenu to set or reset
the distance for replacing tires.
SKIP:
A to move to the
Push the
switch q
warning check mode.
Push the
menus.
B to select other
switch q
ALERT:
There are 3 submenus under the alert
menu.
2-28 Instruments and controls
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
SECURITY SYSTEMS
O
OTHER
Select this submenu and set or reset
the distance for replacing items other
than the engine oil, oil filter and tires.
Select this menu to see the details of
warnings.
DISPLAY:
There are 3 submenus under the display
menu.
O
BACK
Select this submenu to return to the
top page of the setting mode.
O
LANGUAGE
Select this submenu to choose English
or French for display.
O
UNIT
Select this submenu to choose the
metric unit from MPG or l/100 km.
7. Warning check
SKIP:
A to move to the
Push the
switch q
warning check mode.
Push the
menus.
B to select other
switch q
DETAIL:
This item is available only when a
warning is displayed.
SIC2132
Your vehicle has two types of security
systems, as follows:
O
Vehicle security
O
INFINITI Vehicle Immobilizer System
The security condition will be shown by
the security indicator light.
VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM
The vehicle security system provides visual and audio alarm signals if someone
opens the doors, hood, or trunk lid when
the system is armed. It is not, however, a
motion detection type system that acti-
Instruments and controls 2-29
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
vates when a vehicle is moved or when a
vibration occurs.
request switch, power door
switch or mechanical key.
The system helps deter vehicle theft but
cannot prevent it, nor can it prevent the
theft of interior or exterior vehicle components in all situations. Always secure your
vehicle even if parking for a brief period.
Never leave your Intelligent Key(s) in the
vehicle, and always lock it when unattended. Be aware of your surroundings,
and park in secure, well-lit areas whenever possible.
Many devices offering additional protection, such as component locks, identification markers, and tracking systems, are
available at auto supply stores and specialty shops. Your INFINITI dealer may
also offer such equipment. Check with
your insurance company to see if you may
be eligible for discounts for various theft
protection features.
lock
5. Confirm that the security indicator
light comes on. The security indicator
light glows for about 30 seconds and
then blinks. The system is now armed.
If, during this 30 second time period,
the door is unlocked, or the ignition
switch is pushed to ACC or ON, the
system will not be armed.
SIC2045
How to arm the vehicle security
system
Even when the driver and/or passengers
are in the vehicle, the system will activate
with all doors, hood, and trunk lid locked
with the ignition switch in the LOCK position. When pushing the ignition switch to
the ACC or ON position, the system will be
released.
1. Close all windows.
Vehicle security system activation
The system can be armed even if the windows are open.
The vehicle security system will give the
following alarm:
2. Push the ignition switch to the OFF position.
O
The headlights blink and the horn
sounds intermittently.
O
The alarm automatically turns off after
approximately 1 minute. However, the
alarm reactivates if the vehicle is tampered with again.
3. Remove the Intelligent Key from the
vehicle.
4. Close all doors, hood and trunk. Lock
all doors. The doors can be locked
with the Intelligent Key, door handle
2-30 Instruments and controls
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
The alarm is activated by:
System (CONT ASSY - CARD SLOT)
O
This device complies with part 15 of the
FCC Rules and RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions;
O
Unlocking the door or opening the
trunk lid without using the button on
the Intelligent Key, the door handle request switch or the mechanical key.
(Even if the door is opened by releasing the door inside lock knob, the
alarm will activate.)
Opening the hood.
How to stop an activated alarm
The alarm will stop by unlocking a door by
pushing the unlock button on the Intelligent Key, the door handle request switch or
using the mechanical key. The alarm will
not stop if the ignition switch is pushed to
the ACC or ON position.
If the system does not operate as described above, have it checked by an
INFINITI dealer.
INFINITI VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER
SYSTEM
The INFINITI Vehicle Immobilizer System
will not allow the engine to start without
the use of the registered Intelligent Key.
Statement related to section 15 of FCC
rules for INFINITI Vehicle Immobilizer
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept
any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.
CHANGES OR MODIFICATIONS NOT EXPRESSLY APPROVED BY THE PARTY RESPONSIBLE FOR COMPLIANCE COULD VOID
THE USER’S AUTHORITY TO OPERATE THE
EQUIPMENT.
SIC2045
Security indicator light
The security indicator light is located on
the meter panel. It indicates the status of
the INFINITI Vehicle Immobilizer System.
The light blinks after the ignition switch
was in the LOCK position. This function
indicates the security systems equipped
on the vehicle are operational.
If the INFINITI Vehicle Immobilizer System
is malfunctioning, this light will remain on
while the ignition switch is in the ON position.
If the light still remains on and/or the en-
Instruments and controls 2-31
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
WINDSHIELD WIPER AND WASHER SWITCH
gine will not start, see an INFINITI dealer
for INFINITI Vehicle Immobilizer System
service as soon as possible. Please bring
all Intelligent Keys that you have when visiting an INFINITI dealer for service.
WARNING
mended levels before pouring the fluid
into the window washer reservoir tank.
Do not use the window washer reservoir
tank to mix the washer fluid concentrate
and water.
In freezing temperatures the washer solution may freeze on the windshield and obscure your vision which may lead to an accident. Warm windshield with the defroster
before you wash the windshield.
CAUTION
O
Do not operate the washer continuously
for more than 30 seconds.
O
Do not operate the washer if the reservoir tank is empty.
O
Do not fill the window washer reservoir
tank with washer fluid concentrates at
full strength. Some methyl alcohol
based washer fluid concentrates may
permanently stain the grille if spilled
while filling the window washer reservoir tank.
O
Pre-mix washer fluid concentrates with
water to the manufacturer’s recom-
2-32 Instruments and controls
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
REAR WINDOW AND OUTSIDE MIRROR
DEFROSTER SWITCH
faster.) To turn this function on and
off, see “How to use SETTING button”
in the “4. Monitor, climate, audio,
phone and voice recognition systems”
section.
2 Low — continuous low speed operaq
tion
3
q
High — continuous high speed operation
4 to have one sweep
Push the lever up q
operation of the wiper.
SIC3238
The windshield wiper and washer operates when the ignition switch is in the ON
position.
Push the lever down to operate the wiper
at the following speed:
1 Intermittent — intermittent operation
q
can be adjusted by turning the knob
A
B
toward q
(Slower) or q
(Faster).
When the speed sensing wiper interval
function is turned on, the intermittent
operation speed varies in accordance
with the vehicle speed. (For example,
when the vehicle speed is high, the intermittent operation speed will be
5 to operate
Pull the lever toward you q
the washer. Then the wiper will also operate several times.
SIC3239
Type A
To defog/defrost the rear window glass
and outside mirrors (if so equipped), start
1 on.
the engine and push the switch q
2 will come on. Push
The indicator light q
the switch again to turn the defroster off.
It will automatically turn off in approximately 15 minutes.
CAUTION
When cleaning the inner side of the rear window, be careful not to scratch or damage the
rear window defroster.
Instruments and controls 2-33
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
HEADLIGHT AND TURN SIGNAL SWITCH
XENON HEADLIGHTS
O
The life of xenon headlights will be
shortened by frequent on-off operation. It is generally desirable not to
turn off the headlights for short intervals (for example, when the vehicle
stops at a traffic signal). Even when the
daytime running lights are active
(Canada only), the xenon headlights do
not turn on. This way the life of the
xenon headlights is not reduced.
O
If the xenon headlight bulb is close to
burning out, the brightness will drastically decrease, the light will start
blinking, or the color of the light will
become reddish. If one or more of the
above signs appear, contact an INFINITI
dealer.
WARNING
HIGH VOLTAGE
O
Type B
SIC3278
O
When xenon headlights are on, they produce a high voltage. To prevent an electric shock, never attempt to modify or
disassemble. Always have your xenon
headlights replaced at an INFINITI
dealer.
Xenon headlights provide considerably
more light than conventional headlights. If they are not correctly aimed,
they might temporarily blind an oncoming driver or the driver ahead of you
and cause a serious accident. If headlights are not aimed correctly, immediately take your vehicle to an INFINITI
dealer and have the headlights adjusted
correctly.
When the xenon headlight is initially
turned on, its brightness or color varies
slightly. However, the color and brightness will soon stabilize.
2-34 Instruments and controls
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
switch to the OFF,
, or
position.
The autolight system can turn on the
headlights automatically when it is dark
and turn off the headlights when it is
light.
If the ignition switch is pushed to the OFF
position and one of the doors is opened
and this condition is continued, the headlights remain on for 5 minutes.
Automatic headlights off delay
SIC3267
SIC3268
HEADLIGHT SWITCH
Autolight system
Lighting
1 Turn the switch to the
q
The autolight system allows the headlights to be set so they turn on and off
automatically.
position:
The front park, side marker, tail, license plate and instrument lights will
come on.
2 Turn the switch to the
q
position:
Headlights will come on and all the
other lights remain on.
To set the autolight system:
1. Make sure the headlight switch is in
1 .
the AUTO position q
You can keep the headlights on for up to
180 seconds after you push the ignition
switch to OFF and open any door then
close all the doors.
You can adjust the period of the automatic headlights off delay from 0 seconds
(OFF) to 180 seconds.
For automatic headlights off delay setting,
see “Automatic headlights off delay” in
the “4. Monitor, climate, audio, phone
and voice recognition systems” section.
2. Push the ignition switch to the ON position.
3. The autolight system automatically
turns the headlights on and off.
To turn the autolight system off, turn the
Instruments and controls 2-35
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
Battery saver system
SAA0642A
Be sure not to put anything on top of the
A located on the top of the
photo sensor q
instrument panel. The photo sensor controls the autolight; if it is covered, the
photo sensor reacts as if it is dark and the
headlights will illuminate.
O
When the headlight switch is in the
or
position while the ignition switch is in the ON position, the
lights will automatically turn off 5 minutes after the ignition switch has been
pushed to the OFF position.
O
When the headlight switch remains in
the
or
position after the
lights automatically turn off, the lights
will turn on when the ignition switch is
pushed to the ON position.
SIC3269
CAUTION
Headlight beam select
1 To select the low beam, put the lever
q
in the neutral position as shown.
O
When you turn on the headlight switch
again after the lights automatically turn
off, the lights will not turn off automatically. Be sure to turn the light switch to
the OFF position when you leave the vehicle for extended periods of time, otherwise the battery will be discharged.
O
Never leave the light switch on when the
engine is not running for extended periods of time even if the headlights turn
off automatically.
2 To select the high beam, push the
q
lever forward while the switch is in the
position. Pull it back to select
the low beam.
3 Pulling the lever toward you will flash
q
the headlight high beam even when
the headlight switch is in the OFF position.
2-36 Instruments and controls
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
Daytime running light system
(Canada only)
Adaptive Front lighting System
(AFS) (if so equipped)
The daytime running lights automatically
illuminate when the engine is started with
the parking brake released. The daytime
running lights operate with the headlight
switch in the OFF position or in the
position. Turn the headlight switch
to the
position for full illumination
when driving at night.
The Adaptive Front lighting System (AFS)
will automatically adjust the headlights
(low beam) toward the turning direction to
improve the driver’s view. When the headlight switch is ON and the driver operates
the steering wheel in a turn, the AFS system will be activated.
If the parking brake is applied before the
engine is started, the daytime running
lights do not illuminate. The daytime running lights illuminate once the parking
brake is released. The daytime running
lights will remain on until the ignition
switch is pushed to the OFF position.
WARNING
When the daytime running light system is
active, tail lights on your vehicle are not on.
It is necessary at dusk to turn on your headlights. Failure to do so could cause an accident injuring yourself and others.
The AFS will operate:
O
when the headlight switch is ON.
O
when the selector lever is in any position other than P (Park) or R (Reverse).
O
when the vehicle is driven at above 16
MPH (25 km/h) for the left-side headlight. Note that the right-side low
beam headlight will swivel but the left
side will not swivel when the vehicle
is at a stop and the steering wheel is
turned. The vehicle must attain a
speed above 16 MPH (25 km/h) before
AFS activates the left-side headlight.
SIC2645
To turn the AFS off, push the OFF side of
the AFS switch. (The AFS OFF indicator
light will illuminate.) Push the ON side of
the switch to turn the system on again.
AFS will also adjust the headlight to a
proper axis automatically, depending on
the number of occupants in the vehicle,
the load the vehicle is carrying and the
road conditions.
If the AFS OFF indicator light blinks after
the ignition switch has been pushed to
the ON position, this may indicate that
the AFS is not functioning properly. Have
the system checked by an INFINITI dealer.
Instruments and controls 2-37
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
When the engine is started, the headlights will vibrate to check the system
condition. This is not a malfunction.
SIC3257
SIC3270
2-38 Instruments and controls
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
Instrument brightness control
The instrument brightness control switch
can be operated when the ignition switch
is in the ON position. When the switch is
operated, the dot matrix liquid crystal display switches to the brightness adjustment mode.
A to brighten the
Push the upper switch q
1 moves
instrument panel lights. The bar q
to the + side. When reaching the
maximum brightness, “MAX” appears on
2 .
the display q
B to dim the inPush the lower switch q
1 moves
strument panel lights. The bar q
to the − side. When reaching the
minimum brightness, “MIN” appears on
3 . However, “MIN” does not
the display q
appear during the nighttime.
SIC3271
TURN SIGNAL SWITCH
FOG LIGHT SWITCH
1 Turn signal
q
To turn the fog lights on, turn the headlight switch to the
position, then
turn the switch to the
position. To
turn them off, turn the switch to the OFF
position.
The dot matrix liquid crystal display returns to the normal display under the following conditions:
Move the lever up or down to signal the
turning direction. When the turn is completed, the turn signals cancel automatically.
O
2 Lane change signal
q
O
when the instrument brightness control switch is not operated for more
than 5 seconds.
when the side or front of the
switch or
switch on the
right side of the combination meter
panel is pushed.
SIC3272
The headlights must be on for the fog
lights to operate.
To indicate a lane change, move the lever
up or down to the point where lights
begin flashing.
Instruments and controls 2-39
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
HAZARD WARNING FLASHER SWITCH
HORN
drive so slowly that your vehicle might
become a hazard to other traffic.
O
Turn signals do not work when the
hazard warning flasher lights are on.
The flasher can be actuated with the ignition switch in any position.
Some state laws may prohibit the use of
the hazard warning flasher switch while
driving.
SIC2574
SIC3312
Push the switch on to warn other drivers
when you must stop or park under emergency conditions. All turn signal lights will
flash.
To sound the horn, push the center pad
area of the steering wheel.
WARNING
O
If stopping for an emergency, be sure to
move the vehicle well off the road.
O
Do not use the hazard warning flashers
while moving on the highway unless unusual circumstances force you to
WARNING
Do not disassemble the horn. Doing so could
affect proper operation of the supplemental
front air bag system. Tampering with the
supplemental front air bag system may result in serious personal injury.
2-40 Instruments and controls
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
HEATED SEATS (if so equipped)
CAUTION
O
The battery could run down if the seat
heater is operated while the engine is
not running.
O
Do not use the seat heater for extended
periods or when no one is using the seat.
O
Do not put anything on the seat which
insulates heat, such as a blanket,
cushion, seat cover, etc. Otherwise, the
seat may become overheated.
O
Do not place anything hard or heavy on
the seat or pierce it with a pin or similar
object. This may result in damage to the
heater.
O
Any liquid spilled on the heated seat
should be removed immediately with a
dry cloth.
O
When cleaning the seat, never use gasoline, thinner, or any similar materials.
O
If any abnormalities are found or the
heated seat does not operate, turn the
switch off and have the system checked
by an INFINITI dealer.
SIC2770
The front seats are warmed by built-in
heaters. The switches located on the center console can be operated independently of each other.
1. Start the engine.
2. Select heat range.
1 For high heat, push the HI (High)
q
side of the switch.
2 For low heat, push the LO (Low)
q
side of the switch.
3 will
The indicator light in the switch q
Instruments and controls 2-41
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
SNOW MODE SWITCH (if so equipped)
VEHICLE DYNAMIC CONTROL (VDC) OFF
SWITCH
illuminate when low or high is selected.
3. To turn off the heater, return the
switch to the level position. Make sure
the indicator light goes off.
The heater is controlled by a thermostat, automatically turning the heater
on and off. The indicator light will remain on as long as the switch is on.
When the vehicle’s interior is warmed,
or before you leave the vehicle, be
sure to turn off the switch.
SSD0351
SIC1881
For driving or starting the vehicle on
snowy roads or slippery areas, turn on
the SNOW mode switch. The indicator
light on the switch will illuminate. When
the SNOW mode is activated, engine
output is controlled to avoid wheel spin.
The vehicle should be driven with the Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system on for
most driving conditions.
If the vehicle is stuck in mud or snow, the
VDC system reduces the engine output to
reduce wheel spin. The engine speed will
be reduced even if the accelerator is depressed to the floor. If maximum engine
power is needed to free a stuck vehicle,
turn the VDC system off.
To turn off the VDC system, push the VDC
OFF switch. The
indicator will illuminate.
2-42 Instruments and controls
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
CLOCK
Push the VDC OFF switch again or restart
the engine to turn on the system. See
“Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system”
in the “5. Starting and driving” section.
(if so equipped), see “How to use SETTING
button” in the “4. Monitor, climate, audio,
phone and voice recognition systems”
section.
SIC3325
If the power supply is disconnected, the
clock will not indicate the correct time. Readjust the time.
ADJUSTING THE TIME
1. To set the clock forward, push the
1 .
button q
2. To set the clock backward, push the
2 .
button q
3. To move forward or backward faster,
push and hold the button more than 5
seconds.
For details about display clock adjustment
Instruments and controls 2-43
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
POWER OUTLET
SIC3247
Automatic transmission models
The power outlet is located in the center
console.
CAUTION
O
The outlet and plug may be hot during or
immediately after use.
O
Do not use with accessories that exceed
a 12 volt, 120W (10A) power draw. Do not
use double adapters or more than one
electrical accessory.
Manual transmission models
O
Before inserting or disconnecting a plug,
be sure the electrical accessory being
used is turned OFF.
O
When not in use, be sure to close the
cap. Do not allow water to contact the
outlet.
SIC3273
O
Use power outlet with the engine running to avoid discharging the vehicle
battery.
O
Avoid using power outlet when the air
conditioner, headlights or rear window
defroster is on.
O
This power outlet is not designed for use
with a cigarette lighter unit.
O
Push the plug in as far as it will go. If
good contact is not made, the plug may
overheat or the internal temperature
fuse may blow.
2-44 Instruments and controls
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
CIGARETTE LIGHTER AND ASHTRAYS
CAUTION
O
The cigarette lighter socket is a power
source for the cigarette lighter element
only. The use of the cigarette lighter
socket as a power source for any other
accessory is not recommended.
O
Do not use any other power outlet for an
accessory lighter.
SIC3219
SIC2570
FRONT
REAR
To open the ashtray lid, push the lid
1 .
down and release it q
1 .
To open the ashtray lid, pull q
2 .
To empty the ashtray, pull out q
2 , and
To empty the ashtray, push down q
pull out.
The cigarette lighter operates when the
ignition switch is in the ON position.
3 , then
Push the lighter in all the way q
release it. When the lighter is heated, it
will spring out. Return the lighter to its
original position after use.
Instruments and controls 2-45
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
STORAGE
CUP HOLDERS
CAUTION
O
Avoid abrupt starting and braking when
the cup holder is being used to prevent
spilling the drink. If the liquid is hot, it
can scald you or your passenger.
O
Use only soft cups in the cup holder.
Hard objects can injure you in an accident.
SIC3313
SIC3274
Automatic transmission models — Front
1 .
To open the cup holder, push the lid q
Manual transmission models — Front
1 .
To open the cup holder, slide the lid q
A will be folded down when inThe flap q
serting a large container.
2 .
Install the partition plate into the slit q
To remove the inner tray for cleaning, pull
2 .
it up as illustrated q
2-46 Instruments and controls
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
SIC3275
Manual transmission models — Console box
To open the console boxes, push the
A and pull up the lid.
knob q
SIC1846B
Rear
To open the cup holder, pull the lid.
SIC3276
Soft bottle holder
CAUTION
To close, push the lid down until the lock
latches.
O
Do not use bottle holder for any other
objects that could be thrown about in
the vehicle and possibly injure people
during sudden braking or an accident.
O
Do not use bottle holder for open liquid
containers.
Instruments and controls 2-47
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
CAUTION
O
Do not use for anything other than
glasses.
O
Do not leave glasses in the sunglasses
holder while parking in direct sunlight.
The heat may damage the glasses.
SIC3246
SUNGLASSES HOLDER
SIC3244
GLOVE BOX
WARNING
Keep the sunglasses holder closed while
driving to prevent an accident.
1 .
To open the sunglasses holder, push q
WARNING
Keep glove box lid closed while driving to
help prevent injury in an accident or a
sudden stop.
1 .
To open the glove box, pull the handle q
To close, push the lid in until the lock
latches.
2 /unlock q
3 the glove box, use
To lock q
2-48 Instruments and controls
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
the mechanical key. For the mechanical
key usage, see “Keys (Intelligent Key)” in
the “3. Pre-driving checks and adjustments” section.
SIC3245
Automatic transmission models
CONSOLE BOX
Manual transmission models
SIC3277
To open the console boxes, push up the
A and pull up the lid.
knob q
To close, push the lid down until latched.
Instruments and controls 2-49
w 06.9.20/V36-D X
SIC1850
REAR ARMREST POCKET
CARD HOLDER
The pocket can store a first aid kit or
other small items.
Type A
Type A
A in the holder.
Insert a card q
SIC3263
Type B
Type B
SIC2154A
1 and slide a
Pull the sun visor down q
A in the card holder.
card q
2-50 Instruments and controls
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
SIC3248
SIC3320
COAT HOOKS
CARGO NET
The coat hooks are equipped beside the
rear personal lights.
The cargo net helps keep packages in the
cargo area from moving around while your
vehicle is driven.
CAUTION
Do not place items which are more than 2 lb
(1 kg) on the hook.
To install the cargo net, attach the hooks
A .
to the retainers q
CAUTION
SIC3317
TRUNK NET FOR EXTRA WINDOW
WASHER FLUID (Canada only)
The trunk net is provided for holding a
tank of extra window washer fluid.
To install the net, place a commercially
available tank in the right corner of the
trunk and then attach the hooks to the reA .
strainers q
Avoid keeping heavy objects in the net.
Instruments and controls 2-51
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
WINDOWS
POWER WINDOWS
Locking passengers’ windows
C is pushed in,
When the lock button q
WARNING
O
Make sure that all passengers have their
hands, etc. inside the vehicle while it is
in motion and before closing the windows. Use the window lock switch to
prevent unexpected use of the power
windows.
O
Do not leave children unattended inside
the vehicle. They could unknowingly activate switches or controls and become
trapped in the window. Unattended children could become involved in serious
accidents.
The power windows operate when the ignition switch is in the ON position or for
about 45 seconds after the ignition switch
is pushed to the OFF position. If the driver’s or front passenger’s door is opened
during this period of about 45 seconds,
power to the windows is canceled.
only the driver side window can be
opened or closed. Push it in again to cancel.
SIC3279
Main power window switch
(driver’s side)
1. Driver side window
2. Front passenger side window
3. Rear left passenger side window
4. Rear right passenger side window
5. Window lock button
To open or close the window, push down
A or pull up q
B the switch and hold it.
q
The main switch (driver side switches) will
open or close all the windows.
2-52 Instruments and controls
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
Automatic operation (for front
door windows or all door
windows)
To fully open or close the window, completely push down or pull up the switch
and release it; it need not be held. The
window will automatically open or close
all the way. To stop the window, just push
or lift the switch in the opposite direction.
SIC3241
Passenger side power window
switch
Type A
SIC3289
A light push or pull on the switch will
cause the window to open or close until
the switch is released.
Auto reverse function
WARNING
The passenger side switch will open or
close only the corresponding window. To
open or close the window, push down or
pull up the switch and hold it.
There are some small distances immediately
before the closed position which cannot be
detected. Make sure that all passengers
have their hands, etc., inside the vehicle before closing the window.
If the control unit detects something
caught in the window as it is closing, the
window will be immediately lowered.
Type B
SIC3242
The auto reverse function can be acti-
Instruments and controls 2-53
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
SUNROOF (if so equipped)
vated when the window is closed by automatic operation when the ignition switch
is in the ON position or for 45 seconds after the ignition switch is pushed to the
OFF position.
Depending on the environment or driving
conditions, the auto reverse function may
be activated if an impact or load similar to
something being caught in the window occurs.
function to confirm the initialization is
complete.
5. Perform steps 2 through 4 above for
other windows.
If the power window automatic function
does not operate properly after performing the procedure above, have your
vehicle checked by an INFINITI dealer.
WARNING
O
In an accident you could be thrown from
the vehicle through an open sunroof. Always use seat belts and child restraints.
O
Do not allow anyone to stand up or extend any portion of their body out of the
sunroof opening while the vehicle is in
motion or while the sunroof is closing.
If the windows do not close
automatically
If the power window automatic function
(closing only) does not operate properly,
perform the following procedure to initialize the power window system.
1. Push the ignition switch to the ON position.
2. Open the window more than halfway
by operating the power window
switch.
3. Pull
hold
hold
after
the power window switch and
it to close the window, and then
the switch more than 3 seconds
the window is closed completely.
4. Release the power window switch. Operate the window by the automatic
CAUTION
O
Remove water drops, snow, ice or sand
from the sunroof before opening.
O
Do not place any heavy object on the
sunroof or surrounding area.
AUTOMATIC SUNROOF
The sunroof only operates when the ignition switch is in the ON position.
The automatic sunroof is operational for
about 45 seconds, even if the ignition
switch is pushed to the OFF position. If
the driver’s door or the passenger’s door
2-54 Instruments and controls
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
Sliding the sunroof
is opened during this period of about 45
seconds, power to the sunroof is canceled.
To fully open or close the sunroof, push
1 or OPEN q
2 side of the sunthe CLOSE q
roof switch for less than 1 second and release it; it need not be held. The roof will
automatically open or close all the way.
To stop the roof, push the switch once
more while it is opening or closing.
SIC3243
Sunshade
The sunshade will open automatically
when the sunroof is opened. However, it
must be closed manually.
Tilting the sunroof
To tilt up, first close the sunroof, then
1 side of the sunroof switch
push the UP q
and release it; it need not be held. To tilt
2
down the sunroof, push the DOWN q
side.
To open or close the sunroof and stop on
1 or OPEN q
2
the way, push the CLOSE q
side of the sunroof switch for more than 1
second. The roof will stop when releasing
the switch.
Auto reverse function
WARNING
There are some small distances immediately
before the closed position which cannot be
detected. Make sure that all passengers
have their hands, etc., inside the vehicle before closing the sunroof.
If the control unit detects something
caught in the sunroof when it is closing,
the sunroof will be immediately opened.
The auto reverse function can be acti-
Instruments and controls 2-55
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
INTERIOR LIGHTS
vated when the sunroof is closed by automatic operation when the ignition switch
is in the ON position or for about 45 seconds after the ignition switch is pushed
to the OFF position.
If the sunroof cannot be closed automatically when the auto reverse function activates due to a malfunction, push and hold
1 side of the sunroof switch.
the CLOSE q
the sunroof switch to fully tilt the sunroof down.
5. Check if the sunroof switch operates
normally.
If the sunroof does not operate properly
after performing the procedure above,
have your vehicle checked by an INFINITI
dealer.
Depending on the environment or driving
conditions, the auto reverse function may
be activated if an impact or load similar to
something being caught in the sunroof occurs.
SIC3249
If the sunroof does not operate
MAP LIGHTS
If the sunroof does not operate properly,
perform the following procedure to initialize the sunroof operation system.
Push the button as illustrated to turn the
light on or off.
1. If the sunroof is open, close it fully by
1 side
repeatedly pushing the CLOSE q
of the sunroof switch.
1 side of
2. Push and hold the CLOSE q
the sunroof switch to tilt the sunroof
up.
3. Release the sunroof switch after the
sunroof moves slightly up and down.
2 side of
4. Push and hold the OPEN q
2-56 Instruments and controls
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
O
ignition switch is in the LOCK position
— remain on for about 15 seconds.
O
doors are unlocked by pushing the
UNLOCK button on the Intelligent Key
or door handle request switch with the
ignition switch in the LOCK position
— remain on for about 15 seconds.
O
any door is opened and then closed
with the ignition switch in the LOCK
position
— remain on for about 15 seconds.
SIC3250
SIC3251
PERSONAL LIGHTS
INTERIOR LIGHT CONTROL SWITCH
Rear
The interior light control switch has three
positions: ON, DOOR and OFF.
Push the button as illustrated to turn the
light on or off.
ON position
1
When the switch is in the ON position q
the map lights and rear personal lights
will illuminate.
DOOR position
When the switch is in the DOOR position
2 , the map lights and rear personal
q
lights will illuminate under the following
conditions:
O
any door is opened with the ignition
switch in the ACC or ON position
— remain on while the door is opened.
When the door is closed, the lights
go off.
The lights will also turn off after 30 minutes when the lights remain illuminated to
prevent the battery from becoming discharged.
When the auto interior illumination is set
to the OFF position (see “Vehicle information and settings” in the “4. Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition
systems” section), the lights will illuminate under the following condition:
Instruments and controls 2-57
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
VANITY MIRROR LIGHTS
O
TRUNK LIGHT
any door is opened with the ignition
switch in any position
The light illuminates when the trunk lid is
opened. When the trunk lid is closed, the
light will turn off.
— remain on while the door is opened.
When the door is closed, the lights
go off.
The light will also turn off after 30 minutes
when the light remains illuminated to prevent the battery from becoming discharged.
OFF position
3 ,
When the switch is in the OFF position q
the lights will not illuminate, regardless
of the condition.
CAUTION
Do not use for extended periods of time with
the engine stopped. This could result in a
discharged battery.
SIC2064
The light on the vanity mirror will turn on
when the cover on the vanity mirror is
opened.
When the cover is closed, the light will
turn off.
The lights will also turn off after 30 minutes when the lights remain illuminated to
prevent the battery from becoming discharged.
2-58 Instruments and controls
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
HomeLink UNIVERSAL TRANSCEIVER
HomeLink Universal Transceiver provides
a convenient way to consolidate the functions of up to three individual hand-held
transmitters into one built-in device.
HomeLink Universal Transceiver:
O
Will operate most Radio Frequency
(RF) devices such as garage doors,
gates, home and office lighting, entry
door locks and security systems.
O
Is powered by your vehicle’s battery.
No separate batteries are required. If
the vehicle’s battery is discharged or
is disconnected, HomeLink will retain
all programming.
Once HomeLink Universal Transceiver is
programmed, retain the original transmitter for future programming procedures
(Example: new vehicle purchases). Upon
sale of the vehicle, the programmed
HomeLink Universal Transceiver buttons
should be erased for security purposes.
For additional information, refer to “Programming HomeLink ” later in this section.
PROGRAMMING HomeLink
WARNING
O
Do not use HomeLink Universal Transceiver with any garage door opener that
lacks safety stop and reverse features as
required by federal safety standards.
(These standards became effective for
opener models manufactured after April
1, 1982). A garage door opener which
cannot detect an object in the path of a
closing garage door and then automatically stop and reverse, does not meet
current federal safety standards. Using a
garage door opener without these features increases the risk of serious injury
or death.
O
During programming procedure, your
garage door or security gate may open
or close. Make sure that people and objects are clear of the garage door, gate,
etc. that you are programming.
O
Your vehicle’s engine should be turned
off while programming HomeLink Universal Transceiver.
To program your HomeLink Transceiver
to operate a garage door, gate, or entry
door opener, home or office lighting, you
need to be at the same location as the
device. Note: Garage door openers (manufactured after 1996) have “rolling code
protection”. To program a garage door
opener equipped with “rolling code protection”; you will need to use a ladder to
get up to the garage door opener motor to
be able to access the “smart or learn”
program button.
Instruments and controls 2-59
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
grammed device, push and hold the
programmed HomeLink button - releasing when the device begins to activate.
5. If the indicator light on HomeLink
blinks rapidly for two seconds and
then turns solid, HomeLink
has
picked up a “rolling code” garage
door opener signal. You will need to
proceed with the next steps to train
HomeLink , completing the programming may require a ladder and another person for convenience.
SIC3182
1. To begin, push and hold the 2 outer
HomeLink
buttons (to clear the
A
memory) until the indicator light q
blinks (after 20 seconds). Release
both buttons.
2. Position the end of the hand-held
transmitter 1-3 inches away from the
HomeLink surface.
SIC3183
3. Using both hands, simultaneously
push and hold both the HomeLink
button you want to program and the
hand-held transmitter button.
DO NOT release the buttons until step
4 has been completed.
4. Hold down both buttons until the indicator light on HomeLink flashes,
changing from a “slow blink” to a
“rapid blink”. This could take up to 90
seconds. When the indicator light
blinks rapidly, both buttons may be
released. The rapidly flashing light indicates successful programming. To
activate the garage door or other pro-
6. Push and release the program button
located on the garage door opener’s
motor to activate the “training mode”.
This button is usually located near the
antenna wire that hangs down from
the motor. If the wire originates from
under a light lens, you will need to remove the lens to access the training
button.
NOTE:
Once you have pushed and released the
training button on the garage door opener’s motor and the “training light” is lit,
you have 30 seconds in which to perform
step 7. For convenience, use the help of a
2-60 Instruments and controls
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
second person to assist when performing
this step.
7. Quickly (within 30 seconds of pushing
and releasing the garage door opener
training button) and firmly push and
release the HomeLink button you’ve
just programmed. Push and release
the HomeLink button up to three
times to complete the training.
8. Your HomeLink button should now be
programmed. To program the remaining HomeLink buttons for additional door or gate openers, follow
steps 2 through 8 only.
PROGRAMMING HomeLink FOR
CANADIAN CUSTOMERS
while the signal is being transmitted.
Prior to 1992, D.O.C. regulations required
hand-held transmitters to stop transmitting after 2 seconds. To program your
hand-held transmitter to HomeLink , continue to push and hold the HomeLink
button (note steps 2 through 4 under
“Programming HomeLink ”) while you
push and re-push (“cycle”) your handheld transmitter every 2 seconds until the
indicator light flashes rapidly (indicating
successful programming).
NOTE:
NOTE:
Do not repeat step 1 unless you want to
“clear” all previously programmed
HomeLink buttons.
If programming a garage door opener, etc.,
it is advised to unplug the device during
the “cycling” process to prevent possible
damage to the garage door opener components.
If you have any questions or are having
difficulty programming your HomeLink
buttons, please refer to the HomeLink
web site at: www.homelink.com or call
1-800-355-3515.
OPERATING THE HomeLink
UNIVERSAL TRANSCEIVER
HomeLink Universal Transceiver (once
programmed) may now be used to activate the garage door, etc. To operate,
simply push the appropriate programmed
HomeLink Universal Transceiver button.
The red indicator light will illuminate
PROGRAMMING TROUBLEDIAGNOSIS
If HomeLink does not quickly learn the
hand-held transmitter information:
O
replace the hand-held transmitter batteries with new batteries.
O
position the hand-held transmitter
with its battery area facing away from
the HomeLink surface.
O
push and hold both the HomeLink
and hand-held transmitter buttons
without interruption.
O
position the hand-held transmitter 2
to 5 in (50 to 127 mm) away from the
HomeLink surface. Hold the transmitter in that position for up to 15 seconds. If HomeLink
is not programmed within that time, try holding
the transmitter in another position keeping the indicator light in view at
all times.
If you continue to have programming difficulties, please contact the INFINITI Consumer Affairs Department. The phone
numbers are located in the Foreword of
this Owner’s Manual.
Instruments and controls 2-61
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
CLEARING THE PROGRAMMED
INFORMATION
Individual buttons cannot be cleared,
however to clear all programming, push
and hold the two outside buttons and release when the indicator light begins to
flash (in approximately 20 seconds).
REPROGRAMMING A SINGLE
HomeLink BUTTON
To reprogram a HomeLink
Universal
Transceiver button, complete the following.
1. Push and hold the desired HomeLink
button. Do not release the button until
step 4 has been completed.
2. When the indicator light begins to
flash slowly (after 20 seconds), position the hand-held transmitter 2 to 5
in (50 to 127 mm) away from the
HomeLink surface.
3. Push and hold the hand-held transmitter button.
4. The HomeLink indicator light will
flash, first slowly and then rapidly.
When the indicator light begins to
flash rapidly, release both buttons.
The HomeLink Universal Transceiver button has now been reprogrammed. The
new device can be activated by pushing
the HomeLink button that was just programmed. This procedure will not affect
any other programmed HomeLink buttons.
IF YOUR VEHICLE IS STOLEN
plies with FCC and DOC/MDC rules.
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to
operate the device.
DOC: ISTC 1763K1313
FCC I.D.: CB2V67690
If your vehicle is stolen, you should
change the codes of any non-rolling code
device that has been programmed into
HomeLink . Consult the Owner’s Manual
of each device or call the manufacturer or
dealer of those devices for additional information.
When your vehicle is recovered, you will
need to reprogram the HomeLink Universal Transceiver with your new transmitter information.
FCC Notice:
This device complies with FCC rules part
15. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions: (1) This device may not
cause harmful interference and (2) This device must accept any interference that may
be received, including interference that
may cause undesired operation.
The transmitter has been tested and com-
2-62 Instruments and controls
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
3 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
Keys (Intelligent Key) ........................................ 3-2
Removing the mechanical key .................... 3-4
How to use the mechanical key ................. 3-4
Valet hand-off ............................................. 3-4
Doors................................................................ 3-5
Locking with metal key................................ 3-5
Opening and closing windows with the
metal key .................................................... 3-6
Locking with inside lock knob ..................... 3-6
Locking with power door lock switch........... 3-7
Child safety rear door lock .......................... 3-7
Intelligent Key system ...................................... 3-8
Intelligent Key operating range .................. 3-8
Door locks/unlocks precaution ................... 3-9
Intelligent Key operation............................ 3-10
Battery saver system .................................. 3-11
Warning signals ......................................... 3-12
Troubleshooting guide ............................... 3-13
Remote keyless entry system .......................... 3-14
How to use remote keyless entry system ... 3-15
Hood ............................................................... 3-17
Trunk lid ......................................................... 3-18
Trunk lid release switch.............................
Trunk open request switch.........................
Trunk release power cancel switch ............
Interior trunk lid release ............................
Secondary trunk lid release.......................
Fuel-filler door ................................................
Opening the fuel-filler door .......................
Fuel-filler cap .............................................
Tilting telescopic steering column...................
Manual operation ......................................
Electric operation ......................................
Sun visors ......................................................
Mirrors ..........................................................
Inside mirror .............................................
Outside mirrors .........................................
Automatic drive positioner (if so equipped) ....
Entry/exit function (Automatic
Transmission models)................................
Seat synchronization function ..................
Memory storage ........................................
System operation ......................................
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
3-18
3-18
3-19
3-19
3-20
3-20
3-20
3-21
3-22
3-22
3-23
3-23
3-24
3-24
3-25
3-26
3-26
3-27
3-28
3-29
KEYS (INTELLIGENT KEY)
The Intelligent Key uses coded radio signals to communicate with the vehicle.
When the Intelligent Key is near the vehicle, such as in your pocket or bag, it allows the vehicle to be locked, unlocked,
or started. It is also possible to use the
remote control entry function.
CAUTION
O
Be sure to carry the Intelligent Key with
you.
O
Do not leave the vehicle with the Intelligent Key inside.
O The Intelligent Key may not function
correctly depending on the environment or operating conditions. It could
also malfunction if you do not use it
correctly.
O The Intelligent Key transmits faint
radio waves.
In the following situations, the Intelligent Key and remote control entry functions may not operate correctly, and
you may have to use the mechanical
key or:
— when there are strong signals
coming from a television tower,
power station or broadcasting station.
— when you have wireless equipment
or a cellular phone with you.
— when the Intelligent Key is in contact with or covered by a metallic
material.
— when radio wave-type remote control entry is used nearby.
— when the Intelligent Key is placed
near an electric appliance such as a
personal computer.
O The Intelligent Key continually consumes battery power as the key receives a signal to communicate with
the vehicle. Battery life is about 2
years, although it varies depending on
the operating conditions.
O When the Intelligent Key battery is almost discharged, insert the Intelligent
Key into the Intelligent Key port and
start the engine. Replace the discharged battery with a new one as soon
as possible. For more details, see
“Push- button ignition switch” in the
“5. Starting and driving” section.
O Because the steering wheel is locked
electrically, unlocking the steering
wheel with the ignition switch in the
LOCK position is impossible when the
vehicle battery is completely discharged. In this case, unlocking the
steering wheel is also impossible if the
Intelligent Key is inserted into the Intelligent Key port. Pay special attention that the vehicle battery is not completely discharged.
O If the vehicle battery is completely discharged, make sure to recharge the
battery immediately.
O If the Intelligent Key receives strong
signal over an extended period of time,
the battery could quickly run down. Do
not place the Intelligent Key near an
electric appliance such as a television
set or personal computer.
3-2 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
w 06.9.14/V36-D X
WARNING
SPA2315
1. Intelligent Key 2 sets
2. Mechanical key (metal key)
3. Key number plate 1 set
2 sets
O
The Intelligent Key transmits radio
waves that can adversely affect medical
electric equipment.
O
If you have a pacemaker, you should
contact the medical equipment manufacturer to ask if it will be affected by the Intelligent Key signal.
CAUTION
O
Record the key number on the key
number plate/metal tag and keep it in a
safe place (such as your wallet), NOT IN
THE VEHICLE. A key number plate is supplied with your key. Keep the plate in a
safe place. INFINITI does not record key
numbers so it is very important to keep
track of your key number plate.
Be sure to carry the Intelligent Key with
you when driving. The Intelligent Key is a
precision device with a built-in transmitter. To avoid damaging it, please note
the following.
— The Intelligent Key is water resistant;
however, wetting may damage the Intelligent Key. If the Intelligent Key
gets wet, immediately wipe until it is
completely dry.
— Do not bend, drop or strike it against
another object.
— Do not place the Intelligent Key for an
extended period in a place where
temperatures exceed 140°F (60°C).
As many as 4 Intelligent Keys can be used
with one vehicle. For information concerning the purchase and use of additional Intelligent Keys, contact an INFINITI dealer.
— Do not change or modify the Intelligent Key.
It is possible that the Intelligent Key functions become canceled. Contact an
INFINITI dealer.
— Do not place the Intelligent Key near
an electric appliance such as a television set or personal computer.
— Do not use a magnet key holder.
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-3
w 06.9.14/V36-D X
the doors, trunk lid, glove box and trunk
pass-through lid.
— Do not allow the Intelligent Key to
come into contact with water or salt
water, and do not wash it in a
washing machine. This could affect
the system function.
O
See “Doors” and “Trunk lid” later in this
section, “Storage” in the “2. Instruments
and controls” section and “Seats” in the
“1. Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system” section.
If an Intelligent Key is lost or stolen,
INFINITI recommends erasing the ID
code of that Intelligent Key. This will
prevent the Intelligent Key from unauthorized use to unlock the vehicle. For
information regarding the erasing procedure, please contact an INFINITI
dealer.
VALET HAND-OFF
SPA2033
REMOVING THE MECHANICAL KEY
O
Release the lock knob at the back of
the Intelligent Key and remove the mechanical key as illustrated.
O
Reinsert the mechanical key into the
Intelligent Key by pressing it firmly
back into place. Make sure the lock
knob has properly latched, and the
mechanical key cannot move.
HOW TO USE THE MECHANICAL
KEY
Use the mechanical key to lock or unlock
When you have to leave a key with a
valet, give them the Intelligent Key itself
and keep the mechanical key with you to
protect your belongings.
To prevent the glove box and the trunk
from being opened during valet hand-off,
follow the procedures below.
1. Push the trunk release power cancel
switch to the CANCEL side.
2. Remove the mechanical key from the
Intelligent Key.
3. Lock the glove box and the trunk passthrough with the mechanical key.
4. Hand the Intelligent Key to the valet,
keeping the mechanical key in your
pocket or bag for insertion into the Intelligent Key when you retrieve your
vehicle.
3-4 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
DOORS
See “Trunk lid” later in this section,
“Storage” in the “2. Instruments and controls” section and “Seats” in the “1.
Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system” section.
WARNING
O
Always have the doors locked while driving. Along with the use of seat belts, this
provides greater safety in the event of an
accident by helping to prevent persons
from being thrown from the vehicle. This
also helps keep children and others from
unintentionally opening the doors, and
will help keep out intruders.
O
Before opening any door, always look for
and avoid oncoming traffic.
O
Do not leave children unattended inside
the vehicle. They could unknowingly activate switches or controls. Unattended
children could become involved in serious accidents.
SPA2321
LOCKING WITH METAL KEY
The power door lock system allows you to
lock or unlock all doors simultaneously
using the mechanical key.
O Turning the driver’s door key cylinder
1 will lock
to the front of the vehicle q
all doors.
O Turning the driver’s door key cylinder
2 will
once to the rear of the vehicle q
unlock the driver’s door. After returning the key to the neutral position
3 , turning it to the rear again within
q
5 seconds will unlock all doors.
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-5
w 06.9.14/V36-D X
O You can switch the lock system to the
mode that allows you to open all the
doors when the key is turned once.
See “How to use SETTING button” in
the “4. Monitor, climate, audio, phone
and voice recognition systems” section.
To close the windows, turn the driver’s
door key cylinder to the front of the vehicle for longer than 1 second. The door is
locked and the window keeps closing
while turning the key.
OPENING AND CLOSING WINDOWS
WITH THE METAL KEY
The driver’s door key operation also allows you to open and close all door windows.
To open the windows, turn the driver’s
door key cylinder to the rear of the vehicle for longer than 1 second. The door is
unlocked and the window keeps opening
while turning the key.
LOCKING WITH INSIDE LOCK KNOB
This function can also be performed by
pushing and holding the door UNLOCK
button of the Intelligent Key. Refer to “Intelligent remote keyless entry system”
later in this section.
To unlock, move the inside lock knob to
2 .
the unlock position q
SPA1814
To lock the door individually, move the in1
side lock knob to the lock position q
then close the door.
When locking the door without an Intelligent Key, be sure not to leave the Intelligent Key inside the vehicle.
3-6 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
w 06.9.14/V36-D X
To unlock the doors including the fuelfiller door, push the power door lock
2 .
switch to the unlock position q
Lockout protection
SPA2300
LOCKING WITH POWER DOOR
LOCK SWITCH
Operating the power door lock switch will
lock or unlock all the doors. The switches
are located on the driver’s and front passenger’s door armrests.
To lock the doors, push the power door
1 with
lock switch to the lock position q
the driver’s or front passenger’s door
open, then close the door.
When the power door lock switch (driver
or front passenger) is moved to the lock
position with the Intelligent Key in the
port and any door open, all doors will
lock and unlock automatically. With the
Intelligent Key left in the vehicle (not in
the Intelligent Key port) and any door
open, all doors will unlock automatically
and a chime will sound after the door is
closed.
These functions help to prevent the Intelligent Key from being accidentally locked
inside the vehicle.
SPA2301
CHILD SAFETY REAR DOOR LOCK
The child safety rear door lock helps prevent doors from being opened accidentally, especially when small children are
in the vehicle.
When the levers are in the lock position
1 , the rear doors can be opened only from
q
the outside.
To disengage, move the levers to the un2 .
lock position q
When locking the door this way, be certain
not to leave the Intelligent Key inside the
vehicle.
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-7
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM
INTELLIGENT KEY OPERATING
RANGE
lock/unlock functions are shown in the illustration.
The Intelligent Key functions can be used
only when you carry the key with you and
operate it as specified within the inside or
outside operating ranges described as follows.
Front door:
1 31.5 in (80 cm) from the door handle
q
request switch
Trunk:
2 31.5 in (80 cm) from the trunk open req
When the Intelligent Key battery runs
down or where there are strong radio
waves or noise, the operating range may
be narrower or the key may be inoperative.
quest switch
O
If you are too close to the outside
door handles or rear bumper, the Intelligent Key may not operate.
O
If the Intelligent Key is in the operating range, it is possible for anyone
who does not carry the Intelligent Key
to lock/unlock the doors by pushing
the door handle request switch.
SPA2341
Operating range of the door or
trunk lock/unlock function
The outside sensors are located in the
front outside door handles and the trunk.
The operating ranges of the door or trunk
3-8 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
ing left inside the vehicle, make sure
you carry the key with you and then
lock the doors.
SSD0603
SPA2326
Operating range for engine start
function
DOOR LOCKS/UNLOCKS
PRECAUTION
The operating range for starting the engine inside the vehicle is shown in the illustration.
O
Do not push the door handle request
switch with the Intelligent Key held in
your hand as illustrated. The close distance to the door handle will cause
the Intelligent Key system to have difficulty recognizing that the Intelligent
Key is outside the vehicle.
O
After locking with the door handle request switch, verify the doors are securely locked by testing them.
O
To prevent the Intelligent Key from be-
O
If the Intelligent Key is on the instrument panel, rear parcel shelf, inside
the glove box or door pocket, or the
corner of interior compartment, it may
not be possible to start the engine.
O
If the Intelligent Key is near the door
or door glass outside the vehicle, it
may be possible to start the engine.
O
To prevent the Intelligent Key from being left inside the trunk, make sure
you carry the key with you and then
close the trunk.
O
Do not pull the door handle before
pushing the door handle request
switch. The door will be unlocked but
will not open. Release the door handle
once and pull it again to open the
door.
O
The Intelligent Key system (opening/
closing doors with the door handle request switch) can be set to remain inactive. See “Vehicle information and
settings” in the “4. Monitor, climate,
audio, phone and voice recognition
systems” section.
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-9
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
OFF position and make sure you carry
the Intelligent Key with you.*1
2. Close all the doors.*2
3. Push the driver’s or front passenger’s
door handle request switch while carrying the Intelligent Key with you.*3
4. All the doors and fuel-filler door will
lock.
5. The hazard indicator flashes twice and
the outside chime sounds twice.
SPA2316
INTELLIGENT KEY OPERATION
You can lock or unlock the doors without
taking the key out from your pocket or
bag.
SPA2303
When you carry the Intelligent Key with
you, you can lock or unlock all doors by
pushing the door handle request switch
A within the range of operation.
q
Locking doors and fuel-filler door
When you lock or unlock the doors or the
trunk lid, the hazard indicator will flash
and the horn (or the outside chime) will
sound as a confirmation. For details, see
“Setting hazard indicator and horn mode”
later in this section.
1. Move the selector lever to the P position, push the ignition switch to the
*1: Doors will lock with the Intelligent Key
while the ignition switch is in the ACC
or ON position.
*2: Doors will not lock with the Intelligent
Key while any door is open.
*3: Doors will not lock by pushing the
door handle request switch with the
Intelligent Key inside the vehicle.
However, when an Intelligent Key is
inside the vehicle, doors can be
locked with another registered Intelligent Key.
Unlocking doors and fuel-filler
door
1. Push the driver’s or front passenger’s
door handle request switch once while
carrying the Intelligent Key with you.
3-10 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
2. The hazard indicator flashes once and
outside chime sounds once. The corresponding door and the fuel-filler door
will unlock.
Opening trunk lid
3. Push the door handle request switch
again within 5 seconds.
2. The trunk will unlatch. An outside
chime will sound four times.
4. The hazard indicator flashes once and
outside chime sounds once again. All
the doors will unlock.
3. Raise the trunk lid to open the trunk.
Any door should be opened within 1
minute after the door is unlocked. Otherwise, all the doors will be locked again
automatically.
A
1. Push the trunk open request switch q
for more than 1 second.
Lockout protection:
SPA2317
To prevent the Intelligent Key from being
accidentally locked in the trunk, lockout
protection is equipped with the Intelligent
Key system.
When the trunk lid is closed with the Intelligent Key inside the trunk, the outside
buzzer will sound and the trunk will open.
BATTERY SAVER SYSTEM
When all the following conditions are met
for 60 minutes, the battery saver system
will cut off the power supply to prevent
battery discharge.
O
The ignition switch is in the ACC position, and
O
All doors are closed, and
O
The selector lever is in the P (Park) position.
SPA2304
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-11
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
WARNING SIGNALS
To help prevent the vehicle from moving
unexpectedly by erroneous operation of
the Intelligent Key or to help prevent the
vehicle from being stolen, chime or beep
sounds inside and outside the vehicle
and a warning displays in the dot matrix
liquid crystal display.
When a chime or beep sounds or the
warning displays, be sure to check the vehicle and Intelligent Key.
See the troubleshooting guide on the next
page and “Dot matrix liquid crystal display” in the “2. Instruments and controls”
section.
3-12 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE
Symptom
When pushing the ignition switch to
stop the engine
The SHIFT P warning appears on the
display and the inside warning chime
sounds continuously.
When opening the driver’s door to get
out of the vehicle
The inside warning chime sounds continuously.
The NO KEY warning appears on the
display, the outside chime sounds 3
times and the inside warning chime
When closing the door after getting out
sounds for approximately 3 seconds.
of the vehicle
The SHIFT P warning appears on the
display and the outside chime sounds
continuously.
The outside chime sounds for approxiWhen closing the door with the inside
mately 3 seconds and all the doors
lock knob turned to LOCK
unlock.
Possible cause
Action to take
The selector lever is not in the P position.
Shift the selector lever to the P position.
The ignition switch is in the ACC position.
Push the ignition switch to the OFF position.
The Intelligent Key is in the Intelligent
Key port.
Remove the Intelligent Key from the
Intelligent Key port.
The ignition switch is in the ACC or ON
position.
Push the ignition switch to the OFF position.
The ignition switch is in the ACC or OFF Move the selector lever to the P posiposition and the selector lever is not in tion and push the ignition switch to the
the P position.
OFF position.
The Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle
or trunk.
When pushing the door handle request
switch to lock the door
The outside chime sounds for approximately 2 seconds.
The Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle
or trunk.
A door is not closed securely.
The door handle request switch is
pushed before the door is closed.
When closing the trunk lid
The outside chime sounds for approximately 10 seconds and the trunk lid
opens.
The Intelligent Key is inside the trunk.
Carry the Intelligent Key with you.
Carry the Intelligent Key with you.
Close the door securely.
Push the door handle request switch
after the door is closed.
Carry the Intelligent Key with you.
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-13
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM
It is possible to lock/unlock all doors,
fuel-filler door, activate the panic alarm
and open the windows by pushing the
buttons on the Intelligent Key from outside the vehicle.
curely operate the lock and unlock buttons, approach the vehicle to about 3 ft (1
m) from the door.
Before locking the doors, make sure the Intelligent Key is not left in the vehicle.
The LOCK/UNLOCK button on the Intelligent Key can operate at a distance of approximately 33 ft (10 m) from the vehicle.
(The effective distance depends upon the
conditions around the vehicle.)
As many as 4 Intelligent Keys can be used
with one vehicle. For information concerning the purchase and use of additional Intelligent Keys, contact an INFINITI dealer.
The lock and unlock buttons on the Intelligent Key will not operate when:
O
the distance between the Intelligent
Key and the vehicle is over 33 ft (10
m).
O
the Intelligent Key battery runs down.
After locking with the remote keyless
entry function, pull the door handle to
make sure the doors are securely locked.
The LOCK/UNLOCK operating range varies
depending on the environment. To se-
3-14 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
2. Close all the doors.*2
3. Push the LOCK
Intelligent Key.
1 on the
button q
4. All the doors and fuel-filler door will
lock.
5. The hazard indicator flashes twice and
the horn chirps once.
SPA2010
HOW TO USE REMOTE KEYLESS
ENTRY SYSTEM
Locking doors and fuel-filler door
When you lock or unlock the doors or the
trunk lid, the hazard indicator will flash
and the horn (or the outside chime) will
sound as a confirmation. For details, see
“Setting hazard indicator and horn mode”
later in this section.
1. Move the selector lever to the P position, push the ignition switch to the
OFF position and make sure you carry
the Intelligent Key with you.*1
*1: Doors will lock with the Intelligent Key
while the ignition switch is in the ACC
or ON position.
*2: Doors will not lock with the Intelligent
Key while any door is open.
Unlocking doors and fuel-filler
door
2 on
1. Push the UNLOCK
button q
the Intelligent Key once.
2. The hazard indicator flashes once. The
driver’s door and fuel-filler door will
unlock.
3. Push the UNLOCK
button on the
Intelligent Key again within 5 seconds.
4. The hazard indicator flashes once
again. All the doors will unlock.
Any door should be opened within 1
minute after the door is unlocked. Other-
wise all the doors will be locked again automatically.
Opening windows
To open the windows, push the door UNLOCK
button on the Intelligent Key
for about 3 seconds after the door is unlocked.
To stop opening, release the UNLOCK
button.
Window cannot be closed using the Intelligent Key.
The door windows can be opened or
closed by turning the metal key in a door
lock. See “Doors” earlier in this section.
Opening trunk lid
3 on
1. Push the TRUNK
button q
the Intelligent Key for more than 1
second.
2. The trunk will unlatch.
3. Raise the trunk lid to open the trunk.
Using panic alarm
If you are near your vehicle and feel
threatened, you may activate the alarm to
call attention as follows:
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-15
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
4 on the
1. Push the PANIC
button q
Intelligent Key for more than 1 second.
2. The theft warning alarm and headlights will stay on for 25 seconds.
3. The panic alarm stops when:
O It has run for 25 seconds, or
O Any of the buttons on the Intelligent
Key are pushed. (Note: Panic button
should be pushed for more than 1
second.)
Setting hazard indicator and horn
mode
This vehicle is set in hazard indicator and
horn mode when you first receive the vehicle.
In hazard indicator and horn mode, when
1 is pushed, the
the LOCK
button q
hazard indicator flashes twice and the
horn chirps once. When the UNLOCK
2 is pushed, the hazard inbutton q
dicator flashes once.
Hazard indicator and horn mode:
DOOR LOCK
Intelligent Key system
(Using door handle request switch
or trunk open request switch)
Remote keyless entry system
(Using
,
or
button)
DOOR UNLOCK
TRUNK UNLOCK
HAZARD - twice
OUTSIDE CHIME twice
HAZARD - once
OUTSIDE CHIME once
HAZARD - none
OUTSIDE CHIME - 4
times
HAZARD - twice
HORN - once
HAZARD - once
HORN - none
HAZARD - none
HORN - none
Hazard indicator mode:
DOOR LOCK
DOOR UNLOCK
TRUNK UNLOCK
Intelligent Key system
(Using door handle request switch
or trunk open request switch)
HAZARD - twice
HAZARD - none
HAZARD - none
Remote keyless entry system
(Using
,
or
button)
HAZARD - twice
HAZARD - none
HAZARD - none
If horns are not necessary, the system
can be switched to the hazard indicator
mode.
In hazard indicator mode, when the LOCK
button is pushed, the hazard indicator flashes twice. When the UNLOCK
button is pushed, neither the hazard
indicator nor the horn operates.
3-16 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
w 06.9.20/V36-D X
HOOD
Switching procedure:
1
Push the LOCK
and UNLOCK
q
2 buttons on the Intelligent Key siq
multaneously for more than 2 seconds to
switch the mode from one to the other.
When pushing the buttons to set the hazard indicator mode, the hazard indicator
flashes 3 times.
When pushing the buttons to set the hazard indicator and horn mode, the hazard
indicator flashes once and the horn chirps
once.
SPA2318
1
1. Pull the hood lock release handle q
located below the instrument panel;
the hood will then spring up slightly.
2 up at the front of the
2. Pull the lever q
hood with your fingertips and raise
the hood.
3. When closing the hood, slowly close
the hood down to latch both the right
and left locks. Push the hood down to
lock the hood securely into place.
WARNING
O
Make sure the hood is completely closed
and latched before driving. Failure to do
so could cause the hood to fly open and
result in an accident.
O
If you see steam or smoke coming from
the engine compartment, to avoid injury
do not open the hood.
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-17
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
TRUNK LID
WARNING
O
Do not drive with the trunk lid open. This
could allow dangerous exhaust gases to
be drawn into the vehicle. See “Exhaust
gas” in the “5. Starting and driving” section of this manual.
O
Closely supervise children when they are
around cars to prevent them from
playing and becoming locked in the
trunk where they could be seriously injured. Keep the car locked, with the
trunk closed, when not in use, and prevent children’s access to Intelligent
Keys.
SPA2307
TRUNK LID RELEASE SWITCH
A is located
The trunk lid release switch q
on the instrument panel.
To open the trunk lid, push the release
switch down as illustrated. To close, push
the trunk lid down.
You can open the trunk lid with Intelligent
Key. Refer to “Intelligent Key system” or
“Intelligent remote control system” earlier
in this section.
SPA2304
TRUNK OPEN REQUEST SWITCH
The trunk lid can be opened by pushing
the trunk open request switch when the
Intelligent Key is within the operating
range of the trunk lock/unlock function
regardless of the inside lock knob position. See “Intelligent Key system” earlier
in this section.
3-18 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
w 06.9.14/V36-D X
with the mechanical key. Then leave the
vehicle and the Intelligent Key with the
valet and keep the mechanical key with
you.
See “Keys (Intelligent Key)” earlier in this
section.
To connect the power to the trunk lid,
B position.
push the switch to the ON q
SPA2308
TRUNK RELEASE POWER CANCEL
SWITCH
When the switch located inside the glove
A , the power
box is in the OFF position q
to the trunk lid will be canceled and the
trunk lid cannot be opened by the trunk
lid release switch, the trunk open request
switch with the Intelligent Key carried
with you or the TRUNK button on the Intelligent Key.
When you have to leave the vehicle with a
valet and want to keep your belongings
safe in the glove box and the trunk, push
this switch to OFF and lock the glove box
SPA2327
INTERIOR TRUNK LID RELEASE
WARNING
Closely supervise children when they are
around cars to prevent them from playing
and becoming locked in the trunk where they
could be seriously injured. Keep the car
locked, with the trunk lid securely latched,
when not in use, and prevent children’s access to Intelligent Keys.
The interior trunk lid release mechanism
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-19
w 06.9.14/V36-D X
FUEL-FILLER DOOR
provides a means of escape for children
and adults in the event they become
locked inside the trunk.
To open the trunk lid from the inside, pull
1 until the lock rethe release handle q
leases and push up on the trunk lid. The
release lever is made of a material that
glows in the dark after a brief exposure to
ambient light.
The handle is located on the back of the
trunk lid as illustrated.
You can also access the handle through
the trunk pass-through (rear seat armrest).
To open the trunk lid from the rear seat,
pull the release handle towards front of vehicle until the lock releases.
SPA2327
SPA2340
SECONDARY TRUNK LID RELEASE
OPENING THE FUEL-FILLER DOOR
The secondary trunk lid release mechanism allows opening of the trunk lid in
the event of the loss of electrical power
such as a discharged battery.
To open the fuel-filler door, unlock the
fuel-filler door by using one of the following operations, then push the right side
of the door.
1 is located on the back side
The handle q
of the trunk lid inside the trunk compartment.
O Push the door handle request switch
with the Intelligent Key carried with
you.
Access the handle through the trunk
pass-through (rear seat armrest).
O Push the UNLOCK button on the Intelligent Key.
To open the trunk lid from the rear seat,
pull the release handle towards front of vehicle until the lock releases.
O Insert the mechanical key into the
door lock cylinder and turn it to the
rear of the vehicle.
3-20 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
w 06.9.14/V36-D X
O
Push the power door lock switch to
the UNLOCK position.
To lock, close the fuel-filler door securely
and lock all doors by operating the door
handle request switch, the LOCK button
on the Intelligent Key or the mechanical
key.
matically. Continued refueling may
cause fuel overflow, resulting in fuel
spray and possibly a fire.
O
FUEL-FILLER CAP
WARNING
O
O
O
Gasoline is extremely flammable and
highly explosive under certain conditions. You could be burned or seriously
injured if it is misused or mishandled. Always stop engine and do not smoke or
allow open flames or sparks near the vehicle when refueling.
Fuel may be under pressure. Turn the
cap a third of a turn, and wait for any
“hissing” sound to stop to prevent fuel
from spraying out and possibly causing
personal injury. Then remove the cap.
Do not attempt to top off the fuel tank after the fuel pump nozzle shuts off auto-
— Keep the pump nozzle in contact with
the container while you are filling it.
Use only an original equipment type
fuel-filler cap as a replacement. It has a
built-in safety valve needed for proper
operation of the fuel system and emission control system. An incorrect cap
can result in a serious malfunction and
possible injury. It could also cause the
malfunction indicator light to come on.
O
Never pour fuel into the throttle body to
attempt to start your vehicle.
O
Do not fill a portable fuel container in the
vehicle or trailer. Static electricity can
cause an explosion of flammable liquid,
vapor or gas in any vehicle or trailer. To
reduce the risk of serious injury or death
when filling portable fuel containers:
— Always place the container on the
ground when filling.
— Do not use electronic devices when
filling.
— Use only approved portable fuel containers for flammable liquid.
CAUTION
O
If fuel is spilled on the vehicle body,
flush it away with water to avoid paint
damage.
O
Tighten until the fuel-filler cap clicks.
Failure to tighten the fuel-filler cap properly may cause the
malfunction indicator light (MIL) to illuminate. If the
light illuminates because the fuelfiller cap is loose or missing, tighten or
install the cap and continue to drive the
vehicle. The
light should turn off
after a few driving trips. If the
light
does not turn off after a few driving trips,
have the vehicle inspected by an INFINITI
dealer.
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-21
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
TILTING TELESCOPIC STEERING COLUMN
WARNING
SPA2338
The fuel-filler cap is a ratcheting type.
Turn the cap counterclockwise to remove.
To tighten, turn the cap clockwise until
ratcheting clicks are heard.
Put the fuel-filler cap on the cap holder
A while refueling.
q
O
Do not adjust the steering wheel while
driving. You could lose control of your
vehicle and cause an accident.
O
Do not adjust the steering wheel any
closer to you than is necessary for
proper steering operation and comfort.
The driver’s air bag inflates with great
force. If you are unrestrained, leaning
forward, sitting sideways or out of position in any way, you are at greater risk of
injury or death in a crash. You may also
receive serious or fatal injuries from the
air bag if you are up against it when it inflates. Always sit back against the seatback and as far away as practical from
the steering wheel. Always use the seat
belts.
SPA2328
MANUAL OPERATION
Tilt or telescopic operation
1 down and adjust the
Pull the lock lever q
steering wheel up, down, forward or rearward to the desired position.
Push the lock lever up securely to lock
the steering wheel in place.
3-22 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
SUN VISORS
For more information, see “Automatic
drive positioner” later in this section.
SPA2312
ELECTRIC OPERATION
Tilt or telescopic operation
Move the lever to adjust the steering
wheel up or down, forward or rearward to
the desired position.
Entry/Exit function operation (if so
equipped):
The automatic drive positioner system will
make the steering wheel move up
automatically when the driver’s door is
opened with the ignition switch in the
LOCK position. This lets the driver get into
and out of the seat more easily.
SPA2176
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-23
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
MIRRORS
CAUTION
O
Do not store the main sun visor before
storing the extension sun visor.
O
Do not pull the extension sun visor forcedly downward.
1. To block out glare from the front,
1 .
swing down the main sun visor q
2. To block glare from the side, remove
the main sun visor from the center
2 .
mount and swing it to the side q
3
3. Draw out the extension sun visor q
from the main sun visor to block from
further glare.
SPA1792
SPA2143
INSIDE MIRROR
Manual anti-glare type
Adjust the height and the angle of the inside mirror to the desired position.
1 will reduce glare
The night position q
from the headlights of vehicles behind
you at night.
2 when driving in
Use the day position q
daylight hours.
WARNING
Use the night position only when necessary,
because it reduces rear view clarity.
3-24 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
side rearview mirror operate normally and
the indicator light will turn off. Push the
switch again to turn the system on.
Do not allow any object to cover the sensor
C or apply glass cleaner on it. Doing so
q
will reduce the sensitivity of the sensor,
resulting in improper operation.
For HomeLink Universal Transceiver (if so
equipped), see “HomeLink
Universal
Transceiver” in the “2. Instruments and
controls” section.
SPA2253
Automatic anti-glare type
The inside mirror is designed so that it
automatically changes reflection according to the intensity of the headlights
of the following vehicle.
The anti-glare system will be automatically turned on when you turn the ignition
switch to the ON position.
When the system is turned on, the indicaB will illuminate and excessive
tor light q
glare from the headlights of the vehicle
behind you will be reduced.
Push the
SPA2319
OUTSIDE MIRRORS
WARNING
Objects viewed in the outside mirror on the
passenger side are closer than they appear.
Be careful when moving to the right. Using
only this mirror could cause an accident. Use
the inside mirror or glance over your
shoulder to properly judge distances to
other objects.
A to make the inswitch q
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-25
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER (if so
equipped)
Adjusting outside mirrors
The automatic drive positioner system
has three features:
The outside mirror control switch is located on the armrest.
O Entry/exit function (Automatic Transmission models)
The outside mirror will operate only when
the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON position.
O Seat synchonization function
O Memory storage
Turn the switch right or left to select the
1 , then adjust
right or left side mirror q
2 .
using the control switch q
ENTRY/EXIT FUNCTION (Automatic
Transmission models)
Defrosting outside mirrors (if so
equipped)
The outside mirrors will be heated when
the rear window defroster switch is operated.
SPA1829
Foldable outside mirrors
Fold the outside mirror by pushing it toward the rear of the vehicle.
This system is designed so that the driver’s seat and steering column will automatically move when the automatic transmission selector lever is in the P (Park)
position. This allows the driver to get into
and out of the driver’s seat more easily.
Note that the function is set to disabled
as the factory default setting.
The driver’s seat will slide backward and
the steering wheel will move up when the
driver’s door is opened with the ignition
switch in the LOCK position.
The driver’s seat and steering wheel will
return to the previous positions when one
of the following is operated:
O When the ignition switch is pushed to
the ACC position after the driver’s
door is closed.
3-26 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
w 07.2.6/V36-D X
O When the ignition switch is pushed to
the ON position.
switch pressed for more than 10 seconds
to turn on or off the entry/exit function.
The driver’s seat will not return to the previous positions if the seat or steering adjusting switch is operated when the seat
is at the exit position.
The entry/exit function can also be activated or canceled if the 0Lift Steering
Wheel on Exit0 key or 0Slide Driver Seat
Back on Exit0 key is turned to ON or OFF
in the 0Comfort & Conv.0 settings. See
“Vehicle information and settings” in the
“4. Monitor, climate, audio, phone and
voice recognition systems” section.
Cancel or activate entry/exit
function
The selector lever must be in the P (Park)
position with the ignition switch in the
OFF position.
The entry/exit function can be activated
or canceled by pressing and holding the
SET switch for more than 10 seconds.
Activating or canceling the entry/exit
function using the SET switch also activates or cancels the seat synchronization
function.
The indicator lights on the memory
switches (1 and 2) will blink once when
the function is canceled, and the indicator
lights will blink twice when the function is
activated. Note that the indicator lights
may illuminate after 5 seconds while
holding the SET switch. This indicates
readiness for linking the Intelligent Key to
a stored memory position. Keep the SET
Initialize entry/exit function
If the battery cable is disconnected, or if
the fuse opens, the entry/exit function
will not work though this function was set
on before. In such a case, after connecting the battery or replacing with a
new fuse, open and close the driver’s
door more than two times after the ignition switch is turned from the ON position
to the LOCK position. The entry/exit function will be activated.
SPA2322
SEAT SYNCHRONIZATION FUNCTION
The seat synchronization function automatically adjusts the positions of the steering
wheel and outside mirrors when the seat is
adjusted using the power seat switches.
However, the steering wheel and outside
mirrors will not move if the seat is adjusted over the maximum thresholds. The
system considers that the steering wheel
and outside mirror adjustments are not
necessary because the seat may not be
adjusted for the driving position. Note
that the function is set to disabled as the
factory default setting.
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-27
w 07.2.6/V36-D X
The seat synchronization function operates under the following conditions:
Cancel or activate seat
synchronization function
pressed for more than 10 seconds to turn
on or off the seat synchronization function.
O The ignition switch is in the ON position.
For Automatic Transmission models:
For Automatic Transmission models, the
seat synchronization function can also be
activated if both the 0Lift Steering Wheel
on Exit0 key and 0Slide Driver Seat Back
on Exit0 key are turned to ON or canceled
if either the “Lift Steering Wheel on Exit”
key or “Slide Driver Seat Back on Exit” key
or both are turned to OFF in the “Comfort
& Conv.” settings. See “VEHICLE INFORMATION AND SETTINGS” in the “4.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice
recognition systems.
O The selector lever is in the P (Park) position
(Automatic
Transmission
models) or the parking brake is applied (Manual Transmission models).
The selector lever must be in the P (park)
position with the ignition switch in the
OFF position.
If the outside mirrors or the steering
wheel reaches its maximum adjustment,
the function is automatically disabled. Restart the function by selecting a previously stored seat memory position using
the memory switches (1 or 2). An Intelligent Key that was previously linked to the
stored seat memory can also be used to
restart the function.
The parking brake must be applied with
the ignition switch in the OFF position.
If a seat position was not previously
stored in the seat memory, restart the
function by adjusting the steering wheel
and outside mirrors manually for your
best driving position and then drive the
vehicle above 4 MPH (7 km/h).
For Manual Transmission models:
The seat synchronization function can be
activated or canceled by pressing and
holding the SET switch for more than 10
seconds while the ignition switch is in the
OFF position.
Activating or canceling the seat synchronization function using the SET switch
also activates or cancels the entry/exit
function.
The indicator lights on the memory
switches (1 and 2) will blink once when the
function is canceled, and the indicator
lights will blink twice when the function is
activated. Note that the indicator lights may
illuminate after 5 seconds while holding the
SET switch. This indicates readiness for
linking the Intelligent Key to a stored
memory position. Keep the SET switch
MEMORY STORAGE
Two positions for the driver’s seat,
steering column and outside mirrors can
be stored in the automatic drive positioner memory. Follow these procedures
to use the memory system.
1. Automatic transmission models:
Move the selector lever to the P (Park)
position.
Manual transmission models:
Move the shift lever to the 1st or R (Reverse) position and the parking brake
is applied.
3-28 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
w 07.2.6/V36-D X
2. Push the ignition switch to the ON position.
3. Adjust the driver’s seat, steering
column and outside mirrors to the desired positions by manually operating
each adjusting switch. For additional
information, see “Seats” in the
“1. Safety — Seats, seat belts and
supplemental restraint system” section and “Tilting telescopic steering
column” and “Outside mirrors” earlier
in this section.
4. Push the SET switch and, within 5 seconds, push the memory switch (1 or 2)
fully for at least 1 second.
The indicator light for the pushed
memory switch will stay on for approximately 5 seconds after pushing
the switch.
If memory is stored in the same
memory switch, the previous memory
will be deleted.
For manual transmission models, the
memory positions can be stored even
when the engine is running. In this case,
move the shift lever to the N (Neutral) position and apply the parking brake. Then,
repeat steps 2 through 4.
Linking Intelligent Key to a stored
memory position
dicator light will stay on for approximately 5 seconds.
The Intelligent Key can be linked to a
stored memory position with the following
procedure.
1. Follow the steps for storing a memory
position.
2. While the indicator light for the
memory switch being set is illuminated for 5 seconds, push the
button on the Intelligent Key. If
the indicator light blinks, the Intelligent Key is linked to that memory setting.
Push the ignition switch to the OFF position and press the
button on the Intelligent Key. The driver’s seat, steering
wheel and outside mirrors will move to
the memorized position.
O If the battery cable is disconnected, or
if the fuse opens, the memory will be
canceled. In this case, reset the desired position using the previous procedure.
O If optional Intelligent Keys are added
to your vehicle, the memory storage
procedure to switch 1 or 2 and linking
Intelligent Key procedure to a stored
memory position should be performed
again for each Intelligent Key. For additional Intelligent Key information,
see “Key (Intelligent Key)” earlier in
this section.
Selecting the memorized position
1. Automatic transmission models:
Move the selector lever to the P (Park)
position.
Confirming memory storage
Manual transmission models:
O Push the ignition switch to the ON position and push the SET switch. If the
main memory has not been stored, the
indicator light will come on for approximately 0.5 seconds. When the
memory has stored in position, the in-
Move the shift lever to the 1st or R (Reverse) position and apply the parking
brake.
2. Use one of the following methods to
move the driver’s seat, the outside
mirrors and the steering wheel.
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-29
w 07.2.6/V36-D X
O Turn the ignition switch to the ON
position and push the memory
switch (1 or 2) fully for at least 1
second.
O When the adjusting switch for the driver’s seat and steering column is
turned on while the automatic drive
positioner is operating.
O Within 45 seconds of opening the
driver’s door, push the memory
switch (1 or 2) fully for at least 1
second.
O When the memory switch 1 or 2 is not
pushed for at least 1 second.
The driver’s seat, steering column and
outside mirrors will move to the
memorized position with the indicator
light flashing, and then the light will
stay on for approximately 5 seconds.
For manual transmission models, the
memory positions can be selected even
when the engine is running. In this case,
move the shift lever to the N (Neutral) position and apply the parking brake. Then,
perform step 2.
SYSTEM OPERATION
The automatic drive positioner system will
not work or will stop operating under the
following conditions:
O When the vehicle speed is above 4
MPH (7 km/h).
O When the seat, steering column and
outside mirrors have already been
moved to the memorized position.
O When no position is stored in the
memory switch.
O When the parking brake is released. —
MT models
O When the speed is above 4 MPH (7
km/h) while the parking brake is applied. — MT models
To restart the drive positioner system,
move the parking brake to off and on.
O When the driver’s door remains open
for more than 45 seconds and the ignition switch is not in the ON position.
O The seat synchronization function is
automatically disabled if the outside
mirrors or steering wheel reaches its
maximum adjustment.
O The seat synchronization function will
not move if the seat is adjusted over
one of the following maximum thresholds:
— Seat sliding: 3.0 inch (76 mm)
— Seatback reclining: 9.1 degrees
— Seat lifer (rear side): 0.8 inch (20
mm)
O When the engine is started while moving the automatic drive positioner.
O When the AT selector lever is moved
from the P (Park) position to any other
position. (However, it will not be canceled if the switch is pushed while the
seat and steering column are returning
to the previous positions (entry/exit
function).)
3-30 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
w 07.2.6/V36-D X
MEMO
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-31
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
4 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice
recognition systems
Safety note....................................................... 4-2
Center multi-function control panel................... 4-3
How to use INFINITI controller ..................... 4-4
How to use touch screen (models with
navigation system) ..................................... 4-5
Start-up screen (models with navigation
system) ....................................................... 4-7
Start menu .................................................. 4-7
How to select menus on the screen ............ 4-8
Vehicle information and settings ...................... 4-9
How to use “STATUS” button ...................... 4-9
How to use “BRIGHTNESS CONTROL AND
DISPLAY ON/OFF” button............................. 4-9
How to use “INFO” button........................... 4-9
How to use “SETTING” button .................... 4-13
How to use “AUX” button.......................... 4-20
Rearview monitor (if so equipped)................... 4-21
How to read the displayed lines................ 4-22
How to park with predicted course lines ... 4-22
How to adjust the screen .......................... 4-24
Operating tips ........................................... 4-24
Ventilators ...................................................... 4-25
Automatic climate control ............................... 4-25
Automatic climate control (TYPE A) ............ 4-27
Automatic climate control (TYPE B) ............
In-cabin microfilter.....................................
Servicing climate control............................
Audio system..................................................
Audio operation precautions .....................
FM-AM-SAT radio with compact disc (CD)
changer.....................................................
CompactFlash (CF) player operation
(models with navigation system) ..............
“MUSIC BOX” hard-disk drive audio
system (models with navigation system) ...
CD/CF (CompactFlash) care and cleaning...
Steering-wheel-mounted controls for
audio.........................................................
Antenna.....................................................
Auxiliary input jacks .................................
Car phone or CB radio ....................................
Bluetooth Hands-Free Phone System (if so
equipped) .......................................................
Models with navigation system..................
Models without navigation system ............
Speaker adaptation (SA) mode ..................
Troubleshooting guide ..............................
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
4-29
4-31
4-31
4-32
4-32
4-40
4-44
4-46
4-54
4-56
4-57
4-57
4-58
4-58
4-61
4-68
4-77
4-80
INFINITI Voice Recognition System (models
with navigation system) ................................. 4-81
Command list ............................................ 4-81
Using the system ...................................... 4-89
Voice command learning function ............. 4-92
Troubleshooting guide .............................. 4-96
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
SAFETY NOTE
WARNING
O
Do not disassemble or modify this
system. If you do, it may result in accidents, fire, or electric shock.
O
Do not use this system if you notice any
abnormality, such as a frozen screen or
lack of sound. Continued use of the
system may result in accident, fire or
electric shock.
O
In case you notice any foreign object in
the system hardware, spill liquid on it,
or notice smoke or smell coming from it,
stop using the system immediately and
contact your nearest INFINITI dealer. Ignoring such conditions may lead to accidents, fire, or electric shock.
O
Park the vehicle in a safe location and
apply the parking brake to view the images on the front center display screen
using devices connected to the auxiliary
input jacks.
−4°F (−20°C) and above 158°F (70°C)]. Operating this system under these conditions
may result in system malfunctions.
Do not attempt to operate the system in
extreme temperature conditions [below
4-2 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
CENTER MULTI-FUNCTION CONTROL PANEL
SAA1523
With navigation system
1. “STATUS” status display button (P.4-9)
8. “AMzFMzSAT” band selector button
(P.4-32)
2, 6, 7, 10, 11. For navigation system control buttons (Refer to the
9. “DISCzAUX” selector button
separate
Navigation
(P.4-20, P.4-32)
System Owner’s Manual.)
12. “INFO” vehicle and navigation infor3. INFINITI controller (P.4-4)
mation button (P.4-9)
4. “PHONE”
Bluetooth
Hands-Free
Phone System button (P.4-58)
13. “SETTING” button (P.4-13)
5. “
OFF” brightness control and display ON/OFF button (P.4-9)
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-3
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
SAA1524
1.
2.
3.
4.
Without navigation system
“AUX” button (P.4-20)
When you use this system, make sure the
engine is running.
“RADIO AMzFM” band selector button
If you use the system with the engine not
(P.4-32)
running (ignition ON or ACC) for a long
INFINITI controller (P.4-4)
time, it will use up all the battery power,
and the engine will not start.
“
OFF” brightness control and display ON/OFF button (P.4-9)
With navigation system
SAA1541
HOW TO USE INFINITI CONTROLLER
Choose an item on the display using the
2 (or additional
main directional buttons q
6 with navigation
directional buttons q
3 , and push the
system) or center dial q
1 for operation.
ENTER button q
7. “STATUS” status display button (P.4-9)
4 before
If you push the BACK button q
the setup is completed, the setup will be
canceled and/or the display will return to
the previous screen. This button can also
be used to delete characters that have
been input.
8. “SETTING” button (P.4-13)
After the setup is completed, push the
5. “INFO” vehicle information button
(P.4-9)
6. “DISC” selector button (P.4-32)
4-4 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
or sharp object. If the glass breaks, do
not touch the liquid crystalline material,
which contains a small amount of mercury. In case of contact with skin, wash
immediately with soap and water.
SAA1508
Without navigation system
4 and return to the preBACK button q
vious screen.
5 functions, refer
For the VOICE button q
to the separate Navigation System Owner’s Manual.
HOW TO USE TOUCH SCREEN
(models with navigation system)
CAUTION
O
The glass screen on the liquid crystal
display may break if it is hit with a hard
O
To clean the display, never use a rough
cloth, alcohol, benzine, thinner or any
kind of solvent or paper towel with a
chemical cleaning agent. They will
scratch or deteriorate the panel.
O
Do not splash any liquid such as water
or car fragrance on the display. Contact
with liquid will cause the system to malfunction.
To ensure safe driving, some functions
cannot be operated while driving.
The on-screen functions that are not available while driving will be “grayed out” or
muted.
Park the vehicle in a safe location and
then operate the navigation system.
SAA1542
Touch screen operation
With this system, the same operations as
those for the INFINITI controller are possible using the touch screen operation.
Selecting the item:
Touch an item to select. When you select
the “Audio” settings, touch the “Audio”
1 on the screen.
area q
2 button to return the
Touch the BACK q
previous screen.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-5
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
O
Lowercase:
Shows lowercase characters.
O
Space:
Inserts a space.
O
Symbols:
Shows symbols such as the question
mark (?).
O
SAA1543
Inputting characters:
1 or − q
2 button to adjust
Touch the + q
the settings.
1 .
Touch the letter or number q
3 or DOWN q
4 button to
Touch the UP q
move to the previous or next page.
Deletes the last character that has
been input with one touch. Push and
hold the button to delete all of the
characters.
SAA1617
Adjusting the item:
O
Uppercase:
Shows uppercase characters.
OK:
Completes character inputs.
There are some options available when inputting characters.
O
Delete:
Touch screen maintenance
If you clean the display screen, use a dry,
soft cloth. If additional cleaning is necessary, use a small amount of neutral detergent with a soft cloth. Never spray the
screen with water or detergent. Dampen
the cloth first, and then wipe the screen.
4-6 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
SAA1454
START-UP SCREEN (models with
navigation system)
When you push the ignition switch to the
ACC or ON position, the SYSTEM
START-UP warning is displayed on the
screen. When you read and agree with the
warning, push the ENTER button.
If you do not push the ENTER button, you
will not be able to use the NAVI system.
To proceed to the NAVI system, refer to
the separate Navigation System Owner’s
Manual.
SAA1525
SAA1591
START MENU
Available items
The start menu can be displayed using
the ENTER switch on the steering-wheelmounted controls.
Destination/Route:
1. While the map (if equipped) or status
screen is displayed, push and hold the
ENTER switch until the “Menu Options” screen appears.
2. Highlight the preferred item tilting the
ENTER switch up or down, and then
push the ENTER switch.
These items are for the navigation
system. If your vehicle is equipped with
the navigation system, see the separate
Navigation System Owner’s Manual for
details.
Information:
Displays the information screen. It is the
same screen that appears when you push
the INFO button.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-7
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
Settings:
2. Menu Selections:
Displays the settings screen. It is the
same screen that appears when you push
the SETTING button.
Shows the options to choose within
that menu screen. (i.e. Auto Interior Illumination, etc.)
3. UP/DOWN Movement indicator:
Shows that the INFINITI controller may
be used to move UP/DOWN on the
screen and select more options.
4. Screen Count:
Shows the number of menu selections
available for that screen (i.e. 1/9).
SAA1510
HOW TO SELECT MENUS ON THE
SCREEN
Vehicle functions are viewed on the display screen in menus. Whenever a menu
selection is made or menu item is highlighted, different areas on the screen provide you with important information. See
the following for details.
5. Footer/Information Line:
Provides more information (if available) about the menu selection currently highlighted. (i.e.
Cabin
lighting when unlocking doors.)
1. Header:
Shows the path used to get to the current screen. (i.e. push SETTING button
> choose “Comfort & Conv.” menu
item.)
4-8 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
VEHICLE INFORMATION AND SETTINGS
HOW TO USE “STATUS” BUTTON
HOW TO USE “INFO” BUTTON
To display the status of the audio, climate
control system, fuel consumption and
navigation system (if so equipped), push
the STATUS button. The following information will appear when the STATUS button is pushed.
The display screen shows vehicle and
navigation (if so equipped) information for
your convenience.
Audio → Audio and Climate control
system → Audio and fuel consumption →
Audio and Navigation system (if so
equipped) → Audio
HOW TO USE “BRIGHTNESS
CONTROL AND DISPLAY ON/OFF”
BUTTON
The information shown on the screen
should be a guide to determine the condition of the vehicle. See the following for
details.
With navigation system
SAA1545
Vehicle information display
Push the “
OFF” button to switch the
display brightness to the daytime mode
or the nighttime mode, and to adjust the
display brightness using the INFINITI controller while the indicator is displayed at
the bottom of the screen.
1. Push the INFO button on the control
panel.
The screens as illustrated will appear.
The display brightness can also be adjusted using the brightness UP button (+)
or brightness DOWN button (−) (models
with navigation system).
3. After viewing or adjusting the information on the following screens, push
the BACK button to return to the INFORMATION menu.
Push the “
OFF” button for more than
2 seconds to turn the display off. Push
the button again to turn the display on.
For the items “Traffic Info.”, “Where am
I?”, “GPS Satellite Info.” and “Navigation
Version”, refer to the separate Naviga-
2. Choose an item using the INFINITI controller and push the ENTER button.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-9
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
Without navigation system
tion System Owner’s Manual.
SAA1511
SAA1546
SAA1547
“Fuel Economy” information
Reset-to-Reset period.
The distance to empty, average fuel
economy and current fuel economy
(shown on the right side bar) will be displayed for reference.
The unit can be converted between “US”
and “Metric”. See “How to use SETTING
button” later in this section.
To reset the Average Fuel Economy, use
the INFINITI controller to highlight the
“Reset” key and push the ENTER button.
If the “View” key is highlighted with the
INFINITI controller and the ENTER button
is pushed, the average fuel consumption
history will be displayed in graph form
along with the average for the previous
The fuel economy information may differ
from the information displayed on the dot
matrix liquid crystal display. This is due
to the timing difference in updating the
information and does not indicate a malfunction.
4-10 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
INFO., push the BACK button.
Maintenance information display cannot
be operated when the vehicle is moving.
Stop the vehicle in a safe place to see the
information.
The unit can be converted between “US”
and “Metric”. See “How to use SETTING
button” later in this section.
SAA1554
“Maintenance” information
To set the maintenance interval for Reminders 1 to 4, choose an item using the
INFINITI controller and push the ENTER
button.
You can also set to display a message to
remind you that the maintenance needs
to be performed.
The following example shows how to set
Reminder 1. Use the same steps to set the
other maintenance information.
SAA1555
1. Reset the driving distance to the new
maintenance schedule.
2. Set the interval (mileage) of the maintenance schedule. To determine the
recommended maintenance interval,
refer to your “INFINITI Service and
Maintenance Guide”.
3. To display the reminder automatically
when the set trip distance is reached,
highlight the “Interval Reminder” key
with the INFINITI controller and push
the ENTER button.
4. To return the display to MAINTENANCE
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-11
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
The “MAINTENANCE NOTICE” screen is
displayed each time the ignition switch is
pushed to the ON position until one of the
following conditions is met:
O
“Reset Distance” is selected.
O
“Interval Reminder” is set to OFF.
O
the maintenance interval is set again.
SAA1611
The Reminder will be automatically displayed as shown when both of the following conditions are met:
O
the vehicle is driven the set distance
and the ignition switch is pushed to
the LOCK position.
O
the ignition switch is pushed to the
ACC or ON position the next time you
drive the vehicle after the set value
has been reached.
To return to the previous display after the
“MAINTENANCE NOTICE” screen is displayed, push the BACK button.
SAA1592
“Voice Recognition” information
(models with navigation system)
If you use the voice recognition system
for the first time or you do not know how
to operate it, you can display the voice
command list or user guide for confirmation. See “INFINITI VOICE RECOGNITION
SYSTEM” later in this section for the details.
Command List:
Displays a list of voice commands that
the system can recognize.
4-12 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
User Guide:
Displays a simplified operation manual of
the voice recognition system and how to
use the voice commands.
With navigation system
SAA1556
Without navigation system
SAA1514
HOW TO USE “SETTING” BUTTON
The display as illustrated will appear
when the SETTING button is pushed.
For navigation settings, refer to the separate Navigation System Owner’s Manual.
To show the “Comfort & Conv.” item,
push the ignition switch to the ON position.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-13
w 06.9.29/V36-D X
SAA1557
SAA1559
With navigation system
SAA1560
“Audio” settings
Precision Phased Audio (if so equipped):
“Display” settings
The following display will appear when
pushing the SETTING button, selecting the
“Audio” key with the INFINITI controller
and pushing the ENTER button.
When this item is turned to ON, super
high pitch sound and super low pitch
sound are emphasized and midrange
sound is played naturally.
The following display will appear when
pushing the SETTING button, selecting
“Display” key with the INFINITI controller
and pushing the ENTER button.
Speed Sensitive Vol.:
Display:
Sound volume is increased according to
the vehicle speed. Choose the effect level
from OFF (0) to 5.
To turn off the screen, push the ENTER
button and turn the “Display” indicator
off. The other method is to push the
“
OFF” button for more than 2 seconds.
Bass/Treble/Balance/Fade:
To adjust the speaker tone quality and
sound balance, select the “Bass”,
“Treble”, “Balance” or “Fade” key and adjust it with the INFINITI controller.
These items can also be adjusted by
pushing and turning the AUDIO knob.
When any mode button is pushed with
the screen off, the screen turns on for fur-
4-14 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
ther operation. The screen will turn off automatically 5 seconds after the operation
is finished.
To turn on the screen, set this item to the
ON position, or push the “
OFF”
button.
Brightness/Contrast/Background Color:
To adjust the brightness and contrast of
the screen, select the “Brightness” or
“Contrast” key and push the ENTER
button.
Then, you can adjust the brightness to
“Darker” or “Brighter”, and the contrast
to “Lower” or “Higher” using the multifunction controller.
For information on the “Background
Color” key, refer to the separate Navigation System Owner’s Manual.
“Navigation” settings (if so
equipped)
For the details of “Navigation” settings,
refer to the separate Navigation System
Owner’s Manual.
SAA1561
SAA1562
“Volume and Beeps” settings
(models with navigation system)
knob while voice guidance is being announced.
The following display will appear when
pushing the SETTING button, selecting the
“Volume and Beeps” key with the INFINITI
controller and pushing the ENTER button.
Guidance Voice:
Guidance Vol.:
To adjust the guidance voice volume
louder or softer, select the “Guidance Volume” and adjust it with the INFINITI controller.
When this item is turned to ON, you will
hear voice guidance in the navigation (if
so equipped) operation or in other operations.
Ringer Vol./Incoming Call/Outgoing Call:
For the details of these items, refer to
“Bluetooth Hands-Free Phone System”
later in this section.
You can also adjust the guidance voice
volume by turning the VOLUME control
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-15
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
Button Beeps:
“Phone” settings (if so equipped)
When this item is turned to ON, you will
hear a beep sound when you use a
button.
For the details of “Phone” settings, refer
to
“Bluetooth
Hands-Free
Phone
System” later in this section.
SAA1612
“Beeps” settings (models without
navigation system)
The following display will appear when
pushing the SETTING button, selecting the
“Beeps” key with the INFINITI controller
and pushing the ENTER button.
Button Beeps:
When this item is turned to ON, you will
hear a beep sound when you use a
button.
4-16 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
Clock Format:
Choose either the 12-hour clock display or
the 24-hour clock display.
Offset Adjust:
Adjust the time by increasing or decreasing per minute.
Daylight Saving Time:
Turn this item to ON for daylight saving
time application.
Time Zone:
SAA1563
“Clock” settings (if so equipped)
The following display will appear when
pushing the SETTING button, selecting the
“Clock” key with the INFINITI controller
and pushing the ENTER button.
Choose the time zone from the following
O
Pacific
O
Mountain
O
Central
O
Eastern
O
Atlantic
On-screen Clock:
O
Newfoundland
When this item is turned to ON, a clock is
always displayed in the upper right corner
of the screen.
O
Hawaii
O
Aleutian
This clock will indicate the time almost
exactly because it is always adjusted by
the GPS system.
O
Alaska
SAA1564
“Comfort & Conv.” settings
The following display will appear when
pushing the SETTING button, selecting the
“Comfort & Conv.” key with the INFINITI
controller and pushing the ENTER button.
This key does not appear on the display
until the ignition switch is pushed to the
ON position.
Auto Interior Illumination:
When this item is turned to ON, the
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-17
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
cording to the vehicle speed.
Slide Driver Seat Back on Exit:
Selective Door Unlock:
When this item is turned to ON, the driver’s seat moves backward for easy exit if
the ignition switch is in the OFF position
and the driver’s door is opened. After getting into the vehicle and pushing the ignition switch to the ACC position, the driver’s seat moves to the previous position.
When this item is turned to ON, only the
driver’s door is unlocked first after the
door unlock operation. When the door
handle request switch on the driver’s or
front passenger’s side door is pushed to
be unlocked, only the corresponding door
is unlocked first. All the doors can be unlocked if the door unlock operation is performed again within 5 seconds.
SAA1565
interior lights will illuminate if any door is
unlocked.
Auto Headlights Sensitivity:
Adjust the sensitivity of the automatic
headlights higher (right) or lower (left).
Auto Headlights Off Delay:
Choose the duration of the automatic
headlight off timer from 0, 30, 45, 60, 90,
120, 150 and 180 second periods.
Speed Sensing Wiper Interval:
When this item is turned to ON, the wiper
interval is adjusted automatically ac-
When this item is turned to OFF, all the
doors will be unlocked after the door unlock operation is performed once.
Return All Settings to Default:
Select this item, push the ENTER button
and choose “YES” if you want to return all
settings to the default.
Intelligent Key Lock/Unlock:
When this item is turned to ON, door
lock/unlock function by pushing the door
handle request switch will be activated.
Lift Steering Wheel on Exit:
When this item is turned to ON, the steering wheel moves upward for easy exit if
the ignition switch is in the OFF position
and the driver’s door is opened. After getting into the vehicle and pushing the ignition switch to the ACC position, the steering wheel moves to the previous position.
4-18 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
O
Minimize Voice Feedback
When this item is turned to ON, vocal
feedback is reduced if the voice recognition system is activated.
O
push the ENTER button. Select “US”
(Mile, °F, MPG) or “Metric” (km, °C,
L/100 km) for your favorite display appearance.
Voice Command Learning
Select this item to have the INFINITI
Voice Recognition system learn the user’s voice. The system can memorize
the voices of up to three persons.
For the details of this function, refer to
“INFINITI
VOICE
RECOGNITION
SYSTEM” later in this section.
SAA1566
“Others” settings (models with
navigation system)
The following display will appear when
pushing the SETTING button, selecting the
“Others” key with the INFINITI controller
and pushing the ENTER button.
Voice Recognition:
O
O
User Guide
Select this item to learn the operation
flow of the INFINITI Voice Recognition
system with the help of a step-by-step
guide.
Language/Units:
O
Select Language
Choose the “Select Language” key
and push the ENTER button. Select
“English” or “Français” for your favorite display appearance.
Command List
Displays the voice command list on
the screen.
O
Select Units
Choose the “Select Units” key and
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-19
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
Select Units:
Choose the “Select Units” key and push
the ENTER button. From the following display, select “US” (Mile, °F, MPG) or “Metric” (km, °C, L/100 km) for your favorite
display appearance.
SAA1092
“Language/Units” settings
(models without navigation
system)
The following display will appear when
pushing the SETTING button, selecting the
“Language/Units” key with the INFINITI
controller and pushing the ENTER button.
Select Language:
Choose the “Select Language” key and
push the ENTER button. From the following
display,
select
“English”,
“Français” or “Español” for your favorite
display appearance.
SAA1567
HOW TO USE “AUX” BUTTON
Images being played can be switched to
the center display if NTSC compatible devices are connected to the auxiliary input
jacks in the center console. (See “Auxiliary input jacks” later in this section.)
Push the AUX button to perform
switching.
The above display will appear when the
“Setting” key is selected using the
INFINITI controller.
4-20 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
REARVIEW MONITOR (if so equipped)
Display Mode:
Choose the display mode from the following:
O
Normal
O
Wide
O
Cinema
When the selector lever is shifted into the
R (Reverse) position, the monitor display
shows view to the rear of the vehicle.
The system is designed as an aid to the
driver in detecting large stationary objects
to help avoid damaging the vehicle. The
system will not detect small objects
below the bumper and may not detect objects close to the bumper or on the
ground.
WARNING
O
The rear view camera is a convenience
but it is not a substitute for proper backing up. Always turn and check that it is
safe to do so before backing up. Always
back up slowly.
O
Objects viewed in the RearView Monitor
differ from actual distance because a
wide-angle lens is used. Objects in the
RearView Monitor will appear visually
opposite than when viewed in the rear
view and outside mirrors.
O
Make sure that the trunk is securely
closed when backing up.
O
Do not put anything on the rear view
camera. The rear view camera is installed on the trunk finisher.
O
When washing the vehicle with highpressure water, be sure not to spray it
around the camera. Otherwise, water
may enter the camera unit causing water
condensation on the lens, a malfunction,
fire or an electric shock.
O
Do not strike the camera. It is a precision
instrument. Otherwise, it may malfunction or cause damage resulting in a fire
or an electric shock.
CAUTION
There is a plastic cover over the camera. Do
not scratch the cover when cleaning dirt or
snow from the cover.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-21
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
When the steering wheel is turned with
the selector lever in the R (Reverse) posiB is distion, the predicted course line q
played on the monitor.
lines may be displayed incorrectly. If
this occurs, please perform the following procedures:
HOW TO PARK WITH PREDICTED
COURSE LINES
— Turn the steering wheel from lock to
lock while the engine is running.
— Drive the vehicle on a straight road for
more than 5 minutes.
WARNING
SAA1099
O
Always turn and check that it is safe to
do so before backing up. Always back up
slowly.
O
Use the displayed lines as a reference.
The lines are highly affected by the number of occupants, fuel level, vehicle position, road condition and road grade.
O
If the tires are replaced with different
sized tires, the predicted course line
may be displayed incorrectly.
O
On a snow-covered or slippery road,
there may be a difference between the
predicted course line and the actual
course line.
O
If the battery is disconnected or becomes discharged, the predicted course
HOW TO READ THE DISPLAYED
LINES
Guiding lines which indicate the vehicle
width and distances to objects with referA are displayed
ence to the bumper line q
on the monitor.
They are indicated as reference distances
to objects. Displayed lines indicate dis1 , 3 feet (yellow) q
2 ,
tances 1.5 feet (red) q
3 and 10 feet (green) q
4
7 feet (green) q
[0.5 m (red), 1 m (yellow), 2 m (green) and
3 m (green)] from the lower part of the
A .
bumper line q
O
When the steering wheel is turned with
the ignition switch in the ACC position,
the predicted course lines may be displayed incorrectly.
O
The distance guide line and the vehicle
width line should be used as a reference
only when the vehicle is on a level paved
surface. The distance viewed on the
monitor is for reference only and may be
different than the actual distance between the vehicle and displayed objects.
O
When backing-up the vehicle up a hill
objects viewed in the monitor are further
than they appear. When backing-up the
vehicle down a hill objects viewed in the
monitor are closer than they appear. Use
the inside mirror or glance over your
4-22 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
shoulder to properly judge distances to
other objects.
The vehicle width and predicted course
lines are wider than the actual width and
course.
SAA1137
1. Visually check that the parking space
is safe before parking your vehicle.
B will appear when the steering
lines q
wheel is turned to the right or left.
2. The rear view of the vehicle is displayed on the screen as illustrated
when the selector lever is moved to
the R position. The predicted course
3. Back up the vehicle to the parking
C while referring to the prespace q
dicted course lines. Do not rely completely on the information displayed
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-23
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
on the screen. Confirm the safety of
the vehicle by visually checking
around the vehicle.
4. Maneuver the steering wheel to make
D parallel to
the vehicle width lines q
C while referring to
the parking space q
the predicted course lines.
5. When the vehicle is parked in the
space completely, move the selector
lever to the P position and apply the
parking brake.
mode. However, the radio can be
heard.
O
O
HOW TO ADJUST THE SCREEN
To adjust the Display ON/OFF, Brightness,
Tint, Color, Contrast and Black Level of
the RearView Monitor, push the SETTING
button with the RearView Monitor on, select the item key and adjust the level
using the INFINITI controller.
Do not adjust the Brightness, Contrast,
Tint and Color of the RearView Monitor
while the vehicle is moving. Make sure
the parking brake is firmly applied and
the engine is not running.
OPERATING TIPS
O
When the selector lever is shifted to R,
the monitor screen automatically
changes to the RearView Monitor
It may take some time until the RearView Monitor or the normal screen is
displayed after the selector lever has
been shifted to R from another position or to another position from R. Objects may be distorted momentarily
until the RearView Monitor screen is
displayed completely.
When the temperature is extremely
high or low, the screen may not clearly
display objects. This is not a malfunction.
O
When strong light directly enters the
camera, objects may not be displayed
clearly. This is not a malfunction.
O
Vertical lines may be seen in objects
on the screen. This is due to strong reflected light from the bumper. This is
not a malfunction.
O
The screen may flicker under fluorescent light. This is not a malfunction.
O
The colors of objects on the RearView
Monitor may differ somewhat from
those of the actual object.
O
Objects on the monitor may not be
clear in a dark place or at night. This
is not a malfunction.
O
If dirt, rain or snow attaches to the
camera, the RearView Monitor may not
clearly display objects. Clean the camera.
O
Do not use alcohol, benzine or thinner
to clean the camera. This will cause
discoloration. To clean the camera,
wipe with a cloth dampened with diluted mild cleaning agent and then
wipe with a dry cloth.
O
Do not damage the camera as the
monitor screen may be adversely affected.
O
Do not use wax on the camera
window. Wipe off any wax with a clean
cloth dampened with mild detergent
diluted with water.
4-24 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
VENTILATORS
AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL
WARNING
Center ventilators
SAA1499
O
The air conditioner cooling function operates only when the engine is running.
O
Do not leave children or adults who
would normally require the support of
others alone in your vehicle. Pets should
not be left alone either. On hot, sunny
days, temperatures in a closed vehicle
could quickly become high enough to
cause severe or possibly fatal injuries to
people or animals.
O
Do not use the recirculation mode for
long periods as it may cause the interior
air to become stale and the windows to
fog up.
SAA0564B
Rear
Open or close, and adjust the air flow direction of ventilators.
: This symbol indicates that the
vents are closed.
: This symbol indicates that the
vents are open.
Start the engine and operate the automatic climate control system.
When the “STATUS” button is pushed, the
automatic climate control status screen
will appear. See “How to use STATUS button” earlier in this section.
Side ventilators
SAA1500
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-25
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
SAA1520
You can individually set the driver and
front passenger side temperature using
each temperature control button.
Type A
1. “AUTO” automatic climate control ON
button/Temperature
control
dial
(driver side)
2. “A/C” air conditioner ON/OFF button
3. “
” fan speed increase button
4. “
” front defroster button
5. “MODE”
button
manual
air
flow
SAA1527
7. “OFF” button
system
8. “
for
climate
control
” fan speed decrease button
9. “
” rear window defroster button
(See “REAR WINDOW AND OUTSIDE
MIRROR DEFROSTER SWITCH” in the
“2. Instruments and controls” section.)
control
10. “
button
6. “DUAL”
zone
control
ON/OFF
button/Temperature control dial (passenger side)
4-26 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
” intake air control
AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL
(TYPE A)
button. When the “DUAL” button is
pushed or the passenger side temperature control button is turned, the
DUAL indicator will come on. To turn
off the passenger side temperature
control, push the “DUAL” button.
Automatic operation
Cooling and/or dehumidified heating
(AUTO):
This mode may be used all year round.
The system works automatically to control
the
inside
temperature,
air
flow
distribution and fan speed after the
preferred temperature is set manually.
1. Push the “AUTO” button on. (The indicator on the button will illuminate and
AUTO will be displayed.)
2. Turn the temperature control dial
(driver side) to set the desired temperature.
Adjust the temperature to about 75°F
(24°C) for normal operation.
O
The temperature of the passenger
compartment will be maintained automatically. Air flow distribution and fan
speed will also be controlled automatically.
3. You can individually set driver and
front passenger side temperature
using each temperature control
4. To turn off the climate control system,
push the “OFF” button.
A visible mist may be seen coming from
the ventilators in hot, humid conditions
as the air is cooled rapidly. This does not
indicate a malfunction.
the system may not work properly.
O
Not recommended if windows fog up.
Dehumidified defrosting or defogging:
1. Push the “
” front defroster
button. (The indicator light on the button will come on.)
2. Turn the temperature control dial to
set the desired temperature.
O
To quickly remove ice from the outside
of the windows, push the fan speed
increase button “
” and set it to
the maximum position.
The air conditioner does not activate in
this mode. When you need to heat only,
use this mode.
O
As soon as possible after the windshield is clean, push the “AUTO”
button to return to the auto mode.
1. Push the “A/C” button. (The A/C indicator will turn off.)
O
When the “
” front defroster
button is pushed, the air conditioner
will automatically be turned on at outside temperatures above 23°F (−5°C)
to defog the windshield, and the air
recirculate mode will automatically be
turned off.
Heating (A/C OFF):
2. Turn the temperature control dial to
set the desired temperature.
O
O
The temperature of the passenger
compartment will be maintained automatically. Air flow distribution and fan
speed are also controlled automatically.
Outside air is drawn into the passenger compartment to improve the
defogging performance.
Do not set the temperature lower than
the outside air temperature. Otherwise
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-27
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
Manual operation
Fan speed control:
Push the fan speed increase “
” or
decrease “
” buttons to manually
control the fan speed.
Push the “AUTO” button to return to automatic control of the fan speed.
Air recirculation:
” for
take air control button “
about 2 seconds. The indicator lights
(both air recirculation and outside air circulation sides) will flash twice, and then
the intake air will be controlled automatically.
Air flow control:
Pushing the “MODE” manual air flow control button selects the air outlet to:
Push the intake air control button
“
” to recirculate interior air inside the vehicle. The indicator light on the
“
” side will come on.
:
Air flows from center and side
ventilators.
:
Air flows from center and side
ventilators and foot outlets.
The air recirculation mode cannot be
activated when the air conditioner is in the
front defrosting mode “
”.
:
Air flows mainly from foot outlets.
:
Air flows from defroster and foot
outlets.
Outside air circulation:
Push the intake air control button
“
” to draw outside air into the
passenger compartment. The indicator
light on the “
” side will come on.
To turn the system off:
Push the OFF button.
Automatic intake air control:
In the AUTO mode, the intake air will be
controlled automatically. To manually control the intake air, push the intake air
control button “
”. To return to
the automatic control mode, push the in-
4-28 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
AUTO will be displayed.)
2. Use the temperature control dial to set
the desired temperature.
Adjust the temperature to about 75°F
(24°C) for normal operation.
O
Type B
1. “AUTO” automatic climate control ON
button/Temperature control dial
2. Air flow control button
3. “
” Fan speed control dial
4. “OFF” button
5. “
” front defroster button
6. “
” rear window defroster button
(See “REAR WINDOW AND OUTSIDE
MIRROR DEFROSTER SWITCH” in the
“2. Instruments and controls” section.)
7. “
” intake air control button
SAA1526
The temperature of the passenger
compartment will be maintained automatically. Air flow distribution and fan
speed will also be controlled automatically.
3. To turn off the climate control system,
push the “OFF” button.
AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL
(TYPE B)
A visible mist may be seen coming from
the ventilators in hot, humid conditions
as the air is cooled rapidly. This does not
indicate a malfunction.
Automatic operation
Heating (A/C OFF):
Cooling and/or dehumidified heating
(AUTO):
The air conditioner does not activate in
this mode. When you need to heat only,
use this mode.
This mode may be used all year round.
The system works automatically to control
the
inside
temperature,
air
flow
distribution and fan speed after the
preferred temperature is set manually.
1. Push the “AUTO” button on. (The indicator on the button will illuminate and
1. Push the “A/C” button. (The A/C indicator will turn off.)
2. Turn the temperature control dial to
set the desired temperature.
O
The temperature of the passenger
compartment will be maintained auto-
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-29
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
matically. Air flow distribution and fan
speed are also controlled automatically.
O
O
Do not set the temperature lower than
the outside air temperature. Otherwise
the system may not work properly.
Manual operation
Not recommended if windows fog up.
Turn the “
” fan speed control dial to
manually control the fan speed.
Dehumidified defrosting or defogging:
1. Push the “
” front defroster
button. (The indicator light on the button will come on.)
2. Turn the temperature control dial to
set the desired temperature.
O
Outside air is drawn into the passenger compartment to improve the
defogging performance.
To quickly remove ice from the outside
of the windows, turn the “
” fan
speed control dial and set it to the
maximum position.
O
As soon as possible after the windshield is clean, push the “AUTO”
button to return to the auto mode.
O
When the “
” front defroster
button is pushed, the air conditioner
will automatically be turned on at outside temperatures above 23°F (−5°C)
to defog the windshield, and the air
recirculate mode will automatically be
turned off.
Fan speed control:
Push the “AUTO” button to return to automatic control of the fan speed.
Air recirculation:
Push the intake air control button
“
” to recirculate interior air inside the vehicle. The indicator light on the
“
” side will come on.
The air recirculation mode cannot be
activated when the air conditioner is in the
front defrosting mode “
”.
Outside air circulation
Push the intake air control button
“
” to draw outside air into the
passenger compartment. The indicator
light on the “
” side will come on.
trol the intake air, push the intake air
”. To return to
control button “
the automatic control mode, push the intake air control button “
” for
about 2 seconds. The indicator lights
(both air recirculation and outside air circulation sides) will flash twice, and then
the intake air will be controlled automatically.
Air flow control:
Pushing an air flow control button manually controls the air flow and selects the
air outlet to the following settings.
:
Air flows from center and side
ventilators.
:
Air flows from center and side
ventilators and foot outlets.
:
Air flows mainly from foot outlets.
:
Air flows from defroster and foot
outlets.
To turn the system off:
Push the OFF button.
Automatic intake air control
In the AUTO mode, the intake air will be
controlled automatically. To manually con-
4-30 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
The filter should be replaced if air flow is
extremely decreased or when windows fog
up easily when operating heater or air conditioning system.
SERVICING CLIMATE CONTROL
SIC2768
A on the instrument
The sunload sensor q
panel helps maintain a constant temperature. Do not put anything on or around
this sensor.
IN-CABIN MICROFILTER
The climate control system is equipped
with an in-cabin microfilter which collects
dirt, pollen, dust, etc. To make sure the
air conditioner heats, defogs, and ventilates efficiently, replace the filter in accordance with the maintenance schedule in
the INFINITI Service and Maintenance
Guide. To replace the filter, contact an
INFINITI dealer.
The climate control system in your
INFINITI is charged with a refrigerant designed with the environment in mind. This
refrigerant will not harm the earth’s ozone
layer. However, special charging equipment and lubricant are required when servicing your INFINITI air conditioner. Using
improper refrigerants or lubricants will
cause severe damage to your climate control system. See “Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants” in the “9. Technical and consumer information” for climate control system refrigerant and
lubricant recommendations.
WARNING
The system contains refrigerant under high
pressure. To avoid personal injury, any air
conditioner service should be done only by
an experienced technician with the proper
equipment.
Your INFINITI dealer will be able to service
your environmentally friendly climate control system.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-31
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
AUDIO SYSTEM
AUDIO OPERATION PRECAUTIONS
Radio
Push the ignition switch to the ACC or ON
position and push the “RADIO” button to
turn on the radio. If you listen to the radio
with the engine not running, the ignition
switch should be pushed to the ACC position.
Radio reception is affected by station signal strength, distance from radio transmitter, buildings, bridges, mountains and
other external influences. Intermittent
changes in reception quality normally are
caused by these external influences.
moving vehicle, even when the finest
equipment is used. These characteristics
are completely normal in a given reception area, and do not indicate any malfunction in your INFINITI radio system.
Reception conditions will constantly
change because of vehicle movement.
Buildings, terrain, signal distance and interference from other vehicles can work
against ideal reception. Described below
are some of the factors that can affect
your radio reception.
Using a cellular phone in or near the vehicle may influence radio reception
quality.
Radio reception:
Your INFINITI radio system is equipped
with state-of-the-art electronic circuits to
enhance radio reception. These circuits
are designed to extend reception range,
and to enhance the quality of that reception.
However there are some general characteristics of both FM and AM radio signals
that can affect radio reception quality in a
SAA0306
FM radio reception:
Range: FM range is normally limited to 25
to 30 miles (40 to 48 km), with monaural
(single channel) FM having slightly more
range than stereo FM. External influences
may sometimes interfere with FM station
reception even if the FM station is within
25 miles (40 km). The strength of the FM
signal is directly related to the distance
between the transmitter and receiver. FM
signals follow a line-of-sight path, exhibiting many of the same characteristics as
light. For example they will reflect off objects.
4-32 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
Fade and drift: As your vehicle moves
away from a station transmitter, the signals will tend to fade and/or drift.
Static and flutter: During signal interference from buildings, large hills or due to
antenna position, usually in conjunction
with increased distance from the station
transmitter, static or flutter can be heard.
This can be reduced by lowering the
treble setting to reduce the treble response.
Multipath reception: Because of the reflective characteristics of FM signals, direct and reflected signals reach the receiver at the same time. The signals may
cancel each other, resulting in momentary
flutter or loss of sound.
AM radio reception:
AM signals, because of their low frequency, can bend around objects and
skip along the ground. In addition, the
signals can be bounced off the ionosphere and bent back to earth. Because
of these characteristics. AM signals are
also subject to interference as they travel
from transmitter to receiver.
Fading: Occurs while the vehicle is
passing through freeway underpasses or
in areas with many tall buildings. It can
also occur for several seconds during
ionospheric turbulence even in areas
where no obstacles exist.
Static: Caused by thunderstorms, electrical power lines, electric signs and even
traffic lights.
Satellite radio reception:
When the satellite radio (if so equipped)
is first installed or the battery has been
replaced, the satellite radio may not work
properly. This is not a malfunction. Wait
more than 10 minutes with satellite radio
ON for satellite radio to receive all of the
necessary data.
The satellite radio mode will be skipped
unless an optional satellite receiver and
antenna are installed and an XM or
SIRIUSTM satellite radio service subscription is active. Satellite radio is not available in Alaska, Hawaii and Guam.
Satellite radio performance may be affected if cargo carried on the roof blocks
the satellite radio signal.
If possible, do not put cargo near the satellite antenna.
SAA0480
Compact Disc (CD) player
O
Do not force a compact disc into the CD
insert slot. This could damage the CD
and/or CD changer/player.
O
Trying to load a CD with the CD door
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-33
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
closed could damage the CD and/or CD
changer.
O
During cold weather or rainy days, the
player may malfunction due to the humidity. If this occurs, remove the CD
and dehumidify or ventilate the player
completely.
O
The player may skip while driving on
rough roads.
O
The CD player sometimes cannot function when the passenger compartment
temperature is extremely high. Decrease the temperature before use.
O
O
O
O
Only use high quality 4.7 in (12 cm)
round discs that have the “COMPACT
disc DIGITAL AUDIO” logo on the disc
or packaging.
Do not expose the CD to direct sunlight.
CDs that are of poor quality, dirty,
scratched, covered with fingerprints, or
that have pin holes may not work properly.
The following CDs may not work properly:
- Copy control compact discs (CCCD)
- Recordable compact discs (CD-R)
the CD by pushing the EJECT button,
and after a short time reinsert the CD.
The CD can be played when the temperature of the player returns to
normal.
- Rewritable compact discs (CD-RW)
O
Do not use the following CDs as they
may cause the CD player to malfunction.
UNPLAYABLE:
- 3.1 in (8 cm) discs
The file is unplayable in this audio system (only MP3 or WMA CD).
- CDs that are not round
O
O
- CDs with a paper label
CompactFlash (CF) player
- CDs that are warped, scratched, or
have abnormal edges
O
This audio system can only play prerecorded CDs. It has no capabilities to
record or burn CDs.
Do not force a CF card into the slot. This
could damage the CF card and/or
player.
O
During cold weather or rainy days, the
player may malfunction due to the humidity. If this occurs, remove the CF
card and dehumidify or ventilate the
player completely.
O
The CF player sometimes cannot function when the passenger compartment
temperature is extremely high. Decrease the temperature before use.
O
Do not expose a CF card to direct sunlight.
O
Confirm that a CF card is inserted correctly.
If the CD cannot be played, one of the
following messages will be displayed.
CHECK DISC:
- Confirm that the CD is inserted correctly (the label side is facing up,
etc.).
- Confirm that the CD is not bent or
warped and it is free of scratches.
PUSH EJECT:
This is an error due to the temperature
inside the player is too high. Remove
4-34 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
Compact Disc (CD)/CompactFlash
(CF) with MP3 or WMA
music files. The size and quality of a
compressed digital audio file is determined by the bit rate used when encoding the file.
Explanation of terms:
O
O
O
MP3 — MP3 is short for Moving Pictures Experts Group Audio Layer 3.
MP3 is the most well known compressed digital audio file format. This
format allows for near “CD quality”
sound, but at a fraction of the size of
normal audio files. MP3 conversion of
an audio track from CD/CF can reduce
the file size by approximately 10:1
ratio (Sampling: 44.1 kHz, Bit rate: 128
kbps) with virtually no perceptible loss
in quality. MP3 compression removes
the redundant and irrelevant parts of a
sound signal that the human ear
doesn’t hear.
WMA — Windows Media Audio (WMA)
is a compressed audio format created
by Microsoft as an alternative to MP3.
The WMA codec offers greater file
compression than the MP3 codec, enabling storage of more digital audio
tracks in the same amount of space
when compared to MP3s at the same
level of quality.
Bit rate — Bit rate denotes the number
of bits per second used by a digital
O
Sampling frequency — Sampling frequency is the rate at which the
samples of a signal are converted
from analog to digital (A/D conversion)
per second.
O
Multisession — Multisession is one of
the methods for writing data to media.
Writing data once to the media is
called a single session, and writing
more than once is called a multisession.
O
ID3/WMA Tag — The ID3/WMA tag is
the part of the encoded MP3 or WMA
file that contains information about
the digital music file such as song
title, artist, album title, encoding bit
rate, track time duration, etc. ID3 tag
information is displayed on the
Album/Artist/Track title line on the
display.
*
Windows and Windows Media are
registered trademarks or trademarks
of Microsoft Corporation in the United
States of America and/or other countries.
CompactFlash is a trademark of SanDisk
Corporation in the United States of
America and/or other countries.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-35
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
taining MP3/WMA files are not shown
in the display.
O
If there is a file in the top level of the
disc, “Root Folder” is displayed.
O
The playback order is the order in
which the files were written by the
writing software, so the files might not
play in the desired order.
SAA1025
Playback order:
Music playback order of the CD/CF with
MP3 or WMA is as illustrated above.
O
The folder names of folders not con-
4-36 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
Specification chart:
Supported media
CD, CD-R, CD-RW, CF
Supported file systems
CD, CD-R, CD-RW:
ISO9660 LEVEL1, ISO9660 LEVEL2, Romeo, Joliet
* ISO9660 Level 3 (packet writing) is not supported.
CompactFlash card:
FAT12, FAT16, FAT32
Version
MP3
Supported versions*1
MPEG1, MPEG2, MPEG2.5
Sampling frequency 8 kHz - 48 kHz
Bit rate
8 kbps - 320 kbps, VBR*4
Version
WMA7, WMA8, WMA9
*1 Files created with a combination of 48
kHz sampling frequency and 64 kbps
bit rate cannot be played.
*2 Protected WMA files (DRM) cannot be
played.
*3 Available codes depend on what kind
of media, versions and information are
going to be displayed.
*4 When VBR files are played, the playback time may not be displayed correctly.
WMA*2 Sampling frequency 32 kHz - 48 kHz
Bit rate
Tag information (Song title and Artist name)
Folder levels
Text character number limitation
Displayable character codes*3
32 kbps - 192 kbps, VBR*4
ID3 tag VER1.0, VER1.1, VER2.2, VER2.3, VER2.4 (MP3 only)
WMA tag (WMA only)
With navigation system:
Folder levels: 8, Folders: 255 (including root folder), Files:
512 (Max. 255 files for one folder)
Without navigation system:
Folder levels: 8, Folders and files: 999 (Max. 255 files for
one folder)
With navigation system: 128 characters
Without navigation system: 64 characters
01: ASCII, 02: ISO-8859-1, 03: UNICODE (UTF-16 BOM Big
Endian), 04: UNICODE (UTF-16 Non-BOM Big Endian), 05:
UNICODE (UTF-8), 06: UNICODE (Non-UTF-16 BOM Little Endian)
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-37
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
Troubleshooting guide:
Symptom
Cause and Countermeasure
Check if the CD/CF was inserted correctly.
Check if the CD/CF is scratched or dirty.
Check if there is condensation inside the player, and if there is, wait until the condensation is gone (about 1 hour) before using
the player.
If there is a temperature increase error, the player will play correctly after it returns to the normal temperature.
Cannot play
If there is a mixture of music CD files (CD-DA data) and MP3/WMA files on a CD, only the music CD files (CD-DA data) will be
played.
Files with extensions other than “.MP3”, “.WMA”, “.mp3” or “.wma” cannot be played. In addition, the character codes and
number of characters for folder names and file names should be in compliance with the specifications.
Check if the disc or the file is generated in an irregular format. This may occur depending on the variation or the setting of
MP3/WMA writing applications or other text editing applications.
Check if the finalization process, such as session close and disc close, is done for the disc.
Check if the CD/CF is protected by copyright.
Poor sound quality
Check if the CD/CF is scratched or dirty.
It takes a relatively long time before the music starts playing.
If there are many folder or file levels on the MP3/WMA CD/CF, or if it is a multisession disc, some time may be required before
the music starts playing.
Music cuts off or skips
The writing software and hardware combination might not match, or the writing speed, writing depth, writing width, etc., might
not match the specifications. Try using the slowest writing speed.
Skipping with high bit rate files
Skipping may occur with large quantities of data, such as for high bit rate data.
Move immediately to the next
song when playing.
When a non-MP3/WMA file has been given an extension of “.MP3”, “.WMA”, “.mp3” or “.wma”, or when play is prohibited by
copyright protection, the player will skip to the next song.
The songs do not play back in the
desired order.
The playback order is the order in which the files were written by the writing software, so the files might not play in the desired order.
4-38 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
tor / AUDIO control knob
7. CD EJECT button
8. Radio station and CD selector buttons
9. CD LOAD button (if so equipped)
10. CompactFlash (CF) card slot (models
with navigation system) (located
above the ashtray)
No satellite radio reception is available
unless optional satellite receiver and antenna are installed and an XM or SIRIUSTM satellite radio service subscription
is active.
SAA1532
1. ONzOFF/VOLUME control knob
2. Radio PRESET A-B-C selector button
3. Radio SCAN (tuning)/CD RPT (repeat)
play button
4. Radio CAT (category)/REW (rewind)
button for SEEK/TRACK
5. FF (fast forward) button for
SEEK/TRACK
6. Radio tuning / MP3/WMA folder selec-
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-39
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
FM-AM-SAT RADIO WITH COMPACT
DISC (CD) CHANGER
For all operation precautions, see “Audio
operation precautions” earlier in this section.
The satellite radio mode will be skipped unless an optional satellite receiver and antenna are installed and an XM or SIRIUSTM
satellite radio service subscription is active.
Satellite radio is not available in Alaska, Hawaii and Guam.
With navigation system
1. AMzFMzSAT band select button
2. DISCzAUX button
SAA1533
SAA1504
Without navigation system
1. RADIO AMzFM band select button
2. DISC button
It may take some time to receive the activation signal after subscribing to the XMT or
SIRIUS satellite radio provider. After receiving the activation signal, an available
channel list will be automatically updated in
the radio. For XMT, push the ignition switch
from LOCK to ACC to update the channel list.
Audio main operation
Head unit:
The radio has an FM diversity reception
system, which employs two antennas
printed on the rear window. This system
automatically switches to the antenna
which is receiving less interference.
The auto loudness circuit enhances the
low and high frequency ranges automati-
4-40 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
cally in both radio reception and CD playback.
ONzOFF/Volume control:
O
Speed Sensitive Volume
For more details, see “Vehicle information
and settings” earlier in this section.
Push the ignition switch to the ACC or ON
position,
and
then
push
the
ONzOFF/VOLUME control knob while the
system is off to call up the mode (radio,
CD or AUX) which was playing immediately before the system was turned off.
While the system is on, pushing the
ONzOFF/VOLUME control knob turns the
system off.
FM-AM-SAT radio operation
Turn the ONzOFF/VOLUME control knob to
adjust the volume.
(With satellite radio)
Adjusting tone quality and speaker
balance:
To adjust Bass, Treble, Balance and Fade,
push the Audio control knob. When the
display shows the setting you want to
change (Bass, Treble, Balance and Fade),
rotate the Audio control knob to set the
desired setting. For the other setting
methods, refer to “How to use SETTING
button” earlier in this section.
This vehicle has some sound effect functions as follows (if so equipped):
O
Precision Phased Audio
or
radio (FM/AM/SAT)
band select:
Pushing the radio band select button will
change the band as follows:
If another audio source is playing when
the radio band select button is turned to
ON, the audio source will automatically
be turned off and the last radio station
played will come on.
When the stereo broadcast signal is
weak, the radio will automatically change
from stereo to monaural reception.
TUNE (Tuning):
O
(Without satellite radio)
For AM and FM radio
Turn the TUNE/FOLDER
manual tuning.
AM → FM → AM
O
AM → FM → SAT (XM/SR) → AM
The satellite radio mode will be skipped unless an optional satellite receiver and antenna are installed and an XM or SIRIUSTM
satellite radio service subscription is active.
Satellite radio is not available in Alaska, Hawaii and Guam.
for
For satellite radio
Turn the TUNE/FOLDER knob to seek
channels from all of the categories
when any CAT is not selected.
When the radio band select button is
pushed while the ignition switch is in the
ACC or ON position, the radio will come
on at the station last played.
The last station/channel played will also
come on when the ONzOFF/VOL control
knob is pushed to ON.
knob
SEEK tuning/CATEGORY
(CAT):
O
For AM and FM radio
Push the SEEKzCAT or TRACK button
or
to tune from low to high
or high to low frequencies and to stop
at the next broadcasting station.
O
For satellite radio
Push the SEEKzCAT or TRACK button
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-41
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
or
to tune to the first
channel of the next or previous category.
During satellite radio reception, the following notices will be displayed under
certain conditions.
O
NO SIGNAL (No signal is received
while the SAT tuner is connected.)
O
OFF AIR (Broadcasting signed off)
O
ANTENNA ERROR (Antenna connection
error)
O
LOADING(XM)/ACQUIRING(SR) (When
the initial setting is performed)
O
UPDATING(XM)/CALL XXXX(SR) (When
the satellite radio subscription is not
active)
O
INVALID CH (Invalid channel is received.)
SCAN tuning:
Push the SCAN tuning button to tune from
low to high frequencies and stops at each
broadcasting station for 5 seconds. Pushing the button again during this 5 seconds period will stop SCAN tuning and
the radio will remain tuned to that station.
If the SCAN tuning button is not pushed
within 5 seconds, SCAN tuning moves to
the next station.
PRESET select:
Push the PRESET select button to go to
the next PRESET. After choosing from the
PRESET A, B or C, you can select the desired channel using the INFINITI controller
1
or pushing the station preset buttons q
6 .
to q
1 to q
6 Station memory operations:
q
Six stations/channels can be set for
PRESET A, B and C. The PRESET A, B and C
function allows you to store a combination of FM, AM and SAT (if so equipped)
stations for easy access.
1. Choose preset channel A, B or C using
the preset select button.
2. Tune to the desired station using the
SEEK, SCAN or TUNE button.
3. Select the desired station/channel
and keep pushing any of the desired
1 to q
6 until a
station preset buttons q
beep sound is heard. (The radio mutes
when the select button is pushed.)
4. The channel indicator will then come
on and the sound will resume. Memorizing is now complete.
5. Other buttons can be set in the same
manner.
If the battery cable is disconnected, or if
the fuse blows, the radio memory will be
erased. In that case, reset the desired
stations.
Text:
When the “Text” key is selected with the
INFINITI controller on the display and then
the ENTER button is pushed while the satellite radio is being played, the text information will be displayed on the screen.
O
CH Name
O
Category
O
Name
O
Title
O
Other
Compact Disc (CD) changer
operation
Push the ignition switch to the ACC or ON
position, push the LOAD button (if so
equipped) and insert the compact disc
into the slot with the label side facing up.
4-42 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
The compact disc will be guided automatically into the slot and start playing.
loaded, the system will turn on and the
compact disc will start to play.
O
Song title
When the DISC button is pushed with the
compact disc loaded and the radio
playing, the radio will automatically be
turned off and the compact disc will start
to play.
O
Album title
After loading the disc, the number of
tracks on the disc and the play time will
appear on the display.
O
Artist
If the radio is already operating, it will automatically turn off and the compact disc
will play.
If the system has been turned off while
the compact disc was playing, pushing
the ONzOFF/VOL control knob will start
the compact disc.
CD LOAD (if so equipped):
To insert a CD in the CD changer, push
the LOAD button for less than 1.5 seconds. Select the loading position by
1 to
pushing the CD insert select button q
6 , then insert the CD.
q
To insert 6 CDs to the CD changer in succession, push the LOAD button for more
than 1.5 seconds.
The inserted slot numbers will illuminate
on the display.
DISC or
PLAY:
When the DISC (CD play) button is pushed
with the system off and the compact disc
When the DISC button is pushed while a
CD is loaded and a medium is played using the auxiliary input jacks, you can
toggle back and forth between CD and
medium.
Text:
When the “Text” key is selected in the
screen using the INFINITI controller and
then the ENTER button is pushed while
the CD is being played, the music information below will be displayed on the
screen.
CD:
O
Disc title
O
Track title
CD with MP3 or WMA:
O
Folder title
O
File title
FF (Fast Forward), REW
(Rewind)/APS (Automatic
Program Search) FF, APS
REW:
When the
(fast forward) or
(rewind) button is pushed for more than 1.5
seconds while the compact disc is being
played, the compact disc will play while
fast forwarding or rewinding. When the
button is released, the compact disc will
return to normal play speed.
When the
or
button is pushed
for less than 1.5 seconds while the compact disc is being played, the next track
or the beginning of the current track on
the CD will be played.
The INFINITI controller can also be used to
select tracks when a CD is being played.
CD PLAY selection:
To change to another CD already loaded
into the player, push the CD play select
1 to q
6 or choose a disc disbuttons q
played on the screen using the INFINITI
controller.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-43
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
REPEAT (RPT):
When the RPT button is pushed while the
compact disc is played, the play pattern
can be changed as follows:
(CD)
removed, it will be pulled back into the slot
to protect it.
(CD with MP3 or WMA)
CD EJECT:
When the CD EJECT button is pushed with
the compact disc loaded, the compact
disc will be ejected.
To eject the discs selected by the CD select button, push the EJECT button for less
than 1.5 seconds.
SAA1568
COMPACTFLASH (CF) PLAYER
OPERATION (models with
navigation system)
To eject all the discs, push the EJECT button for more than 1.5 seconds.
Push the ignition switch to the ACC or ON
A and insert a
position, remove the cover q
B into the slot. Then, push the
CF card q
button repeatedly to switch to the
CompactFlash mode.
When this button is pushed while the
compact disc is being played, the compact disc will come out and the system
will turn off.
If the system has been turned off while
the CompactFlash card was playing,
pushing the ONzOFF/VOL control knob will
start the CompactFlash card.
If the compact disc comes out and is not
4-44 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
PLAY:
When the DISC button is pushed with the
system off and the CF card inserted, the
system will turn on.
If another audio source is playing and a
CF card is inserted, push the DISC button
repeatedly until the center display
changes to the CompactFlash mode.
Text:
When the “Text” key is selected on the
screen using the INFINITI controller and
then the ENTER button is pushed while
the CF is being played, the music information below will be displayed on the
screen.
FF (Fast Forward), REW
(Rewind)/APS (Automatic
Program Search) FF, APS
REW:
When the
(fast forward) or
(rewind) button is pushed for more than 1.5
seconds while the CompactFlash card is
being played, the CompactFlash card will
play while fast forwarding or rewinding.
When the button is released, the CompactFlash card will return to the normal
play speed.
When the
or
button is pushed
for less than 1.5 seconds while the CompactFlash card is being played, the next
track or the beginning of the current track
on the CF will be played.
O
Folder title
O
Song title
O
Track title
The INFINITI controller can also be used to
select tracks when the CompactFlash card
is being played.
O
Album Title
Folder selection:
O
Artist
To change to another folder in the CompactFlash card, turn the MP3/WMA folder
selector or choose a folder displayed on
the screen using the INFINITI controller.
REPEAT (RPT):
When the RPT button is pushed while the
CompactFlash card is played, the play
pattern can be changed as follows:
CF EJECT:
When the knob next to the CF slot is
pushed with the CF card inserted, the CF
card will be ejected.
Messages:
The following messages will be displayed
under certain conditions.
O
Reading Compact Flash (The system is
reading the CF card inserted in the
slot.)
O
No Compact Flash card (A CF card is
not inserted in the slot.)
O
Compact Flash read error (The system
cannot read a CF card.)
O
Unplayable file (The system cannot
play a music file.)
O
No audio file (The CF card inserted in
the slot or its folder does not contain
any music files.)
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-45
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
Compatibility with other media:
If a commercially available CompactFlash
adapter is inserted into the slot, your
memory media can also be used.
“MUSIC BOX” HARD-DISK DRIVE
AUDIO SYSTEM (models with
navigation system)
NOTE:
The “Music Box” hard-disk drive audio
system can store songs from CDs being
played. The system has a 9.3 gigabyte
(GB) storage capacity and can record up
to 200 hours (approximately 2,900
songs).
If the hard disk needs to be replaced due to
a malfunction, all stored music data will be
erased.
The following CDs can be recorded in the
“MUSIC BOX” hard-disk drive audio
system.
O
CDs without MP3/WMA files
O
Hybrid Compact Disc Digital Audio (Hybrid CD-DA) specification in Super
Audio CDs
O
Compact Disc Digital Audio (CD-DA)
specification in CD-Extras
O
First session of multisession disc
The optional in-trunk CD changer cannot
record music to the hard disk.
Extreme temperature conditions [below
−4°F (−20°C) and above 158°F (70°C)] could
affect the performance of the hard disk.
4-46 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
perform recording under the following
conditions.
O
There is not enough space in the hard
disk
O
The number of albums reaches the
maximum of 500.
O
The number of tracks reaches the
maximum of 3,000.
Automatic recording:
SAA1613
Recording songs
1. Operate the audio system to play a
CD. For the details of playing CDs,
refer to “Compact Disc (CD) changer
operation” earlier in this section.
2. Select the “REC” key using the INFINITI
controller and push the ENTER button.
The system starts recording the track
being played and “REC CD” appears on
the screen.
If the title information of the track being
recorded is stored either in the hard-disk
drive or in the CD, the title is automati-
SAA1614
cally displayed on the screen. For title acquisition from the hard-disk drive, music
recognition technology and related data
are provided by Gracenote .
To view the details of the track, select the
Text key by touching the screen or using
the INFINITI controller. The track name
and album title are displayed on the
screen.
If the “Automatic Recording” function is
turned to ON, recording starts when a CD
is inserted. (See ““Music Box” settings”
later in this section.)
Stopping recording:
To stop the recording, select the STOP
button by touching the screen or using
the INFINITI controller.
If the CD is ejected, the audio system is
turned off or the ignition switch is pushed
to the OFF position, the recording also
stops.
If a track is not recorded successfully due
to skipping sounds, the
mark is displayed behind the track number.
The “Music Box” audio system cannot
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-47
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
VOICE RECOGNITION SYSTEM” later in
this section.)
Stopping playback:
Play mode selection:
To change to another album or artist, turn
the MP3/WMA folder selector.
REPEAT (RPT):
The system stops playing when:
a. another mode (radio, CD, CompactFlash or AUX) is selected.
b. the audio system is turned off.
When the RPT button is pushed while a
track is being played, the play pattern can
be changed as follows:
c. the ignition switch is pushed to the
OFF position.
SAA1615
Playing recorded songs
Select the “Music Box” audio system by
using one of the following methods.
O
Push the source select switch on the
steering wheel and the ENTER switch.
(See “STEERING-WHEEL-MOUNTED
CONTROLS FOR AUDIO” later in this
section.)
O
Push the DISC button repeatedly until
the center display changes to the Music Box mode.
O
Give voice commands. (See “INFINITI
FF (Fast Forward), REW
(Rewind)/APS (Automatic
Program Search) FF, APS
REW:
When the
(fast forward) or
(rewind) button is pushed for more than 1.5
seconds while a track is being played, the
track will play while fast forwarding or rewinding. When the button is released, the
track will return to the normal play speed.
When the
or
button is pushed
for less than 1.5 seconds while a track is
being played, the next track or the beginning of the current track will be played.
The INFINITI controller can also be used to
select tracks when a track is being
played.
4-48 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
O
Play by Category
Plays music from one of the following
categories: My Favorites, Hit Songs,
Kids’ Songs and Rarely Played.
O
Search Artists
Displays a list of artists in alphabetical order. Selecting an artist displays all of the tracks by the artist and
starts playing the first track.
SAA1684
There are some options available during
playback. Select one of the following that
are displayed on the screen, if necessary.
Menu:
Refer to the following information for each
item.
O
SAA1685
O
Plays tracks in each album. The albums are sorted in alphabetical order.
O
Play by Date
Plays tracks in each album. The albums are sorted in order of the date
when they were stored in the system.
Play by Artist
Plays songs by an artist whose music
is currently being played. The artists
are sorted in alphabetical order.
Play by Album
O
Play by Mood
Plays music from one of the following
moods: Relaxing Music, Lively Music,
Slow Music and Upbeat Music.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-49
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
a desired song that is stored in the
system. The conditions are as follows:
Music Tempo (All, Slow, Normal and
Fast)
Decade (All, ’70s, ’80s, ’90s, ’00s and
’10s and After)
Group (All, Male Artist, Female Artist,
Group and Duo)
Category (Rock, Pop, Latin, Jazz, R&B,
Hip Hop, Club/Dance, Punk, Reggae,
Folk, Blues, Country, Metal, Easy Listening, New Age, Soundtrack, Gospel
& Religious, World, Classical, Children’s and Other)
SAA1686
O
O
Search Albums
Displays a list of albums in order of
the date when they were stored in the
system. Selecting an album displays
all of the tracks on the album and
starts playing the first track.
O
Select the “Sort” key to re-sort albums
in one of the following order: Rec. (Recorded) Date, Name, Release Year, Artist.
O
Search Song Details
Set the conditions and select the
“Start Song Search” key to search for
Search Keywords
Input a search keyword using the keypad displayed on the screen. (See
“HOW TO USE TOUCH SCREEN” earlier
in this section.)
Edit Albums
Select a category (Rec. (Recorded)
Date, Name, Released Year and Artist)
and edit the details using the keypad
displayed on the screen. (See “HOW
TO USE TOUCH SCREEN” earlier in this
section.)
O
Music Box System Info.
Displays the following information
about the “Music Box” audio system:
a. Music Box Used / Free Space (Information about “Saved Album”,
“Saved Track” and “Remaining
Time” is displayed.)
b. Mood Categories (Number of saved
tracks and their categories (Relaxing Music, Lively Music, Slow
Music, Upbeat Music and Others)
are displayed.)
c. Deleted Items (Information about
the deleted tracks is displayed.)
d. Search Missing Titles
If titles are not displayed for CDs that
have been recorded, titles can be acquired using one of the following
methods:
O Retrieve from HDD
Searches the title using the database in the hard disk.
O Retrieve from CF
Searches the title from the information acquired on the Internet. Visit
www.infiniti.com for details.
4-50 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
O Transfer Missing Titles to CF
played and its artist using the keypad
displayed on the screen. (See “HOW
TO USE TOUCH SCREEN”.)
Transfers the information of the
album recorded without titles to a
CompactFlash card. Visit www.infiniti.com for details.
The category of the track can also be
set to Rock, Pop, Latin, Jazz, R&B, Hip
Hop, Club/Dance, Punk, Reggae, Folk,
Blues, Country, Metal, Easy Listening,
New Age, Soundtrack, Gospel & Religious, World, Classical, Children’s and
Others.
e. Music Box Settings (See “Music
Box” settings” later in this section.)
f. CDDB Version (the version of the
built-in Gracenote Database is displayed.)
O
Remove Track
Reset the mood setting of a track.
SAA1688
Text:
Refer to the following information for each
item.
O
Set Mood
Set the mood category of the track to
“Relaxing Music”, “Lively Music”,
“Slow Music” or “Upbeat Music”.
O
Delete Track
Deleted music data can be restored by
performing the following.
1. Select the “Menu” key and then the
“Music Box System Info.” key on the
screen.
2. Select the “Deleted Items” key and
then the “Album/Track” key.
3. Select the “Restore Album/Track” key
to restore the deleted music data.
You can also listen to the beginning of
each track that has been deleted by performing the following.
Delete the track being played.
O
Restoring deleted data
Edit Info.
Edit the name of the track being
1. Select the “Menu” key and then the
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-51
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
“Music Box System Info.” key on the
screen.
Recording Quality:
Set the recording quality of 105 kbps or
132 kbps. The default is set to 132 kbps.
2. Select the “Deleted Items” key and
then the “Play Sample” key.
Title Text Priority:
Set the priority to CDDB (Compact Disc
Data Base) to acquire track information
from the Gracenote Database or set to CD
TEXT to acquire the information from CDs.
Delete ALL Music Box Data:
Delete all music data stored on the hard
disk.
SAA1616
“Music Box” settings
To set up the “Music box” hard-disk drive
audio system to your preferred settings,
select the “Menu” key during playback,
“Music Box System Info.” key, and “Music
Box Settings” key with the INFINITI controller, and then push the ENTER button.
Automatic Recording:
When this item is turned to ON, the “Music Box” hard-disk audio system automatically starts recording when a CD is inserted.
4-52 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
Gracenote
NOTE:
O
The information contained in the
Gracenote Database is not fully guaranteed.
O
The service of the Gracenote Database
on the Internet may be stopped without
prior notice for maintenance.
End-User License Agreement
USE OF THIS PRODUCT IMPLIES ACCEPTANCE OF THE TERMS BELOW.
Gracenote MusicID Terms of Use
This device contains software from
Gracenote, Inc. of Emeryville, California
(“Gracenote”).
The
software
from
Gracenote (the “Gracenote Software”) enables this application to do online disc
identification and obtain music-related information, including name, artist, track,
and title information (“Gracenote Data”)
from online servers (“Gracenote Servers”)
and to perform other functions. You may
use Gracenote Data only by means of the
intended End-User functions of this device.
You agree that you will use Gracenote
Data, the Gracenote Software, and
Gracenote Servers for your own personal
non-commercial use only. You agree not
to assign, copy, transfer or transmit the
Gracenote Software or any Gracenote
Data to any third party. YOU AGREE NOT
TO USE OR EXPLOIT GRACENOTE DATA,
THE
GRACENOTE
SOFTWARE,
OR
GRACENOTE SERVERS, EXCEPT AS EXPRESSLY PERMITTED HEREIN.
You agree that your non-exclusive license
to use the Gracenote Data, the Gracenote
Software, and Gracenote Servers will terminate if you violate these restrictions. If
your license terminates, you agree to
cease any and all use of the Gracenote
Data, the Gracenote Software, and
Gracenote Servers. Gracenote reserves all
rights in Gracenote Data, the Gracenote
Software, and the Gracenote Servers, including all ownership rights. Under no circumstances will Gracenote become liable
for any payment to you for any information that you provide. You agree that
Gracenote, Inc. may enforce its rights under this Agreement against you directly in
its own name.
The Gracenote MusicID Service uses a
unique identifier to track queries for sta-
tistical purposes. The purpose of a randomly assigned numeric identifier is to
allow the Gracenote MusicID service to
count queries without knowing anything
about who you are. For more information,
see the web page for the Gracenote Privacy Policy for the Gracenote MusicID Service.
The Gracenote Software and each item of
Gracenote Data are licensed to you “AS
IS.” Gracenote makes no representations
or warranties, express or implied, regarding the accuracy of any Gracenote Data
from in the Gracenote Servers. Gracenote
reserves the right to delete data from the
Gracenote Servers or to change data categories for any cause that Gracenote
deems sufficient. No warranty is made
that the Gracenote Software or Gracenote
Servers are error-free or that functioning
of Gracenote Software or Gracenote
Servers will be uninterrupted. Gracenote
is not obligated to provide you with new
enhanced or additional data types or categories that Gracenote may provide in the
future and is free to discontinue its online
services at any time.
GRACENOTE DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT
NOT LIMITED TO, IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-53
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, TITLE, AND NONINFRINGEMENT. GRACENOTE DOES NOT
WARRANT THE RESULTS THAT WILL BE OBTAINED BY YOUR USE OF THE GRACENOTE
SOFTWARE OR ANY GRACENOTE SERVER.
IN NO CASE WILL GRACENOTE BE LIABLE
FOR ANY CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL
DAMAGES OR FOR ANY LOST PROFITS OR
LOST REVENUES.
are registered trademarks of Gracenote.
The Gracenote logo and logotype, and the
“Powered by Gracenote” logo are trademarks of Gracenote.
Copyright:
Music recognition technology and related
data are provided by Gracenote .
Gracenote is the industry standard in music recognition technology and related
content delivery. For more information
visit www.gracenote.com.
CD
and
music-related
data
from
Gracenote, Inc., copyright © 2000-2006
Gracenote. Gracenote Software, copyright
© 2000-2006 Gracenote. This product
and service may practice one or more of
the following U.S. Patents: #5,987,525;
#6,061,680;
#6,154,773,
#6,161,132,
#6,230,192, #6,230,207, #6,240,459,
#6,330,593, and other patents issued or
pending. Some services supplied under license from Open Globe, Inc. for U.S.
Patent: #6,304,523. Gracenote and CDDB
SAA0451
CD/CF (CompactFlash) CARE AND
CLEANING
CD:
O
Handle a CD by its edges. Never touch
the surface of the disc. Do not bend
the disc.
O
Always place the discs in the storage
case when they are not being used.
O
To clean a disc, wipe the surface from
the center to the outer edge using a
clean, soft cloth. Do not wipe the disc
using a circular motion.
Do not use a conventional record
4-54 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
cleaner or alcohol intended for industrial use.
O
A new disc may be rough on the inner
and outer edges. Remove the rough
edges by rubbing the inner and outer
edges with the side of a pen or pencil
as illustrated.
CF cards:
O
Never touch the terminal portion of
the CompactFlash cards. Do not bend
the cards.
O
Always place the cards in the storage
case when they are not being used.
O
Do not place heavy objects on the
cards.
O
Do not store the cards in highly humid
locations.
O
Do not expose the cards to direct sunlight.
O
Do not spill any liquids on the cards.
Refer to the CompactFlash card Owner’s
Manual for the details.
With navigation system
SAA1534
1. Source select switch
2. ENTER (models with navigation system)
or tuning (models without navigation
system) switch
Without navigation system
SAA1506
3. Volume control switch
4. BACK switch
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-55
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
STEERING-WHEEL-MOUNTED
CONTROLS FOR AUDIO
Next or previous station/channel
CD:
ENTER (models with navigation
system) or tuning (models without
navigation system) switch
Push the switch upward or downward to
select a channel, track, CD or folder when
they are listed on the display. You can
also use the ENTER switch to select the
items on the usual setting menu screen.
After selecting an MP3 folder using the up
and down switch, push the ENTER switch
to complete the selection.
While the display is in the NAVI, STATUS
or Audio setting screen, some audio functions can also be controlled using the ENTER switch. The function varies depending
on if you push the switch shorter (less
than 1.5 seconds) or longer (more than 1.5
seconds).
O
Pushing DOWN “
shorter
”/UP “
O
Pushing DOWN “
longer
”/UP “
”/UP “
”
Pushing DOWN “
longer
”/UP “
”
Disc change (When only one disc is
loaded, the 1st track of the disc will be
selected.)
CD/CF with MP3/WMA:
O
Pushing DOWN “
shorter
”/UP “
”
Next track or the beginning of the current track
O
Pushing DOWN “
longer
”/UP “
”
Folder change (When the last folder on
a disc is playing, the next disc will be
selected.)
”
O
Pushing DOWN “
longer
”
O
Pushing DOWN “
shorter
”/UP “
”/UP “
”
Playlist change (When the last playlist
is playing, the next playlist will be selected.)
BACK switch
Push this switch to go back to the previous screen or cancel the selection if it is
not completed.
Volume control switches
Push the upper (+) or lower (−) side
switch to increase or decrease the
volume.
“SOURCE” select switch
Push the source select switch to change
the mode in the sequence of Preset A,
Preset B, Preset C, “Music Box” (if so
equipped), CD and CompactFlash (if so
equipped).
“Music Box” hard-disk drive audio
system:
Next or previous preset channel
O
Pushing DOWN “
shorter
Next track or the beginning of the current track
RADIO:
O
Next track or the beginning of the current track
”
4-56 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
ANTENNA
Window antenna
The antenna pattern is printed inside the
rear window.
CAUTION
O
Do not place metalized film near the rear
window glass or attach any metal parts
to it. This may cause poor reception or
noise.
O
When cleaning the inside of the rear
window, be careful not to scratch or
damage the rear window antenna.
Lightly wipe along the antenna with a
dampened soft cloth.
SAA1507
Automatic transmission models
AUXILIARY INPUT JACKS
The auxiliary input jacks are located in
the center console. NTSC compatible devices such as video games, camcorders
and portable video players can be connected to the auxiliary jacks.
SAA1531
Manual transmission models
The auxiliary jacks are color coded for
identification purposes.
O
Yellow - video input
O
White - left channel audio input
O
Red - right channel audio input
Before connecting a device to a jack,
turn off the power of the portable device.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-57
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
CAR PHONE OR CB RADIO
When installing a car phone or a CB radio
in your INFINITI, be sure to observe the
following cautions, otherwise the new
equipment may adversely affect the electronic control modules and electronic control system harness.
WARNING
O
O
O
A cellular telephone should not be used
while driving so full attention may be
given to vehicle operation. Some jurisdictions prohibit the use of cellular telephones while driving.
If you must make a call while your vehicle is in motion, the hands-free cellular phone operational mode (if so
equipped) is highly recommended. Exercise extreme caution at all times so full
attention may be given to vehicle operation.
BLUETOOTH HANDS-FREE PHONE SYSTEM
(if so equipped)
CAUTION
WARNING
O
Keep the antenna as far away as possible from the electronic control modules.
O
Keep the antenna wire more than 8 in
(20 cm) away from the electronic control
system harness. Do not route the antenna wire next to any harness.
O
Adjust the antenna standing-wave ratio
as recommended by the manufacturer.
O
Connect the ground wire from the CB
radio chassis to the body.
O
For details, consult an INFINITI dealer.
O
Use a phone after stopping your vehicle
in a safe location. If you have to use a
phone while driving, exercise extreme
caution at all times so full attention may
be given to vehicle operation.
O
If a conversation in a moving vehicle requires you to take notes, pull off the
road to a safe location and stop your vehicle before doing so.
CAUTION
To avoid draining the vehicle battery, use a
phone after starting the engine.
If a conversation in a moving vehicle requires you to take notes, pull off the
road to a safe location and stop your vehicle before doing so.
4-58 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
Your phone is automatically connected
with the in-vehicle phone module when
the ignition switch is pushed to the ON
position with the registered cellular
phone turned on and carried in the vehicle.
You can register up to 5 different
Bluetooth cellular phones in the invehicle phone module. However, you can
talk on only one cellular phone at a time.
Before using the Bluetooth Hands-Free
Phone System, refer to the following
notes.
O Set up the wireless connection between a cellular phone and the invehicle phone module before using
the Bluetooth Hands-Free Phone System.
SAA1569
Your INFINITI is equipped with the
Bluetooth Hands-Free Phone System. If
you are an owner of a Bluetooth enabled
cellular phone, you can set up the wireless connection between your cellular
phone and the in-vehicle phone module.
With Bluetooth wireless technology, you
can make or receive a telephone call with
your cellular phone in your pocket.
O Some Bluetooth
enabled cellular
phones may not be recognized by the
in-vehicle phone module. Please visit
www.infiniti.com/bluetooth for a recommended phone list.
Once your cellular phone is paired to the
in-vehicle phone module, no phone connecting procedure is required anymore.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-59
w 06.9.14/V36-D X
O You will not be able to use a handsfree phone under the following conditions:
- Your vehicle is outside of the telephone service area.
- Your vehicle is in an area where it is
difficult to receive radio waves; such
as in a tunnel, in an underground
parking garage, behind a tall
building or in a mountainous area.
- Your cellular phone is locked in
order not to be dialed.
O When the signal reception is too bad
or ambient sound is too loud, it may
be difficult to hear the other person’s
voice during a call.
O Immediately after the ignition switch
is pushed to the ON position, it may
be impossible to receive a call for a
short period of time.
O Do not place the cellular phone in an
area surrounded by metal or far away
from the in-vehicle phone module to
prevent tone quality degradation and
wireless connection disruption.
O While a cellular phone is connected
through the Bluetooth wireless connection, the battery power of the cellular
phone may discharge quicker than
usual.
O If the Bluetooth Hands-Free Phone
System seems to be malfunctioning,
please
visit
www.infiniti.com/bluetooth for troubleshooting help.
O Refer to the cellular phone Owner’s
Manual regarding the telephone
charges, cellular phone antenna and
body, etc.
O The antenna display on the monitor
will not coincide with the antenna display of some cellular phones.
O Keep the interior of the vehicle as
quiet as possible to hear the caller’s
voice clearly as well as to minimize its
echoes.
O If reception between callers is unclear,
adjusting the outgoing volume may
improve the clarity.
Regulatory information:
FCC Regulatory information
-
CAUTION: To maintain compliance with
FCC’s RF exposure guidelines, use only
the supplied antenna. Unauthorized
antenna, modification, or attachments
could damage the transmitter and may
violate FCC regulations.
-
Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
1) this device may not cause interference
and
2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may
cause undesired operation of the device
IC Regulatory information:
-
Operation is subject to the following
two conditions: (1) this device may not
cause interference, and (2) this device
must accept any interference, including interference that may cause
undesired operation of the device.
4-60 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
w 06.9.14/V36-D X
-
This Class B digital apparatus meets
all requirements of the Canadian
Interference-Causing Equipment Regulations.
Bluetooth trademark:
BLUETOOTH is a trademark
owned by Bluetooth SIG,
Inc., U.S.A. and licenced to
Xanavi Informatics Corporation.
SAA1570
MODELS WITH NAVIGATION
SYSTEM
SAA1571
the name list of the phones, and push
the ENTER button.
Pairing procedure
1. Push the SETTING button, and select
the “PHONE” key on the display using
the INFINITI controller. Then push the
ENTER button.
2. Select the “Bluetooth Setup” key, and
push the ENTER button.
3. Select the “Pair Phone” key, and push
the ENTER button.
4. Select the “None (Add New)” key from
5. When a PIN code appears on the
screen, operate the Bluetooth cellular phone to enter the PIN code.
The pairing procedure of the cellular
phone varies according to each cellular phone. See the cellular phone
Owner’s Manual for the details. You
can
also
visit
www.infiniti.com/bluetooth for instructions on pairing INFINITI recommended cellular phones.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-61
w 06.8.14/V36-D X
6. When the pairing is completed, the
screen will return to the Bluetooth
setup display.
SAA1572
SAA1574
Phonebook registration
Up to 40 phone numbers can be stored in
the phonebook.
1. Push the SETTING button, and select
the “PHONE” key on the display using
the INFINITI controller. Then push the
ENTER button.
2. Select the “Phonebook” key, and push
the ENTER button.
SAA1573
3. Select the “None (Add New)” key from
the name list of the phonebook, and
push the ENTER button.
4-62 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
There are different methods to input a
phone number. Select one of the following options instead of “Transfer via
Bluetooth” in step 4 above.
Enter Data by Keypad:
Input the name and phone number manually using the keypad displayed on the
screen. See “HOW TO USE TOUCH
SCREEN” earlier in this section.
Copy from Downloaded Phonebook:
SAA1575
SAA1576
4. Select the “Transfer via Bluetooth”
key, and push the ENTER button in order to register your cellular phone
memory in the phonebook.
want to add a voice tag for it. If you
want to add a voice tag, select “YES”
on the “Add a voicetag?” screen. For
example, if the partner’s name is
David, speak “David” after a tone
while the “Store voicetag” screen is
on the display. The “David” voice tag
is stored in the phonebook. Voice tag
is a useful function for easy dialing
supported by the voice recognition
system. See “INFINITI Voice Recognition System” later in this section.
5. Operate the cellular phone to send a
person’s name and phone number
from the memory of the cellular
phone. The memory sending procedure from the cellular phone varies according to each cellular phone manufacturer. See the cellular phone Owner’s Manual for more details.
6. After the memory is registered in the
phonebook, the system will ask if you
7. When the phonebook registration is
completed, the screen will return to
the name list of the phonebook.
Copy a phonebook from the Bluetooth
cellular phone. The availability of this
function depends on each cellular phone.
The copying procedure from the cellular
phone also varies according to each cellular phone. See cellular phone Owner’s
Manual for more details.
Copy from Outgoing Call Logs:
Store the name and phone number from
the outgoing call list.
Copy from Incoming Call Logs:
Store the name and phone number from
the incoming call list.
Transfer via Bluetooth:
Transfer a contact from the Bluetooth
cellular phone. Availability of this function
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-63
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
depends on each cellular phone. The
transferring procedure from the cellular
phone also varies according to each cellular phone. See the cellular phone Owner’s
Manual for more details.
4. After the call is over, perform one of
the following to finish the call.
a. Select the “Hang up” key and push
the ENTER button.
b.Push the
wheel.
Delete:
Delete a contact that is registered in the
phonebook.
button on the steering
c. Push the PHONE button on the instrument panel.
There are different methods to make a
call. Select one of the following options
instead of “Call (Phonebook)” in step 2
above.
SAA1577
Redial:
Making a call
Dial the previously dialed number again.
To make a call, follow the procedures below.
Call (Call Logs):
1. Push the PHONE button on the instrument panel or the
button on the
steering wheel. The “PHONE” screen
will appear on the display.
2. Select the “Call (Phonebook)” key on
the “PHONE” menu, and push the
ENTER button.
3. Select the registered person’s name
from the list, and push the ENTER button. Dialing will start.
Select the name or phone number from
the incoming or outgoing call logs.
Call (Downloaded):
Select the name or phone number from
the downloaded call list.
Dial (Keypad):
Input the phone number manually using
the keypad displayed on the screen. See
“HOW TO USE TOUCH SCREEN” earlier in
this section.
4-64 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
w 06.9.14/V36-D X
receiving a call. Select one of the following displayed on the screen.
Answer:
Accept an incoming call to talk.
On Hold:
Put an incoming call on hold.
Reject Call:
Reject an incoming call.
To finish the call, perform one of the following procedures listed below.
SAA1578
Receiving a call
When you hear a phone ring, the display
will change to the incoming call mode. To
receive a call, perform one of the following procedures listed below.
a. Select the “Hang up” key on the display and push the ENTER button.
b. Push the PHONE button on the instrument panel.
c. Push the
wheel.
button on the steering
SAA1579
During a call
There are some options available during a
call. Select one of the following displayed
on the screen if necessary.
Hang up:
a. Select the “Answer” key on the display and push the ENTER button.
Finish the call.
b. Push the PHONE button on the instrument panel.
Transfer the call to the cellular phone.
c. Push the
wheel.
button on the steering
Use Handset:
Mute:
Mute your voice to the person.
There are some options available when
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-65
w 06.9.14/V36-D X
Keypad:
Send a dial tone to the caller for using
network services such as voice mail.
Cancel Mute:
This will appear after “Mute” is selected.
Mute will be canceled.
To adjust the person’s voice to be louder
or quieter, push the volume control
switch (+ or −) on the steering wheel or
turn the volume control knob on the instrument panel while talking on the
phone. This adjustment is also available
in the SETTING mode.
SAA1580
SAA1581
Phone setting
Downloaded Phonebook:
To set up the Bluetooth Hands-Free
Phone System to your preferred settings,
push the SETTING button on the instrument panel and select the “PHONE” key
on the display, and then push the ENTER
button.
Refer to the following information for each
item.
Phonebook:
See “Phonebook registration” in this section for adding, editing and deleting a
contact.
O Download All
Download all of the contacts registered in the Bluetooth cellular phone.
Availability of this function depends
on each cellular phone. The memory
downloading procedure from the cellular phone also varies according to
each cellular phone. See cellular
phone Owner’s Manual for more details.
4-66 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
w 06.9.14/V36-D X
O Delete Downloaded Phonebook
Delete a downloaded phonebook.
O Delete an Entry of Downloaded Phonebook
Delete an entry from the downloaded
phonebook.
Automatic Hold:
If this item is turned on, an incoming call
will be placed on hold automatically after
several rings.
Use Vehicle Ringtone:
If this item is turned on, a specific ringtone that is different from the cellular
phone’s will sound when receiving a call.
Delete Call Logs:
Delete all of the incoming or outgoing call
logs from the list.
Bluetooth Setup:
See the following information for each
item.
O Bluetooth
If this setting is turned off, the connection between the cellular phone
and the in-vehicle phone module will
be canceled.
O Bluetooth Info
Check information about the device
name, device PIN and connection
status.
O Pair Phone
See “Pairing Procedure” in this section.
O Priority Change
Use this command to change the priority level of the active phone.
The priority level determines which
phone will be connected to the system
when
more
than
one
paired
Bluetooth phone is in the vehicle.
The system states the priority level of
the active phone and asks for a new
priority level (1, 2, 3, 4, 5).
If the new priority level is already
being used for another phone, the two
phones will swap priority levels.
Priority Level 3 = Phone C
and you change the priority level of
Phone C to Level 1, then:
Priority Level 1 = Phone C
Priority Level 2 = Phone B
Priority Level 3 = Phone A
O Remove Paired Phone
Delete a registered cellular phone
from the paired list.
O Paired Phone List
Up to 5 registered cellular phones are
shown on the list. If you select a cellular phone that is different from the
one currently being connected, the
newly selected phone will be connected to the system.
O Edit Phone Name
Rename the registered cellular phones
using the keypad displayed on the
screen. See “HOW TO USE TOUCH
SCREEN” earlier in this section.
For example, if the current priority levels are:
Priority Level 1 = Phone A
Priority Level 2 = Phone B
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-67
w 06.9.14/V36-D X
MODELS WITHOUT NAVIGATION
SYSTEM
O
Initialization
Giving voice commands
When the ignition switch is turned to the
ON position, INFINITI Voice Recognition is
initialized, which takes a few seconds. If
the
button is pushed before the initialization completes, the system will announce “Hands-free phone system not
ready” and will not react to voice commands.
To operate INFINITI Voice Recognition,
push and release the
button located
on the steering wheel. After the tone
sounds, speak a command.
Operating tips
To get the best performance out of the
INFINITI Voice Recognition system, observe the following:
O
can also push the
button on the
steering wheel at any time. Whenever
the VR session is canceled, a double
beep is played to indicate you have
exited the system.
Speak in a natural voice without pausing between words.
O
The command given is picked up by the
microphone, and voice feedback is given
when the command is accepted.
O
O
If you need to hear the available commands for the current menu again, say
“Help” and the system will repeat
them.
If a command is not recognized, the
system announces, “Command not
recognized. Please try again.” Repeat
the command in a clear voice.
Keep the interior of the vehicle as
quiet as possible. Close the windows
to eliminate surrounding noises (traffic noises, vibration sounds, etc.),
which may prevent the system from
recognizing voice commands correctly.
O
O
Wait until the tone sounds before
speaking a command. Otherwise, the
command will not be received properly.
If you want to go back to the previous
command, you can say “Go back” or
“Correction” anytime the system is
waiting for a response.
O
O
Start speaking a command within 5
seconds after the tone sounds.
You can cancel a command when the
system is waiting for a response by
saying, “Cancel” or “Quit.” The system
announces “Cancel” and ends the
voice recognition (VR) session. You
If you want to adjust the volume of the
voice feedback, push the volume control switches (+ or -) on the steering
wheel while being provided with feedback. You can also use the radio
volume control knob.
How to say numbers
INFINITI Voice Recognition requires a certain way to speak numbers in voice commands. Refer to the rules and examples
below.
O
Either “zero” or “oh” can be used for
“0”.
Example: 1-800-662-6200
— “One eight oh oh six six two six two
oh oh”, or
— “One eight zero zero six six two six
two oh oh”
O
Words can be used for the first 4 digits places only.
Example: 1-800-662-6200
4-68 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
— “One eight hundred six six two six
two oh oh”,
— NOT “One eight hundred six six two
sixty two hundred, and
NOTE:
For best results, say phone numbers as
single digits.
— NOT “One eight oh oh six six two
sixty two hundred.
O
Numbers can be spoken in small
groups. The system will prompt you to
continuing entering digits, if desired.
Example: 1-800-662-6200
— “One eight oh oh”
The system repeats the numbers and
prompts you to enter more.
— “six six two”
The system repeats the numbers and
prompts you to enter more.
— “six two oh oh”
O
You can say “Star” for * and “Pound”
for # at anytime in any position of the
phone number.
Example: 1-555-1212 *123
— “One five five five one two one two
star one two three”
SAA1582
Control buttons
The control buttons for the Bluetooth
Hands-Free Phone System are located on
the steering wheel.
TALK/PHONE SEND
Push the
button to initiate a VR
session or answer an incoming call.
You can also use the
button to
skip through system feedback and to
enter commands during a call. See
“List of voice commands” and “During
a call” later in this section for more information.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-69
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
PHONE END
Pairing procedure
lar phone, operate it to enter the code
“1234”.
Push the
button to cancel a VR
session or end a call.
The code is always “1234” regardless
of the number of phones paired.
Getting started
The pairing procedure of the cellular
phone varies according to each cellular phone. See the cellular phone
Owner’s Manual for details. You can
also visit www.infiniti.com/bluetooth
for instructions on pairing INFINITI recommended cellular phones.
The following procedures will help you get
started using the Bluetooth Hands-Free
Phone System with INFINITI Voice Recognition. For additional command options,
refer to “List of voice commands” later in
this section.
Choosing a language
You can interact with the Bluetooth
Hands-Free Phone System using English,
Spanish or French.
See “How to use SETTING button” earlier
in this section to change the language.
1. Push the
button on the steering
wheel. The system announces the
available commands.
A . The system acknowl2. Say: “Setup” q
edges the command and announces
the next set of available commands.
B . The system ac3. Say: “Pair phone” q
knowledges the command and announces the next set of available commands.
C . The system ac4. Say: “New phone” q
knowledges the command and asks
you to initiate pairing from the phone
D .
handset q
When you are asked to enter a PIN
code for pairing your Bluetooth cellu-
5. The system asks you to say a name for
E .
the phone q
If the name is too long or too short,
the system tells you, then prompts
you for a name again.
Also, if more than one phone is paired
and the name sounds too much like a
name already used, the system tells
you, then prompts you for a name
again.
6. The system asks you to assign a priorF . The priority level deterity level q
mines which phone is active when
more than one paired Bluetooth
phone is in the vehicle. Follow the instructions provided by the system or
refer to “Setup” later in this section
4-70 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
w 06.9.14/V36-D X
for more information on changing priorities.
7. The system will ask if you would like
G . Follow
to select a custom ringtone q
the instructions provided by the
system or refer to “Setup” later in this
section for more information on selecting ringtones.
Making a call by entering a phone
number
4. When you have finished speaking the
phone number, the system repeats it
back and announces the available
commands.
C . The system acknowl5. Say: “Dial” q
edges the command and makes the
call.
For additional command options, see “List
of voice commands” later in this section.
Receiving a call
When you hear the ringtone, press the
button on the steering wheel.
Once the call has ended, press the
button on the steering wheel.
NOTE:
1. Push the
button on steering
wheel. A tone will sound.
A . The system acknowl2. Say: “Call” q
edges the command and announces
the next set of available commands.
B .
3. Say the number you wish to call q
For example, 555-1212 can be said as
“five five five one two one two.” See
“How to say numbers” earlier in this
section for more information.
If you do not wish to take the call when you
hear the ringtone, press the
button
on the steering wheel to reject the call.
For additional command options, see “List
of voice commands” later in this section.
SAA1583
List of voice commands
When you push and release the
button on the steering wheel, you can
choose from the commands on the Main
Menu. The following pages describe these
commands and the commands in each
sub-menu.
Remember to wait for the tone before
speaking.
You can say “Help” to hear the list of
commands currently available anytime the
system is waiting for a response.
If you want to end an action without com-
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-71
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
pleting it, you can say “Cancel” or “Quit”
at anytime the system is waiting for a response. The system will end the VR session. Whenever the VR session is canceled, a double beep is played to indicate
you have exited the system.
with the name, the system asks you to
choose the location.
If you want to go back to the previous
command, you can say “Go back” or “Correction” anytime the system is waiting for
a response.
When prompted by the system, say the
number you wish to call. Refer to “How to
say numbers” and “Making a call by entering a phone number” earlier in this
section for more details.
When you get used to the menus in the
system, you can talk ahead by saying
more than one command at a time. For
example, say, “Call five five five one two
one two” or “Memo pad record.”
Also, when you get used to the system responses, you can skip ahead to the tone
by pressing the
button on the steering wheel. However, if you press the
button when the system is waiting
for a response from you it will end the VR
session.
Once you have confirmed the name and
location, the system begins the call.
<Number> (speak digits)
“Redial”
“Call”
Use the Redial command to call the last
number that was dialed within the vehicle.
<Name> (speak name)
NOTE:
If you have stored entries in the Phone
Book, you can dial a number associated
with a name and location.
The system will not redial the last number
dialed by the handset keypad.
SAA1584
See “Phone book” later in this section to
learn how to store entries.
When prompted by the system, say the
name of the phone book entry you wish to
call. The system acknowledges the name.
If there are multiple locations associated
The system acknowledges the command,
repeats the number and begins dialing.
If a redial number does not exist, the system announces, “There is no number to
redial” and ends the VR session.
“Callback”
Use the Call Back command to dial the
4-72 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
number of the last incoming call within
the vehicle.
The system acknowledges the command,
repeats the number and begins dialing. If
a call back number does not exist, the
system announces, “There is no number
to call back” and ends the VR session.
The system acknowledges the command and sends the tones associated
with the numbers. The system then
ends the VR session and returns to
the call.
O
During a call
During a call there are several command
options available. Press the
button
on the steering wheel to mute the receiving voice and enter commands.
O
“Help” — The system announces the
available commands.
O
“Go back/Correction” — The system
announces “Go back,” ends the VR
session and returns to the call.
O
“Cancel/Quit” — The system announces “Cancel,” ends the VR session and returns to the call.
O
“Send/Enter/Call/Dial” — Use the
Send command to enter numbers during a call. For example, if you were directed to dial an extension by an automated system:
“Transfer Call” — Use the Transfer Call
command to transfer the call from the
Bluetooth Hands-Free Phone System
to the cellular phone when privacy is
desired.
The system announces, “Transfer call.
Call transferred to privacy mode.” The
system then ends the VR session.
You can also issue the Transfer Call
command again to return to a handsfree call through the vehicle.
O
“Mute” — Use the Mute command to
mute your voice so the other party
cannot hear it. Use the mute command
again to unmute your voice.
NOTE:
If the other party ends the call or the cellular phone network connection is lost while
the Mute feature is on, the Mute feature
may need to be reset to “off.”
SAA1585
“Phone book”
The Phone Book stores up to 40 names
for each phone paired with the system.
Each name can have up to 4
locations/phone numbers associated with
it.
NOTE:
Each phone has its own separate phone
book. You cannot access Phone A’s phone
book if you are currently connected with
Phone B.
Say: “Send one two three four.”
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-73
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
“New Entry”
Use the New Entry command to store a
new name in the system.
When prompted by the system, say the
name you would like to give the new
entry.
For example, say: “Mary.”
If the name is too long or too short, the
system tells you, then prompts you for a
name again.
Also, if the name sounds too much like a
name already stored, the system tells
you, then prompts you for a name again.
Once the system accepts the name and
you confirm it is correct, the system asks
for a location (Home, Office, Mobile or
Other).
For example, say: “Home.”
The system acknowledges the location.
The system will ask you to say a phone
number or to transfer a phone number
stored in the cellular phone’s memory.
To enter a phone number by voice command:
one two.” See “How to say numbers” earlier in this section for more information.
To transfer a phone number stored in the
cellular phone’s memory (if so equipped):
“Edit”
Use the Edit command to alter an existing
phone book entry or to add a 2nd, 3rd or
4th phone number to an existing entry.
Say “Transfer entry.” The system acknowledges the command and asks you to initiate the transfer from the phone handset.
The new contact phone number will be
transferred from the cellular phone via
the Bluetooth communication link.
When prompted by the system, say the
name of the entry you wish to edit.
The transfer procedure varies according to
each cellular phone. See the cellular
phone Owner’s Manual for details. You
can also visit www.infiniti.com/bluetooth
for instructions on transferring phone
numbers from INFINITI recommended cellular phones.
Say the name of the location.
The system repeats the number and
prompts you for the next command. When
you have finished entering numbers,
choose “Store.”
The system confirms the name, location
and number. The system then asks if you
would like to store another location for
the same name. If you do not wish to
store another location, the system ends
the VR session.
For example, say: “five five five one two
The system acknowledges the name and
asks you for the location you would like
to edit.
The system acknowledges the location.
The system will ask you to say a phone
number or to transfer a phone number
stored in the cellular phone’s memory.
To enter a phone number by voice command:
For example, say: “five five five one two
one two.” See “How to say numbers” earlier in this section for more information.
To transfer a phone number stored in the
cellular phone’s memory (if so equipped):
Say “Transfer entry.” The system acknowledges the command and asks you to initiate the transfer from the phone handset.
The new contact phone number will be
transferred from the cellular phone via
4-74 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
the Bluetooth communication link.
The transfer procedure varies according to
each cellular phone. See the cellular
phone Owner’s Manual for details. You
can also visit www.infiniti.com/bluetooth
for instructions on transferring phone
numbers from INFINITI recommended cellular phones.
The system repeats the number and
prompts you for the next command. When
you have finished entering numbers,
choose “Store.”
The system confirms the name, location
and number, then announces that the entry has been stored. The system then
ends the VR session.
“Delete”
Use the Delete command to erase one entry from the phone book, all entries from
the phone book, the current redial
number or the current call back number.
To delete entries from the phone book,
say a name or “All entries” when
prompted by the system.
The system acknowledges the command
and asks you to confirm the deletion.
back number, say “redial number” or “call
back number” when prompted by the system.
If a redial number or a call back number
exists, the system deletes them without
asking for confirmation.
If there is no number for the entry you are
trying to delete, the system says so and
ends the VR session.
“List Name”
Use the List Names command to hear all
the names and locations in the phone
book.
SAA1586
The system recites the phone book entries but does not include the actual
phone numbers. When the playback of
the list is complete the system ends the
VR session.
“Memo pad”
You can stop the playback of the list at
any time by pressing the
button on
the steering wheel. The system ends the
VR session.
“Play”
The Memo Pad records a maximum of 6
voice memos, each up to 20 seconds
long.
The system plays back all the memos in
the order of newest to oldest. The system
ends the VR session.
If there are no memos recorded, the
system announces “No messages to
play.” The system ends the VR session.
To delete the current redial number or call
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-75
w 06.9.14/V36-D X
Up to 5 phones can be paired. If you try to
pair a sixth phone, the system announces
that you must first delete one phone or
replace an existing phone.
“Record”
The system announces “Recording” and a
tone sounds signaling you to begin.
Speak the information you wish to record
clearly. When you are done, press the
or
button on the steering wheel.
If you try to pair a phone that has already
been paired to your vehicle’s system, the
system announces the name the phone is
already using. The pairing procedure will
then be canceled.
A tone sounds and the system announces
“Memo recorded.” Another tone sounds
to end the VR session.
When prompted by the system, choose
from the following commands:
If the memo pad is full, the system asks if
you wish to record over the oldest memo.
“Delete”
The Delete command erases all memos.
The system asks you to confirm this action before deleting all memos.
O
“New phone” — Refer to “Pairing a
phone” earlier in this section.
O
“Replace phone” — The system announces the names of the phones already paired and asks which you
would like to replace.
SAA1587
“Setup”
Use the Setup command to change options associated with the Bluetooth
Hands-Free Phone System.
“Pair Phone”
Use the Pair Phone command to pair a
phone to the Bluetooth
Hands-Free
Phone System.
When you are asked to enter a PIN code for
pairing your Bluetooth cellular phone, operate it to enter the code “1234”.
The code is always “1234” regardless of
the number of phones paired.
Once you say the name of the phone
you wish to replace, the paring procedure will begin. Refer to “Pairing procedure” earlier in this section.
O
“List phone” — See the description
below.
“List Phones”
Use the List Phone command to hear the
names of the phones currently paired. If
no phones are paired, the system an-
4-76 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
nounces, “No paired phones to list.” The
system then ends the VR session.
“Select Phone”
Use the Select Phone command to select
a phone of lesser priority when two or
more phones paired with Bluetooth
Hands-Free Phone System are in the vehicle at the same time.
The system asks you to name the phone
and confirm the selection.
Once the selection is confirmed, the selected phone remains active until the ignition switch is turned OFF or you select a
new phone.
“Change Priority”
Use the Change Priority command to
change the priority level of the active
phone.
The priority level determines which phone
is active when more than one paired
Bluetooth phone is in the vehicle.
The system states the priority level of the
active phone and asks for a new priority
level (1, 2, 3, 4, 5).
If the new priority level is already being
used for another phone, the two phones
will swap priority levels.
For example, if the current priority levels
are:
Priority Level 1 = Phone A
Priority Level 2 = Phone B
Priority Level 3 = Phone C
phone book for that phone will also be deleted.
“Select Ring tone”
Use the Select Ring tone command to select the tone heard in the vehicle when an
incoming call is received.
and you change the priority level of Phone
C to Level 1, then:
Priority Level 1 = Phone C
Priority Level 2 = Phone B
Priority Level 3 = Phone A
The system announces the name of the
active phone and asks you to choose from
the following commands:
O
“Ringtone” — The system plays a ringtone and asks if you would like to select that tone. If you say no, the
system plays the next ringtone available and continues to cycle through
the ringtones until you select one or
quit.
The system announces the names of the
phones already paired with the system and
their priority level. The system then gives
you the option to delete a specific phone,
all phones or listen to the list again.
O
“Silent” — The system asks you to
confirm your wish to disable the ringtone.
Once you chose to delete a phone or all
phones, the system asks you to confirm
this action.
Speaker Adaptation allows up to two out-of
dialect users to train the system to improve
recognition accuracy. By repeating a
number of commands, the users can create
a voice model of their own voice that is
stored in the system. The system is capable of storing a different speaker adapta-
“Delete Phone”
Use the Delete Phone command to delete
a specific phone or all phones from the
Bluetooth Hands-Free Phone System.
NOTE:
When you delete a phone, the associated
SPEAKER ADAPTATION (SA) MODE
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-77
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
tion model for memory A and memory B.
If memory A is available, the system will
use memory A to store the model. If
memory A is in use and memory B is
available, the system will use memory B
to store the model. If both of the memory
locations are in use, the system will ask
the user to select which memory location
should be overwritten.
Training procedure
The procedure for training a voice is as
follows.
1. Position the vehicle in a reasonably
quiet outdoor location.
2. Sit in the driver’s seat with the engine
running, the parking brake on, and the
transmission in Park.
3. Press and hold the
more than 5 seconds.
button for
locations are already in use, the
system will prompt you to overwrite
one. Follow the instructions provided
by the system.
7. When preparation is complete and you
are ready to begin, the press the
button.
8. The SA mode will be explained. Follow
the instructions provided by the
system.
Training phrases
During the SA mode, the system instructs
you to say the following phrases.
(The system will prompt you for each
phrase.)
O phone book new entry
O dial three oh four two nine
O delete call back number
9. When training is finished, the system
will tell you an adequate number of
phrases have been recorded.
O setup pair phone
10. The system will ask you to say your
name. Follow the instructions to register your name.
O eight pause nine three two pause
seven
11. The system will announce that
speaker adaptation has been completed and the system is ready.
O memo pad play
O delete all entries
O call seven two four zero nine
O phone book delete entry
The SA mode will stop if:
4. The system announces: “Press the
PHONE/SEND (
) button for the
hands-free phone system to enter the
speaker adaptation mode.
O memo pad record
O The
button is pressed for more
than 5 seconds in SA mode.
O dial star two one seven oh
5. Press the
O The ignition switch is pushed to the
OFF or LOCK position.
button.
6. Voice memory A or memory B is selected automatically. If both memory
O The vehicle is driven during SA mode.
O Yes
O No
O select ringtone
4-78 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
w 06.9.14/V36-D X
O
dial eight five six nine two
O
memo pad delete
O
Bluetooth on
O
call seven six three oh one
O
setup change priority
O
go back
O
call three one nine oh two
O
call five six two eight zero
O
nine seven pause pause three oh eight
O
dial six six four three seven
O
Cancel
O
call back number
O
call star two zero nine five
O
delete phone
O
dial eight three zero five one
O
Home
O
four three pause two nine pause zero
O
delete redial number
O
phone book list names
O
call eight oh five four one
O
Correction
O
setup change ringtone
O
dial seven four oh one eight
O
setup main menu
O
Delete
O
dial nine seven two six six
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-79
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE
The system should respond correctly to all voice commands without difficulty. If problems are encountered, try the following solutions.
Where the solutions are listed by number, try each solution in turn, starting with number 1, until the problem is resolved.
Symptom
Solution
1. Ensure that the command is valid. See “List of voice commands” earlier in this section.
2. Ensure that the command is spoken after the tone.
System fails to interpret the command correctly.
3. Speak clearly without pausing between words and at a level appropriate to the ambient noise level in the vehicle.
4. Ensure that the ambient noise level is not excessive (for example, windows open or defroster on). NOTE: If it is
too noisy to use the phone, it is likely that the voice commands will not be recognized.
5. If more than one command was said at a time, try saying the commands separately.
6. If the system consistently fails to recognize commands, the voice training procedure should be carried out to
improve the recognition response for the speaker. See “Speaker adaptation (SA) mode” earlier in this section.
The system consistently selects the wrong entry from the phone book.
1. Ensure that the phone book entry name requested matches what was originally stored. This can be confirmed
by using the “List Names” command. See “Phone book” earlier in this section.
2. Replace one of the names being confused with a new name.
4-80 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
INFINITI VOICE RECOGNITION SYSTEM
(models with navigation system)
INFINITI Voice Recognition allows handsfree operation of the systems equipped
on this vehicle, such as the display,
audio, climate control, phone and optional navigation systems.
To operate INFINITI Voice Recognition,
push and release the TALK
switch located on the steering wheel. Then speak
the command for the system you wish to
activate. The command given is picked up
by the microphone, and it is performed
when it is properly recognized. At this
time INFINITI Voice Recognition will provide a voice and message (in the center
display) to inform you of the command results.
COMMAND LIST
Displaying command list
If you are controlling the system by voice
commands for the first time or do not
know the appropriate voice command,
perform the following procedure for displaying the voice command list and help
list.
SAA1545
SAA1590
1. Push the INFO button on the instrument panel.
4. Highlight a category using the INFINITI
controller and push the ENTER button.
2. Highlight the “Voice Recognition” key
using the INFINITI controller and push
the ENTER button.
3. Highlight the “Command List” key
using the INFINITI controller and push
the ENTER button.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-81
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
SAA1593
5. Highlight an item using the INFINITI
controller and push the ENTER button.
6. If necessary, scroll the screen using
the INFINITI controller to view the entire list.
7. Press the BACK button to return to the
previous screen.
4-82 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
List of help commands
Navigation Help:
See the separate Navigation System Owner’s Manual.
Audio Help:
O
Music Box
COMMAND
ACTION
Music Box Play
Turns on the “Music Box” hard-disk drive audio system.
Play by Mood
Plays the specified song matching your mood.
Relaxing Music
Plays the specified relaxing music.
Lively Music
Plays the specified lively music.
Slow Music
Plays the specified slow music.
Upbeat Music
Plays the specified upbeat music.
Play by Category
Plays the specified song in the specified category.
My Favorites
Plays your favorite song.
Rarely Played
Plays a rarely played song.
Hit Songs
Plays the specified hit song.
Kids’ Songs
Plays the specified song for children.
Music Box OFF
Turns on the “Music Box” off.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-83
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
O
Radio
COMMAND
Radio Play
ACTION
Turns the radio on, selecting the station and band last played.
Radio AM
Turns to the AM band, selecting the station last played.
Radio FM
Turns to the FM band, selecting the station last played.
Tune <87.7 - 107.9>
Tunes to the specified FM frequency.
Tune <530 - 1710>
Tunes to the specified AM frequency.
Preset <A - C> <1 - 6>
Switches directly to the specified preset station in the specified preset bank.
Preset <A - C>
Switches directly to the specified preset station in the specified preset bank.
Preset <1 - 6>
Switches directly to the specified preset bank.
Radio OFF
Turns the radio off.
Radio Menu
Displays the radio menu.
O
Satellite
COMMAND
ACTION
Satellite Radio
Turns the SAT radio on, selecting the station and band last played.
Satellite Radio Channel <1 - 255>
Tunes to the specified SAT frequency.
Preset <A - C> <1 - 6>
Switches directly to the specified preset station in the specified preset bank.
Preset <A - C>
Switches directly to the specified preset station in the specified preset bank.
Preset <1 - 6>
Switches directly to the specified preset bank.
4-84 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
Radio OFF
Turns the radio off.
Radio Menu
Displays the radio menu.
O
CD
COMMAND
ACTION
CD Play
Starts to play a CD.
Track <1 - 512>
Switches to the specified track.
Folder <1 - 255>
Selects the specified MP3 folder and plays the first file.
Folder <1 - 255> Track <1 - 512>
Switches to the specified track on the specified MP3 folder.
CD OFF
Stops the CD playback.
CD Text
Displays the information about the track currently being played.
CD Menu
Displays the CD menu.
O
Changer
COMMAND
ACTION
CD Changer Play
Starts to play the CD changer.
Disc <1 - 6>
Switches to the specified CD and plays the first file.
Track <1 - 99>
Switches to the specified track.
Disc <1 - 6> Track <1 - 99>
Switches to the specified track in the specified CD.
CD Changer OFF
Stops the CD playback.
CD Changer Menu
Displays the CD menu.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-85
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
O
Audio
COMMAND
ACTION
Audio Play
Turns the audio system on.
Audio OFF
Turns the audio system off.
O
CF
COMMAND
ACTION
Compact Flash Play
Starts to play the files saved in the CompactFlash card.
Track <1 - 512>
Switches to the specified track.
Folder <1 - 255>
Selects the specified folder in the CompactFlash card and plays the first file.
Folder <1 - 255> Track <1 - 512>
Switches to the specified track in the specified folder in the CompactFlash card.
Compact Flash OFF
Stops the playback of the CompactFlash card.
Compact Flash Text
Displays the information about the file currently being played.
Compact Flash Menu
Displays the CompactFlash menu.
4-86 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
Phone Help:
COMMAND
Phone Redial
ACTION
Redials the phone number last dialed.
Phone Dial
Dials the phone number given in the command.
Phone Dial <Phone number>
Dials the phone number given in the command. Speak the phone number in one sequence. The number is automatically dialed.
Phonebook
Shows the first page of the “Phonebook” list.
Phonebook <Voicetag>
Dials the phone number registered in the specified “voicetag”.
Outgoing Calls
Shows the outgoing call history (1 to 5).
Incoming Calls
Shows the incoming call history (1 to 5).
Phone Select
Selects another cellular phone registered in the system.
Play Phonebook
Outputs the “Voicetags” registered in the system.
Climate Control Help:
COMMAND
ACTION
Climate Control
Turns the climate control system on and operates it in the AUTO mode.
Climate Control OFF
Turns the climate control system off.
Temperature <60 - 90>
Sets the climate control temperature to the value given in the command.
Driver Temperature <60 - 90>
Sets the driver’s side temperature to the value given in the command.
Passenger Temperature <60 - 90>
Sets the passenger’s side temperature to the value given in the command.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-87
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
Others Help:
O
Vehicle
COMMAND
ACTION
Fuel Economy
Displays the Fuel Economy screen.
Maintenance
Displays the Maintenance screen.
Status
Displays the Status screen.
O
Help
COMMAND
Help
ACTION
Displays the command list.
4-88 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
O
Help on Speaking
Displays useful tips for how to correctly speak commands in order for
them to be properly recognized by the
system.
O
Voice Recognition Settings
Displays the description of voice recognition settings.
O
Adapting the System to Your Voice
Simulates an example of the operation
to adapt the system to your voice.
4. Highlight an item using the INFINITI
controller and push the ENTER button.
For the items “Finding Points of Interest”,
“Using the Address Book” and “Finding a
Street Address”, refer to the separate
Navigation system Owner’s Manual.
Available items:
USING THE SYSTEM
O
Initialization
SAA1594
Displaying user guide
You can confirm how to use voice commands by displaying a simplified User
Guide or by displaying simulated voice
command operations.
SAA1595
Displays the simplified User Guide describing how to operate the voice recognition system.
1. Push the INFO button on the instrument panel.
2. Highlight the “Voice Recognition” key
using the INFINITI controller and push
the ENTER button.
3. Highlight the “User Guide” key using
the INFINITI controller and push the
ENTER button.
Getting Started
O
Placing Calls
Simulates voice commands to make a
phone call by voice command operation.
When the ignition switch is pushed to the
ON position, INFINITI Voice Recognition is
initialized, which takes a few seconds.
When completed, the system is ready to
accept voice commands. If the TALK
switch is pushed before the initialization completes, a beep sounds.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-89
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
Before starting
To get the best performance out of
INFINITI Voice Recognition, observe the
following:
O
Keep the interior of the vehicle as
quiet as possible. Close the windows
to eliminate the surrounding noises
(traffic noises, vibration sounds, etc.),
which may prevent the system from
recognizing the voice commands correctly.
O
When the climate control is in the
AUTO mode, the fan speed decreases
automatically for easy recognition.
O
Wait until a tone sounds before
speaking a command.
O
Speak in a natural voice without pausing between words.
SAA1588
Giving voice command
1. Push
and
release
the
TALK
switch located on the steering
wheel.
SAA1589
2. A list of commands appears on the
screen, and the system announces,
“Please say a command”.
3. After the tone sounds and the icon on
the screen changes from
to
, speak “Help”, “Voice help” or
“Command list”.
4-90 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
O
The list displayed can be scrolled by
tilting the ENTER switch on the
steering wheel.
O
If the command is not recognized, the
system announces, “Please say
again”. Repeat the command in a clear
voice.
O
Push the BACK button once to return
to the previous screen.
O
If you want to cancel the command,
switch
push and hold the TALK
for 1 second. The message “Voice canceled” will be announced.
SAA1590
4. The system confirms the recognized
command, and a list of command list
categories appears.
O
5. Locate your desired voice command in
the list using the INFINITI controller.
Selecting a category lists its voice
commands.
O
6. Push the TALK
the command.
switch and enter
Operating tips
O
Voice commands cannot be accepted
when the icon is
.
Push the TALK
switch again to
pause the operation. Push the TALK
switch to restart the operation.
If you want to adjust the volume of the
system feedback, push the volume
control buttons (+ or −) on the
steering wheel or use the audio
system volume knob while the system
is making an announcement.
How to speak numbers
INFINITI Voice Recognition requires a certain way to speak numbers in voice commands. Refer to the following examples.
(General rule: Either “zero” or “oh” can
be used for “0”).
Radio frequencies:
Speak radio frequencies according to the
following examples:
O
930 kHz
— “Tune nine thirty AM.”
— “Tune nine thirty.”
O
1000 kHz
— “Ten hundred.”
O
1040 kHz
— “Tune ten forty.”
O
1710 kHz
— “Tune seventeen ten.”
O
97.9 MHz
— “Tune ninety seven point nine.”
O
100.5 MHz
— “Tune one hundred point five.”
O
101.1 MHz
— “Tune one oh one point one FM.”
Temperatures (climate control):
Speak temperatures according to the following examples:
O
74°F
— “Temperature seventy four.”
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-91
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
O
O
21.5°C
— “Temperature twenty one point
five.”
— “Temperature twenty one and a
half.”
19.0°C
— “Temperature nineteen point zero.”
— “Temperature nineteen point oh.”
— “Temperature nineteen.”
Phone numbers:
Speak phone numbers according to the
following examples:
O
1-800-662-6200
Personal vocabulary (voicetags)
INFINITI Voice Recognition provides the
function called “voicetags,” which can be
associated with the phone and the navigation system (if so equipped). Using
your own voice, 40 voicetags can be registered in the “Phonebook” (phone) and
10 locations can be registered in the “Address Book” (navigation system).
See “Bluetooth
Hands-Free Phone
System” earlier in this section and/or the
separate Navigation System Owner’s
Manual (if so equipped) for the method of
“voicetag” registration.
— “Dial one eight oh oh six six two
six two oh oh.”
— “Dial one eight hundred six six two
six two oh oh.”
— “Dial one eight zero zero six six
two oh oh.”
Note 1: For the best voice recognition
phone dialing results, say phone numbers
as single digits.
Note 2: You cannot say 555-6000 as “five
five five six thousands”.
SAA1601
VOICE COMMAND LEARNING
FUNCTION
The voice recognition system has a function to learn the user’s voice for better
voice recognition performance. The
system can memorize the voices of up to
three persons.
Having the system learn the
user’s voice
1. Push the SETTING button on the instrument panel, highlight the “Others”
key on the display and then push the
ENTER button.
4-92 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
2. Highlight the “Voice Recognition” key
and then push the ENTER button.
3. Highlight the “Voice Command
Learning” key and then push the
ENTER button.
SAA1606
SAA1605
4. Select the user whose voice is memorized by the system and push the
ENTER button.
5. Select a category to be learned by the
system from the following list and
then push the ENTER button.
O Audio
O Phone
O Vehicle Info.
O Others
The voice commands in the category
are displayed.
6. Select a voice command and then
push the ENTER button.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-93
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
The voice recognition system starts.
If the system has learned the command
correctly, the voice command indicator on
the screen turns on.
SAA1607
7. The system requests that you repeat a
command after a tone.
8. After the tone sounds and the icon on
the screen changes from
to
, speak the command that the
system requested.
9. When the system has recognized the
voice command, the voice of the user
is learned.
Push the
switch or BACK button to
return to the previous screen.
4-94 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
w 06.9.21/V36-D X
Continuous Learning:
When this item is turned to ON, you can
have the system learn the voice commands in succession, without selecting
commands one by one.
SAA1608
Learning function settings
Edit Name:
Edit the user name using the keypad displayed on the screen.
Store Result:
When this item is turned to ON, the voice
recognition system can easily recognize
the user’s voice that it has learned.
Reset Result:
Resets the user’s voice that the voice recognition system has learned.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-95
w 06.9.14/V36-D X
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE
The system should respond correctly to all voice commands without difficulty. If problems are encountered, follow the solutions given
in this guide for the appropriate error.
Where the solutions are listed by number, try each solution in turn, starting with number one, until the problem is resolved.
Symptom/error message
Solution
Displays “COMMAND NOT REC1. Ensure that the command format is valid, see Command list in this section.
OGNIZED” or the system fails to 2. Speak clearly without pausing between words and at a level appropriate to the ambient noise level.
interpret the command correctly.
3. Ensure that the ambient noise level is not excessive, for example, windows open or defrost on.
NOTE:
If it is too noisy to use the phone, it is likely that voice commands will not be recognized.
4. If optional words of the command have been omitted, then the command should be tried with these in place.
The system consistently selects 1. Ensure that the voicetag requested matches what was originally stored. This can be confirmed by giving the Radio Directory or
the wrong voicetag.
Phone Directory command.
2. Replace one of the voicetags being confused with a different voicetag.
4-96 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
MEMO
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-97
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
5 Starting and driving
Precautions when starting and driving.............. 5-2
Exhaust gas (Carbon monoxide) .................. 5-2
Three-way catalyst....................................... 5-3
Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) ..... 5-3
Avoiding collision and rollover..................... 5-5
Drinking alcohol/drugs and driving ............. 5-6
All-wheel drive (AWD) driving safety
precautions (For AWD models) ................... 5-6
Push-button ignition switch .............................. 5-7
Push-button ignition switch positions ......... 5-8
Intelligent Key battery discharge ................. 5-8
Before starting the engine ................................ 5-9
Starting the engine........................................... 5-9
Driving the vehicle .......................................... 5-10
Automatic transmission.............................. 5-10
Manual transmission ................................. 5-15
Parking brake.................................................. 5-16
Cruise control .................................................. 5-17
Precautions on cruise control ..................... 5-17
Cruise control operations ........................... 5-18
Intelligent cruise control (ICC) system (if so
equipped)........................................................ 5-19
Selecting the vehicle-to-vehicle distance
control mode ............................................. 5-20
Vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode ...
Precautions on vehicle-to-vehicle distance
control mode ............................................
Vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode
operation...................................................
Conventional (fixed speed) cruise control
mode.........................................................
Preview function (for Intelligent Cruise
Control system equipped models) ..............
Break-in schedule ...........................................
Increasing fuel economy..................................
All-wheel drive (AWD) (if so equipped) ............
Parking/parking on hills .................................
Power steering ................................................
Brake system ..................................................
Braking precautions...................................
Brake assist....................................................
Brake assist ..............................................
Preview function (Intelligent Cruise
Control system equipped models) .............
Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) .................
Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system ...........
Four-Wheel Active Steer (4WAS) system (if so
equipped) ......................................................
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
5-21
5-21
5-23
5-36
5-41
5-41
5-41
5-42
5-44
5-45
5-45
5-45
5-46
5-46
5-46
5-49
5-50
5-52
Cold weather driving .......................................
Freeing a frozen door lock .........................
Antifreeze ..................................................
Battery.......................................................
Draining of coolant water ..........................
5-52
5-52
5-52
5-52
5-52
Tire equipment ..........................................
Special winter equipment ..........................
Driving on snow or ice...............................
Engine block heater (if so equipped) .........
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
5-53
5-53
5-53
5-54
PRECAUTIONS WHEN STARTING AND
DRIVING
WARNING
O
O
Do not leave children or adults who
would normally require the support of
others alone in your vehicle. Pets should
not be left alone either. They could accidentally injure themselves or others
through inadvertent operation of the vehicle. Also, on hot, sunny days, temperatures in a closed vehicle could quickly
become high enough to cause severe or
possibly fatal injuries to people or animals.
Closely supervise children when they
are around cars to prevent them from
playing and becoming locked in the
trunk where they could be seriously injured. Keep the car locked, with the
trunk closed, when not in use, and prevent children’s access to car keys.
EXHAUST GAS (Carbon monoxide)
to circulate the air.
WARNING
Do not breathe exhaust gases; they contain
colorless and odorless carbon monoxide.
Carbon monoxide is dangerous. It can cause
unconsciousness or death.
O
If you suspect that exhaust fumes are
entering the vehicle, drive with all windows fully open, and have the vehicle inspected immediately.
O
Do not run the engine in closed spaces
such as a garage.
O
Do not park the vehicle with the engine
running for any extended length of time.
O
Keep the trunk lid closed while driving,
otherwise exhaust gases could be drawn
into the passenger compartment. If you
must drive with the trunk lid open,
follow these precautions:
1. Open all the windows.
2. Set the
air recirculation button
to off and the fan control at 4 (high)
O
If electrical wiring or other cable connections must pass to a trailer through the
seal on the trunk lid or the body, follow
the manufacturer’s recommendation to
prevent carbon monoxide entry into the
vehicle.
O
If a special body, camper or other equipment is added for recreational or other
usage, follow the manufacturer’s recommendation to prevent carbon monoxide
entry into the vehicle. Do not occupy
these areas while the engine is running
even if the vehicle is parked. Some recreational vehicle appliances such as
stoves, refrigerator, heaters, etc. may
also generate carbon monoxide.
O
The exhaust system and body should be
inspected by a qualified mechanic whenever:
a. The vehicle is raised for service.
b. You suspect that exhaust fumes are
entering
into
the
passenger
compartment.
5-2 Starting and driving
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
d. You have had an accident involving
damage to the exhaust system, underbody, or rear of the vehicle.
THREE-WAY CATALYST
O
Do not use leaded gasoline. Deposits
from leaded gasoline seriously reduce
the three-way catalyst’s ability to help
reduce exhaust pollutants.
O
Keep your engine tuned up. Malfunctions in the ignition, fuel injection, or
electrical systems can cause overrich
fuel flow into the three-way catalyst,
causing it to overheat. Do not keep
driving if the engine misfires, or if noticeable loss of performance or other unusual operating conditions are detected.
Have the vehicle inspected promptly by
an INFINITI dealer.
The three-way catalyst is an emission
control device installed in the exhaust
system. Exhaust gases in the three-way
catalyst are burned at high temperatures
to help reduce pollutants.
WARNING
O
The exhaust gas and the exhaust system
are very hot. Keep people, animals or
flammable materials away from the exhaust system components.
O
Do not stop or park the vehicle over
flammable materials such as dry grass,
waste paper or rags. They may ignite
and cause a fire.
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING
SYSTEM (TPMS)
CAUTION
c. You notice a change in the sound of
the exhaust system.
O
Avoid driving with an extremely low fuel
level. Running out of fuel could cause
the engine to misfire, damaging the
three-way catalyst.
O
Do not race the engine while warming it
up.
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked monthly when
cold and inflated to the inflation pressure
recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has
tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should determine
the proper tire inflation pressure for those
tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle
has been equipped with a tire pressure
monitoring system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when
one or more of your tires is significantly
under-inflated. Accordingly, when the low
tire pressure telltale illuminates, you
should stop and check your tires as soon
as possible, and inflate them to the
proper pressure. Driving on a significantly
under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Underinflation also reduces fuel efficiency and
tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s
handling and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substi-
Starting and driving 5-3
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
tute for proper tire maintenance, and it is
the driver’s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation
has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with
a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate
when the system is not operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is
combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated. This sequence will
continue upon subsequent vehicle
start-ups as long as the malfunction exists. When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to
detect or signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for
a variety of reasons, including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or
wheels on the vehicle that prevent the
TPMS from functioning properly. Always
check the TPMS malfunction telltale after
replacing one or more tires or wheels on
your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow
the TPMS to continue to function properly.
Additional information
O The TPMS does not monitor the tire
pressure of the spare tire.
O The TPMS will activate only when the vehicle is driven at speeds above 16 MPH
(25 km/h). Also, this system may not detect a sudden drop in tire pressure (for
example a flat tire while driving).
O The low tire pressure warning light
does not automatically turn off when
the tire pressure is adjusted. After the
tire is inflated to the recommended
pressure, the vehicle must be driven
at speeds above 16 MPH (25 km/h) to
activate the TPMS and turn off the low
tire pressure warning light. Use a tire
pressure gauge to check the tire pressure.
O Tire pressure rises and falls depending on the heat caused by the vehicle’s operation and the outside temperature. Low outside temperature can
lower the temperature of the air inside
the tire which can cause a lower tire
inflation pressure. This may cause the
low tire pressure warning light to illuminate. If the warning light illuminates
in low ambient temperature, check the
tire pressure for all four tires.
For additional information, see “Low tire
pressure warning light” in the “2. Instruments and controls” section and “Tire
pressure monitoring system (TPMS)” in
the “6. In case of emergency” section.
WARNING
O
If the low tire pressure warning light illuminates or LOW PRESSURE information
is displayed on the monitor screen while
driving, avoid sudden steering maneuvers or abrupt braking, reduce vehicle
speed, pull off the road to a safe location
and stop the vehicle as soon as possible.
Serious vehicle damage could occur and
may lead to an accident and could result
in serious personal injury. Check the tire
pressure for all four tires. Adjust the tire
pressure to the recommended COLD tire
pressure shown on the Tire and Loading
Information label to turn the low tire
pressure warning light OFF. If the light
still comes on while driving after adjusting the tire pressure, a tire may be
flat. If you have a flat tire, replace it with
a spare tire as soon as possible. (See
“Flat tire” in the “6. In case of emergency” section for changing a flat tire.)
5-4 Starting and driving
w 07.2.6/V36-D X
O
O
O
When a spare tire is mounted or a wheel
is replaced, tire pressure will not be indicated, the TPMS will not function and the
low tire pressure warning light will flash
for approximately 1 minute. The light will
remain on after 1 minute. Contact your
INFINITI dealer as soon as possible for tire
replacement and/or system resetting.
Replacing tires with those not originally
specified by INFINITI could affect the
proper operation of the TPMS.
Do not inject any tire liquid or aerosol tire
sealant into the tires, as this may cause a
malfunction of the tire pressure sensors.
Some devices and transmitters may temporarily interfere with the operation of the
TPMS and cause the low tire pressure
warning light to illuminate. Some examples are:
O Facilities or electric devices using
similar radio frequencies are near the
vehicle.
O If a transmitter set to similar frequencies is being used in or near the vehicle.
O If a computer (or similar equipment) or
a DC/AC converter is being used in or
near the vehicle.
FCC Notice:
CAUTION
O
O
The low tire pressure warning system
may not function properly when the
wheels are equipped with tire chains or
the wheels are buried in snow.
Do not place metalized film or any metal
parts (antenna, etc.) on the windows.
This may cause poor reception of the signals from the tire pressure sensors, and
the TPMS will not function properly.
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to
operate the equipment.
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules and RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) This device may not cause
harmful interference, and (2) this device
must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.
AVOIDING COLLISION AND
ROLLOVER
WARNING
Failure to operate this vehicle in a safe and
prudent manner may result in loss of control
or an accident.
Be alert and drive defensively at all times.
Obey all traffic regulations. Avoid excessive speed, high speed cornering, or sudden steering maneuvers, because these
driving practices could cause you to lose
control of your vehicle. As with any vehicle, a loss of control could result in a collision with other vehicles or objects, or
cause the vehicle to rollover, particularly if
the loss of control causes the vehicle to
slide sideways. Be attentive at all times,
and avoid driving when tired. Never drive
when under the influence of alcohol or
drugs (including prescription or over-thecounter drugs which may cause drowsiness). Always wear your seat belt as outlined in the “Seat belts” section of this
manual, and also instruct your passengers to do so.
Seat belts help reduce the risk of injury in
collisions and rollovers. In a rollover
Starting and driving 5-5
w 07.2.19/V36-D X
crash, an unbelted or improperly belted
person is significantly more likely to be injured or killed than a person properly
wearing a seat belt.
DRINKING ALCOHOL/
DRUGS AND DRIVING
WARNING
Never drive under the influence of alcohol or
drugs. Alcohol in the bloodstream reduces
coordination, delays reaction time and impairs judgement. Driving after drinking alcohol increases the likelihood of being involved in an accident injuring yourself and
others. Additionally, if you are injured in an
accident, alcohol can increase the severity
of the injury.
INFINITI is committed to safe driving. You
must not drive under the influence of alcohol. Every year thousands of people are
injured or killed in alcohol related accidents. Although the local laws vary on
what is considered to be legally intoxicated, the fact is that alcohol affects all
people differently and most people underestimate the effects of alcohol.
Remember, drinking and driving don’t
mix!
And that’s true for drugs too (over the
counter, prescription, and illegal drugs).
Don’t drive if your ability to operate your
vehicle is impaired by alcohol, drugs, or
some other physical condition.
(rough road) use. Do not drive on sandy
or muddy roads that tires may get stuck
in.
O
For AWD equipped vehicles, do not attempt to raise two wheels off the ground
and shift the transmission to any D
(drive) or R (reverse) position. Doing so
may result in transmission damage or
unexpected vehicle movement which
could result in serious vehicle damage
or personal injury.
O
Do not attempt to test an AWD equipped
vehicle on a 2-wheel dynamometer, even
if the other two wheels are raised of the
ground. Doing so may result in transmission damage or unexpected vehicle
movement which could result in serious
vehicle damage or personal injury.
O
When a wheel is off the ground due to an
unlevel surface, do not spin the wheel
excessively.
ALL-WHEEL DRIVE (AWD) DRIVING
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS (For AWD
models)
WARNING
O
Do not drive beyond the performance capability of the tires, even with AWD engaged. Accelerating quickly, sharp
steering maneuvers or sudden braking
may cause loss of control.
O
Always use tires of the same type, size,
brand, construction (bias, bias-belted or
radial), and tread pattern on all four
wheels. Install tire chains on the rear
wheels when driving on slippery roads
and drive carefully.
O
This vehicle is not designed for offroad
5-6 Starting and driving
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH
The ignition switch is equipped with an
anti-theft steering lock device.
WARNING
The ignition lock is designed so that the
ignition switch position cannot be
switched to OFF until the selector lever is
moved to the P (Park) position.
Do not operate the push-button ignition
switch while driving the vehicle except in an
emergency. (The engine will stop when the
ignition switch is pushed 3 consecutive
times or the ignition switch is pushed and
held for more than 2 seconds.) If the engine
stops while the vechicle is being driven, this
could lead to a crash and serious injury.
Before operating the push-button ignition
switch, be sure to move the selector lever
to the P (Park) position (for automatic
transmission model) or the shift lever to
the N (Neutral) position (for manual transmission model).
When the ignition switch cannot be
pushed toward the LOCK position, proceed as follows:
1. Move the selector lever into the P position.
SSD0597
When the ignition switch is pushed
without depressing the brake pedal (automatic transmission model) or the clutch
pedal (manual transmission model), the
ignition switch position will change as follows:
O Push center once to change to ACC.
O Push center two times to change to ON.
O Push center three times to change to
OFF. (No position illuminates.)
O Push center four times to return to ACC.
O Open or close any door to return to
LOCK during the OFF position.
2. Push the ignition switch. The ignition
switch position will change to the ON
position.
3. Push the ignition switch again to the
LOCK position.
The selector lever can be moved from the P
position if the ignition switch is in the ON
position and the brake pedal is depressed.
In order for the steering wheel to be
locked, it must be turned about 1/8 of a
right or left turn from the straight up position.
To lock the steering wheel, push the ignition switch to the LOCK position. To unlock
the steering wheel, push the ignition
switch. If the steering lock release mal-
Starting and driving 5-7
w 06.9.15/V36-D X
function indicator appears on the dot matrix liquid crystal display, push the pushbutton ignition switch again while lightly
turning the steering wheel right and left.
See “Dot matrix liquid crystal display” in
the “2. Instruments and controls” section.
ACC (Accessories):
If the battery of the vehicle is discharged,
the push-button ignition switch cannot be
turned from the LOCK position.
This position turns on the ignition system
and electrical accessories.
Some indicators and warnings for operation are displayed on the dot matrix liquid
crystal display between the speedometer
and tachometer. See “Dot matrix liquid
crystal display” in the “2. Instruments
and controls” section.
PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH
POSITIONS
LOCK (Normal parking position):
The ignition switch can only be locked in
this position.
The ignition switch will be unlocked when
it is pushed to the ACC position while carrying the Intelligent Key or with the Intelligent Key inserted in the port.
This position activates electrical accessories such as the radio, when the engine is
not running.
ON (Normal operating position):
OFF:
The engine can be turned off without
locking the steering wheel.
The ignition lock is designed so that the
ignition switch cannot be pushed to the
LOCK position until the selector lever is
moved to the P position.
CAUTION
Do not leave the vehicle with the pushbutton ignition switch in ACC or ON positions when the engine is not running for an
extended period. This can discharge the battery.
SSD0595
INTELLIGENT KEY BATTERY
DISCHARGE
If the battery of the Intelligent Key is alB of the
most discharged, the guide light q
A blinks and the indiIntelligent Key port q
cator appears on the dot matrix liquid
crystal display. See “Dot matrix liquid
crystal display” in the “2. Instruments
and controls” section.
In this case, inserting the Intelligent Key
1 allows you to start the
into the port q
engine. Make sure that the key ring side
faces backward as illustrated. Insert the
5-8 Starting and driving
w 06.9.14/V36-D X
BEFORE STARTING THE ENGINE
STARTING THE ENGINE
Intelligent Key in the port until it is
latched and secured.
O
Make sure the area around the vehicle
is clear.
1. Apply the parking brake.
Pull the Intelligent Key to remove it from
the port.
O
Make sure the periodical maintenance
is being performed.
NOTE:
O
Make sure all windows and lights are
clean.
O
Make sure of the proper inflation of
tires and their conditions.
O
Make sure to lock all doors.
O
Make sure to adjust seats and head
restraints.
O
Make sure to adjust inside and outside mirrors.
O
Make sure to fasten seat belts and direct all passengers to do likewise.
O
Make sure to check the operation of
warning lights when the ignition
switch is pushed to the ON position.
The Intelligent Key port does not charge
the Intelligent Key battery. If you see the
low battery indicator, replace the battery
as soon as possible. See “Intelligent Key
battery replacement” in the “8. Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section.
CAUTION
O
O
O
Never place anything except the Intelligent Key in the Intelligent Key port.
Doing so may cause damage to the
equipment.
Make sure the Intelligent Key is in the
correct direction when inserting it to the
Intelligent Key port. The engine may not
start if it is in the wrong direction.
Remove the Intelligent Key from the Intelligent Key port after the ignition
switch is pushed to the OFF position.
2. Automatic transmission models:
Move the selector lever to the P or N
position. (P is recommended.)
The starter is designed so that it does
not operate unless the selector lever
is in either of the above positions.
Manual transmission models:
Move the shift lever to the N position.
Depress the clutch pedal fully to the
floor.
The starter is designed so that it does
not operate unless the clutch pedal is
fully depressed.
3. Push the ignition switch to the ON position. Depress the brake pedal and
push the ignition switch to start the
engine.
To start the engine immediately, push
and release the ignition switch while
depressing the brake pedal with the
ignition switch in any position.
If the engine starts, but fails to run, repeat the above procedure.
O
If the engine is very hard to start in extremely cold weather or when restarting,
Starting and driving 5-9
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
DRIVING THE VEHICLE
depress the accelerator pedal a little (approximately 1/3 to the floor) and while
holding, push the ignition switch for up to
15 seconds to crank the engine. Release
the accelerator pedal when the engine
starts.
O
If the engine is very hard to start because
it is flooded, depress the accelerator pedal
all the way to the floor and hold it. Crank
the engine for 5 to 6 seconds. After cranking the engine, release the accelerator
pedal. Crank the engine with your foot off
the accelerator pedal by depressing the
brake pedal and pushing the push-button
ignition switch to start the engine. If the
engine starts, but fails to run, repeat the
above procedure.
CAUTION
Do not operate the starter for more than 15
seconds at a time. If the engine does not
start, push the ignition switch to OFF and
wait 10 seconds before cranking again, otherwise the starter could be damaged.
4. Warm-up
Allow the engine to idle for at least 30
seconds after starting. Do not race the
engine while warming it up. Drive at
moderate speed for a short distance
first, especially in cold weather. In
cold weather, keep the engine running
for a minimum of 2 - 3 minutes before
shutting it off. Starting and stopping
the engine over a short period of time
may make the vehicle more difficult to
start.
5. To stop the engine, shift the selector
lever to the P position (Automatic
transmission models) or move the
shift lever to the N position (Manual
transmission models), and push the
ignition switch to the OFF position.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
5 speed automatic transmission
The automatic transmission in your vehicle is electronically controlled by a
transmission control module to produce
maximum efficiency and smooth operation.
Shown on the following pages are the recommended operating procedures for this
transmission. Follow these procedures for
maximum vehicle performance and
driving enjoyment.
Starting the vehicle
After starting the engine, fully depress the
foot brake pedal and push the selector lever button before shifting the selector
lever to the R (Reverse), N (Neutral), D
(Drive), DS (Drive Sport) or Manual shift
mode position. Be sure the vehicle is fully
stopped before attempting to shift the selector lever.
This automatic transmission model is designed so that the foot brake pedal must
be depressed before shifting from P (Park)
to any drive position while the ignition
switch position is ON.
The selector lever cannot be moved out of
5-10 Starting and driving
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
the P (Park) position and into any of the
other gear positions if the ignition switch
is pushed to the LOCK, OFF or ACC position.
1. Keep the foot brake pedal depressed
and push the selector lever button to
shift into a driving gear.
Never shift to P (Park) or R (Reverse)
while vehicle is moving forward. Never
shift to P (Park), D (Drive) or DS (Drive
Sport) while vehicle is moving rearward.
Failure to do so could cause you to lose
control and have an accident.
2. Release the parking brake and foot
brake, then gradually start the vehicle
in motion.
CAUTION
WARNING
O
Do not depress the accelerator pedal
while shifting from P (Park) or N (Neutral) to R (Reverse), D (Drive), DS (Drive
Sport) or manual shift mode. Always depress the brake pedal until shifting is
completed. Failure to do so could cause
you to lose control and have an accident.
O
Cold engine idle speed is high, so use
caution when shifting into a forward or
reverse gear before the engine has
warmed up.
O
On slippery roads, do not downshift.
This may cause a loss of control.
O
When stopping the vehicle on an uphill
grade, do not hold the vehicle by depressing
the accelerator pedal. The foot brake should
be used for this purpose.
SSD0596
Shifting
To move the selector lever,
: Push the button while depressing
the brake pedal,
: Push the button,
: Just move the selector lever.
After starting the engine, fully depress the
brake pedal and shift the selector lever
from P (Park) to R (Reverse), N (Neutral), D
(Drive), DS (Drive Sport) or Manual shift
mode position.
Push the button to shift into P (Park) or R
(Reverse). All other positions can be se-
Starting and driving 5-11
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
lected without pushing the button.
WARNING
Apply the parking brake if the selector lever
is in any position while the engine is not running. Failure to do so could cause the vehicle
to move unexpectedly or roll away and result
in serious personal injury or property
damage.
Sport) position allows you to enjoy comfortable driving on a winding road and
feel smooth acceleration or deceleration
on a hilly road by moving in a lower gear
automatically.
completely stopped.
R (Reverse):
Use this position to back up. Always be
sure the vehicle is completely stopped before selecting R (Reverse). The brake pedal
must be depressed and the selector lever
button pushed in to move the selector
lever from P (Park), N (Neutral) or any drive
position to R (Reverse).
P (Park):
N (Neutral):
Use this selector position when the vehicle
is parked or when starting the engine.
Make sure the vehicle is completely
stopped. The brake pedal must be depressed and the selector lever button
pushed in to move the selector lever from N
(Neutral) or any drive position to P (Park).
Apply the parking brake. When parking on
a hill, apply the parking brake first, then
move the selector lever to the P (Park) position.
Neither forward nor reverse gear is engaged. The engine can be started in this
position. You may shift to N (Neutral) and
restart a stalled engine while the vehicle
is moving.
CAUTION
Use this position only when the vehicle is
When canceling the DS mode, return the
selector lever to the D (Drive) position.
The transmission returns to the normal
driving mode.
D (Drive):
Use this position for all normal forward
driving.
DS (Drive Sport) mode
When
the D
gate,
(Drive
the selector lever is shifted from
(Drive) position to the manual shift
the transmission enters the DS
Sport) mode.
Moving the selector lever to the DS (Drive
5-12 Starting and driving
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
B . The transmisside paddle shifter (−) q
sion shifts to the lower range.
When canceling the manual shift mode,
return the selector lever to the D position.
The transmission returns to the normal
driving mode.
SSD0599
Manual shift mode
When the selector lever is in the DS (Drive
Sport) position, the transmission is ready
for the manual shift mode. Shift ranges
can be selected manually by moving the
selector lever up or down, or pulling the
right-side or left-side paddle shifter.
When shifting up, move the selector lever
to the + (up) side or pull the right-side
A . The transmission
paddle shifter (+) q
shifts to the higher range.
When shifting down, move the selector lever to the − (down) side or pull the left-
When you pull the paddle shifter while in
the D (Drive) position, the transmission
will shift to the upper or lower range temporarily. The transmission will automatically return to the D (Drive) position after
a short period of time. If you want to return to the D (Drive) position manually,
pull and hold the paddle shifter for about
1.5 seconds.
In the manual shift mode, the shift range is
displayed on the position indicator in the
meter.
Shift ranges up or down one by one as
follows:
M
M
1
→
←
M
2
→
←
M
3
→
←
M
4
→
←
M
5
M
4 (4th):
For driving up or down long slopes where
engine braking would be advantageous.
M
3 (3rd) and
M
2 (2nd):
Use for hill climbing or engine braking on
downhill grades.
M
1 (1st):
Use this position when climbing steep
hills slowly or driving slowly through
deep snow, or for maximum engine
braking on steep downhill grades.
O
Remember not to drive at high speeds
for extended periods of time in lower
than 5th gear. This reduces fuel
economy.
O
Moving the selector lever rapidly to
the same side twice will shift the
ranges in succession.
O
In the manual shift mode, the transmission may not shift to the selected gear.
This helps maintain driving performance and reduces the chance of vehicle damage or loss of control.
O
In the manual shift mode, the transmission automatically shifts down to 1st
gear before the vehicle comes to a
5 (5th):
Use this position for all normal forward driving.
Starting and driving 5-13
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
A using a
3. Remove the shift lock cover q
suitable tool.
stop. When accelerating again, it is
necessary to shift up to the desired
range.
B as illus4. Push down the shift lock q
trated.
Accelerator downshift
— In D position —
C and
5. Push the selector lever button q
move the selector lever to N (Neutral)
D while holding down the
position q
shift lock.
For passing or hill climbing, fully depress
the accelerator pedal to the floor. This
shifts the transmission down into the
lower gear, depending on the vehicle
speed.
Push the ignition switch to the ON position to unlock the steering wheel. Now
the vehicle may be moved to the desired
location.
Fail-safe
When the fail-safe operation occurs, note
that the transmission will be locked in
any of the forward gears according to the
condition.
If the vehicle is driven under extreme conditions, such as excessive wheel spinning
and subsequent hard braking, the fail-safe
system may be activated. This will occur
even if all electrical circuits are functioning
properly. In this case, push the switch to
the OFF position and wait for 3 seconds.
Then push the ignition switch back to the
ON position. The vehicle should return to
its normal operating condition. If it does
not return to its normal operating condition, have an INFINITI dealer check the
transmission and repair if necessary.
SSD0598
Shift lock release
If the battery charge is low or discharged,
the selector lever may not be moved from
the P (Park) position even with the brake
pedal depressed and the selector lever
button pushed.
If the battery is discharged completely,
the steering wheel cannot be unlocked.
Do not move the vehicle with the steering
wheel locked.
If the lever cannot be moved out of P
(Park), have an INFINITI dealer check the
automatic transmission system as soon
as possible.
To move the selector lever, perform the
following procedure:
1. Push the ignition switch to the OFF or
LOCK position.
2. Apply the parking brake.
5-14 Starting and driving
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
shifted, a gear noise may be heard. Transmission damage could occur.
SSD0536
O
To back up, depress the shift lever and
then move it to the R (Reverse) gear after
stopping the vehicle completely.
Do not rest your foot on the clutch pedal
while driving. This may damage the
clutch.
O
Fully depress the clutch pedal before
shifting to help prevent transmission
damage.
O
Stop your vehicle completely before
shifting into R (Reverse).
O
When the vehicle is stopped for a period
of time, for example at a stop light, shift
to N (Neutral) and release the clutch
pedal with the foot brake applied.
If it is difficult to move the shift lever into
the R (Reverse) or 1st gear, shift to the N
(Neutral) position, and then release the
clutch pedal once. Fully depress the
clutch pedal again and shift into the R
(Reverse) or 1st gear.
MANUAL TRANSMISSION
WARNING
Shifting
To change gears, or when upshifting or
downshifting, fully depress the clutch
pedal, shift into the appropriate gear,
then slowly and smoothly release the
clutch.
This vehicle is equipped with a short
throw shifter manual transmission. To ensure smooth gear changes, fully depress
the clutch pedal before operating the shift
lever. If the clutch pedal is not fully depressed before the transmission is
CAUTION
Start the vehicle in 1st gear and shift to
2nd, 3rd, 4th, 5th and 6th gear in sequence according to the vehicle speed.
O
Do not downshift abruptly on slippery
roads. This may cause a loss of control.
O
Do not over-rev the engine when shifting
to a lower gear. This may cause a loss of
control or engine damage.
Suggested upshift speeds
Shown below are suggested vehicle
speeds for shifting into a higher gear.
These suggestions relate to fuel economy
and vehicle performance. Actual upshift
speeds will vary according to road conditions, the weather and individual driving
habits.
Starting and driving 5-15
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
PARKING BRAKE
For normal acceleration in low altitude areas [less than 4,000 ft (1,219 m)]:
Gear change
1st to 2nd
2nd to 3rd
3rd to 4th
4th to 5th
5th to 6th
MPH (km/h)
8 (13)
16 (25)
25 (40)
30 (50)
33 (53)
For quick acceleration in low altitude
areas or in high altitude areas [over 4,000
ft (1,219 m)]:
Gear change
1st to 2nd
2nd to 3rd
3rd to 4th
4th to 5th
5th to 6th
MPH (km/h)
15 (24)
25 (40)
40 (64)
45 (72)
50 (80)
Suggested maximum speed in
each gear
Downshift to a lower gear if the engine is
not running smoothly, or if you need to
accelerate.
Do not exceed the maximum suggested
speed (shown below) in any gear. For
level road driving, use the highest gear
suggested for that speed. Always observe
posted speed limits, and drive according
to the road conditions, which will ensure
safe operation. Do not over-rev the engine
when shifting to a lower gear as it may
cause engine damage or loss of vehicle
control.
Gear
1st
2nd
3rd
4th
5th
6th
MPH (km/h)
39 (63)
64 (103)
92 (148)
—
—
—
SPA2331
Automatic transmission models
To apply: Fully depress the parking brake
1 .
pedal q
To release:
2 .
1. Firmly apply the foot brake q
1
2. Depress the parking brake pedal q
and the parking brake will be released.
3. Before driving, be sure the brake
warning light goes out.
5-16 Starting and driving
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
CRUISE CONTROL
PRECAUTIONS ON CRUISE
CONTROL
WARNING
SPA2110
Manual transmission models
To apply: Pull the parking brake lever up
1 .
q
To release:
1. Firmly apply the foot brake.
2. Place the shift lever in the N (Neutral)
position.
O
If the cruise control system malfunctions, it will cancel automatically. The
SET indicator on the dot matrix crystal
display will then blink to warn the
driver.
O
Do not use the gear shift in place of the
parking brake. When parking, be sure
the parking brake is fully engaged.
If the engine coolant temperature becomes excessively high, the cruise
control system will be canceled automatically.
O
Do not leave children unattended in a vehicle. They could release the parking
brake and cause an accident.
If the SET indicator blinks, turn the
cruise control main switch off and
have the system checked by your
INFINITI dealer.
O
The SET indicator may sometimes blink
when the cruise control main switch is
turned
ON
while
pushing
the
RESUME/ACCELERATE, SET/COAST or
CANCEL switch. To properly set the
cruise control system, perform the
steps below in the order indicated.
O
Be sure the parking brake is fully released before driving. Failure to do so
can cause brake failure and lead to an
accident.
O
Do not release the parking brake from
outside the vehicle.
O
O
3. While pulling up on the parking brake
2 and
lever slightly, push the button q
3 .
lower the lever completely q
4. Before driving, be sure the brake
warning light goes out.
Starting and driving 5-17
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
hicle to the desired speed, push the
SET/COAST switch and release it. (The
CRUISE SET indicator will come on in the
instrument panel.) Take your foot off the
accelerator pedal. Your vehicle will maintain the set speed.
WARNING
Do not use the cruise control when driving under the following conditions:
O
when it is not possible to keep the vehicle at a set speed
O
in heavy traffic or in traffic that varies in
speed
O
on winding or hilly roads
O
on slippery roads (rain, snow, ice, etc.)
O
in very windy areas
Doing so could cause a loss of vehicle control and result in an accident.
CAUTION
On manual transmission models, do not
shift into N (Neutral) without depressing the
clutch pedal when the cruise control is set.
Should this occur, depress the clutch pedal
and turn the main switch off immediately.
Failure to do so may cause engine damage.
O
To pass another vehicle, depress the
accelerator pedal. When you release
the pedal, the vehicle will return to
the previously set speed.
O
The vehicle may not maintain the set
speed on winding or hilly roads. If this
happens, drive without the cruise control.
SSD0600
1.
2.
3.
4.
To cancel the preset speed, follow any of
these methods:
RESUME/ACCELERATE switch
SET/COAST switch
CANCEL switch
MAIN (ONzOFF) switch
a) Push the CANCEL button. The SET indicator will go out.
CRUISE CONTROL OPERATIONS
The cruise control allows driving at a
speed between 25 to 89 MPH (40 to 144
km/h) without keeping your foot on the
accelerator pedal.
b) Tap the brake pedal. The SET indicator
will go out.
c) Move the selector lever to the N (Neutral) position. The SET indicator will go
out.
To turn on the cruise control, push the
MAIN switch on. The CRUISE indicator will
come on.
d) Turn the MAIN switch off. Both the
CRUISE indicator and SET indicator will
go out.
To set cruising speed, accelerate your ve-
O
If you depress the brake pedal while
5-18 Starting and driving
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
INTELLIGENT CRUISE CONTROL (ICC)
SYSTEM (if so equipped)
pushing the RESUME/ACCELERATE or
SET/COAST switch and reset at the
cruising speed, the cruise control will
disengage. Turn the MAIN switch off
once and then turn it on again.
O
O
The cruise control will automatically
cancel if the vehicle slows more than
8 MPH (12 km/h) below the set speed.
If you depress the clutch pedal
(Manual Transmission models) or
move the selector lever to N (Neutral)
position (Automatic Transmission
models), the cruise control will be canceled.
To reset at a faster cruising speed, use one
of the following methods:
O
Depress the accelerator pedal. When
the vehicle attains the desired speed,
push and release the SET/COAST
switch.
O
Push
and
hold
the
RESUME/
ACCELERATE switch. When the vehicle
attains the speed you desire, release
the switch.
O
Push, then quickly release the
RESUME/ACCELERATE switch. Each
time you do this, the set speed will increase by about 1 MPH (1.6 km/h).
To reset at a slower cruising speed, use
one of the following methods:
O
Lightly tap the brake pedal. When the
vehicle attains the desired speed,
push the SET/COAST switch and release it.
O
Push and hold the SET/COAST switch.
Release the switch when the vehicle
slows down to the desired speed.
O
Push, then quickly release the
SET/COAST switch. Each time you do
this, the set speed will decrease by
about 1 MPH (1.6 km/h).
To resume the preset speed, push and release the RESUME/ACCELERATE switch.
The vehicle will resume the last set cruising speed when the vehicle speed is over
25 MPH (40 km/h).
The Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) system
automatically maintains a selected distance from the vehicle traveling in front of
you according to that vehicle’s speed (up
to the set speed), or at the set speed
when the road ahead is clear.
The ICC function can be set to one of two
cruise control modes:
O
Vehicle-to-vehicle
mode:
distance
control
For maintaining a selected distance
between your vehicle and the vehicle
in front of you up to the preset speed.
O
Conventional (fixed speed) cruise control mode:
For cruising at a preset speed.
WARNING
O
Always drive carefully and attentively
when using either cruise control mode.
Read and understand the Owner’s
Manual thoroughly before using the
cruise control. To avoid serious injury or
death, do not rely on the system to prevent accidents or to control the ve-
Starting and driving 5-19
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
hicle’s speed in emergency situations.
Do not use cruise control except in appropriate road and traffic conditions.
O
In the conventional (fixed speed) cruise
control mode, a warning buzzer will not
sound to warn you if you are too close to
the vehicle ahead. Pay special attention
to the distance between your vehicle
and the vehicle ahead of you or a collision could occur.
SSD0604
1. Vehicle-to-vehicle distance control
mode
2. Conventional (fixed speed) cruise control mode
A to choose the
Push the MAIN switch q
cruise control mode between the vehicle1 and
to-vehicle distance control mode q
the conventional (fixed speed) cruise con2 .
trol mode q
Always confirm the setting in the Intelligent Cruise Control system display.
For the vehicle-to-vehicle distance control
mode, see the following description. For
the conventional (fixed speed) cruise control mode, see page 5-37.
SELECTING THE
VEHICLE-TO-VEHICLE DISTANCE
CONTROL MODE
To choose the vehicle-to-vehicle distance
1 , quickly push and recontrol mode q
A .
lease the MAIN switch q
Once a control mode is activated, it
cannot be changed to the other cruise
control mode. To change the mode, push
the MAIN switch once to turn the system
off. Then push the MAIN switch again to
5-20 Starting and driving
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
PRECAUTIONS ON
VEHICLE-TO-VEHICLE DISTANCE
CONTROL MODE
turn the system back on and select the
desired cruise control mode.
VEHICLE-TO-VEHICLE DISTANCE
CONTROL MODE
The system is intended to enhance the
operation of the vehicle when following a
vehicle traveling in the same lane and direction.
In the vehicle-to-vehicle distance control
mode, the Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC)
system automatically maintains a selected distance from the vehicle traveling
in front of you according to that vehicle’s
speed (up to the set speed), or at the set
speed when the road ahead is clear.
With ICC, the driver can maintain the
same speed as other vehicles without the
constant need to adjust the set speed as
you would with a normal cruise control
system.
Type A
SSD0624
A detects a slower
If the distance sensor q
moving vehicle ahead, the system will reduce the vehicle speed so that your vehicle follows the vehicle in front at the selected distance.
The system automatically controls the
throttle and applies the brakes (up to
25% of vehicle braking power) if necessary.
The detection range of the sensor is approximately 390 ft (120 m) ahead.
WARNING
O
Type B
SSD0625
This system is only an aid to assist the
driver and is not a collision warning or
avoidance device. It is the driver’s responsibility to stay alert, drive safely
and be in control of the vehicle at all
Starting and driving 5-21
w 06.9.14/V36-D X
WARNING
times.
O
O
The system is primarily intended for use
on straight, dry, open roads with light
traffic. It is not advisable to use the system in city traffic or congested areas.
O
This system will not adapt automatically
to road conditions. This system should
be used in evenly flowing traffic. Do not
use the system on roads with sharp
curves, or on icy roads, in heavy rain or
in fog.
The distance sensor will not detect under
most conditions:
O
Stationary and slow moving vehicles
O
Pedestrians or objects in the roadway
O
Oncoming vehicles in the same lane
O
Motorcycles traveling offset in the
travel lane
O
This system will not automatically brake
the vehicle to a stop.
O
As there is a performance limit to the
distance control function, never rely
solely on the Intelligent Cruise Control
system. This system does not correct
careless, inattentive or absent-minded
driving, or overcome poor visibility in
rain, fog, or other bad weather. Decelerate the vehicle speed by depressing
the brake pedal, depending on the distance to the vehicle ahead and the surrounding circumstances in order to
maintain a safe distance between vehicles.
Although the brake operation is controlled by the system, the system does
not automatically stop the vehicle. If the
vehicle speed falls below approximately
20 MPH (32 km/h), the Intelligent Cruise
Control system is automatically canceled and a warning chime sounds. (The
brake control is also canceled.)
The system may not detect the vehicle in
front of you in certain road or weather
conditions. To avoid accidents, never
use the Intelligent Cruise Control
system under the following conditions:
− On roads where the traffic is heavy or
there are sharp curves
− On slippery road surfaces such as on
ice or snow, etc.
− During bad weather (rain, fog, snow,
etc.)
When the windshield wiper is operated at the low speed (LO) or high
speed (HI) position, the Intelligent Cruise Control system is automatically canceled.
− When strong light (for example, at
sunrise or sunset) is directly shining
on the front of the vehicle
− When rain, snow or dirt adhere to the
system sensor
− On steep downhill roads (the vehicle
may go beyond the set vehicle speed
and frequent braking may result in
overheating the brakes)
5-22 Starting and driving
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
VEHICLE-TO-VEHICLE DISTANCE
CONTROL MODE OPERATION
− On repeated uphill and downhill roads
− When traffic conditions make it difficult to keep a proper distance between vehicles because of frequent
acceleration or deceleration
O
Do not use the Intelligent Cruise Control
system if you are towing a trailer. The
system may not detect a vehicle ahead.
O
In some road or traffic conditions, a vehicle or object can unexpectedly come
into the sensor detection zone and
cause automatic braking. You may need
to control the distance from other vehicles using the accelerator pedal. Always stay alert and avoid using the ICC
system when it is not recommended in
this section.
Always pay attention to the operation of
the vehicle and be ready to manually control the proper following distance. The
vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode
of the Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) system may not be able to maintain the selected distance between vehicles (following distance) or selected vehicle speed
under some circumstances.
Type A
SSD0624
The vehicle-to-vehicle distance control
A located on the
mode uses a sensor q
front of the vehicle to detect vehicles traveling ahead. The sensor generally detects
the signals returned from the reflectors
on a vehicle ahead. Therefore, if the
sensor cannot detect the reflector on the
vehicle ahead, the ICC system may not
maintain the selected distance.
The following are some conditions in
which the sensor cannot detect the signals:
Type B
SSD0625
O
When the reflector of the vehicle
ahead is positioned high on the vehicle (trailer, etc.)
O
When the reflector on the vehicle
ahead is missing, damaged or covered
Starting and driving 5-23
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
O
When the reflector of the vehicle
ahead is covered with dirt, snow and
road spray
O
When the snow or road spray from
traveling vehicles reduces the sensor’s
visibility
O
When dense exhaust or other smoke
(black smoke) from vehicles reduces
the sensor’s visibility
O
When excessively heavy baggage is
loaded in the rear seat or the trunk of
your vehicle
O
When your vehicle is towing a trailer,
etc.
The ICC system is designed to automatically check the sensor’s operation. When
the sensor is covered with dirt or obstructs, the system will automatically be
canceled. If the sensor is covered with
ice, a transparent or translucent vinyl
bag, etc., the ICC system may not detect
them. In these instances, the vehicle-tovehicle distance control mode may not
cancel and may not be able to maintain
the selected following distance from the
vehicle ahead. Be sure to check and clean
the sensor regularly.
The vehicle-to-vehicle distance control
mode is designed to maintain a selected
distance and reduce the speed to match
the slower vehicle ahead; the system will
decelerate the vehicle as necessary. However, the ICC system can only apply up to
25% of the vehicles total braking power.
This system should only be used when
traffic conditions allow vehicle speeds to
remain fairly constant or when vehicle
speeds change gradually. If a vehicle
moves into the traveling lane ahead or if
a vehicle traveling ahead rapidly decelerates, the distance between vehicles may
become closer because the ICC system
cannot decelerate the vehicle quickly
enough. If this occurs, the ICC system will
sound a warning chime and blink the system display to notify the driver to take
necessary action.
O
When there are no vehicles traveling
ahead, the vehicle-to-vehicle distance
control mode maintains the speed set
by the driver. The set speed range is
between approximately 25 and 90
MPH (40 and 144 km/h).
O
When there is a vehicle traveling
ahead, the vehicle-to-vehicle distance
control mode adjusts the speed to
maintain the distance, selected by
driver, from the vehicle ahead. The adjusting speed range is between approximately 20 MPH (32 km/h) and up
to the set speed.
O
When the vehicle traveling ahead has
moved out from its lane of travel, the
vehicle-to-vehicle distance control
mode accelerates and maintains vehicle speed up to the set speed.
The system will cancel and a warning
chime will sound if the speed falls below
approximately 20 MPH (32 km/h). The
system will also disengage below the 20
MPH (32 km/h) cut-off speed or over the
maximum set speed.
The ICC system does not control vehicle
speed or warn you when you approach
stationary and slow moving vehicles. You
must pay attention to vehicle operation to
maintain proper distance from vehicles
ahead when approaching toll gates or
traffic congestion.
Refer to “Approach warning” later in this
section.
The following items are controlled in the
vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode:
5-24 Starting and driving
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
SSD0252
The detection zone of the ICC sensor is
limited. A vehicle ahead must be in the
detection zone for the vehicle-to-vehicle
distance detection mode to maintain the
selected distance from the vehicle ahead.
and sounding the chime. The driver may
have to manually control the proper distance away from vehicle traveling ahead.
A vehicle ahead may move outside of the
detection zone due to its position within
the same lane of travel. Motorcycles may
not be detected in the same lane ahead if
they are traveling offset from the centerline of the lane. A vehicle that is entering
the lane ahead may not be detected until
the vehicle has completely moved into the
lane. If this occurs, the ICC system may
warn you by blinking the system indicator
Starting and driving 5-25
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
When driving on some roads, such as
winding, hilly, curved, narrow roads, or
roads which are under construction, the
ICC sensor may detect vehicles in a different lane, or may temporarily not detect a
vehicle traveling ahead. This may cause
the ICC system to decelerate or accelerate
the vehicle.
The detection of vehicles may also be affected by vehicle operation (steering maneuver or traveling position in the lane,
etc.) or vehicle condition. If this occurs,
the ICC system may warn you by blinking
the system indicator and sounding the
chime unexpectedly. You will have to
SSD0253
SSD0254
manually control the proper distance away
from the vehicle traveling ahead.
When driving on the freeway at a set
speed and approaching a slower traveling
vehicle ahead, the ICC will adjust the
speed to maintain the distance, selected
by the driver, from the vehicle ahead. If
the vehicle ahead changes lanes or exits
the freeway, the ICC system will accelerate and maintain the speed up to the
set speed. Pay attention to the driving operation to maintain control of the vehicle
as it accelerates to the set speed.
The vehicle may not maintain the set
speed on winding or hilly roads. If this occurs, you will have to manually control
the vehicle speed.
5-26 Starting and driving
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
4. DISTANCE switch:
Changes the vehicle’s following distance:
O Long
O Middle
O Short
5. MAIN switch:
Master switch to activate the system
SSD0605
Intelligent cruise control switch
The system is operated by a MAIN switch
and four control switches, all mounted on
the steering wheel.
SSD0606
Intelligent cruise control system
display and indicators
The display is located between the speedometer and tachometer.
1. RESUME/ACCELERATE switch:
Resumes set speed or increases speed
incrementally.
1. MAIN switch indicator:
2. SET/COAST switch:
Sets desired cruise speed, reduces
speed incrementally.
2. Vehicle ahead detection indicator:
3. CANCEL switch:
Deactivates the system
erasing the set speed.
without
Indicates that the MAIN switch is ON.
Indicates whether it detects a vehicle
in front of you.
3. Set distance indicator:
Displays the selected distance be-
Starting and driving 5-27
w 06.9.21/V36-D X
tween vehicles set with the DISTANCE
switch.
4. Indicates your vehicle
5. Set vehicle speed indicator:
Indicates the set vehicle speed.
For Canadian models, the speed is
displayed in km/h.
6. Intelligent Cruise Control
warning light (Orange):
system
The light comes on if there is a malfunction in the ICC system.
SSD0607
When the ignition switch is pushed to the
ON position, the indicators come on as illustrated to check for a burned-out bulb,
and it turns off when the engine is
started.
SSD0608
Operating vehicle-to-vehicle
distance control mode
To turn on the cruise control, quickly push
A on. The
and release the MAIN switch q
cruise indicator light, set distance indicator and set vehicle speed indicator come
on and in a standby state for setting.
5-28 Starting and driving
w 06.9.21/V36-D X
O
While the brakes are applied by the
driver
O
When
pushing
the
RESUME/
ACCELERATE switch without a set
speed in memory
O
When the windshield wipers are operating at low speed (LO) or high speed
(HI)
O
When the Vehicle Dynamic Control
(VDC) system is switched off
O
When the SNOW mode switch is
turned on
SSD0609
To set cruising speed, accelerate your vehicle to the desired speed, push the
SET/COAST switch and release it. (Vehicle
ahead detection indicator, set distance indicator and set vehicle speed indicator
come on.) Take your foot off the accelerator pedal. Your vehicle will maintain the
set speed.
The Intelligent Cruise Control system cannot be set under the following conditions
even if the SET/COAST switch is pushed.
O
When traveling outside the 25 to 90
MPH (40 to 144 km/h) speed range
Starting and driving 5-29
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
as no vehicle is detected in the lane
ahead.
The ICC system displays the set speed.
Vehicle detected ahead:
When a vehicle is detected in the lane
ahead, the ICC system decelerates the vehicle by controlling the throttle and applying the brakes to match the speed of a
slower vehicle ahead. The system then
controls the vehicle speed based on the
speed of the vehicle ahead to maintain
the driver selected distance.
SSD0610
1. System set display with vehicle ahead
2. System set display without vehicle
ahead
System operation
WARNING
Normally when controlling the distance to a
vehicle ahead, this system automatically accelerates or decelerates your vehicle according to the speed of the vehicle ahead.
Depress the accelerator to properly acceler-
ate your vehicle when acceleration is required for a lane change. Depress the brake
pedal when deceleration is required to maintain a safe distance to the vehicle ahead due
to its sudden braking or if a vehicle cuts in.
Always stay alert when using the ICC
system.
The stoplights of the vehicle come on and
the brake pedal depresses when braking is
performed by the ICC system.
When the brake operates, a noise may be
heard. This is not a malfunction.
When a vehicle ahead is detected, the vehicle ahead detection indicator comes on.
The ICC system will also display the set
speed and selected distance.
The driver sets the desired vehicle speed
based on the road conditions. The ICC
system maintains the set vehicle speed,
similar to standard cruise control, as long
Vehicle ahead not detected:
When a vehicle is no longer detected
ahead, the ICC system gradually accelerates your vehicle to resume the previously
set vehicle speed. The ICC system then
maintains the set speed.
5-30 Starting and driving
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
When a vehicle is no longer detected the
vehicle ahead detection indicator turns
off.
How to change the set vehicle
speed
If a vehicle ahead appears during acceleration to the set vehicle speed or any
time the ICC system is in operation, the
system controls the distance to that vehicle.
O
Push the CANCEL switch. The set vehicle speed indicator will go out.
O
Tap the brake pedal. The set vehicle
speed indicator will go out.
O
Turn the MAIN switch off. Both the
ON/OFF switch indicator and set vehicle speed indicator will go out.
To cancel the preset speed, use any of
these methods:
SSD0611
When passing another vehicle, the set
speed indicator will flash when the vehicle speed exceeds the set speed. The
vehicle detect indicator will turn off when
the area ahead of the vehicle is open.
When the pedal is released, the vehicle
will return to the previously set speed.
Even though your vehicle speed is set in
the ICC system, you can depress the accelerator pedal when it is necessary to accelerate your vehicle rapidly.
To reset at a faster cruising speed, use one
of the following methods:
O
Depress the accelerator pedal. When
the vehicle attains the desired speed,
push and release the SET/COAST
switch.
O
Push
and
hold
the
RESUME/
ACCELERATE switch. The set vehicle
speed will increase by approximately 5
MPH (5 km/h for Canada).
O
Push, then quickly release the
RESUME/ACCELERATE switch. Each
time you do this, the set speed will increase by approximately 1 MPH (1
km/h for Canada).
Starting and driving 5-31
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
To reset at a slower cruising speed, use
one of the following methods:
O
Lightly tap the brake pedal. When the
vehicle attains the desired speed,
push the SET/COAST switch and release it.
O
Push and hold the SET/COAST switch.
The set vehicle speed will decrease by
approximately 5 MPH (5 km/h for
Canada).
O
Push, then quickly release the
SET/COAST switch. Each time you do
this, the set speed will decrease by
approximately 1 MPH (1 km/h for
Canada).
To resume the preset speed, push and release the RESUME/ACCELERATE switch.
The vehicle will resume the last set cruising speed when the vehicle speed is over
25 MPH (40 km/h).
SSD0612
How to change the set distance to
the vehicle ahead
The distance to the vehicle ahead can be
selected at any time depending on the
traffic conditions.
A
Each time the DISTANCE switch q
is
pushed, the set distance will change to
long, middle, short and back to long
again in that sequence.
5-32 Starting and driving
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
vehicle or if another vehicle cuts in, the
system warns the driver with the chime
and ICC system display. Decelerate by depressing the brake pedal to maintain a
safe vehicle distance if:
• The chime sounds.
• The vehicle ahead detection and set
distance indicator blink.
The warning chime may not sound in
some cases when there is a short distance between vehicles. Some examples
are:
SSD0613
O
O
engine is started, the initial setting
becomes “long”.)
The distance to the vehicle ahead will
change according to the vehicle
speed. The higher the vehicle speed,
the longer the distance.
Approach warning
If the engine is stopped, the set distance becomes “long”. (Each time the
If your vehicle comes closer to the vehicle
ahead due to rapid deceleration of that
O
When the vehicles are traveling at the
same speed and the distance between
vehicles is not changing
O
When the vehicle ahead is traveling
faster and the distance between vehicles is increasing
O
When the accelerator pedal is depressed, overriding the system
O
When a vehicle cuts in near your vehicle
The warning chime will not sound when
your vehicle approaches vehicles that are
parked or moving slowly.
Starting and driving 5-33
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
Also, the sensor sensitivity can be affected by vehicle operation (steering maneuver or driving position in the lane) or
traffic or vehicle condition (for example, if
a vehicle is being driven with some damage).
Automatic cancellation
A chime sounds under the following conditions and the control is automatically
canceled.
SSD0284A
NOTE:
The approach warning chime may sound
and the system display may blink when
A
the ICC sensor detects some reflectors q
which are fitted on vehicles in other lanes
or on the side of the road. This may cause
the ICC system to decelerate or accelerate
the vehicle. The ICC sensor may detect
these reflectors when the vehicle is driven
on winding roads, hilly roads or when entering or exiting a curve. The ICC sensor
may also detect reflectors on narrow roads
or in road construction zones. In these
cases you will have to manually control the
proper distance ahead of your vehicle.
O
When the vehicle speed falls below
approximately 20 MPH (32 km/h)
O
When the selector lever is shifted to
the N (Neutral) position
O
When the windshield wipers are operated at low speed (LO) or high speed
(HI)
O
When the VDC is turned off
O
When the VDC operates
O
When the engine coolant temperature
becomes excessively high
SSD0614
Warning light and display
Condition A
The chime sounds and the Intelligent
Cruise Control system is canceled automatically in the conditions described
below. Part of the system display will
come on or blink, making it impossible to
set.
O
When the VDC is turned off
O
When the VDC operates
O
When a tire slips
5-34 Starting and driving
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
O
When the SNOW mode switch is
turned on
O
When strong light (sunlight, etc.) is directly shining on the front of the vehicle
Action to take:
When the conditions listed above are no
longer present, turn the system off using
the Intelligent Cruise Control MAIN
Switch. Turn the ICC system back on to
use the system.
SSD0615
SSD0616
Condition B
Condition C
When the sensor window is dirty, making
it impossible to detect a vehicle ahead,
the ICC system is automatically canceled.
When the ICC system is not operating
properly, the chime sounds and the
system warning light (Orange) will come
on.
The chime sounds and the system
warning light (Orange) will come on and
the “CLEAN SENSOR” indicator will appear.
Action to take:
If the warning light comes on, park the
vehicle in a safe place, turn the engine
off. Clean the sensor window with a soft
cloth and then perform the settings again.
Action to take:
If the warning light comes on, park the
vehicle in a safe place. Turn the engine
off, restart the engine, resume driving and
set the ICC system again.
If it is not possible to set the system or the
indicator stays on, it may indicate that the
system is malfunctioning. Although the ve-
Starting and driving 5-35
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
Sensor maintenance
hicle is still driveable under normal conditions, have the vehicle checked at an
INFINITI dealer.
A is loThe sensor for the ICC system q
cated below the front bumper.
To keep the ICC system operating properly, be sure to observe the following:
Type A
O
Always keep the sensor clean. Wipe
with a soft cloth carefully so as not to
damage the sensor.
O
Do not strike or damage the areas
around the sensor. Do not touch or remove the screw located on the sensor.
Doing so could cause failure or malfunction. If the sensor is damaged due
to an accident, contact an INFINITI
dealer.
O
Do not attach a sticker (including
transparent material) or install an accessory near the sensor. This could
cause failure or malfunction.
SSD0624
CONVENTIONAL (FIXED SPEED)
CRUISE CONTROL MODE
This mode allows driving at a speed between 25 to 89 MPH (40 to 144 km/h)
without keeping your foot on the accelerator pedal.
5-36 Starting and driving
Type B
SSD0625
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
WARNING
O
In the conventional (fixed speed) cruise
control mode, a warning chime does not
sound to warn you if you are too close to
the vehicle ahead, as neither the presence of the vehicle ahead nor the
vehicle-to-vehicle distance is detected.
O
Pay special attention to the distance between your vehicle and the vehicle
ahead of you or a collision could occur.
O
Always confirm the setting in the Intelligent Cruise Control system display.
O
Do not use the conventional (fixed
speed) cruise control mode when driving
under the following conditions:
— when it is not possible to keep the vehicle at a set speed
— in heavy traffic or in traffic that varies
in speed
— on winding or hilly roads
— on slippery roads (rain, snow, ice,
etc.)
— in very windy areas
O
Doing so could cause a loss of vehicle
control and result in an accident.
SSD0617
Conventional (fixed speed) cruise
control switch
1. RESUME/ACCELERATE switch:
Resumes set speed or increases speed
incrementally.
2. SET/COAST switch:
Sets the desired cruise speed, reduces
speed incrementally.
3. CANCEL switch:
Deactivates the system
erasing the set speed.
without
4. MAIN switch:
Master switch to activate the system.
Starting and driving 5-37
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
3. Cruise system warning light:
Comes on if there is a malfunction in
the cruise control system.
SSD0618
Conventional (fixed speed) cruise
control mode display and
indicators
The display is located between the speedometer and tachometer.
1. MAIN switch indicator:
Indicates that the MAIN switch is ON.
2. Cruise set switch indicator:
Displays while the vehicle speed is
controlled by the conventional (fixed
speed) cruise control mode of the ICC
system.
SSD0619
Operating conventional (fixed
speed) cruise control mode
To turn on the conventional (fixed speed)
cruise control mode, push and hold the
A for longer than about 1.5
MAIN switch q
seconds.
When pushing the MAIN switch on, the Intelligent Cruise Control system display
and the CRUISE indicator are displayed on
the dot matrix crystal display. After you
hold the MAIN switch on for longer than
about 1.5 seconds, the Intelligent Cruise
Control system display goes out. The
CRUISE indicator stays lit. You can now
5-38 Starting and driving
w 06.8.14/V36-D X
To cancel the preset speed, use any of the
following methods:
set your desired cruising speed. Pushing
the MAIN switch again will turn the
system completely off.
a) Push the CANCEL button. The SET indicator will go out.
When the ignition switch is pushed to the
OFF position, the system is also automatically turned off. To use the Intelligent
Cruise Control again, quickly push and release the MAIN switch (vehicle-to-vehicle
distance control mode) or push and hold
it (conventional cruise control mode)
again to turn it on.
b) Tap the brake pedal. The SET indicator
will go out.
c) Turn the MAIN switch off. Both the
CRUISE indicator and SET indicator will
go out.
To reset at a faster cruising speed, use one
of the following three methods:
CAUTION
SSD0620
To avoid accidentally engaging cruise control, make sure to turn the ON/OFF switch off
when not using the Intelligent Cruise Control.
To set cruising speed, accelerate your vehicle to the desired speed, push the
SET/COAST switch and release it. (The
SET indicator will come on in the display.)
Take your foot off the accelerator pedal.
Your vehicle will maintain the set speed.
O
To pass another vehicle, depress the
accelerator pedal. When you release
the pedal, the vehicle will return to
the previously set speed.
O
The vehicle may not maintain the set
speed when going up or down steep
hills. If this happens, manually maintain vehicle speed.
a) Depress the accelerator pedal. When
the vehicle attains the desired speed,
push and release the SET/COAST
switch.
b) Push
and
hold
the
RESUME/
ACCELERATE set switch. When the vehicle attains the speed you desire, release the switch.
c) Push, then quickly release the
RESUME/ACCELERATE switch. Each
time you do this, the set speed will increase by about 1 MPH (1.6 km/h).
To reset at a slower cruising speed, use
one of the following three methods:
a) Lightly tap the brake pedal. When the
Starting and driving 5-39
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
vehicle attains the desired speed,
push the SET/COAST switch and release it.
O
When the VDC operates (except ABS,
which is functional with ICC system
operation)
b) Push and hold the SET/COAST switch.
Release the switch when the vehicle
slows down to the desired speed.
O
When the engine coolant temperature
becomes excessively high
c) Push, then quickly release the
SET/COAST switch. Each time you do
this, the set speed will decrease by
about 1 MPH (1.6 km/h).
To resume the preset speed, push and release the RESUME/ACCELERATE switch.
The vehicle will resume the last set cruising speed when the vehicle speed is over
25 MPH (40 km/h).
Automatic cancellation
A chime sounds under the following conditions and the control is automatically
canceled.
O
When the vehicle slows down more
than 8 MPH (13 km/h) below the set
speed
O
When the vehicle speed falls below
approximately 20 MPH (32 km/h)
O
When the selector lever is shifted to
the N (Neutral) position
SSD0621
Warning light
When the system is not operating properly, the chime sounds and the system
warning light (Orange) will come on.
Action to take:
If the warning light comes on, park the
vehicle in a safe place. Turn the engine
off, restart the engine, resume driving and
then perform the setting again.
If it is not possible to set or the indicator
stays on, it may indicate that the system is
malfunctioning. Although the vehicle is
still driveable under normal conditions,
5-40 Starting and driving
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
BREAK-IN SCHEDULE
have the vehicle checked at an INFINITI
dealer.
PREVIEW FUNCTION (for Intelligent
Cruise Control system equipped
models)
The ICC system with the preview function
identifies the need to apply emergency
braking by sensing the vehicle ahead in
the same lane and the distance to the vehicle ahead and relative speed from it, it
applies the brake pre-pressure before the
driver depresses the brake pedal and
helps improve brake response by reducing pedal free play.
For more details, refer to “Brake assist”
later in this section.
INCREASING FUEL ECONOMY
O
Accelerate slowly and smoothly. Maintain cruising speeds with a constant
accelerator position.
During the first 1,200 miles (2,000 km),
follow these recommendations to obtain
maximum engine performance and ensure
the future reliability and economy of your
new vehicle.
O
Drive at moderate speeds on the highway.
O
Avoid unnecessary stopping and braking. Keep a safe distance behind other
vehicles.
Failure to follow these recommendations
may result in shortened engine life and reduced engine performance.
O
Select a gear range suitable to road
conditions.
O
Avoid unnecessary prolonged engine
idling.
O
Keep your engine tuned up.
O
Follow the recommended
maintenance schedule.
O
Keep the tires inflated at the correct
pressure. Improper tire pressure will
increase wear and waste fuel.
O
Make sure the front wheels are properly aligned. Improper alignment will
cause premature tire wear and lower
fuel economy.
O
Climate control operation lowers fuel
economy. Use the air conditioner only
when necessary.
O
When cruising at highway speeds, it is
CAUTION
O
Avoid driving for long periods at constant speed, either fast or slow. Do
not run the engine over 4,000 rpm.
O
Do not accelerate at full throttle in any
gear.
O
Avoid quick starts.
O
Avoid hard braking as much as possible.
periodic
Starting and driving 5-41
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
ALL-WHEEL DRIVE (AWD) (if so equipped)
If any malfunction occurs in the AWD system while the engine is running, the
warning light will come on.
more economical to use the air conditioner and leave the windows closed to
reduce drag.
The warning light may blink rapidly (about
twice per second) while trying to free a
stuck vehicle due to high power train oil
temperature. The driving mode may
change to two-wheel drive. If the warning
light blinks rapidly during operation, stop
the vehicle with the engine idling in a
safe place immediately. Then if the light
goes off after a while, you can continue
driving.
A large difference between the diameters
of front and rear wheels will make the
warning light blink slowly (about once per
two seconds). Pull off the road in a safe
area, and idle the engine. Check that all
tire sizes are the same, tire pressure is
correct and tires are not worn.
SSD0336
The AWD warning light is located in the
meter.
If the warning light is blinking after the
above operation, have your vehicle
checked by an INFINITI dealer as soon as
possible.
The AWD warning light comes on when
the ignition switch is pushed to the ON
position. It turns off soon after the engine
is started.
5-42 Starting and driving
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
WARNING
O
O
For AWD equipped vehicles, do not attempt to raise two wheels off the ground
and shift the transmission to any drive
or reverse position with the engine running. Doing so may result in drivetrain
damage or unexpected vehicle movement which could result in serious vehicle damage or personal injury.
Do not attempt to test an AWD equipped
vehicle on a 2-wheel dynamometer (such
as the dynamometers used by some
states for emissions testing) or similar
equipment even if the other two wheels
are raised off the ground. Make sure that
you inform the test facility personnel
that your vehicle is equipped with AWD
before it is placed on a dynamometer.
Using the wrong test equipment may result in drivetrain damage or unexpected
vehicle movement which could result in
serious vehicle damage or personal injury.
CAUTION
O
Do not operate the engine on a free roller
when any of the wheels are raised.
O
If the warning light comes on while driving there may be a malfunction in the
AWD system. Reduce the vehicle speed
and have your vehicle checked by an
INFINITI dealer as soon as possible.
O
If the warning light remains on after the
above operation, have your vehicle
checked by an INFINITI dealer as soon as
possible.
O
The power train may be damaged if you
continue driving with the warning light
blinking rapidly.
Starting and driving 5-43
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
PARKING/PARKING ON HILLS
1. Firmly apply the parking brake.
2. Automatic transmission models:
Move the selector lever to the P (Park)
position.
Manual transmission models:
Place the shift lever in the R (Reverse)
gear. When parking on an uphill
grade, place the shift lever in the 1st
gear.
SD1006MA
WARNING
O
O
Do not stop or park the vehicle over
flammable materials such as dry grass,
waste paper or rags. They may ignite
and cause a fire.
O
Never leave the engine running while the
vehicle is unattended.
O
Never leave children unattended in the
vehicle.
O
Safe parking procedures require that
both the parking brake be set and the
transmission placed into P (Park).
Failure to do so could cause the vehicle
to move unexpectedly or roll away and
result in an accident.
Make sure the automatic transmission
selector lever has been pushed as far
forward as it can go and cannot be
moved without depressing the button at
the end of the lever.
3. To help prevent the vehicle from
rolling into the street when parked on
a sloping drive way, it is a good practice to turn the wheels as illustrated.
O
1
HEADED DOWNHILL WITH CURB: q
Turn the wheels into the curb and
move the vehicle forward until the
curb side wheel gently touches the
curb.
O
2
HEADED UPHILL WITH CURB: q
Turn the wheels away from the curb
and move the vehicle back until the
curb side wheel gently touches the
curb.
5-44 Starting and driving
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
POWER STEERING
O
HEADED UPHILL OR DOWNHILL, NO
3
CURB: q
Turn the wheels toward the side of the
road so the vehicle will move away
from the center of the road if it moves.
4. Push the ignition switch to the OFF position.
BRAKE SYSTEM
BRAKING PRECAUTIONS
WARNING
The brake system has two separate hydraulic circuits. If one circuit malfunctions, you will still have braking at two
wheels.
If the engine is not running or is turned off
while driving, the power assist for the steering will not work. Steering will be much
harder to operate.
The power assisted steering uses a hydraulic pump, driven by the engine, to assist steering.
If the engine stops or the drive belt
breaks, you will still have control of the
vehicle. However, much greater steering
effort is needed, especially in sharp turns
or at low speeds.
You may feel a small click and hear a
sound when the brake pedal is fully depressed slowly. This is not a malfunction
and means the brake assist mechanism is
operating properly.
Vacuum assisted brakes
The brake booster aids braking by using
engine vacuum. If the engine stops, you
can stop the vehicle by depressing the
brake pedal. However, greater foot pressure on the brake pedal will be required
to stop the vehicle and the stopping distance will be longer.
When the brake pedal is depressed slowly
and firmly, you may hear a clicking noise
and feel a slight pulsation. This is normal
and indicates that the Brake Assist
System is operating.
Wet brakes
When the vehicle is washed or driven
through water, the brakes may get wet.
As a result, your braking distance will be
Starting and driving 5-45
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
BRAKE ASSIST
longer and the vehicle may pull to one
side during braking.
To dry brakes, drive the vehicle at a safe
speed while lightly tapping the brake
pedal to heat-up the brakes. Do this until
the brakes return to normal. Avoid driving
the vehicle at high speeds until the
brakes function correctly.
Overheated brakes may reduce braking
performance and could result in loss of
vehicle control.
WARNING
O
Parking brake break-in
Break in the parking brake shoes whenever the stopping effect of the parking
brake is weakened or whenever the parking brake shoes and/or drums/rotors are
replaced, in order to assure the best
braking performance.
O
While driving on a slippery surface, be
careful when braking, accelerating or
downshifting. Abrupt braking or accelerating could cause the wheels to skid and
result in an accident.
If the engine is not running or is turned
off while driving, the power assist for
the brakes will not work. Braking will be
harder.
BRAKE ASSIST
When the force applied to the brake pedal
exceeds a certain level, the Brake Assist
is activated generating greater braking
force than a conventional brake booster
even with light pedal force.
WARNING
The Brake Assist is only an aid to assist
braking operation and is not a collision
warning or avoidance device. It is the driver’s responsibility to stay alert, drive safely
and be in control of the vehicle at all times.
This procedure is described in the vehicle
service manual and can be performed by
an INFINITI dealer.
PREVIEW FUNCTION (Intelligent
Cruise Control system equipped
models)
Using the brakes
When the Preview Function identifies the
need to apply emergency braking by
sensing a vehicle ahead in the same lane
and the distance and relative speed from
it, it applies the brake pre-pressure before the driver depresses the brake pedal
and helps improve brake response by reducing pedal free play.
Avoid resting your foot on the brake pedal
while driving. This will cause overheating
of the brakes, wearing out the brake and
pads faster and reduce gas mileage.
To help save the brakes and to prevent
the brakes from overheating, reduce
speed and downshift to a lower gear before going down a slope or long grade.
5-46 Starting and driving
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
O
This system will not operate when the
vehicle is moving at approximately 20
MPH (32 km/h) or less.
O
The pre-pressure function ceases
when the following conditions are
met:
driver’s responsibility to stay alert, drive
safely and be in control of the vehicle at
all times.
O
As there is a performance limit to the
Preview Function, never rely solely on
this system. This system does not correct careless inattentive or absentminded driving, or overcome poor visibility in rain, fog, or other bad weather.
Reduce vehicle speed by depressing the
brake pedal, in order to maintain a safe
distance between vehicles.
O
The system may not detect the vehicle in
front of you in certain road or weather
conditions. The Preview Function may
not operate properly under the following
conditions. The vehicle is still driveable
under normal conditions and the Brake
Assist will operate.
— When rain, snow or dirt adhere to the
system sensor
— When strong light (for example, at
sunrise or sunset) is directly shining
on the front of the vehicle
a) When the driver depresses the accelerator pedal or the brake pedal.
b) If the driver does not operate the accelerator or brake pedal within approximately 1 second.
SSD0338
O
The sensor will not detect:
a) Pedestrians or objects in the roadway
b) Oncoming vehicles in the same lane
c) Motorcycles traveling offset in the
travel lane as illustrated
WARNING
O
This system is only an aid to assist braking operation and is not a collision warning or avoidance device. It is the
Starting and driving 5-47
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
conditions, have the vehicle checked at an
INFINITI dealer.
— Winding or hilly roads may cause the
sensor to temporarily not detect a vehicle in the same lane or may detect
objects or vehicles in other lanes.
— Vehicle position in the lane may
cause the sensor to temporarily not
detect a vehicle in the same lane or
may detect objects or vehicles in
other lanes.
O
How to handle the sensor
The sensor for the Preview Function is
common with Intelligent Cruise Control
and is located below the front bumper.
To keep the Preview Function operating
properly, be sure to observe the following:
When the Preview Function operates, the
brake pedal may move slightly and may
make a small noise. This is not a system
malfunction.
SSD0471
Warning light and display
O
Always keep the sensor clean. Wipe
with a soft cloth carefully so as not to
damage the sensor.
O
Do not strike or damage the areas
around the sensor. Do not touch or remove the screw located on the sensor.
Doing so could cause failure or malfunction. If the sensor is damaged due
to an accident, contact an INFINITI
dealer.
O
Do not attach a sticker (including
transparent material) or install an accessory near the sensor. This could
cause failure or malfunction.
When the Preview Function is not operating properly, the buzzer sounds and the
system warning light (Orange) will come
on.
Action to take:
If the warning light comes on, park the
vehicle in a safe place. Turn the engine
off, restart the engine and resume driving.
If the indicator stays on, it may indicate
that the Preview Function is malfunctioning (the brake is operative). Although
the Vehicle is still driveable under normal
5-48 Starting and driving
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
ANTI-LOCK BRAKING SYSTEM
(ABS)
WARNING
The Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) is a sophisticated device, but it cannot prevent accidents resulting from careless or dangerous
driving techniques. It can help maintain vehicle control during braking on slippery surfaces. Remember that stopping distances on
slippery surfaces will be longer than on
normal surfaces even with ABS. Stopping
distances may also be longer on rough,
gravel or snow covered roads, or if you are
using tire chains. Always maintain a safe
distance from the vehicle in front of you. Ultimately, the driver is responsible for safety.
Tire type and condition may also affect braking effectiveness.
— When replacing tires, install the specified size of tires on all four wheels.
— When installing a spare tire, make sure
that it is the proper size and type as
WARNING
specified on the Tire and Loading Information label. See “Tire and Loading Information label” in the “9. Technical and
consumer information” section of this
manual.
Do not pump the brake pedal. Doing so may
result in increased stopping distances.
— For detailed information, see “Wheels
and tires” in the “8. Maintenance and
do-it-yourself” section of this manual.
Self-test feature
The Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) controls the brakes so the wheels do not lock
during hard braking or when braking on
slippery surfaces. The system detects the
rotation speed at each wheel and varies
the brake fluid pressure to prevent each
wheel from locking and sliding. By preventing each wheel from locking, the system helps the driver maintain steering
control and helps to minimize swerving
and spinning on slippery surfaces.
Using the system
Depress the brake pedal and hold it
down. Depress the brake pedal with firm
steady pressure, but do not pump the
brakes. The ABS will operate to prevent
the wheels from locking up. Steer the vehicle to avoid obstacles.
The ABS includes electronic sensors, electric pumps, hydraulic solenoids and a
computer. The computer has a built-in diagnostic feature that tests the system
each time you start the engine and move
the vehicle at a low speed in forward or
reverse. When the self-test occurs, you
may hear a “clunk” noise and/or feel a
pulsation in the brake pedal. This is
normal and does not indicate a malfunction. If the computer senses a malfunction, it switches the ABS off and illuminates the ABS warning light on the instrument panel. The brake system then
operates normally, but without anti-lock
assistance. If the ABS warning light illuminates during the self-test or while driving, have the vehicle checked by an
INFINITI dealer.
Starting and driving 5-49
w 06.9.14/V36-D X
VEHICLE DYNAMIC CONTROL (VDC)
SYSTEM
Normal operation
The ABS operates at speeds above 3 to 6
MPH (5 to 10 km/h).
When the ABS senses that one or more
wheels are close to locking up, the actuator rapidly applies and releases hydraulic
pressure. This action is similar to
pumping the brakes very quickly. You may
feel a pulsation in the brake pedal and
hear a noise from under the hood or feel
a vibration from the actuator when it is
operating. This is normal and indicates
that the ABS is operating properly. However, the pulsation may indicate that road
conditions are hazardous and extra care
is required while driving.
When accelerating or driving on slippery
surfaces, the tires may spin or slide. With
the Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC)
system, sensors detect these movements
and control the braking and engine
output to help improve vehicle stability.
O When the VDC system is operating,
the “SLIP” indicator in the instrument
panel blinks.
O When only the Traction Control System
(TCS) portion of the VDC system is operating, the “SLIP” indicator in the instrument panel blinks.
O If the “SLIP” indicator blinks, the road
conditions are slippery. Be sure to adjust your speed and driving to these
conditions. Be sure to drive carefully.
See “SLIP INDICATOR LIGHT”, and “VEHICLE DYNAMIC CONTROL (VDC) OFF
INDICATOR LIGHT” in the “2. Instruments and controls” section.
O Indicator light
If a malfunction occurs in the system,
the “SLIP” and “VDC OFF” indicator
lights illuminate in the instrument
panel. As long as these warning lights
are illuminated, the VDC system function is canceled.
The VDC system uses an Active Brake Limited Slip (ABLS) function to improve vehicle traction. The ABLS system works
when one of the driving wheels is spinning on a slippery surface. The ABLS system brakes the spinning wheel, which
distributes the driving power to the other
drive wheel. If the vehicle is operated
with the VDC system turned off, all VDC
system and TCS functions will be turned
off. The ABLS system and ABS will still
operate with the VDC system off. If the
ABLS system or ABS is activated, the
“SLIP” indicator light will blink and you
may hear a clunk noise and/or feel a pulsation in the brake pedal. This is normal
and is not an indication of a malfunction.
While the VDC system is operating, you
may feel a pulsation in the brake pedal
and hear a noise or feel a vibration from
under the hood. This is normal and indicates that the VDC system is working
properly.
The VDC system computer has a built-in
diagnostic feature that tests the system
each time you start the engine and move
the vehicle at a low speed forward or
backward. When the self-test occurs, you
may hear a “clunk” noise and/or feel a
pulsation in the brake pedal. This is
5-50 Starting and driving
w 06.9.14/V36-D X
normal and is not an indication of a malfunction.
performance, and the “VDC OFF” indicator or “SLIP” indicator or both indicator lights may illuminate.
WARNING
O
O
O
The VDC system is designed to help improve driving stability but does not prevent accidents due to abrupt steering
operation at high speeds or due to careless or dangerous driving techniques.
Reduce vehicle speed and be especially
careful when driving and cornering on
slippery surfaces and always drive carefully.
If engine related parts such as muffler
are not standard equipment or are extremely deteriorated, the “VDC OFF” indicator or “SLIP” indicator or both indicator lights may illuminate.
Do not modify the vehicle’s suspension.
If suspension parts such as shock absorbers, struts, springs, stabilizer bars
and bushings are not INFINITI approved
or are extremely deteriorated the VDC
system may not operate properly. This
could adversely affect vehicle handling
O
If brake related parts such as brake
pads, rotors and calipers are not standard equipment or are extremely deteriorated, the “VDC OFF” indicator or
“SLIP” indicator or both indicator lights
may illuminate.
O
When driving on extremely inclined surfaces such as higher banked corners,
the VDC system may not operate properly and the “VDC OFF” indicator or
“SLIP” indicator or both indicator lights
may illuminate. Do not drive on these
types of roads.
O
When driving on unstable surfaces such
as a turntable, ferry, elevator or ramp,
the “VDC OFF” indicator or “SLIP” indicator or both indicator lights may illuminate. This is not a malfunction. Restart
the engine after driving onto a stable
surface.
O
If wheels or tires other than those rec-
ommended are used, the VDC system
may not operate properly and “VDC OFF”
indicator or “SLIP” indicator or both indicator lights may illuminate.
O
The VDC system is not a substitute for
winter tires or tire chains on a snow covered road.
Starting and driving 5-51
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
COLD WEATHER DRIVING
FOUR-WHEEL ACTIVE STEER (4WAS)
SYSTEM (if so equipped)
The Four-Wheel Active Steer (4WAS)
system is an electronically controlled
four-wheel steering system.
Depending on the vehicle speed and
steering angle, the angles of the front and
rear wheels are adjusted by the 4WAS
system to help improve driving performance.
If a malfunction occurs in the system, the
4WAS function will stop but the ordinary
two-wheel steering system will operate
normally. The “4WAS” warning light will
illuminate. If the light illuminates while
you are driving, contact an INFINITI dealer
for repair.
The steering wheel may be slightly turned
even when driving on a straight road due
to a protection mechanism for the 4WAS
system. This is not a malfunction. The
steering wheel will return to the normal
position after the protection mechanism
deactivates.
erated when the vehicle is parked or
being driven at extremely low speed.
O
The steering wheel is forcibly turned
beyond its operation limits.
O
The battery voltage is reduced.
Repeated steering maneuvers that may
activate the protection mechanism will
damage the 4WAS system.
WARNING
The 4WAS system, although a sophisticated
device, cannot prevent accidents resulting
from careless or dangerous driving techniques. Ultimately the responsibility for
safety of self and others rests in the hands
of the driver. Therefore only through attentive and careful driving methods can the
4WAS system be fully appreciated and
safety optimized.
FREEING A FROZEN DOOR LOCK
To prevent a door lock from freezing,
apply deicer or glycerin to it through the
key hole. If the lock becomes frozen, heat
the key before inserting it into the key
hole.
ANTIFREEZE
In the winter when it is anticipated that
the temperature will drop below 32°F
(0°C), check antifreeze to assure proper
winter protection. For additional information, see “Engine cooling system” in the
“8. Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section.
BATTERY
The protection mechanism activates
under the following conditions:
If the battery is not fully charged during
extremely cold weather conditions, the
battery fluid may freeze and damage the
battery. To maintain maximum efficiency,
the battery should be checked regularly.
For additional information, see “Battery”
in the “8. Maintenance and do-it-yourself”
section.
O
DRAINING OF COOLANT WATER
O
The steering wheel is operated forcibly
when it is hard to operate or the tires
are blocked by obstacles.
The steering wheel is continuously op-
If the vehicle is to be left outside without
antifreeze, drain the cooling system by
opening the drain plug located under the
5-52 Starting and driving
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
radiator. Refill before operating the vehicle. See “Engine cooling system” in the
“8. Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section for changing engine coolant.
TIRE EQUIPMENT
1. SUMMER tires are of a tread design to
provide superior performance on dry
pavement. However, the performance
of these tires will be substantially reduced in snowy and icy conditions. If
you operate your vehicle on snowy or
icy roads, INFINITI recommends the
use of MUD & SNOW or ALL SEASON
tires on all four wheels. Please consult
an INFINITI dealer for the tire type,
size, speed rating and availability information.
2. For additional traction on icy roads,
studded tires may be used. However,
some provinces and states prohibit
their use. Check local, state and provincial laws before installing studded
tires.
Skid and traction capabilities of studded
snow tires, on wet or dry surfaces, may be
poorer than that of non-studded snow
tires.
see “Tire chains” in the “Maintenance
and do-it-yourself” section of this
manual.
4. For all-wheel drive:
If you install snow tires, they must
also be the same size, brand, construction and tread pattern on all four
wheels.
DRIVING ON SNOW OR ICE
WARNING
O
Wet ice (32°F, 0°C and freezing rain),
very cold snow or ice can be slick and
very hard to drive on. The vehicle will
have much less traction or “grip” under
these conditions. Try to avoid driving on
wet ice until the road is salted or
sanded.
O
Whatever the condition, drive with caution. Accelerate and slow down with
care. If accelerating or downshifting too
fast, the drive wheels will lose even
more traction.
O
Allow more stopping distance under
these conditions. Braking should be
started sooner than on dry pavement.
O
Allow greater following distances on
slippery roads.
O
Watch for slippery spots (glare ice).
These may appear on an otherwise clear
road in shaded areas. If a patch of ice is
seen ahead, brake before reaching it.
SPECIAL WINTER EQUIPMENT
It is recommended that the following
items be carried in the vehicle during
winter:
1. A scraper and stiff-bristled brush to
remove ice and snow from the windows and wiper blades.
2. A sturdy, flat board to be placed under
the jack to give it firm support.
3. A shovel to dig the vehicle out of
snow-drifts.
4. Extra window washer fluid to refill the
reservoir tank.
3. Tire chains may be used. For details,
Starting and driving 5-53
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
Try not to brake while on the ice, and
avoid any sudden steering maneuvers.
O
Do not use cruise control on slippery
roads.
O
Snow can trap dangerous exhaust gases
under your vehicle. Keep snow clear of
the exhaust pipe and from around your
vehicle.
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER (if so
equipped)
Engine block heaters are available
through INFINITI dealers to assist in cold
temperature starting. The engine block
heater should be used when the outside
temperature is 20°F (−7°C) or lower.
To use the engine block heater:
1. Turn the engine off.
Fault
Interrupt
(GFI)
protected,
grounded 110-volt AC (VAC) outlet.
5. The engine block heater must be
plugged in for at least 2 - 4 hours, depending on outside temperatures, to
properly warm the engine coolant. Use
an appropriate timer to turn the engine block heater on.
6. Before starting the engine, unplug and
properly store the cord to keep it away
from moving parts.
WARNING
O
Do not use your engine block heater with
an ungrounded electrical system or a
2-pronged adapter. You can be seriously
injured by an electrical shock if you use
an ungrounded connection.
O
Disconnect and properly store the engine block heater cord before starting
the engine. Damage to the cord could result in an electrical shock and can cause
serious injury.
O
Use a heavy-duty 3-wire, 3-pronged extension cord rated for at least 10A. Plug
2. Open the hood and unwrap the engine
block heater cord.
3. Plug the engine block heater cord into
a grounded 3-wire, 3-pronged extension cord.
the extension cord into a Ground Fault
Interrupt (GFI) protected, grounded
110-VAC outlet. Failure to use the proper
extension cord or a grounded outlet can
result in a fire or electrical shock and
cause serious personal injury.
4. Plug the extension cord into a Ground
5-54 Starting and driving
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
6 In case of emergency
Roadside assistance program ........................... 6-2
Flat tire ........................................................... 6-2
Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) .... 6-2
Changing a flat tire ..................................... 6-3
Jump starting ................................................... 6-8
Push starting .................................................. 6-10
If your vehicle overheats.................................
Towing your vehicle .........................................
Towing recommended by INFINITI ..............
Vehicle recovery (Freeing a stuck
vehicle) ......................................................
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
6-10
6-11
6-12
6-15
ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE PROGRAM
FLAT TIRE
Every new INFINITI comes with a 4 year,
unlimited mileage Roadside Assistance
plan. In the event of a roadside
emergency, Roadside Assistance Service
is available to you. Please refer to your
Warranty Information Booklet (U.S.) or
Warranty
&
Roadside
Assistance
Information Booklet (Canada) for details.
Both the Warranty Information Booklet
and Roadside Assistance Calling Card in
your Owner’s Literature Portfolio provide
the Toll-Free Number to call for assistance.
Roadside Assistance is provided 24 hours
a day, 365 days a year, for 4 years from
the date sold to give emergency roadside
help, in the event of mechanical or
nonmechanical trouble(s) such as flat
tires, out-of-gas, dead battery, lost keys,
mechanical breakdown, accident, etc.
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING
SYSTEM (TPMS)
WARNING
This vehicle is equipped with the tire
pressure monitoring system (TPMS). It
monitors tire pressure of all tires except
the spare. When the low tire pressure
warning light is lit, one or more of your
tires is significantly under-inflated. The
system also displays pressure of all tires
(except the spare tire) on the display by
sending a signal from a sensor that is installed in each wheel. If the vehicle is being driven with low tire pressure, the
TPMS will activate and warn you of it by
the low tire pressure warning light. This
system will activate only when the vehicle
is driven at speeds above 16 MPH (25
km/h). For more details, refer to
“Warning/indicator lights and audible reminders” in the “2. Instruments and controls” section and “Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS)” in the “5. Starting
and driving” section.
O
If the low tire pressure warning light illuminates or LOW PRESSURE information
is displayed on the monitor screen while
driving, avoid sudden steering maneuvers or abrupt braking, reduce vehicle
speed, pull off the road to a safe location
and stop the vehicle as soon as possible. Serious vehicle damage could
occur and may lead to an accident and
could result in serious personal injury.
Check the tire pressure for all four tires.
Adjust the tire pressure to the recommended COLD tire pressure shown on
the Tire and Loading Information label to
turn the low tire pressure warning light
OFF. If the light still comes on while driving after adjusting the tire pressure, a
tire may be flat. If you have a flat tire, replace it with a spare tire as soon as possible.
O
When a spare tire is mounted or a wheel
is replaced, tire pressure will not be indicated, the TPMS will not function and
6-2 In case of emergency
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
the low tire pressure warning light will
flash for approximately 1 minute. The
light will remain on after 1 minute. Contact your INFINITI dealer as soon as possible for tire replacement and/or system
resetting.
O
O
Replacing tires with those not originally
specified by INFINITI could affect the
proper operation of the TPMS.
Do not inject any tire liquid or aerosol
tire sealant into the tires, as this may
cause a malfunction of the tire pressure
sensors.
transmission models). Move the shift
lever to the R (Reverse) gear (Manual
transmission models).
4. Turn off the engine.
5. Raise the hood to warn other traffic,
and to signal professional road assistance personnel that you need assistance.
6. Have all passengers get out of the vehicle and stand in a safe place, away
from traffic and clear of the vehicle.
WARNING
O
CHANGING A FLAT TIRE
If you have a flat tire, follow the instructions below.
O
Stopping the vehicle
1. Safely move the vehicle off the road
and away from traffic.
2. Turn on the hazard warning flashers.
O
Make sure the parking brake is securely
applied and the manual transmission is
shifted into R (Reverse), or the automatic
transmission into P (Park).
Never change tires when the vehicle is
on a slope, ice or slippery areas. This is
hazardous.
Never change tires if oncoming traffic is
close to your vehicle. Wait for professional road assistance.
MCE0001A
Blocking wheels
1 at both the front
Place suitable blocks q
and back of the wheel diagonally opposite the flat tire to prevent the vehicle
from moving when it is jacked up.
WARNING
Be sure to block the wheel as the vehicle
may move and result in personal injury.
3. Park on a level surface and apply the
parking brake. Move the selector lever
to the P (Park) position (Automatic
In case of emergency 6-3
w 06.9.14/V36-D X
Jacking up the vehicle and
removing the damaged tire
WARNING
O
Never get under the vehicle while it is
supported only by the jack. If it is necessary to work under the vehicle, support it
with safety stands.
O
Use only the jack provided with your vehicle to lift the vehicle. Do not use the
jack provided with your vehicle on other
vehicles. The jack is designed for lifting
only your vehicle during a tire change.
O
Remove jacking tools located inside the
trunk as illustrated.
Use the correct jack-up points. Never use
any other part of the vehicle for jack support.
O
The spare tire is located under the jacking
2 holding the
tools. Remove the cap q
spare tire.
Never jack up the vehicle more than necessary.
O
Never use blocks on or under the jack.
O
Do not start or run the engine while vehicle is on the jack, as it may cause the
vehicle to move. This is especially true
Jacking tools
SCE0659
Getting the spare tire and tools
1 using the
Raise the trunk floor cover q
A .
tab q
Spare
SCE0660
6-4 In case of emergency
w 06.9.14/V36-D X
for vehicles with limited slip differentials.
O
Do not allow passengers to stay in the
vehicle while it is on the jack.
Carefully read the caution label attached
to the jack body and the following instructions.
CE1089-A
Jack-up point
1. Place the jack directly under the
jack-up point as illustrated so the top
of the jack contacts the vehicle at the
jack-up point. Align the jack head between the two notches in the front or
the rear as shown. Also fit the groove
of the jack head between the notches
as shown.
The jack should be used on level firm
ground.
In case of emergency 6-5
w 06.9.29/V36-D X
SCE0504
2. Loosen each wheel nut one or two
turns by turning counterclockwise with
the wheel nut wrench. Do not remove
the wheel nuts until the tire is off the
ground.
3. Carefully raise the vehicle until the tire
clears the ground. To lift the vehicle,
securely hold the jack lever and rod
with both hands as shown above. Remove the wheel nuts, and then remove the tire.
SCE0661
Installing the spare tire
The T-type spare tire is designed for emergency use. See specific instructions under
the heading “Wheels and tires” in the
“8. Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section.
1. Clean any mud or dirt from the surface
between the wheel and hub.
2. Carefully put the spare tire on and
tighten the wheel nuts finger tight.
18-inch tire models:
When replacing a front tire, make sure
6-6 In case of emergency
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
that the hole in the spare tire wheel is
aligned with the pin on the brake
rotor.
O
Wheel nut tightening torque:
80 ft-lb (108 Nzm)
3. With the wheel nut wrench, tighten
wheel nuts alternately and evenly in
1 , q
2 ,
the sequence as illustrated ( q
3 , q
4 , q
5 ) until they are tight.
q
4. Lower the vehicle slowly until the tire
touches the ground. Then, with the
wheel nut wrench, tighten the wheel
nuts securely in the sequence as illustrated. Lower the vehicle completely.
WARNING
O
Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly tightened wheel nuts can cause the wheel to
become loose or come off. This could
cause an accident.
O
Do not use oil or grease on the wheel
studs or nuts. This could cause the nuts
to become loose.
O
Retighten the wheel nuts when the vehicle has been driven for 600 miles
(1,000 km) (also in cases of a flat tire,
etc.).
As soon as possible, tighten the wheel
nuts to the specified torque with a
torque wrench.
The wheel nuts must be kept tightened
to specification at all times. It is recommended that wheel nuts be tightened
to specifications at each lubrication interval.
O
Adjust tire pressure to the COLD pressure.
COLD pressure:
SCE0662
After the vehicle has been parked for
three hours or more or driven less than
1 mile (1.6 km).
COLD tire pressures are shown on the
Tire and Loading Information label affixed to the driver side center pillar.
5. Securely store the flat tire and jacking
equipment in the vehicle.
6. Place the spare tire cover and the
trunk floor carpeting over the damaged tire.
7. Close the trunk.
WARNING
O
Always make sure that the spare tire and
jacking equipment are properly secured
In case of emergency 6-7
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
JUMP STARTING
after use. Such items can become dangerous projectiles in an accident or
sudden stop.
O
The T-type spare tire and small size
spare tire are designed for emergency
use. See specific instructions under the
heading “Wheels and tires” in the
“8. Maintenance and do-it-yourself”
section.
If needed Roadside Assistance is available. Please see your Warranty Information Booklet or Roadside Assistance I.D.
Card for the toll-free number to call (U.S.)
or Warranty Information Booklet (Canada).
To start your engine with a booster battery, the instructions and precautions
below must be followed.
WARNING
O
If done incorrectly, jump starting can
lead to a battery explosion, resulting in
severe injury or death. It could also damage your vehicle.
O
Explosive hydrogen gas is always
present in the vicinity of the battery.
Keep all sparks and flames away from
the battery.
O
Do not allow battery fluid to come into
contact with eyes, skin, clothing or
painted surfaces. Battery fluid is a corrosive sulphuric acid solution which can
cause severe burns. If the fluid should
come into contact with anything, immediately flush the contacted area with
water.
O
Keep the battery out of the reach of children.
O
The booster battery must be rated at
12 volts. Use of an improperly rated battery can damage your vehicle.
O
Whenever working on or near a battery,
always wear suitable eye protectors (for
example, goggles or industrial safety
spectacles) and remove rings, metal
bands, or any other jewelry. Do not lean
over the battery when jump starting.
O
Do not attempt to jump start a frozen
battery. It could explode and cause serious injury.
O
Your vehicle has an automatic engine
cooling fan. It could come on at any time.
Keep hands and other objects away from
it.
If needed, Roadside Assistance is available. Please see your Warranty Information Booklet or Roadside Assistance I.D.
Card for the toll-free number to call (U.S.)
or Warranty Information Booklet (Canada).
6-8 In case of emergency
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
If the battery is disconnected or discharged, the steering wheel will lock
and cannot be turned. Supply power
using jumper cables before pushing
the ignition switch and disengaging
the steering lock.
CAUTION
SCE0653
WARNING
Always follow the instructions below. Failure
to do so could result in damage to the charging system and cause personal injury.
1. If the booster battery is in another veA , position the two vehicles (q
A
hicle q
B ) to bring their batteries into
and q
close proximity to each other.
Do not allow the two vehicles to touch.
2. Apply parking brake. Move the se-
lector lever to the P (Park) position
(Automatic transmission models).
Move the shift lever to the R (Reverse)
position
(Manual
transmission
models). Switch off all unnecessary
electrical systems (light, heater, air
conditioner, etc.).
3. Remove vent caps on the battery (if so
equipped). Cover the battery with a
C to refirmly wrung out moist cloth q
duce explosion hazard.
O
Always connect positive (+) to positive
(+) and negative (−) to body ground (for
example, strut mounting bolt, engine lift
bracket, etc.) — not to the battery.
O
Make sure the jumper cables do not
touch moving parts in the engine compartment and that clamps do not contact
any other metal.
5. Start the engine of the booster vehicle
A and let it run for a few minutes.
q
6. Keep the engine speed of the booster
A at about 2,000 rpm, and
vehicle q
start your engine of the jumped veB in the normal manner.
hicle q
4. Connect jumper cables in the se1 → q
2 → q
3
quence as illustrated (q
4 ).
→q
In case of emergency 6-9
w 06.9.21/V36-D X
PUSH STARTING
CAUTION
Do not keep the starter motor engaged for
more than 10 seconds. If the engine does not
start right away, push the ignition switch to
the OFF position and wait 10 seconds before
trying again.
7. After starting your engine, carefully
disconnect the negative cable and
4 → q
3 →
then the positive cable (q
2 → q
1 ).
q
8. Replace the vent caps (if so equipped).
Be sure to dispose of the cloth used to
cover the vent holes as it may be contaminated with corrosive acid.
9. Put the battery cover and the engine
compartment cover on.
IF YOUR VEHICLE OVERHEATS
Do not attempt to start the engine by
pushing.
O
WARNING
CAUTION
O
Automatic transmission models cannot
be push started. Attempting to do so
may cause transmission damage.
Do not continue to drive if your vehicle
overheats. Doing so could cause engine
damage or a vehicle fire.
O
To avoid the danger of being scalded,
never remove the radiator cap while the
engine is still hot. When the radiator cap
is removed, pressurized hot water will
spurt out, possibly causing serious injury.
O
Do not open the hood if steam is coming
out.
O
Three way catalyst equipped models
should not be started by pushing since
the three way catalyst may be damaged.
O
Never try to start the vehicle by towing
it; when the engine starts, the forward
surge could cause the vehicle to collide
with the tow vehicle.
If needed, Roadside Assistance is available. Please see your Warranty Information Booklet or Roadside Assistance I.D.
Card for the toll-free number to call (U.S.)
or Warranty & Roadside Assistance Information Booklet (Canada).
If your vehicle is overheating (indicated
by an extremely high temperature gauge
reading), or if you feel a lack of engine
power, detect abnormal noise, etc., take
the following steps:
1. Move the vehicle safely off the road,
apply the parking brake and move the
selector lever to the P (Park) position
(Automatic transmission models).
Move the shift lever to the R (Reverse)
position (Manual transmission models).
6-10 In case of emergency
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
TOWING YOUR VEHICLE
Do not stop the engine.
2. Turn off the climate control. Open all
the windows, move the heater or air
conditioner temperature control to
maximum hot and fan control to high
speed.
should not leak water. If coolant is
leaking, or the cooling fan does not
run, stop the engine.
WARNING
3. If engine overheating is caused by
climbing a long hill on a hot day, run
the engine at a fast idle (approximately 1,500 rpm) until the temperature gauge indication returns to
normal.
Be careful not to allow your hands, hair, jewelry or clothing to come into contact with, or
get caught in, engine belts or the engine
cooling fan. The engine cooling fan can start
at any time when the coolant temperature is
high.
4. Get out of the vehicle. Look and listen
for steam or coolant escaping from the
radiator before opening the hood (If
steam or coolant is escaping, turn off
the engine.). Do not open the hood
further until no steam or coolant can
be seen.
7. After the engine cools down, check
the coolant level in the reservoir tank
with the engine running. Add coolant
to the reservoir tank if necessary.
Have your vehicle repaired at the
nearest INFINITI dealer.
5. Open the engine hood.
WARNING
If steam or water is coming from the engine,
stand clear to prevent getting burned.
If needed, Roadside Assistance is available. Please see your Warranty Information Booklet or Roadside Assistance I.D.
Card for the toll-free number to call (U.S.)
or Warranty & Roadside Assistance Information Booklet (Canada).
When towing your vehicle, all State (Provincial in Canada) and local regulations
for towing must be followed. Incorrect
towing equipment could damage your vehicle. Towing instructions are available
from an INFINITI dealer. Local service operators will generally be familiar with the
applicable laws and procedures for
towing. To assure proper towing and to
prevent accidental damage to your vehicle, INFINITI recommends that you have
a service operator tow your vehicle. It is
advisable to have the service operator
carefully read the following precautions.
WARNING
O
Never ride in a vehicle that is being
towed.
O
Never get under your vehicle after it has
been lifted by a tow truck.
6. Visually check if the cooling fan is running. The radiator hoses and radiator
In case of emergency 6-11
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
CAUTION
O
When towing, make sure that the transmission, axles, steering system and
power train are in working condition. If
any unit is damaged, dollies must be
used.
O
Always attach safety chains before
towing.
For information about towing your vehicle
behind a recreational vehicle (RV), refer to
“Flat towing” in the “9. Technical and
consumer information” section of this
manual.
If needed, Roadside Assistance is available. Please see your Warranty Information Booklet or Roadside Assistance I.D.
Card for the toll-free number to call (U.S.)
or Warranty & Roadside Assistance Information Booklet (Canada).
SCE0561
Two-wheel drive models
TOWING RECOMMENDED BY
INFINITI
CAUTION
Two-Wheel Drive (2WD) models
INFINITI recommends that your vehicle be
towed with the driving (rear) wheels off
the ground or place the vehicle on a flat
bed truck as illustrated.
O
Never tow automatic transmission
models with the rear wheels on the
ground or four wheels on the ground
(forward or backward), as this may
cause serious and expensive damage to
the transmission. If it is necessary to
tow the vehicle with the front wheels
raised, always use towing dollies under
the rear wheels.
6-12 In case of emergency
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
O
O
When towing rear wheel drive models
with the front wheels on the ground or
on towing dollies: Push the ignition
switch to the ACC or ON position, and secure the steering wheel in a straightahead position with a rope or similar device. Never secure the steering wheel by
selecting the LOCK position. This may
damage the steering lock mechanism.
Distance: Less than 500 miles (800
km)
— If the speed or distance must necessarily be greater, remove the propeller shaft before towing to prevent
damage to the transmission.
If you have to tow manual transmission
models with the rear wheels on the
ground (if you do not use towing dollies)
or four wheels on the ground:
— Push the ignition switch to the ON
position.
— Always release the parking brake.
— Move the transmission shift lever to
the N (Neutral) position.
— Observe the following restricted towing speeds and distances for manual
transmission models only:
Speed: Below 60 MPH (95 km/h)
In case of emergency 6-13
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
All-wheel drive models
SCE0488
All-Wheel Drive (AWD) models
INFINITI recommends that towing dollies
be used when towing your vehicle or the
vehicle be placed on a flat bed truck as illustrated.
CAUTION
SCE0654
Never tow AWD models with any of the
wheels on the ground as this may cause serious and expensive damage to the power
train.
6-14 In case of emergency
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
VEHICLE RECOVERY (Freeing a
stuck vehicle)
WARNING
O
Stand clear of a stuck vehicle.
O
Do not spin your tires at high speed. This
could cause them to explode and result
in serious injury. Parts of your vehicle
could also overheat and be damaged.
damaged.
3. Turn the steering wheel right and left
to clear an area around the front tires.
O
Do not use the vehicle tie downs to free a
vehicle stuck in sand, snow, mud, etc.
4. Slowly rock the vehicle forward and
backward.
O
Never tow a vehicle using the vehicle tie
downs or recovery hooks.
O
O
Always pull the cable straight out from
the front of the vehicle. Never pull on the
vehicle at an angle.
Shift back and forth between R (reverse) and D (drive) (automatic transmission models) or 1st (low) and R (reverse) (manual transmission models).
O
Apply the accelerator as little as possible to maintain the rocking motion.
O
Release the accelerator pedal before
shifting between R and D (automatic
transmission models) or 1st and R
(manual transmission models).
O
Do not spin the tires above 35 MPH (55
km/h).
O
Pulling devices should be routed so they
do not touch any part of the suspension,
steering, brake or cooling systems.
O
Pulling devices such as ropes or canvas
straps are not recommended for use in
vehicle towing or recovery.
Pulling a stuck vehicle
Securely install the vehicle recovery hook
1 stored with jacking tools as illustrated.
q
Make sure that the hook is properly secured in the original place after use.
Do not use the tie down hooks
towing or vehicle recovery.
2 for
q
CAUTION
O
Tow chains or cables must be attached
only to the vehicle recovery hooks or
main structural members of the vehicle.
Otherwise, the vehicle body will be
5. If the vehicle cannot be freed after a
few tries, contact a professional
towing service to remove the vehicle.
Rocking a stuck vehicle
If your vehicle is stuck in sand, snow,
mud, etc., use the following procedure:
1. Turn off the Vehicle Dynamic Control
(VDC) system.
2. Make sure the area in front and behind the vehicle is clear of obstructions.
In case of emergency 6-15
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
MEMO
6-16 In case of emergency
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
7 Appearance and care
Cleaning exterior ..............................................
Washing ......................................................
Waxing ........................................................
Removing spots...........................................
Underbody...................................................
Glass...........................................................
Aluminum alloy wheels................................
Chrome parts ..............................................
Tire dressing ...............................................
Cleaning interior ...............................................
7-2
7-2
7-2
7-3
7-3
7-3
7-3
7-3
7-3
7-4
Power window switch finisher .....................
Floor mats ...................................................
Seat belts....................................................
Corrosion protection .........................................
Most common factors contributing to
vehicle corrosion .........................................
Environmental factors influence the rate of
corrosion.....................................................
To protect your vehicle from corrosion ........
w 06.9.14/V36-D X
7-5
7-5
7-5
7-6
7-6
7-6
7-6
CLEANING EXTERIOR
In order to maintain the appearance of
your vehicle, it is important to take proper
care of it.
washing liquid mixed with clean, lukewarm (never hot) water.
CAUTION
To protect the paint surface, wash your
vehicle as soon as you can:
O
after a rainfall to prevent possible
damage from acid rain
O
after driving on coastal roads
O
when contaminants such as soot, bird
droppings, tree sap, metal particles or
bugs get on the paint surface
O
when dust or mud builds up on the
surface
Whenever possible, store or park your vehicle inside a garage or in a covered area.
When it is necessary to park outside, park
in a shady area or protect the vehicle with
a body cover.
Be careful not to scratch the paint surface
when putting on or removing the body
cover.
WASHING
Wash dirt off the vehicle with a wet
sponge and plenty of water. Clean the vehicle thoroughly using a mild soap, a special vehicle soap or general purpose dish-
damaged.
Rinse the vehicle again with plenty of
clean water.
O
Do not use car washes that use acid in
the detergent. Some car washes, especially brushless ones, use some acid for
cleaning. The acid may react with some
plastic vehicle components, causing
them to crack. This could affect their appearance, and also could cause them not
to function properly. Always check with
your car wash to confirm that acid is not
used.
O
Do not wash the vehicle with strong
household soap, strong chemical detergents, gasoline or solvents.
O
Do not wash the vehicle in direct sunlight or while the vehicle body is hot, as
the surface may become water-spotted.
O
Avoid using tight-napped or rough
cloths, such as washing mitts. Care
must be taken when removing caked-on
dirt or other foreign substances so the
paint surface is not scratched or
Inside flanges, seams and folds on the
doors, hatches and hood are particularly
vulnerable to the effects of road salt.
Therefore, these areas must be regularly
cleaned. Make sure that the drain holes
in the lower edge of the door are open.
Spray water under the body and in the
wheel wells to loosen the dirt and wash
away road salt.
Avoid leaving water spots on the paint
surface by using a damp chamois to dry
the vehicle.
WAXING
Regular waxing protects the paint surface
and helps retain new vehicle appearance.
Polishing is recommended to remove
built-up residue and to avoid a weathered
appearance before reapplying wax.
An INFINITI dealer can assist you in
choosing the proper product.
O
Wax your vehicle only after a thorough
7-2 Appearance and care
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
washing. Follow the instructions supplied with the wax.
O
Do not use a wax containing any abrasives, cutting compounds or cleaners
that may damage the vehicle finish.
Machine compound or aggressive polishing on a base coat/clear coat paint finish may dull the finish or leave swirl
marks.
REMOVING SPOTS
Remove tar and oil spots, industrial dust,
insects, and tree sap as quickly as possible from the paint surface to avoid lasting damage or staining. Special cleaning
products are available at an INFINITI
dealer or automotive accessory stores.
UNDERBODY
In areas where road salt is used in winter,
the underbody must be cleaned regularly.
This will prevent dirt and salt from
building up and causing underbody and
suspension corrosion. Before the winter
period and again in the spring, the underseal must be checked and, if necessary,
re-treated.
GLASS
Use glass cleaner to remove smoke and
dust film from the glass surfaces. It is
normal for glass to become coated with a
film after the vehicle is parked in the hot
sun. Glass cleaner and a soft cloth will
easily remove this film.
CAUTION
When cleaning the inside of the windows, do
not use sharp-edged tools, abrasive
cleaners or chlorine-based disinfectant
cleaners. They could damage the electrical
conductors, radio antenna elements or rear
window defogger elements.
ALUMINUM ALLOY WHEELS
Wash regularly with a sponge dampened
in a mild soap solution, especially during
winter months in areas where road salt is
used. Salt could discolor the wheels if not
removed.
CAUTION
Follow the directions below to avoid staining
or discoloring the wheels:
O
Do not use a cleaner that uses strong
acid or alkali contents to clean the
wheels.
O
Do not apply wheel cleaners to the
wheels when they are hot. The wheel
temperature should be the same as ambient temperature.
O
Rinse the wheel to completely remove
the cleaner within 15 minutes after the
cleaner is applied.
CHROME PARTS
Clean chrome parts regularly with a nonabrasive chrome polish to maintain the
finish.
TIRE DRESSING
INFINITI does not recommend the use of
tire dressings. Tire manufacturers apply a
coating to the tires to help reduce discoloration of the rubber. If a tire dressing is
Appearance and care 7-3
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
CLEANING INTERIOR
applied to the tires, it may react with the
coating and form a compound. This compound may come off the tire while driving
and stain the vehicle paint.
If you choose to use a tire dressing, take
the following precautions:
O
Use a water-based tire dressing. The
coating on the tire dissolves more
easily with an oil-based tire dressing.
O
Apply a light coat of tire dressing to
help prevent it from entering the tire
tread/grooves (where it would be difficult to remove).
O
Wipe off excess tire dressing using a
dry towel. Make sure the tire dressing
is completely removed from the tire
tread/grooves.
O
Allow the tire dressing to dry as recommended by tire dressing manufacturer.
Occasionally remove loose dust from the
interior trim, plastic parts and seats using
a vacuum cleaner or soft bristled brush.
Wipe the vinyl and leather surfaces with a
clean, soft cloth dampened in mild soap
solution, then wipe clean with a dry soft
cloth.
CAUTION
O
Never use benzine, thinner, or any
similar material.
O
Small dirt particles can be abrasive and
damaging to the leather surfaces and
should be removed promptly. Do not use
saddle soap, car waxes, polishes, oils,
cleaning fluids, solvents, detergents or
ammonia-based cleaners as they may
damage the leather’s natural finish.
O
Only use fabric protectors approved by
INFINITI.
O
Do not use glass or plastic cleaner on
meter or gauge lens covers. It may
damage the lens cover.
Regular care and cleaning is required in
order to maintain the appearance to the
leather.
Before using any fabric protector, read
the manufacturer’s recommendations.
Some fabric protectors contain chemicals
that may stain or bleach the seat material. Use a cloth dampened only with
water, to clean the meter and gauge lens.
7-4 Appearance and care
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
FLOOR MATS
Floor mat positioning aid
The use of INFINITI floor mats can extend
the life of your vehicle carpet and make it
easier to clean the interior. No matter
what mats are used, be sure they are fitted
for your vehicle and are properly positioned in the footwell to prevent interference with pedal operation. Mats should be
maintained with regular cleaning and replaced if they become excessively worn.
This model includes front floor mat brackets to act as floor mat positioning aid.
INFINITI floor mats have been specially
designed for your vehicle model. The front
floor mats have grommet holes in them.
To install, simply position the mat by
placing the floor mat bracket through the
floor mat grommet hole while centering
the mat in the floor pan contour.
Periodically check to make certain that
the mats are properly positioned.
SEAT BELTS
The seat belts can be cleaned by wiping
them with a sponge dampened in a mild
soap solution. Allow the belts to dry completely before using them.
See “Seat belt maintenance” in the
“1. Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system” section.
SAI0036
POWER WINDOW SWITCH FINISHER
Wipe the power window switch finisher
surfaces with a clean soft cloth dampened
in a mild soap solution, then wipe it clean
with a dry, soft cloth.
Some cleaners contain chemicals that
may stain or peel off the surface. Before
using any cleaner, contact an INFINITI
dealer for recommendations.
Regular care and cleaning is required in
order to maintain the appearance of the
power finisher surfaces.
WARNING
SAI0031
Do not allow wet seat belts to roll up in the
retractor. NEVER use bleach, dye, or
chemical solvents to clean the seat belts,
since these materials may severely weaken
the seat belt webbing.
Appearance and care 7-5
w 06.8.4/V36-D X
CORROSION PROTECTION
MOST COMMON FACTORS
CONTRIBUTING TO VEHICLE
CORROSION
O The
accumulation
of
moistureretaining dirt and debris in body panel
sections, cavities, and other areas.
O Damage to paint and other protective
coatings caused by gravel and stone
chips or minor traffic accidents.
ENVIRONMENTAL FACTORS
INFLUENCE THE RATE OF
CORROSION
Moisture
Accumulation of sand, dirt and water on
the vehicle body underside can accelerate
corrosion. Wet floor coverings will not dry
completely inside the vehicle, and should
be removed for drying to avoid floor panel
corrosion.
Relative humidity
Corrosion will be accelerated in areas of
high relative humidity, especially those
areas where the temperatures stay above
freezing where atmospheric pollution exists, or where road salt is used.
Temperature
A temperature increase will accelerate the
rate of corrosion to those parts which are
not well ventilated.
CAUTION
O
NEVER remove dirt, sand or other debris
from the passenger compartment by
washing it out with a hose. Remove dirt
with a vacuum cleaner or broom.
O
Never allow water or other liquids to
come in contact with electronic components inside the vehicle as this may
damage them.
Air pollution
Industrial pollution, the presence of salt
in the air in coastal areas, or heavy road
salt use will accelerate the corrosion process. Road salt will also accelerate the
disintegration of paint surfaces.
TO PROTECT YOUR VEHICLE FROM
CORROSION
O Wash your vehicle often to keep the
vehicle clean.
O Always check for minor damage to the
paint and repair it as soon as possible.
O Keep drain holes at the bottom of the
doors open to avoid water accumulation.
O Check the underbody for accumulation
of sand, dirt or salt. If present, wash
with water as soon as possible.
Chemicals used for road surface deicing
are extremely corrosive. They accelerate
corrosion and deterioration of underbody
components such as the exhaust system,
fuel and brake lines, brake cables, floor
pan and fenders.
In winter, the underbody must be cleaned
periodically.
For additional protection against rust and
corrosion, which may be required in some
areas, consult an INFINITI dealer.
7-6 Appearance and care
w 06.8.4/V36-D X
8 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
Maintenance requirement ................................. 8-2
General maintenance........................................ 8-2
Explanation of maintenance items............... 8-2
Maintenance precautions.................................. 8-5
Engine compartment check locations................ 8-7
VQ35HR engine ........................................... 8-7
Engine cooling system ..................................... 8-8
Checking engine coolant level..................... 8-8
Changing engine coolant............................. 8-9
Engine oil ......................................................... 8-9
Checking engine oil level ............................ 8-9
Changing engine oil and filter .................. 8-10
Automatic transmission fluid........................... 8-12
Power steering fluid ........................................ 8-12
Brake fluid ...................................................... 8-13
Clutch fluid .................................................... 8-14
Window washer fluid ...................................... 8-14
Battery ............................................................ 8-15
Jump starting............................................. 8-16
Variable voltage control system ...................... 8-17
Drive belts ...................................................... 8-17
Spark plugs .................................................... 8-18
Replacing spark plugs ...............................
Air cleaner ......................................................
Windshield wiper blades.................................
Cleaning ....................................................
Replacing ..................................................
Brakes ............................................................
Self-adjusting brakes .................................
Brake pad wear indicators .........................
Fuses..............................................................
Engine compartment .................................
Passenger compartment ............................
Intelligent Key battery replacement ................
Lights .............................................................
Headlights ................................................
Exterior and interior lights ........................
Wheels and tires ............................................
Tire pressure.............................................
Tire labeling ..............................................
Types of tires ............................................
Tire chains ................................................
Changing wheels and tires........................
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
8-18
8-19
8-19
8-19
8-20
8-21
8-21
8-21
8-22
8-22
8-23
8-23
8-25
8-26
8-26
8-28
8-28
8-32
8-34
8-35
8-36
MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENT
GENERAL MAINTENANCE
Your new INFINITI has been designed to
have minimum maintenance requirements
with longer service intervals to save you
both time and money. However, some dayto-day and regular maintenance is essential to maintain your INFINITI’s fine mechanical condition, as well as its emission
and engine performance.
for proper vehicle operation. It is your
responsibility to perform these procedures
regularly as prescribed.
It is the owner’s responsibility to make
sure that the specified maintenance, as
well as general maintenance, is performed.
If maintenance service is required or your
vehicle appears to malfunction, have the
systems checked and serviced by an
INFINITI dealer.
As the vehicle owner, you are the only
one who can ensure that your vehicle receives the proper maintenance care. You
are a vital link in the maintenance chain.
INFINITI technicians are well-trained specialists and are kept up to date with the
latest service information through technical bulletins, service tips, and indealership information systems. They are
completely qualified to work on INFINITI
vehicles before work begins.
Scheduled maintenance:
For your convenience, both required and
optional scheduled maintenance items
are described and listed in your “INFINITI
Service and Maintenance Guide”. You
must refer to that guide to ensure that
necessary maintenance is performed on
your INFINITI at regular intervals.
General maintenance:
General maintenance includes those items
which should be checked during normal
day-to-day operation. They are essential
These checks or inspections can be done
by yourself, a qualified technician or, if
you prefer, an INFINITI dealer.
Where to go for service:
You can be confident that an INFINITI
dealer’s service department performs the
best job to meet the maintenance
requirements on your vehicle — in a
reliable and economic way.
During the normal day-to-day operation of
the vehicle, general maintenance should
be performed regularly as prescribed in
this section. If you detect any unusual
sounds, vibrations or smell, be sure to
check for the cause or have an INFINITI
dealer do it promptly. In addition, you
should notify an INFINITI dealer if you
think that repairs are required.
When performing any checks or maintenance work, see “Maintenance precautions” later in this section.
EXPLANATION OF MAINTENANCE
ITEMS
Additional information on the following
items with “*” is found later in this section.
Outside the vehicle
The maintenance items listed here should
be performed from time to time, unless
otherwise specified.
Doors and engine hood: Check that all
doors and the engine hood, operate properly. Also ensure that all latches lock securely. Lubricate hinges and latches if
necessary. Make sure that the secondary
latch keeps the hood from opening when
8-2 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
the primary latch is released.
When driving in areas using road salt or
other corrosive materials, check lubrication frequently.
Lights*: Clean the headlights on a regular
basis. Make sure that the headlights,
stop lights, tail lights, turn signal lights,
and other lights are all operating properly
and installed securely. Also check headlight aim.
Road wheel nuts (lug nuts)*: When
checking the tires, make sure no wheel
nuts are missing, and check for any loose
wheel nuts. Tighten if necessary.
Tire rotation*: Tires should be rotated
every 7,500 miles (12,000 km), except 18inch tire models.
Tires*: Check the pressure with a gauge
often and always prior to long distance
trips. If necessary, adjust the pressure in
all tires, including the spare, to the pressure specified. Check carefully for
damage, cuts or excessive wear.
Tire, wheel alignment and balance: If the
vehicle should pull to either side while
driving on a straight and level road, or if
you detect uneven or abnormal tire wear,
there may be a need for wheel alignment.
If the steering wheel or seat vibrates at
normal highway speeds, wheel balancing
may be needed.
For additional information regarding tires,
refer to “Important Tire Safety Information” (US) or “Tire Safety Information”
(Canada) in the INFINITI Warranty Information Booklet.
Windshield: Clean the windshield on a
regular basis. Check the windshield at
least every six months for cracks or other
damage. Have a damaged windshield repaired by a qualified repair facility.
Windshield wiper blades*: Check for
cracks or wear if they do not wipe properly.
Inside the vehicle
The maintenance items listed here should
be checked on a regular basis, such as
when performing periodic maintenance,
cleaning the vehicle, etc.
Accelerator pedal: Check the pedal for
smooth operation and make sure the
pedal does not catch or require uneven
effort. Keep the floor mat away from the
pedal.
Automatic transmission P (Park) mechanism: On a fairly steep hill, check that
your vehicle is held securely with the selector lever in the P (Park) position
without applying any brakes.
Brake pedal: Check the pedal for smooth
operation. If the brake pedal suddenly
goes down further than normal, the pedal
feels spongy or the vehicle seems to take
longer to stop, see an INFINITI dealer immediately. Keep the floor mat away from
the pedal.
Brakes: Check that the brakes do not pull
the vehicle to one side when applied.
Parking brake: Check the parking brake
operation regularly. The vehicle should be
securely held on a fairly steep hill with
only the parking brake applied. If the
parking brake needs adjusted, see an
INFINITI dealer.
Seat belts: Check that all parts of the seat
belt system (For example, buckles, anchors, adjusters and retractors) operate
properly and smoothly, and are installed
securely. Check the belt webbing for cuts,
fraying, wear or damage.
Seats: Check seat position controls such
as seat adjusters, seatback recliner, etc.
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-3
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
to ensure they operate smoothly and that
all latches lock securely in every position.
Check that the head restraints move up
and down smoothly and that the locks (if
so equipped) hold securely in all latched
positions.
Steering wheel: Check for changes in the
steering conditions, such as excessive
free play, hard steering or strange noises.
Warning lights and chimes: Make sure
that all warning lights and chimes are operating properly.
Windshield defroster: Check that the air
comes out of the defroster outlets properly and in sufficient quantity when operating the heater or air conditioner.
Windshield wiper and washer*: Check that
the wipers and washer operate properly
and that the wipers do not streak.
Under the hood and vehicle
The maintenance items listed here should
be checked periodically (For example,
each time you check the engine oil or refuel).
Battery*: Check the fluid level in each
cell.
It should be between the MAX and MIN
lines. Vehicles operated in high temperatures or under severe condition require
frequent checks of the battery fluid level.
Brake fluid level*: Make sure that the
brake fluid level is between the MAX and
MIN lines on the reservoir.
Engine coolant level*: Check the coolant
level when the engine is cold.
Engine drive belts*: Make sure that no
belt is frayed, worn, cracked or oily.
Engine oil level*: Check the level after
parking the vehicle on a level spot and
turning off the engine. (Wait more than 15
minutes for the oil to drain back into the
oil pan.)
Exhaust system: Make sure there are no
loose supports, cracks or holes. If the
sound of the exhaust seems unusual or
there is a smell of exhaust fumes, immediately locate the trouble and correct it.
See “Precautions when starting and
driving” in the “5. Starting and driving”
section for exhaust gas (Carbon monoxide).
Fluid leaks: Check under the vehicle for
fuel, oil, water or other fluid leaks after
the vehicle has been parked for a while.
Water dripping from the air conditioner
after use is normal. If you should notice
any leaks or if gasoline fumes are evident, check for the cause and have it corrected immediately.
Power steering fluid level* and lines:
Check the level when the fluid is cold and
the engine is turned off. Check the lines
for proper attachment, leaks, cracks, etc.
Radiator and hoses: Check the front of the
radiator and clean off any dirt, insects,
leaves, etc., that may have accumulated.
Make sure the hoses have no cracks, deformation, deterioration or loose connections.
Underbody: The underbody is frequently
exposed to corrosive substances such as
those used on icy roads or to control
dust. It is very important to remove these
substances, otherwise rust will form on
the floor pan, frame, fuel lines and
around the exhaust system. At the end of
winter, the underbody should be thoroughly flushed with plain water, being
careful to clean those areas where mud
and dirt may accumulate. For additional
information, see “Cleaning exterior” in
the “7. Appearance and care” section.
Windshield washer fluid*: Check that
there is adequate fluid in the tank.
8-4 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS
When performing any inspection or maintenance work on your vehicle, always take
care to prevent serious accidental injury
to yourself or damage to the vehicle. The
following are general precautions which
should be closely observed.
WARNING
O
Park the vehicle on a level surface, apply
the parking brake securely and block the
wheels to prevent the vehicle from
moving. For manual transmission
models, move the shift lever to N (Neutral) position. For automatic transmission models, move the selector lever to P
(Park) position.
O
Be sure the ignition switch is in the
LOCK position when performing any
parts replacement or repairs.
O
If you must work with the engine running, keep your hands, clothing, hair
and tools away from moving fans,
belts and any other moving parts.
O
It is advisable to secure or remove any
loose clothing and remove any jewelry,
such as rings, watches, etc. before
working on your vehicle.
O
O
Always wear eye protection whenever
you work on your vehicle.
O
If you must run the engine in an enclosed
space such as a garage, be sure there is
proper ventilation for exhaust gases to
escape.
O
Never get under the vehicle while it is
supported only by a jack. If it is necessary to work under the vehicle, support it
with safety stands.
O
O
Keep smoking materials, flame and
sparks away from fuel tank and the battery.
Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic engine cooling fan. It may come on
at any time without warning, even if the
ignition key is in the OFF position and
the engine is not running. To avoid injury, always disconnect the negative
battery cable before working near the
fan.
The fuel filter or fuel lines should be serviced by an INFINITI dealer because the
fuel lines are under high pressure even
when the engine is off.
CAUTION
O
Do not work under the hood while the
engine is hot. Turn the engine off and
wait until it cools down.
O
Never connect or disconnect the battery
or any transistorized component while
the ignition switch is in the ON position.
O
Never leave the engine or automatic
transmission related component harnesses disconnected while the ignition
switch is in the ON position.
O
Avoid direct contact with used engine oil
and coolant. Improperly disposed engine oil, and coolant, and/or other vehicle fluids can damage the environment. Always conform to local regulations for disposal of vehicle fluid.
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-5
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
This “8. Maintenance and do-it-yourself”
section gives instructions regarding only
those items which are relatively easy for
most owners to perform. A genuine
INFINITI Service Manual is also available.
See “Owner’s Manual/Service Manual
order information” in the “9. Technical
and consumer information” section.
You should be aware that incomplete or
improper servicing may result in operating difficulties or excessive emissions,
and could affect your warranty coverage.
If in doubt about any servicing, we recommend that it be done by an INFINITI dealer.
8-6 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
ENGINE COMPARTMENT CHECK
LOCATIONS
10. Drive belts
11. Engine coolant reservoir
12. Engine oil dipstick
SSI0265
VQ35HR ENGINE
1.
2.
3.
4.
Fuse/fusible link holder
Battery
Engine oil filler cap
Brake fluid reservoir
5. Clutch fluid reservoir (Manual Transmission models)
6. Window washer fluid reservoir
7. Power steering fluid reservoir
8. Air cleaner
9. Radiator filler cap
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-7
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM
The engine cooling system is filled at the
factory with a high-quality, year-round,
anti-freeze coolant solution. The antifreeze solution contains rust and corrosion inhibitors, therefore additional
cooling system additives are not necessary.
WARNING
O
O
Never remove the radiator cap when the
engine is hot. Wait until the engine and
radiator cool down. Serious burns could
be caused by high pressure fluid escaping from the radiator. See precautions in “If your vehicle overheats” found
in the “6. In case of emergency” section
of this manual.
The radiator is equipped with a pressure
type radiator cap. To prevent engine
damage, use only a genuine NISSAN radiator cap.
CAUTION
When adding or replacing coolant, be sure
to use only a Genuine NISSAN Long Life
Antifreeze/Coolant (green) or equivalent
with the proper mixture ratio of 50% antifreeze and 50% demineralized water/
distilled water. The use of other types of
coolant solutions may damage your engine
cooling system.
Outside
temperature
down to
°C
°F
−35
−30
Antifreeze
Demineralized water or
distilled
water
50%
50%
SDI2043
CHECKING ENGINE COOLANT LEVEL
Check the coolant level in the reservoir
tank when the engine is cold. If the
2 , open the
coolant level is below MIN q
reservoir tank cap and add coolant up to
1 level. If the reservoir tank is
the MAX q
empty, check the coolant level in the radiator when the engine is cold. If there is
insufficient coolant in the radiator, fill the
radiator with coolant up to the filler opening and also add it to the reservoir tank
1 . Tighten the cap
up to the MAX level q
securely after adding engine coolant.
8-8 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
w 06.9.14/V36-D X
ENGINE OIL
Tighten the cap securely after adding engine coolant.
If the cooling system requires coolant frequently, have it checked by an
INFINITI dealer.
WARNING
O
To avoid the danger of being scalded,
never change the coolant when the engine is hot.
O
O Major cooling system repairs should
be performed by an INFINITI dealer.
The service procedures can be found
in the appropriate INFINITI Service
Manual.
Never remove the radiator cap when the
engine is hot. Serious burns could be
caused by high pressure fluid escaping
from the radiator.
O
O Improper servicing can result in reduced heater performance and engine
overheating.
Avoid direct skin contact with used coolant. If skin contact is made, wash thoroughly with soap or hand cleaner as
soon as possible.
O
CHANGING ENGINE COOLANT
Contact an INFINITI dealer if replacement
is required.
Keep coolant out of reach of children and
pets.
SDI2045
CHECKING ENGINE OIL LEVEL
1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and
apply the parking brake.
2. Run the engine until it reaches operating temperature.
3. Turn off the engine. Wait more than 15
minutes for the oil to drain back into
the oil pan.
4. Remove the dipstick and wipe it clean.
Reinsert it all the way.
5. Remove the dipstick again and check
the oil level. It should be within the
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-9
w 06.9.14/V36-D X
1 . If the oil level is below q
2 ,
range q
remove the oil filler cap and pour recommended oil through the opening.
3 .
Do not overfill q
6. Recheck oil level with the dipstick.
It is normal to add some oil between oil
maintenance intervals or during the breakin period, depending on the severity of operating conditions.
CAUTION
Oil level should be checked regularly. Operating the engine with an insufficient amount
of oil can damage the engine, and such damage is not covered by warranty.
CHANGING ENGINE OIL AND FILTER
Change the engine oil and filter according
to the maintenance intervals shown in the
INFINITI Service and Maintenance Guide.
3. Turn the engine off and wait more
than 15 minutes.
4. Raise and support the vehicle using a
suitable floor jack and safety jack
stands.
• Place the safety jack stands under
the vehicle jack-up points.
• A suitable adapter should be attached to the jack stand saddle.
5. Remove the plastic engine undercover.
a. Remove the small plastic clip at the
center point of the undercover.
b. Then remove the other bolts that
hold the undercover in place.
CAUTION
Make sure the correct lifting and support
points are used to avoid vehicle damage.
SDI2024
Two-wheel drive (2WD) models
Engine oil and filter
1. Place a large drain pan under the
drain plug.
2. Remove the oil filler cap.
1
3. Remove the drain plug q
with a
wrench and completely drain the oil.
CAUTION
Vehicle set-up
1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and
apply the parking brake.
Be careful not to burn yourself, as the engine
oil is hot.
2. Run the engine until it reaches operating temperature.
8-10 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
6. Coat the gasket on the new filter with
clean engine oil.
7. Screw in the oil filter clockwise until a
slight resistance is felt, then tighten
additionally more than 2/3 turn.
Oil filter tightening torque:
11 to 15 ft-lb
(14.7 to 20.5 Nzm)
8. Clean and re-install the drain plug
with a new washer. Securely tighten
the drain plug with a wrench.
SDI2047
All-wheel drive (AWD) models
O Waste oil must be disposed of properly.
O
Check your local regulations.
(Perform steps 4 to 7 only when the engine oil filter change is needed.)
2 with an oil
4. Loosen the oil filter q
filter wrench. Remove the oil filter by
turning it by hand.
5. Wipe the engine oil filter mounting
surface with a clean rag.
Be sure to remove any old rubber
gasket remaining on the mounting surface of the engine.
Drain plug tightening torque:
22 to 29 ft-lb
(29 to 39 Nzm)
and consumer information” section for
drain and refill capacity. The drain and
refill capacity depends on the oil temperature and drain time. Use these
specifications for reference only. Always use the dipstick to determine the
proper amount of oil in the engine.
10. Start the engine and check for
leakage around the drain plug and
the oil filter. Correct as required.
11. Turn the engine off and wait more
than 15 minutes. Check the oil level
with the dipstick. Add engine oil if
necessary.
After the operation
Do not use excessive force.
9. Refill engine with recommended oil
and install the oil filler cap securely.
CAUTION
1. Install the engine undercover into position as the following steps.
a. Pull the center of the small plastic
clip out.
b. Hold the engine undercover into
position.
The dipstick must be inserted in place to
prevent oil spillage from the dipstick hole
while filling the engine with oil.
c. Insert the clip through the undercover into the hole in the frame,
then push the center of the clip in
to lock the clip in place.
See “Capacities and recommended
fuel/lubricants” in the “9. Technical
d. Install the other bolts that hold the
undercover in place. Be careful not
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-11
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FLUID
to strip the bolts or over-tighten
them.
2. Lower the vehicle carefully to the
ground.
3. Dispose of waste oil and filter properly.
WARNING
O
Prolonged and repeated contact with
used engine oil may cause skin cancer.
O
Try to avoid direct skin contact with
used oil. If skin contact is made, wash
thoroughly with soap or hand cleaner as
soon as possible.
O
Keep used engine oil out of reach of
children.
POWER STEERING FLUID
When checking or replacement is required, we recommend an INFINITI dealer
for servicing.
CAUTION
O
Use only Genuine NISSAN Matic J ATF.
Do not mix with other fluids.
O
Using automatic transmission fluid
other than Genuine NISSAN Matic J ATF
will cause deterioration in driveability
and automatic transmission durability,
and may damage the automatic transmission, which is not covered by the
INFINITI new vehicle limited warranty.
The specified automatic transmission
fluid is also described on caution labels
located on the flip side of the hood.
SDI1765A
Check the fluid level in the reservoir.
The fluid level should be checked using
1 : HOT MAX., q
2 : HOT
the HOT range (q
MIN.) at fluid temperatures of 122 to 176°F
3 :
(50 to 80°C) or using the COLD range (q
4 : COLD MIN.) at fluid temCOLD MAX., q
peratures of 32 to 86°F (0 to 30°C).
CAUTION
O
Do not overfill.
O
Use Genuine NISSAN PSF or equiva-
8-12 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
BRAKE FLUID
or equivalent DOT 3 fluid up to the MAX
1 . If fluid must be added frequently,
line q
the system should be checked by an
INFINITI dealer.
lent.
For further brake fluid specification information, refer to “Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants” in the “9. Technical and consumer information” section
of this manual.
CAUTION
SDI2025
WARNING
Do not spill the fluid on any painted surfaces. This will damage the paint. If fluid is
spilled, immediately wash the surfaces with
water.
Use only new fluid. Old, inferior, or contaminated fluid may damage the brake system.
The use of improper fluids can damage the
brake system and affect the vehicle’s stopping ability.
Check the fluid level in the reservoir. If
2 or the
the fluid is below the MIN line q
brake warning light comes on, add Genuine NISSAN Super Heavy Duty Brake Fluid
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-13
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
CLUTCH FLUID
WINDOW WASHER FLUID
WARNING
O
Use only new fluid from a sealed container. Old, inferior or contaminated
fluid may damage the clutch system.
O
Be sure to clean filler cap before removing.
CAUTION
SDI1906A
Check the fluid level in the reservoir. If
1 ,
the fluid level is below the MIN line q
add Genuine Nissan Super Heavy Duty
Brake Fluid or equivalent DOT 3 fluid up to
2 .
the MAX line q
If fluid is added frequently, the system
should be thoroughly checked by an
INFINITI dealer.
SDI2027
Do not spill the fluid on painted surfaces.
This will damage the paint. If fluid is spilled,
wash the surface with water.
WARNING
Antifreeze is poisonous and should be
stored carefully in marked containers out of
the reach of children.
Add fluid when the low washer fluid
warning light illuminates. Pull up the reservoir tank cap and add a washer solvent
to the water for better cleaning. In the
winter season, add a windshield washer
antifreeze. Follow the manufacturer’s instructions for the mixture ratio.
8-14 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
w 07.2.6/V36-D X
BATTERY
Recommended fluid is Genuine NISSAN
Windshield Washer Concentrate Cleaner &
Antifreeze or equivalent.
CAUTION
O
Do not substitute engine anti-freeze
coolant for window washer solution. This
may result in damage to the paint.
O
Do not fill the window washer reservoir
tank with washer fluid concentrates at
full strength. Some methyl alcohol
based washer fluid concentrates may
permanently stain the grille if spilled
while filling the window washer reservoir tank.
O
O Keep the battery surface clean and
dry. Any corrosion should be washed
off with a solution of baking soda and
water.
O Make certain the terminal connections
are clean and securely tightened.
O If the vehicle is not to be used for 30
days or longer, disconnect the negative (—) battery terminal cable to prevent discharging it.
WARNING
O
Do not expose the battery to flames or
electrical sparks. Hydrogen gas generated by the battery is explosive. Do not
allow battery fluid to contact your skin,
eyes, fabrics, or painted surfaces. After
touching a battery or battery cap, do not
touch or rub your eyes. Thoroughly wash
your hands. If the acid contacts your
eyes, skin or clothing, immediately flush
with water for at least 15 minutes and
seek medical attention.
O
Do not operate the vehicle if the fluid in
the battery is low. Low battery fluid
Pre-mix washer fluid concentrates with
water to the manufacturer’s recommended levels before pouring the fluid
into the window washer reservoir tank.
Do not use the window washer reservoir
tank to mix the washer fluid concentrate
and water.
can cause a higher load on the battery
which can generate heat, reduce battery
life, and in some cases lead to an explosion.
O
When working on or near a battery, always wear suitable eye protection and
remove all jewelry.
O
Battery posts, terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands after handling.
O
Keep the battery out of the reach of
children.
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-15
w 06.9.21/V36-D X
JUMP STARTING
If jump starting is necessary, see “Jump
starting” in the “6. In case of emergency”
section. If the engine does not start by
jump starting, the battery may have to be
replaced. Contact an INFINITI dealer.
DI0137MA
Check the fluid level in each cell (Remove
the battery cover if it is necessary). It
1
should be between the UPPER LEVEL q
2 lines.
and LOWER LEVEL q
If it is necessary to add fluid, add only
distilled water to bring the level to the indicator in each filler opening. Do not overfill.
SDI1480C
A .
1. Remove the cell plugs q
2. Add distilled water up to the UPPER
1 line.
LEVEL q
If the side of the battery is not clear,
check the distilled water level by looking directly above the cell; the condi1 indicates OK and the condition q
2 needs more to be added.
tions q
A .
3. Tighten cell plugs q
Vehicles operated in high temperatures or
under severe conditions require frequent
checks of the battery fluid level.
8-16 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
w 06.9.21/V36-D X
VARIABLE VOLTAGE CONTROL SYSTEM
DRIVE BELTS
ness. If the belt is in poor condition or
loose, have it replaced or adjusted by
an INFINITI dealer.
CAUTION
O
Do not ground accessories directly to
the battery terminal. Doing so will bypass the variable voltage control system
and the vehicle battery may not charge
completely.
O
Use electrical accessories with the engine running to avoid discharging the
vehicle battery.
The variable voltage control system measures the amount of electrical discharge
from the battery and controls voltage generated by the generator.
2. Have the belts checked regularly for
condition in accordance with the maintenance schedule in your “INFINITI
Service and Maintenance Guide”.
SDI2041
1. Power steering fluid pump
2. Alternator
3. Crankshaft pulley
4. Air conditioner compressor
D: Tension checking points
WARNING
Be sure the ignition switch is in the LOCK
position. The engine could rotate
unexpectedly.
1. Visually inspect each belt for signs of
unusual wear, cuts, fraying or loose-
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-17
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
SPARK PLUGS
Always replace spark plugs with recommended or equivalent ones.
WARNING
Be sure the engine is off, ignition switch is in
the LOCK position and that the parking
brake is engaged securely.
CAUTION
Be sure to use the correct socket to remove
the spark plugs. An incorrect socket can
damage the spark plugs.
SDI2020
REPLACING SPARK PLUGS
If replacement is required, see an INFINITI
dealer for servicing.
Iridium-tipped spark plugs
It is not necessary to replace the iridiumtipped spark plugs as frequently as the
conventional type spark plugs since they
will last much longer. Follow the maintenance schedule in “INFINITI Service and
Maintenance Guide”, but do not reuse
them by cleaning or regapping.
8-18 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
w 06.9.14/V36-D X
AIR CLEANER
WINDSHIELD WIPER BLADES
vice and Maintenance Guide” for maintenance intervals. When replacing the filter,
wipe the inside of the air cleaner housing
and the cover with a damp cloth.
WARNING
O
O
Operating the engine with the air
cleaner removed can cause you or others
to be burned. The air cleaner not only
cleans the air, it stops flame if the engine backfires. If it isn’t there, and the
engine backfires, you could be burned.
Do not drive with the air cleaner removed, and be careful when working on
the engine with the air cleaner removed.
CLEANING
If your windshield is not clear after using
the windshield washer or if a wiper blade
chatters when running, wax or other material may be on the blade or windshield.
Clean the outside of the windshield with a
washer solution or a mild detergent. Your
windshield is clean if beads do not form
when rinsing with clear water.
Clean the blade by wiping it with a cloth
soaked in a washer solution or a mild detergent. Then rinse the blade with clear
water. If your windshield is still not clear
after cleaning the blades and using the
wiper, replace the blades.
Never pour fuel into the throttle body or
attempt to start the engine with the air
cleaner removed. Doing so could result
in serious injury.
SDI2033
1 as illustrated
Remove the retainers q
2 .
and pull out the filter element q
The filter element should not be cleaned
and reused. Replace it according to the
maintenance intervals. See “INFINITI Ser-
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-19
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
O
Worn windshield wiper blades can
damage the windshield and impair
driver vision.
SDI2048
REPLACING
CAUTION
Replace the wiper blades if they are worn.
1. Pull the wiper arm.
A , and then
2. Push the release tab q
move the wiper blade down the wiper
1 while pushing the release tab
arm q
to remove.
3. Insert the new wiper blade onto the
wiper arm until a click sounds.
O
After wiper blade replacement, return
the wiper arm to its original position;
otherwise it may be damaged when the
hood is opened.
O
Make sure the wiper blades contact the
glass; otherwise the arm may be damaged from wind pressure.
8-20 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
BRAKES
If the brakes do not operate properly,
have the brakes checked by an INFINITI
dealer.
SELF-ADJUSTING BRAKES
Your vehicle is
adjusting brakes.
equipped
with
self-
The disc-type brakes self-adjust every
time the brake pedal is applied.
occasional brake squeak, squeal or other
noise may be heard. Occasional brake
noise during light to moderate stops is
normal and does not affect the function or
performance of the brake system.
Proper brake inspection intervals should
be followed. For additional information,
see the maintenance log section of your
“INFINITI Service and Maintenance Guide”
for maintenance intervals.
WARNING
See an INFINITI dealer for a brake system
check if the brake pedal height does not return to normal.
BRAKE PAD WEAR INDICATORS
SDI1832
If you wax the surface of the hood, be careful not to let wax get into the washer
A . This may cause clogging or imnozzle q
proper windshield washer operation. If
wax gets into the nozzle, remove it with a
B .
needle or small pin q
The disc brake pads on your vehicle have
audible wear indicators. When a brake
pad requires replacement, it will make a
high pitched scraping or screeching
sound when the vehicle is in motion
whether or not the brake pedal is depressed. Have the brakes checked as
soon as possible if the wear indicator
sound is heard.
Under some driving or climate conditions,
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-21
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
FUSES
headlight switch is turned to OFF.
2. Open the engine hood and remove the
cover on the battery and the fuse/
fusible link holder.
3. Remove the fuse/fusible link holder
cover.
4. Remove the fuse with the fuse puller.
SDI1479A
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
CAUTION
Never use a fuse of a higher or lower amperage rating than that specified on the fuse
box cover. This could damage the electrical
system or cause a fire.
If any electrical equipment does not operate, check for an open fuse.
1. Be sure the ignition switch is pushed
to the OFF or LOCK position and the
SDI1754
A , replace it with a
5. If the fuse is open q
B . Spare fuses are stored in
new fuse q
the passenger compartment fuse box.
6. If a new fuse also opens, have the
electrical system checked and repaired by an INFINITI dealer.
Fusible links
If any electrical equipment does not operate and fuses are in good condition,
check the fusible links. If any of these
fusible links are melted, replace only with
genuine INFINITI parts.
8-22 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
INTELLIGENT KEY BATTERY REPLACEMENT
SDI2034
PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
CAUTION
Never use a fuse of a higher or lower amperage rating than that specified on the fuse
box cover. This could damage the electrical
system or cause a fire.
If any electrical equipment does not operate, check for an open fuse.
1. Be sure the ignition switch is pushed
to the OFF or LOCK position and the
SDI1834
Replace the battery as follows:
headlight switch is turned to OFF.
2. Open the fuse box lid.
3. Remove the fuse with the fuse puller
A .
q
4. If the fuse is open, replace it with a
new fuse.
5. If a new fuse also opens, have the
electrical system checked and repaired by an INFINITI dealer.
1. Release the lock knob at the back of
the Intelligent Key and remove the mechanical key.
A
2. Insert a flat-blade screwdriver q
B
wrapped with a cloth into the slit q
of the corner and twist it to separate
the upper part from the lower part.
3. Replace the battery with a new one.
O
Do not touch the internal circuit and
electric terminals as it could cause a
malfunction.
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-23
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
If the battery is removed for any reason
other than replacement, perform step 5
above.
ment off and on, the user is encouraged to
try to correct the interference by one or
more of the following measures:
O
Be careful not to touch the circuit board
and the battery terminal as it could
cause a malfunction.
— Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna
O
An improperly disposed battery can
harm the environment. Always confirm
local regulations for battery disposal.
O
SDI2042
Recommended battery: CR2032 or
equivalent
Make sure that the ! side faces the
bottom of the case. The ! mark is
stamped on the bottom of the case.
4. Align the tips of the upper and lower
parts, and then push them together
until it is securely closed.
5. Push the buttons two or three times to
check its operation.
See an INFINITI dealer if you need any assistance for replacement.
When changing batteries, do not let
dust or oil get on the Intelligent Key.
FCC Notice:
— Increase the separation between the
equipment and the receiver
— Connect the equipment into an outlet
on a circuit different from that to which
the receiver is connected.
— Consult the dealer or an experienced
radio/TV technician for help.
This equipment has been tested and found
to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device pursuant to part 15 of the FCC
Rules. These limits are designed to provide
reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation.
This equipment generates, uses and can
radiate radio frequency energy and, if not
installed and used in accordance with the
instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However,
there is no guarantee that interference will
not occur in a particular installation. If this
equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which
can be determined by turning the equip-
8-24 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
LIGHTS
1. Front turn signal light
2. Headlight (high- and low-beam)
3. Clearance light and front side turn signal light
4. Map light
5. Rear personal light
6. Fog light
8. Step light
9. High-mounted stop light (on the rear
parcel shelf or in the rear spoiler)*
10. Trunk light
11. License plate light
12. Back-up light
13. Rear combination light (rear turn
signal/tail/stop/side marker light)
*: Note that the high-mounted stop light
on the rear parcel shelf will not be lit if
the vehicle is equipped with the rear
spoiler.
SDI2035
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-25
w 07.2.6/V36-D X
HEADLIGHTS
EXTERIOR AND INTERIOR LIGHTS
Replacing
Xenon headlight bulb:
WARNING
HIGH VOLTAGE
When xenon headlights are on, they produce
a high voltage. To prevent an electric shock,
never attempt to modify or disassemble. Always have your xenon headlights replaced
at an INFINITI dealer. For additional information, see “Headlight and turn signal switch”
in the “2. Instruments and controls” section.
If replacement is required, see an INFINITI
dealer.
Item
Front turn signal light*
Front fog light*
Clearance light and front side turn signal light*
Rear combination light*
back-up
turn signal
stop/tail/side marker
License plate light*
Map light
Rear personal light
Vanity mirror light
Step light*
Trunk light*
High-mounted stop light*
Wattage (W)
21
51
5
Bulb No.
WY21W
HB4
WY5W
16
21
LED
5
8
8
2
5
3.4
LED
W16W
W21W
—
T10
—
—
—
—
—
—
*: See an INFINITI dealer for replacement.
Fog may temporarily form inside the lens
of the exterior lights in the rain or in a car
wash. A temperature difference between
the inside and the outside of the lens
causes the fog. This is not a malfunction.
If large drops of water collect inside the
lens, contact an INFINITI dealer.
8-26 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
Replacement procedures
All other lights are either type A, B, C, D,
E or F. When replacing a bulb, first remove the lens and/or cover.
Map light
SDI1679
Rear personal light
SDI2030
SDI2031
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-27
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
WHEELS AND TIRES
If you have a flat tire, see “Flat tire” in the
“6. In case of emergency” section.
TIRE PRESSURE
Tire pressure monitoring system
(TPMS)
This vehicle is equipped with the tire
pressure monitoring system (TPMS). It
monitors tire pressure of all tires except
the spare. When the low tire pressure
warning light is lit, one or more of your
tires is significantly underinflated.
Vanity mirror light
SDI2032
The TPMS will activate only when the vehicle is driven at speeds above 16 MPH
(25 km/h). Also, this system may not detect a sudden drop in tire pressure (for
example a flat tire while driving).
For more details, refer to “Low tire pressure warning light” in the “2. Instruments
and controls” section, “Tire Pressure
monitoring system (TPMS)” in the “5.
Starting and driving” section and “Flat
tire” in the “6. In case of emergency” section.
tire pressure specifications are shown
on the Tire and Loading Information
label under the “Cold Tire Pressure”
heading. The Tire and Loading Information label is affixed to the driver side
center pillar. Tire pressures should be
checked regularly because:
O Most tires naturally lose air over
time.
O Tires can lose air suddenly when
driven over potholes or other objects
or if the vehicle strikes a curb while
parking.
The tire pressures should be checked
when the tires are cold. The tires are
considered COLD after the vehicle has
been parked for 3 or more hours, or
driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) at moderate speeds.
Incorrect tire pressure, including under
inflation, may adversely affect tire life
and vehicle handling.
Tire inflation pressure
Check the pressure of the tires (including the spare) often and always prior to
long distance trips. The recommended
8-28 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
WARNING
O Improperly inflated tires can fail
suddenly and cause an accident.
O The Gross Vehicle Weight rating
(GVWR) is located on the
F.M. V .S.S./C.M. V .S.S. label. The
vehicle weight capacity is indicated on the Tire and Loading Information label. Do not load your
vehicle beyond this capacity.
Overloading your vehicle may result in reduced tire life, unsafe operating conditions due to premature tire failure, or unfavorable
handling characteristics and
could also lead to a serious accident. Loading beyond the specified capacity may also result in
failure of other vehicle components.
O Do not drive your vehicle over 85
MPH (137 km/h) unless it is
equipped with high speed rated
tires. Driving faster than 85 MPH
(137 km/h) may result in tire
failure, loss of control and possible injury.
O For additional information regarding tires, refer to “Important
Tire Safety Information” (US) or
“Tire
Safety
Information”
(Canada) in the Warranty Information Booklet.
O Before taking a long trip, or whenever you heavily load your vehicle,
use a tire pressure gauge to ensure that the tire pressures are at
the specified level.
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-29
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
originally installed on the vehicle at
the factory.
4 Cold tire pressure: Inflate the tires to
q
this pressure when the tires are
cold. Tires are considered COLD after
the vehicle has been parked for 3 or
more hours, or driven less than 1
mile (1.6 km) at moderate speeds.
The recommended cold tire inflation
is set by the manufacturer to provide
the best balance of tire wear, vehicle
handling, driveability, tire noise,
etc., up to the vehicle’s GVWR.
5 Tire size — refer to “Tire labeling”
q
later in this section.
6 Spare tire size or compact spare tire
q
size (if so equipped)
SDI1948
Tire and loading information label
1 Seating capacity: The maximum
q
number of occupants that can be
seated in the vehicle.
2 Vehicle load limit: See “loading inq
formation” in the “9. Technical and
consumer information” section.
3 Original size: The size of the tires
q
8-30 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
SDI1949
Checking the tire pressure
1. Remove the valve stem cap from the
tire.
4. Read the tire pressure on the gauge
stem and compare it to the specification shown on the Tire and
Loading Information label.
5. Add air to the tire as needed. If too
much air is added, press the core of
the valve stem briefly with the tip of
the gauge stem to release pressure.
Recheck the pressure and add or release air as needed.
6. Install the valve stem cap.
7. Check the pressure of all other tires,
including the spare.
SIZE
FRONT
ORIGINAL
TIRE
REAR
ORIGINAL
TIRE
SPARE
TIRE
COLD TIRE
INFLATION
PRESSURE
P225/55R17
95V
230 kPa,
33 PSI
225/50 R18
95W
230 kPa,
33 PSI
P225/55 R17 230 kPa,
95V
33 PSI
245/45R18
96W
230 kPa,
33 PSI
T145/80D17
420 kPa,
60 PSI
2. Press the pressure gauge squarely
onto the valve stem. Do not press
too hard or force the valve stem
sideways, or air will escape. If the
hissing sound of air escaping from
the tire is heard while checking the
pressure, reposition the gauge to
eliminate this leakage.
3. Remove the gauge.
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-31
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
5. Two-digit number (15): This number
is the wheel or rim diameter in
inches.
6. Two- or three-digit number (95): This
number is the tire’s load index. It is
a measurement of how much weight
each tire can support. You may not
find this information on all tires because it is not required by law.
7. H: Tire speed rating. You should not
drive the vehicle faster than the tire
speed rating.
Example
SDI1575
TIRE LABELING
Federal law requires tire manufacturers
to place standardized information on
the sidewall of all tires. This information identifies and describes the fundamental characteristics of the tire and
also provides the tire identification
number (TIN) for safety standard certification. The TIN can be used to identify
the tire in case of a recall.
Example
SDI1606
1 Tire size (example: P215/65R15 95H)
q
1. P: The “P” indicates the tire is designed for passenger vehicles. (Not
all tires have this information.)
2. Three-digit number (215): This
number gives the width in millimeters of the tire from sidewall edge to
sidewall edge.
3. Two-digit number (65): This number,
known as the aspect ratio, gives the
tire’s ratio of height to width.
4. R: The “R” stands for radial.
8-32 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
4. Three-digit code: Tire type code (Optional)
5. Three-digit code: Date of Manufacture
6. Four numbers represent the week
and year the tire was built. For example, the numbers 3103 means the
31st week of 2003. If these numbers
are missing, then look on the other
sidewall of the tire.
3 Tire ply composition and material
q
Example
SDI1607
2 TIN (Tire Identification Number) for a
q
new tire (example: DOT XX XX XXX
XXXX)
1. DOT: Abbreviation for the “Department of Transportation”. The
symbol can be placed above,
below or to the left or right of
the Tire Identification Number.
2. Two-digit code: Manufacturer’s identification mark
3. Two-digit code: Tire size
The number of layers or plies of
rubber-coated fabric in the tire.
Tire manufacturers also must indicate the materials in the tire, which
include steel, nylon, polyester, and
others.
4 Maximum permissible inflation presq
sure
This number is the greatest amount
of air pressure that should be put in
the tire. Do not exceed the maximum
permissible inflation pressure.
5 Maximum load rating
q
This number indicates the maximum
load in kilograms and pounds that
can be carried by the tire. When re-
placing the tires on the vehicle, always use a tire that has the same
load rating as the factory installed
tire.
6 Term of “tubeless” or “tube type”
q
Indicates whether the tire requires
an inner tube (“tube type”) or not
(“tubeless”).
7 The word “radial”
q
The word “radial” is shown, if the
tire has radial structure.
8 Manufacturer or Brand name
q
Manufacturer or Brand name is
shown.
Other tire-related terminology:
In addition to the many terms that are
defined throughout this section, Intended Outboard Sidewall is (1) the
sidewall that contains a whitewall,
bears white lettering or bears manufacturer, brand and/or model name
molding that is higher or deeper than
the same molding on the other sidewall
of the tire, or (2) the outward facing
sidewall of an asymmetrical tire that
has a particular side that must always
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-33
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
face outward when mounted on a vehicle.
TYPES OF TIRES
WARNING
O
When changing or replacing tires, be
sure all four tires are of the same type
(Example: Summer, All Season or Snow)
and construction. An INFINITI dealer may
be able to help you with information
about tire type, size, speed rating and
availability.
O
Replacement tires may have a lower
speed rating than the factory equipped
tires, and may not match the potential
maximum vehicle speed. Never exceed
the maximum speed rating of the tire.
O
Replacing tires with those not originally
specified by INFINITI could affect the
proper operation of the TPMS.
O
For additional information regarding
tires, refer to “Important Tire Safety Information” (US) or “Tire Safety Information” (Canada) in the Warranty Informa-
rating to the original equipment tires. If
you do not, it can adversely affect the
safety and handling of your vehicle.
tion Booklet.
All season tires
INFINITI specifies all season tires on some
models to provide good performance all
year, including snowy and icy road conditions. All Season tires are identified by
ALL SEASON and/or M&S (Mud and Snow)
on the tire sidewall. Snow tires have better snow traction than All Season tires
and may be more appropriate in some areas.
Summer tires
INFINITI specifies summer tires on some
models to provide superior performance
on dry roads. Summer tire performance is
substantially reduced in snow and ice.
Summer tires do not have the tire traction
rating M&S on the tire sidewall.
If you plan to operate your vehicle in
snowy or icy conditions, INFINITI recommends the use of SNOW tires or ALL SEASON tires on all four wheels.
Generally, snow tires will have lower
speed ratings than factory equipped tires
and may not match the potential
maximum vehicle speed. Never exceed
the maximum speed rating of the tire.
If you operate your vehicle in snowy or icy
conditions, INFINITI recommends the use
of SNOW or ALL SEASON tires on all four
wheels.
For additional traction on icy roads, studded tires may be used. However, some
provinces and states prohibit their use.
Check local, state and provincial laws before installing studded tires. Skid and
traction capabilities of studded snow
tires, on wet or dry surfaces, may be
poorer than that of non-studded snow
tires.
Snow tires could affect the proper operation of the low tire pressure monitoring
system.
Snow tires
If snow tires are needed, it is necessary
to select tires equivalent in size and load
8-34 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
All-Wheel Drive (AWD) models
CAUTION
O
O
Always use tires of the same type, size,
brand, construction (bias, bias-belted or
radial), and tread pattern on all four
wheels. Failure to do so may result in a
circumference difference between tires
on the front and rear axles which will
cause excessive tire wear and may damage the transmission, transfer case and
differential gears.
ONLY use spare tires specified for the
AWD model.
If excessive tire wear is found, it is recommended that all four tires be replaced
with tires of the same size, brand, construction and tread pattern. The tire pressure and wheel alignment should also be
checked and corrected as necessary. Contact an INFINITI dealer.
Tire chains must be installed only on the
rear wheels and not on the front wheels.
Do not drive with tire chains on paved
roads which are clear of snow. Driving
with chains in such conditions can cause
damage to the various mechanisms of the
vehicle due to some overstress.
TIRE CHAINS
Use of tire chains may be prohibited according to location. Check the local laws
before installing tire chains. When installing tire chains, make sure they are the
proper size for the tires on your vehicle
and are installed according to the chain
manufacturer’s suggestions. Use only SAE
Class S chains. Class “S” chains are used
on vehicles with restricted tire to vehicle
clearance. Vehicles that can use Class “S”
chains are designed to meet the SAE
standard minimum clearances between
the tire and the closest vehicle suspension or body component required to accommodate the use of a winter traction
device (tire chains or cables). The
minimum clearances are determined
using the factory equipped tire size. Other
types may damage your vehicle. Use
chain tensioners when recommended by
the tire chain manufacturer to ensure a
tight fit. Loose end links of the tire chain
must be secured or removed to prevent
the possibility of whipping action damage
to the fenders or underbody. If possible,
avoid fully loading your vehicle when
using tire chains. In addition, drive at a
reduced speed. Otherwise, your vehicle
may be damaged and/or vehicle handling
and performance may be adversely affected.
Tire chains must be installed only on the
rear wheels and not on the front wheels.
Do not drive with tire chains on paved
roads which are clear of snow. Driving
with chains in such conditions can cause
damage to the various mechanisms of the
vehicle due to some overstress.
CAUTION
O
Do not use tire chains on dry roads.
O
Never install tire chains on a T-type
spare tire as this could damage your vehicle.
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-35
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
Wheel nut tightening torque:
80 ft-lb (108 Nzm)
The wheel nuts must be kept tightened
to the specification at all times. It is recommended that wheel nuts be tightened
to the specification at each tire rotation
interval.
WARNING
SDI1662
CHANGING WHEELS AND TIRES
Tire rotation (except 18-inch tire
models)
INFINITI recommends rotating the tires
every 7,500 miles (12,000 km), except
18-in tire models. See “Flat tire” in the
“6. In case of emergency” section for
tire replacing procedures.
As soon as possible, tighten the wheel
nuts to the specified torque with a
torque wrench.
O After rotating the tires, check and
adjust the tire pressure.
O Retighten the wheel nuts when
the vehicle has been driven for
600 miles (1,000 km) (also in
cases of a flat tire, etc.).
O Do not include the T-type spare
tire or any other small size spare
tire in the tire rotation.
O For additional information regarding tires, refer to “Important
Tire Safety Information” (US) or
“Tire
Safety
Information”
(Canada) in the Warranty Information Booklet.
Tire rotation (18-inch tire models)
Tires cannot be rotated on this vehicle,
as front tires are a different size from
rear tires and the direction of the wheel
rotation is fixed for each tire.
A pin is on the front brake rotor to prevent the rear wheels from being installed in place of the front wheels. The
spare tire can be installed in place of
the front and rear wheels. When installing the spare tire in the front wheel, the
hole in the spare tire wheel must be
aligned with the pin on the brake rotor.
WARNING
O Retighten the wheel nuts when
the vehicle has been driven for
600 miles (1,000 km) (also in
cases of a flat tire, etc.).
O For additional information regarding tires, refer to “Important
Tire Safety Information” (US) or
“Tire
Safety
Information”
(Canada) in the Warranty Information Booklet.
8-36 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
speed rating and load carrying capacity
as originally equipped. See “Specifications” in the “9. Technical and consumer
information” section for recommended
types and sizes of tires and wheels.
O The original tires have built-in
tread wear indicators. When wear
indicators are visible, the tire(s)
should be replaced.
O Tires degrade with age and use.
Have tires, including the spare,
over 6 years old checked by a
qualified technician, because
some tire damage may not be obvious. Replace the tires as necessary to prevent tire failure and
possible personal injury.
MDI0004B
1. Wear indicator
2. Wear indicator location mark
Tire wear and damage
WARNING
O Tires should be periodically inspected for wear, cracking,
bulging or objects caught in the
tread. If excessive wear, cracks,
bulging or deep cuts are found, the
tire(s) should be replaced.
WARNING
O Improper service of the spare tire
may result in serious personal injury. If it is necessary to repair the
spare tire, contact an INFINITI
dealer.
O For additional information regarding tires, refer to “Important
Tire Safety Information” (US) or
“Tire Safety Information” (Canada)
in the Warranty Information
Booklet.
Replacing wheels and tires
When replacing a tire, use the same size,
O
The use of tires other than those recommended or the mixed use of tires of different brands, construction (bias, biasbelted or radial), or tread patterns can
adversely affect the ride, braking, handling, ground clearance, body-to-tire
clearance, tire chain clearance, speedometer calibration, headlight aim and
bumper height. Some of these effects
may lead to accidents and could result in
serious personal injury.
O
If the wheels are changed for any reason,
always replace with wheels which have
the same off-set dimension. Wheels of a
different off-set could cause premature
tire wear, degrade vehicle handling characteristics and/or interference with the
brake discs/drums. Such interference
can
lead
to
decreased
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-37
w 06.9.14/V36-D X
braking efficiency and/or early brake
pad/shoe wear. Refer to “Wheels and
tires” in the “9. Technical and consumer
information” section of this manual for
wheel off-set dimensions.
O
O
O
O
When a spare tire is mounted or a wheel
is replaced, tire pressure will not be indicated, the TPMS will not function and the
low tire pressure warning light will flash
for approximately 1 minute. The light will
remain on after 1 minute. Contact your
INFINITI dealer as soon as possible for
tire replacement and/or system resetting.
Replacing tires with those not originally
specified by INFINITI could affect the
proper operation of the TPMS.
Do not install a deformed wheel or tire
even if it has been repaired. Such wheels
or tires could have structural damage
and could fail without warning.
The use of retread
recommended.
tire
is
not
O
Wheel balance service should be performed with the wheels off the vehicle.
Spin balancing the wheels on the vehicle
could lead to transmission damage.
For additional information regarding
tires, refer to “Important Tire Safety Information” (US) or “Tire Safety Information” (Canada) in the Warranty Information Booklet.
For additional information regarding tires,
refer to “Important Tire Safety Information” (US) or “Tire Safety Information”
(Canada) in the INFINITI Warranty Information Booklet.
CAUTION
Care of wheels
Always use tires of the same type, size,
brand, construction (bias, bias-belted or radial), and tread pattern on all four wheels.
Failure to do so may result in a circumference
difference between tires on the front and
rear axles which will cause excessive tire
wear and may damage the transmission,
transfer case and differential gears (AWD
models).
O Wash the wheels when washing the
vehicle to maintain their appearance.
O Clean the inner side of the wheels
when the wheel is changed or the underside of the vehicle is washed.
O Do not use abrasive cleaners when
washing the wheels.
Wheel balance
Unbalanced wheels may affect vehicle
handling and tire life. Even with regular
use, wheels can get out of balance. Therefore, they should be balanced as required.
O Inspect wheel rims regularly for dents
or corrosion. Such damage may cause
loss of pressure or poor seal at the
tire bead.
O INFINITI recommends that the road
wheels be waxed to protect against
road salt in areas where it is used
during winter.
8-38 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
w 06.9.14/V36-D X
Spare tire (TEMPORARY USE ONLY
(T-type) spare tire)
O
When a spare tire is mounted (t-type or
conventional), the low tire pressure warning system will not function.
Observe the following precautions if the
T-type spare tire must be used, otherwise
your vehicle could be damaged or involved in an accident.
WARNING
O
O
The T-type spare tire should be used for
emergency use. It should be replaced
with the standard tire at the first opportunity to avoid possible tire or differential damage.
Drive carefully while the TEMPORARY
USE ONLY spare tire is installed. Avoid
sharp turns and abrupt braking while
driving.
Periodically check spare tire inflation
pressure. Always keep the pressure of
the TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare tire at
60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 bar). Always keep
the pressure of the full size spare tire (if
so equipped) at the recommended pressure for standard tires, as indicated on
the Tire and Loading Information label.
For Tire and Loading Information label
location, see “Tire and Loading Information label” in the index of this manual.
O
With the TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare
tire installed do not drive your vehicle at
speeds faster than 50 MPH (80 km/h).
O
When driving on roads covered with
snow or ice, the TEMPORARY USE ONLY
spare tire should be used on the front
wheels and original tire used on the rear
wheels (drive wheels). Use tire chains
only on the two rear original tires.
O
Tire tread of the TEMPORARY USE ONLY
spare tire will wear at a faster rate than
the standard tire. Replace the spare tire
as soon as the tread wear indicators
appear.
O
Do not use the spare tire on other vehicles.
O
Do not use more than one spare tire at
the same time.
CAUTION
O
Do not use tire chains on a TEMPORARY
USE ONLY spare tire. Tire chains will not
fit properly and may cause damage to
the vehicle.
O
Because the TEMPORARY USE ONLY
spare tire is smaller than the original
tire, ground clearance is reduced. To
avoid damage to the vehicle, do not drive
over obstacles. Also do not drive the vehicle through an automatic car wash
since it may get caught.
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-39
w 06.9.14/V36-D X
MEMO
8-40 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
9 Technical and consumer information
Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants ... 9-2
Fuel recommendation .................................. 9-3
Engine oil and oil filter recommendation ..... 9-5
Air conditioning system refrigerant and
lubricant recommendations ......................... 9-6
Specifications ................................................... 9-7
Engine......................................................... 9-7
Wheels and tires ......................................... 9-8
Dimensions ................................................. 9-8
When traveling or registering your vehicle in
another country ................................................ 9-9
Vehicle identification ........................................ 9-9
Vehicle identification number (VIN) plate .... 9-9
Vehicle identification number (Chassis
number) ...................................................... 9-9
Engine serial number................................. 9-10
F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label .... 9-10
Emission control information label............. 9-10
Tire and loading information label.............. 9-11
Air conditioner specification label .............. 9-11
Installing front license plate............................ 9-12
Vehicle loading information ............................ 9-13
Terms ........................................................ 9-13
Vehicle load capacity ................................. 9-14
Loading tips............................................... 9-15
Measurement of weights ........................... 9-16
Towing a trailer............................................... 9-16
Flat towing................................................. 9-16
Uniform tire quality grading ............................ 9-17
Emission control system warranty ................... 9-18
Reporting safety defects (US only) .................. 9-18
Readiness for inspection/maintenance (I/M)
test (US only) .................................................. 9-19
Event data recorders ..................................... 9-20
Owner’s Manual/Service Manual order
information..................................................... 9-20
In the event of a collision .......................... 9-21
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
CAPACITIES AND RECOMMENDED
FUEL/LUBRICANTS
The following are approximate capacities. The actual refill capacities may be a little different. When refilling, follow the procedure instructed in the “8. Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section to determine the proper refill capacity.
Fuel
Engine oil*5
Drain and refill
With oil filter change
Without oil filter
change
Cooling system
With reservoir
Reservoir
Automatic transmission
fluid
Manual transmission gear
oil
Differential gear oil
Transfer fluid
Power steering fluid (PSF)
Brake fluid
Multi-purpose grease
without limited slip
differential
with limited slip differential
Air conditioning system
refrigerant
Air conditioning system
lubricants
Window washer fluid
US measure
20 gal
Capacity (Approximate)
Imp measure
16-5/8 gal
Liter
76
Recommended
specifications
Unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of at least 91 AKI (RON 96)*1
5-1/8 qt
4-3/8 qt
4.9
4-7/8 qt
4 qt
4.6
O Engine oil with API Certification Mark*2
O Viscosity SAE 5W-30
9-1/2 qt
7/8 qt
7-7/8 qt
3/4 qt
9.0
0.8
50% Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant or equivalent
50% Demineralized or distilled water
—
—
—
Genuine NISSAN Matic J ATF*3
Genuine NISSAN Manual Transmission Fluid (MTF)
HQ Multi 75W-85 or API GL-4, Viscosity SAE 75W-85 or 75W-90
Genuine NISSAN Differential Oil Hypoid Super GL-5 80W-90 or API GL-5 Viscosity SAE 80W-90*6
Genuine NISSAN Matic D ATF (Continental U.S. and Alaska) or Canada NISSAN Automatic Transmission Fluid*7
Genuine NISSAN PSF or equivalent*9
Genuine NISSAN Super Heavy Duty Brake Fluid*5 or equivalent DOT 3
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Refill to the proper oil level according to the instructions in the “8. Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section.
NLGI No. 2 (Lithium soap base)
—
—
—
HFC-134a (R-134a)*8
—
—
—
—
—
—
NISSAN A/C System Oil
Type S or exact equivalent
Genuine NISSAN Windshield Washer Concentrate Cleaner & Antifreeze or equivalent
*1: For additional information, see later in this paragraph for fuel recommendation.
*2: For additional information, see later in this paragraph for engine oil and oil filter recommendation.
*3: Using automatic transmission fluid other than Genuine NISSAN Matic J ATF will cause deterioration in driveability and automatic transmission durability, and may damage the automatic transmission, which is not
covered by the INFINITI new vehicle limited warranty.
*4: Available in mainland US through an INFINITI dealer.
*5: For additional information, see “Engine oil” in the “8. Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section for changing engine oil.
*6: For hot climates, viscosity SAE 90 is suitable for ambient temperatures above 32°F (0°C).
*7: DEXRONTMIII/MERCONTM or equivalent may also be used. Outside the continental United States and Alaska contact an INFINITI dealer for more information regarding suitable fluids, including recommended
brand(s) of DEXRONTMIII/MERCONTM automatic transmission fluid.
*8: For additional information, see “Vehicle identification” in this section for air conditioner specification label.
*9: For Canada, NISSAN Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF), DEXRONTMIII/MERCONTM or equivalent ATF may also be used.
9-2 Technical and consumer information
w 06.8.14/V36-D X
FUEL RECOMMENDATION
Gasoline specifications
INFINITI recommends the use of unleaded
premium gasoline with an octane rating of
at least 93 AKI (Anti-Knock Index) number
(Research octane number 98).
INFINITI recommends using gasoline that
meets the World-Wide Fuel Charter
(WWFC) specifications where it is available. Many of the automobile manufacturers developed this specification to improve emission system and vehicle performance. Ask your service station manager
if the gasoline meets the World-Wide Fuel
Charter (WWFC) specifications.
If unleaded premium gasoline is not available, you may use unleaded regular gasoline with an octane rating of at least 87
AKI number (Research octane number 91),
but you may notice a decrease in performance.
CAUTION
O
Using a fuel other than that specified
could adversely affect the emission control system, and may also affect warranty coverage.
O
Under no circumstances should a leaded
gasoline be used, because this will damage the three-way catalyst.
O
Do not use E-85 fuel in your vehicle. Your
vehicle is not designed to run on E-85
fuel. Using E-85 fuel can damage the fuel
system components and is not covered
by the INFINITI vehicle limited warranty.
If you use oxygenate-blend gasoline,
please take the following precautions as
the usage of such fuels may cause vehicle
performance problems and/or fuel system
damage.
O
The fuel should be unleaded and have
an octane rating no lower than that recommended for unleaded gasoline.
O
If an oxygenate-blend, excepting a
methanol blend, is used, it should contain no more than 10% oxygenate.
(MTBE may, however, be added up to
15%.)
O
If a methanol blend is used, it should
contain no more than 5% methanol (methyl alcohol, wood alcohol). It should
also contain a suitable amount of appropriate cosolvents and corrosion inhibitors. If not properly formulated with appropriate cosolvents and corrosion inhibitors, such methanol blends may
cause fuel system damage and/or vehicle performance problems. At this
time, sufficient data is not available to
ensure that all methanol blends are suitable for use in INFINITI vehicles.
Reformulated gasoline
Some fuel suppliers are now producing
reformulated gasolines. These gasolines
are specially designed to reduce vehicle
emissions. INFINITI supports efforts towards cleaner air and suggests that you
use reformulated gasoline when available.
Gasoline containing oxygenates
Some fuel suppliers sell gasoline containing oxygenates such as ethanol, MTBE
and methanol with or without advertising
their presence. INFINITI does not recommend the use of fuels of which the oxygenate content and the fuel compatibility
for your INFINITI cannot be readily determined. If in doubt, ask your service station manager.
If any undesirable driveability problems
such as engine stalling or hard hot
starting are experienced after using
Technical and consumer information 9-3
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
oxygenate-blend
fuels,
immediately
change to a non-oxygenate fuel or a fuel
with a low blend of MTBE.
Take care not to spill gasoline during refueling. Gasoline containing oxygenates can
cause paint damage.
E-85 fuel
E-85 fuel is a mixture of approximately
85% fuel ethanol and 15% unleaded gasoline. E-85 can only be used in a Flexible
Fuel Vehicle (FFV). Do not use E-85 fuel in
your vehicle. U.S. government regulations
require fuel ethanol dispensing pumps to
be identified by a small, square, orange
and black label with the common abbreviation or the appropriate percentage for
that region.
Aftermarket fuel additives
INFINITI does not recommend the use of
any aftermarket fuel additives (Example:
fuel injector cleaner, octane booster, intake valve deposit removers, etc.) which
are sold commercially. Many of these additives intended for gum, varnish or deposit removal may contain active solvent
or similar ingredients that can be harmful
to the fuel system and engine.
Octane rating tips
Using unleaded gasoline with an octane
rating lower than recommended above can
cause persistent, heavy spark knock.
(Spark knock is a metallic rapping noise.)
If severe, this can lead to engine damage.
If you detect a persistent heavy spark
knock even when using gasoline of the
stated octane rating, or if you hear steady
spark knock while holding a steady speed
on level roads, have an INFINITI dealer correct the condition. Failure to correct the
condition is misuse of the vehicle, for
which INFINITI is not responsible.
Incorrect ignition timing will result in
knocking, after-run or overheating. This in
turn may cause excessive fuel consumption or damage to the engine. If any of the
above symptoms are encountered, have
your vehicle checked at an INFINITI dealer
or other competent service facility.
However, now and then you may notice
light spark knock for a short time while accelerating or driving up hills. This is no
cause for concern, because you get the
greatest fuel benefit when there is light
spark knock for a short time under heavy
engine load.
9-4 Technical and consumer information
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
used and maintenance intervals are followed.
Oil which may contain foreign matter or
has been previously used should not be
used.
Oil viscosity
STI0505
1. API certification mark
2. API service symbol
ENGINE OIL AND OIL FILTER
RECOMMENDATION
Selecting the correct oil
It is essential to choose the correct grade,
quality, and viscosity engine oil to ensure
satisfactory engine life and performance,
see “Capacities and recommended
fuel/lubricants” earlier in this section. INFINITI recommends the use of an energy
conserving oil in order to improve fuel
economy.
Select only engine oils that meet the
American Petroleum Institute (API) certification or International Lubricant Standardization and Approval Committee (ILSAC) certification and SAE viscosity standard. These oils have the API certification
mark on the front of the container. Oils
which do not have the specified quality
label should not be used as they could
cause engine damage.
Oil additives
INFINITI does not recommend the use of
oil additives. The use of an oil additive is
not necessary when the proper oil type is
The engine oil viscosity or thickness
changes with temperature. Because of
this, it is important that the engine oil viscosity be selected based on the temperatures at which the vehicle will be operated before the next oil change. Choosing
an oil viscosity other than that recommended could cause serious engine damage.
Selecting the correct oil filter
Your new vehicle is equipped with a highquality genuine NISSAN oil filter. When replacing, use the genuine oil filter or its
equivalent for the reason described in
change intervals.
Change intervals
The oil and oil filter change intervals for
your engine are based on the use of the
specified quality oils and filters. Oil and
filter other than the specified quality, or
oil and filter change intervals longer than
Technical and consumer information 9-5
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
recommended could reduce engine life.
Damage to engines caused by improper
maintenance or use of incorrect oil and
filter quality and/or viscosity is not covered by the new INFINITI vehicle limited
warranties.
Your engine was filled with a high quality
engine oil when it was built. You do not
have to change the oil before the first recommended change interval. Oil and filter
change intervals depend upon how you
use your vehicle. Operation under the following conditions may require more frequent oil and filter changes.
O
repeated short distance driving at cold
outside temperatures,
O
driving in dusty conditions,
O
extensive idling,
O
stop and go “rush hour” traffic,
O
aggressive driving.
Refer to the “INFINITI Service and Maintenance Guide” for the maintenance schedule.
AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM
REFRIGERANT AND LUBRICANT
RECOMMENDATIONS
Contact an INFINITI dealer when servicing
your air conditioning system.
The air conditioning system in your
INFINITI vehicle must be charged with the
refrigerant HFC-134a (R-134a) and the lubricant, NISSAN A/C system oil Type S or
the exact equivalents.
CAUTION
The use of any other refrigerant or lubricant
will cause severe damage to the air conditioning system and will require the replacement of all air conditioner system components.
The refrigerant HFC-134a (R-134a) in your
INFINITI vehicle will not harm the earth’s
ozone layer. Although this refrigerant
does not affect the earth’s atmosphere,
certain governmental regulations require
the recovery and recycling of any refrigerant during automotive air conditioning
system service. Your INFINITI dealer has
the trained technicians and equipment
needed to recover and recycle your air
conditioning system refrigerant.
9-6 Technical and consumer information
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
SPECIFICATIONS
ENGINE
Model
VQ35HR
Type
Gasoline, 4-cycle
Cylinder arrangement
6-cylinder, V-slanted at 60°
Bore 3 Stroke
in (mm)
3.760 3 3.205 (95.5 3 81.4)
Displacement
cu in (cm3)
213.45 (3,498)
rpm
See the emission control information
label on the underside of the hood.
Firing order
Idle speed
1-2-3-4-5-6
Ignition timing (B.T.D.C.)
degree/rpm
Spark plug
Standard
FXE22HR-11
Spark plug gap (Normal)
in (mm)
0.043 (1.1)
Camshaft operation
VQ35HR models
Timing chain
STI0425
The spark ignition system of this vehicle meets all requirements of the Canadian
Interference-Causing Equipment Regulations.
Technical and consumer information 9-7
w 06.9.14/V36-D X
WHEELS AND TIRES
DIMENSIONS
Road wheel
Type
Aluminum
Spare
Size
Offset in (mm)
17 x 7-1/2J
1.77 (45)
Spare (T-type)
Overall width
in (mm)
69.7 (1,770)
18 x 7-1/2J
1.77 (45)
Overall height
in (mm)
57.1 (1,450)*1*3
57.7 (1,465)*2
Rear:
18 x 8-1/2J
1.97 (50)
Front tread
in (mm)
59.8 (1,520)
Rear tread
in (mm)
59.8 (1,520)*1
60.0 (1,525)*2
60.2 (1,530)*3
Wheelbase
in (mm)
112.2 (2,850)
17 x 4T
1.18 (30)
Size
Pressure PSI (kPa) [Cold]
P225/55R17
Conventional
187.2 (4,755)
Front:
Tire
Type
Overall length (With front
license plate)
in (mm)
Front:
225/50R18
Rear:
245/45R18
T145/80D17
33 (230)
*1: Two-wheel drive (2WD) 18-in tire models
*2: All-wheel drive (AWD) models
*3: Two-wheel drive (2WD) 17-in tire models
60 (420)
9-8 Technical and consumer information
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
WHEN TRAVELING OR REGISTERING YOUR
VEHICLE IN ANOTHER COUNTRY
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION
If you plan to travel in another country, you
should first find out if the fuel available is
suitable for your vehicle’s engine.
Using fuel with too low an octane rating
may cause engine damage. All gasoline
vehicles must be operated with unleaded
gasoline. Therefore, avoid taking your vehicle to areas where appropriate fuel is
not available.
When transferring the registration of your
vehicle to another country, state, province
or district, it may be necessary to modify
the vehicle to meet local laws and regulations.
The laws and regulations for motor vehicle emission control and safety standards vary according to the country,
state, province or district; therefore, vehicle specifications may differ.
When any vehicle is to be taken into another country, state, province or district
and registered, its modifications, transportation, and registration are the responsibility of the user. INFINITI is not responsible for any inconvenience that may result.
STI0431
STI0492
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
(VIN) PLATE
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
(Chassis number)
The vehicle identification number plate is
attached as shown. This number is the
identification for your vehicle and is used
in the vehicle registration.
The number is stamped as shown in the
engine compartment.
Technical and consumer information 9-9
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
STI0509
ENGINE SERIAL NUMBER
The number is stamped on the engine as
shown.
STI0493
STI0422
F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S.
CERTIFICATION LABEL
EMISSION CONTROL INFORMATION
LABEL
The Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards (F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S.) certification
label is affixed as shown. This label contains valuable vehicle information, such
as: Gross Vehicle Weight Ratings (GVWR),
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR), month
and year of manufacture, Vehicle Identification Number, (VIN), etc. Review it carefully.
The emission control information label is
attached as shown.
9-10 Technical and consumer information
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
STI0494
STI0495
TIRE AND LOADING INFORMATION
LABEL
AIR CONDITIONER SPECIFICATION
LABEL
The cold tire pressure is shown on the
Tire and Loading Information label affixed
to the pillar as illustrated.
The air conditioner specification label is
attached as shown.
Technical and consumer information 9-11
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
INSTALLING FRONT LICENSE PLATE
Use the following steps to mount the license plate:
Before mounting the license plate, confirm that the following parts are enclosed
in the plastic bag.
Only use the recommended mounting position or Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC)
sensor obstruction (if so equipped) may
result.
O
License plate bracket
O
J-nut x 2
O
Screw x 2
O
Screw grommet x 2
1. Temporarily place the license plate
A bebracket while aligning the lines q
hind the top of the front bumper
B of the rear suropening with part q
face of the license plate bracket.
2. To determine where to drill the hole,
mark along both sides of the
mounting hole by using a felt-tip pen.
3. Remove the license plate bracket and
connect the arcs to form ovals. Mark
the point in the center of each oval.
These are the pilot drilling locations.
STI0496
4. Carefully drill two pilot holes using a
9-12 Technical and consumer information
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
VEHICLE LOADING INFORMATION
0.39 in (10 mm) drill bit at the marked
locations. (Be sure that the drill only
goes through the fascia, or damage to
the nut may occur.)
5. Insert grommets into the hole on the
fascia.
6. Insert a flat-blade screwdriver into the
grommet hole to add 90° turn onto the
C .
part q
7. Insert a J-nut into the license plate
bracket before placing the license
plate bracket on the fascia.
8. Install the license plate bracket with
screws.
9. Install the license plate with bolts that
are no longer than 0.55 in (14 mm).
O GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) - curb
weight plus the combined weight of
passengers and cargo.
WARNING
O It is extremely dangerous to ride
in a cargo area inside the vehicle.
In a collision, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be
seriously injured or killed.
O Do not allow people to ride in any
area of vehicle that is not
equipped with seats and seat
belts.
O Be sure everyone in your vehicle is
in a seat and using a seat belt
properly.
TERMS
It is important to familiarize yourself
with the following terms before loading
your vehicle:
O Curb Weight (actual weight of your
vehicle) - vehicle weight including:
standard and optional equipment,
fluids, emergency tools, and spare
tire assembly. This weight does not
include passengers and cargo.
O GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating)
- maximum total combined weight of
the unloaded vehicle, passengers,
luggage, hitch, trailer tongue load
and any other optional equipment.
This information is located on the
F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. label.
O GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) maximum weight (load) limit specified for the front or rear axle. This
information is located on the
F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. label.
O GCWR (Gross Combined Weight
Rating) - The maximum total weight
rating of the vehicle, passengers,
cargo, and trailer.
O Vehicle Capacity Weight, Load limit,
Total load capacity - maximum total
weight limit specified of the load
(passengers and cargo) for the vehicle. This is the maximum combined weight of occupants and
cargo that can be loaded into the vehicle. If the vehicle is used to tow a
Technical and consumer information 9-13
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
trailer, the trailer tongue weight
must be included as part of the
cargo load. This information is located on the Tire and Loading Information label.
O Cargo capacity - permissible weight
of cargo, the weight of total occupants weight subtracted from the
load limit.
STI0365
VEHICLE LOAD CAPACITY
Do not exceed the load limit of your vehicle shown as “The combined weight
of occupants and cargo” on the Tire and
Loading Information label. Do not ex-
ceed the number of occupants shown
as “Seating Capacity” on the Tire and
Loading Information label.
To get “the combined weight of occupants and cargo”, add the weight of all
9-14 Technical and consumer information
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
occupants, then add the total luggage
weight to the value. Examples are
shown in the illustration.
Steps for determining correct load
limit
(1) Locate the statement “The combined
weight of occupants and cargo
should never exceed XXX kg or XXX
lbs” on your vehicle’s placard.
(2) Determine the combined weight of
the driver and passengers that will
be riding in your vehicle.
(3) Subtract the combined weight of the
driver and passengers from XXX kg
or XXX lbs.
(4) The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage
load capacity. For example, if the
“XXX” amount equals 1,400 lbs. and
there will be five 150 lb. passengers
in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. (1,400 − 750 (5 x
150) = 650 lbs.) or 640 − 340 (5 x
70) = 300 kg.
(5) Determine the combined weight of
luggage and cargo being loaded on
the vehicle. That weight may not
safely exceed the available cargo
and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4.
(6) If your vehicle will be towing a
trailer, load from your trailer will be
transferred to your vehicle. Consult
this manual to determine how this
reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.
Before driving a loaded vehicle, confirm
that you do not exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) or the
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) for
your vehicle. See “Measurement of
Weights” later in this section.
Also check tires for proper inflation
pressures. See the Tire and Loading Information label.
LOADING TIPS
O The GVW must not exceed GVWR or
GAWR as specified on the
F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification
label.
O Do not load the front and rear axle
to the GAWR. Doing so will exceed
the GVWR.
WARNING
O Properly secure all cargo to help
prevent it from sliding or shifting.
Do not place cargo higher than the
seatbacks. In a sudden stop or collision, unsecured cargo could
cause personal injury.
O Do not load your vehicle any
heavier than the GVWR or the maximum front and rear GAWRs. If you
do, parts of your vehicle can break,
tire damage could occur, or it can
change the way your vehicle
handles. This could result in loss of
control and cause personal injury.
O Overloading could not only shorten
the life of your vehicle and the tires,
but also could lead to hazardous
vehicle handling and long braking
distance. This may cause a premature tire malfunction, which could
result in a serious accident and perTechnical and consumer information 9-15
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
TOWING A TRAILER
sonal injury. Failures caused by
overloading are not covered by the
vehicle’s warranty.
MEASUREMENT OF WEIGHTS
Secure loose items to prevent weight
shifts that could affect the balance of
your vehicle. When the vehicle is
loaded, drive to a scale and weigh the
front and the rear wheels separately to
determine axle loads. Individual axle
loads should not exceed either of the
gross axle weight ratings (GAWR). The
total of the axle loads should not exceed the gross vehicle weight rating
(GVWR). These ratings are given on the
vehicle certification label. If weight ratings are exceeded, move or remove
items to bring all weights below the ratings.
Your vehicle was designed to be used to
carry passengers and cargo. INFINITI does
not recommend trailer towing, because it
places additional loads on your vehicle’s
engine, drivetrain, steering, braking, and
other systems.
result in severe transmission damage.
O
Whenever flat towing your vehicle, always tow forward, never backward.
O
DO NOT tow any automatic transmission
vehicle with all four wheels on the
ground (flat towing). Doing so WILL
DAMAGE internal transmission parts due
to lack of transmission lubrication.
O
For emergency towing procedures refer
to “Towing Recommended by INFINITI”
in the “6. In case of emergency” section
of this manual.
If you must use this vehicle to tow a
trailer, the trailer load should never exceed 1,000 lb.
CAUTION
Vehicle damage resulting from towing a
trailer is not covered by INFINITI warranties.
Automatic transmission
FLAT TOWING
Towing your vehicle with all four wheels
on the ground is sometimes called flat
towing. This method is sometimes used
when towing a vehicle behind a recreational vehicle, such as a motor home.
Manual transmission
CAUTION
O
To tow a vehicle equipped with an automatic transmission, an appropriate vehicle dolly MUST be placed under the
towed vehicle’s drive wheels. Always
follow the dolly manufacturer’s recommendations when using their product.
O
Always tow with the manual transmission in Neutral.
O
After towing 500 miles, start and idle
the engine with the transmission in
Failure to follow these guidelines can
9-16 Technical and consumer information
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADING
Neutral for two minutes. Failure to idle
the engine after every 500 miles of
towing may cause damage to the
transmission’s internal parts.
DOT (Department Of Transportation) Quality Grades: All passenger car tires must
conform to federal safety requirements in
addition to these grades.
Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall between tread
shoulder and maximum section width. For
example:
Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A
Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire
when tested under controlled conditions
on a specified government test course.
For example, a tire graded 150 would wear
one and one-half (1 1/2) times as well on
the government course as a tire graded
100. The relative performance of tires depends upon actual conditions of their use
however, and may depart significantly
from the norm due to variations in driving
habits, service practices and differences
in road characteristics and climate.
Traction AA, A, B and C
The traction grades from highest to
lowest are AA, A, B and C. Those grades
represent the tire’s ability to stop on wet
pavement as measured under controlled
conditions on specified government test
surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire
marked C may have poor traction performance.
WARNING
The traction grade assigned to this tire is
based on straight-ahead braking traction
tests and does not include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning or peak traction
characteristics.
Temperature A, B and C
The temperature grades A (the highest),
B, and C, representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat and its
ability to dissipate heat when tested
under controlled conditions on a specified
indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained
high temperature can cause the material
of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire
life, and excessive temperature can lead
to sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which
all passenger car tires must meet under
the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard
No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher
Technical and consumer information 9-17
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
levels of performance on the laboratory
test wheel than the minimum required by
law.
WARNING
The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and
not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause heat
build-up and possible tire failure.
EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM WARRANTY
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS (US only)
Your INFINITI is covered by the following
emission warranties.
If you believe that your vehicle has a
defect which could cause a crash or
could cause injury or death, you
should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying INFINITI.
For US:
O Emission Defects Warranty
O Emissions Performance Warranty
(See Warranty Information Booklet for
details.)
For Canada:
Emission Control System Warranty
Details of these warranties may be found
with other vehicle warranties in your Warranty Information Booklet (Warranty and
Roadside Assistance Information (Canada
only)) that comes with your INFINITI. If you
did not receive a Warranty Information
Booklet (Warranty and Roadside Assistance Information (Canada only)), or it has
become lost, you may obtain a replacement by writing to:
O INFINITI Division
Nissan North America, Inc.
Consumer Affairs Department
P.O. Box 685003
Franklin, TN 37068-5003
O Nissan Canada Inc.
5290 Orbitor Drive
Mississauga, Ontario,
L4W 4Z5
If NHTSA receives similar complaints,
it may open an investigation, and if it
finds that a safety defect exists in a
group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However,
NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your
dealer, or INFINITI.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the
Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at
1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-4249153); go to http://www.safercar.gov;
or write to: Administrator, NHTSA,
400 Seventh Street, SW., Washington
DC 20590. You can also obtain other
information about motor vehicle
safety from http://www.safercar.gov.
9-18 Technical and consumer information
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
You may notify INFINITI by contacting
our Consumer Affairs Department,
toll-free, at 1-800-662-6200.
READINESS FOR INSPECTION/
MAINTENANCE (I/M) TEST (US only)
A vehicle equipped with All-Wheel Drive
(AWD) should never be tested using a two
wheel dynamometer (such as the dynamometers used by some states for emissions testing), or similar equipment. Make
sure you inform test facility personnel
that your vehicle is equipped with AWD
before it is placed on a dynamometer. Using the wrong test equipment may result
in transmission damage or unexpected
vehicle movement which could result in
serious vehicle damage or personal injury.
Due to legal requirements in some states/
areas, your vehicle may be required to be
in what is called the “ready condition” for
an Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) test of
the emission control system.
The vehicle is set to the “ready condition”
when it is driven through certain driving
patterns. Usually, the “ready condition”
can be obtained by ordinary usage of the
vehicle.
If a powertrain system component is repaired or the battery is disconnected, the
vehicle may be reset to a “not ready condition”. Before taking the I/M test, check
the vehicle’s inspection/maintenance test
readiness condition. Push the ignition
switch to the ON position without starting
the engine. If the Malfunction Indicator
Light (MIL) comes on steady for 20 seconds and then blinks for 10 seconds, the
I/M test condition is “not ready”. If the
MIL does not blink after 20 seconds, the
I/M test condition is “ready”.
If the MIL indicates the vehicle is in a “not
ready” condition, drive the vehicle
through the following pattern to set the
vehicle to the “ready condition”. If you
cannot or do not want to perform the
driving pattern, an INFINITI dealer can
conduct it for you.
WARNING
Always drive the vehicle in a safe and prudent manner according to traffic conditions
and obey all traffic laws.
1. Start the engine. Allow the engine to
idle until the engine coolant temperature gauge needle points between the
C and H (normal operating temperature).
2. Accelerate the vehicle to 55 MPH (88
km/h), then quickly release the accel-
Technical and consumer information 9-19
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
erator pedal completely and keep it released for at least 10 seconds.
3. Quickly depress the accelerator pedal
for a moment, then drive the vehicle at
a speed of 53 to 60 MPH (86 to 96
km/h) for at least 9 minutes.
4. Stop the vehicle. Leave the engine
running.
5. Accelerate the vehicle to 35 MPH (55
km/h) and maintain the speed for 20
seconds.
6. Repeat steps 4 and 5 at least 10 times.
7. Accelerate the vehicle to 55 MPH (88
km/h) and maintain the speed for at
least 3 minutes.
8. Stop the vehicle. Place the automatic
transmission selector lever in the P or
N position or the manual transmission
shift lever in the N position.
9. Turn the engine off.
10. Repeat steps 1 through 8 at least one
more time.
If step 1 through 7 is interrupted, repeat
the preceding step. Any safe driving mode
is acceptable between steps. Do not stop
the engine until step 7 is completed.
EVENT DATA RECORDERS
OWNER’S MANUAL/SERVICE MANUAL
ORDER INFORMATION
Your vehicle is equipped with a variety of
computers that monitor and control a number of systems to optimize performance
and help service technicians with diagnosis and repair. Some of the computers
monitor emission control systems, braking
systems, engine systems, transmission
systems, tire pressure systems and air bag
systems. Some data about vehicle operation may be stored in the computers for
use during servicing. Other data may be
stored if a crash event occurs. For example,
vehicle speed, brake application, steering
angle, air bag readiness, air bag performance and seat belt use by the driver or
passenger may be recorded. These types
of systems are sometimes called Event
Data Recorders.
A genuine INFINITI Service Manual is the
best source of service and repair information for your vehicle. Filled with wiring
diagrams, illustrations and step-by-step
diagnostic and adjustment procedures,
this manual is the same one used by the
factory trained technicians working at an
INFINITI dealer. Also available are genuine
INFINITI Owner’s Manuals, and genuine
INFINITI Service and Owner’s Manuals for
older INFINITI models.
Special equipment can be used to access
the electronic data that may be stored in
the vehicle’s computers (sounds are not
recorded). INFINITI and INFINITI dealers
have equipment to access some of this
data; others may also have this equipment. The data may be retrieved during
routine vehicle servicing or for special research. It might also be accessed with the
consent of the vehicle owner or leasee, in
response to a request by law enforcement,
or as otherwise required or permitted by
law.
In the USA:
For current pricing and availability of
genuine INFINITI Service Manuals for the
2000 model year and later, contact:
Tweddle Litho Company
1-800-450-9491
www.nissan-techinfo.com/infiniti
For current pricing and availability of
genuine INFINITI Service Manuals for the
1999 model year and prior, see an INFINITI
dealer, or contact:
Resolve Corporation
20770 Westwood Drive
Strongsville, OH 44149
1-800-247-5321
For current pricing and availability of
genuine INFINITI Owner’s Manuals for this
9-20 Technical and consumer information
w 07.2.6/V36-D X
model year and prior, see an INFINITI
dealer, or contact:
Resolve Corporation
20770 Westwood Drive
Strongsville, OH 44149
1-800-247-5321
In Canada:
To purchase a copy of a genuine INFINITI
Service Manual or Owner’s Manual please
contact an INFINITI dealer. For the phone
number and location of an INFINITI dealer
in your area call the INFINITI Satisfaction
Center at 1-800-361-4792 and a bilingual
INFINITI representative will assist you.
Also available are genuine INFINITI Service and Owner’s Manuals for older
INFINITI models.
IN THE EVENT OF A COLLISION
Unfortunately, accidents do occur. In this
unlikely event, there is some important
information you should know. Many insurance companies routinely authorize the
use of non-genuine collision parts in
order to cut costs, among other reasons.
Insist on the use of Genuine
INFINITI Collision Parts!
Why should you take a chance?
If you want your vehicle to be restored
using parts made to INFINITI’s original exacting specifications — if you want to
help it to last and hold its resale value,
the solution is simple. Tell your insurance
agent and your repair shop to only use
Genuine INFINITI Collision Parts. INFINITI
does not warrant non-INFINITI parts, nor
does INFINITI’s warranty apply to damage
caused by a non-genuine part.
Using Genuine INFINITI Parts can help protect your personal safety, preserve your
warranty protection and maintain the resale value of your vehicle. And if your vehicle was leased, using Genuine INFINITI
Parts may prevent or limit unnecessary
excess wear and tear expenses at the end
of your lease.
In over 40 states, the law says you must
be advised if non-genuine parts are used
to repair your vehicle. And some states
have enacted laws that restrict insurance
companies from authorizing the use of
non-genuine collision parts during the
new vehicle warranty. These laws help
protect you, so you can take action to
protect yourself.
It’s your right!
If you should need further information
visit us at:
www.infiniti.com (for U.S. customers) or
www.infiniti.ca (for Canadian customers)
INFINITI designs its hoods with crumple
zones to minimize the risk that the hood
will penetrate the windshield of your vehicle in an accident. Non-genuine (imitation) parts may not provide such built in
safeguards. Also, non-genuine parts often
show premature wear, rust and corrosion.
Technical and consumer information 9-21
w 07.2.6/V36-D X
MEMO
9-22 Technical and consumer information
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
10 Index
A
ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) ....................... 5-49
Adaptive front lighting system (AFS) ................ 2-37
Advanced air bag system.................................. 1-41
Aiming control, Adaptive front lighting system
(AFS) ................................................................ 2-37
Air bag system
Advanced air bag system ........................... 1-41
Front passenger air bag and status light ... 1-43
Side and curtain (See supplemental
side-impact air bag and curtain
side-impact air bag system) ...................... 1-46
Air bag warning labels ..................................... 1-49
Air bag warning light............................... 1-49, 2-18
Air cleaner housing filter.................................. 8-19
Air conditioner
Air conditioner service............................... 4-31
Air conditioner specification label .............. 9-11
Air conditioning system refrigerant and
lubricant recommendations ................ 4-31, 9-6
Automatic climate control.......................... 4-25
In-cabin microfilter .................................... 4-31
Operation (See automatic climate
control) ..................................................... 4-25
Alarm, How to stop alarm (see vehicle security
system) ............................................................ 2-31
Alcohol, drugs and driving................................. 5-6
All-wheel drive (AWD)....................................... 5-42
All-wheel drive (AWD) warning light ................. 2-14
Antenna ........................................................... 4-57
Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) ....................... 5-49
Anti-lock braking system (ABS) warning light ... 2-14
Appearance care
Exterior appearance care............................. 7-2
Interior appearance care ............................. 7-4
Armrest .............................................................. 1-7
Armrest, Rear armrest pocket .......................... 2-50
Ashtrays (See cigarette lighter and ashtrays)... 2-45
Audible reminders ........................................... 2-20
Audio operation precautions............................ 4-32
Audio system................................................... 4-32
Steering wheel audio controls................... 4-56
Audion system, Hard-disk drive audio system
(Music Box) ..................................................... 4-46
Autochanger
Compact Disc (CD) .................................... 4-42
Autolight system.............................................. 2-35
Automatic
Automatic sunroof..................................... 2-54
Automatic transmission fluid (ATF) ............ 8-12
Climate control.......................................... 4-25
Drive positioner ........................................ 3-26
Driving with automatic transmission.......... 5-10
Seat positioner ......................................... 3-26
Auxiliary port................................................... 4-20
Avoiding collision and rollover ........................... 5-5
B
Battery ............................................................. 8-15
Battery saver system ................................ 2-36
Intelligent Key........................................... 8-23
Variable voltage control system................. 8-17
Before starting the engine ................................. 5-9
Belts (See drive belts) ...................................... 8-17
Bluetooth Hands-Free Phone System ............. 4-58
Booster seats ................................................... 1-31
Brake
Anti-lock Braking System (ABS)................. 5-49
Brake fluid ................................................ 8-13
Brake system ............................................ 5-45
Parking brake operation ............................ 5-16
Warning light............................................. 2-14
Break-in schedule ............................................ 5-41
Brightness control, Instrument panel ............... 2-39
Bulb check/instrument panel ........................... 2-13
Bulb replacement............................................. 8-25
C
Cabin air filter.................................................. 4-31
Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants .... 9-2
Car phone or CB radio ..................................... 4-58
Card holder ..................................................... 2-50
Cargo (See vehicle loading information) ........... 2-51
Cargo net ......................................................... 2-51
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
Catalytic converter, Three way catalyst .............. 5-3
CD/CF care and cleaning.................................. 4-54
Center multi-function control panel.................... 4-3
Child restraints................................................. 1-16
Booster seats............................................. 1-31
Installation using LATCH ............................ 1-21
Installation using the seat belts ................ 1-24
LATCH system ............................................ 1-18
Precautions on child restraints .................. 1-16
Top tether strap ........................................ 1-20
Child safety ...................................................... 1-10
Child safety rear door lock ................................ 3-7
Chimes
Audible reminders..................................... 2-20
Seat belt warning light and chime............. 2-18
Cigarette lighter and ashtrays.......................... 2-45
Circuit breaker, Fusible link ............................. 8-22
Cleaning exterior and interior ..................... 7-2, 7-4
Climate control, Automatic climate control....... 4-25
Clock ............................................................... 2-43
Coat hooks....................................................... 2-51
Cockpit .............................................................. 2-2
Cold weather driving ........................................ 5-52
Command (See Bluetooth Hands-Free Phone
System)............................................................ 4-71
Command (See INFINITI voice recognition
system) ................................................... 4-12, 4-81
Compact Disc (CD) changer (See audio
system) ........................................................... 4-42
Compact spare tire .......................................... 8-38
CompactFlash (CF) player
(See audio system).......................................... 4-44
Compass display ............................................... 2-9
Console box .................................................... 2-49
Controller, Center multi-function control
panel................................................................. 4-4
Controls
Control panel button (display) .................... 4-3
Heater and air conditioner controls (See
automatic climate control)......................... 4-25
Coolant
Capacities and recommended fuel/
lubricants ................................................... 9-2
Changing engine coolant ............................ 8-9
Checking engine coolant level .................... 8-8
Corrosion protection .......................................... 7-6
Cruise control ................................................... 5-17
Cruise control, Fixed speed cruise control
(on ICC system) ............................................... 5-36
Cruise control, Intelligent cruise control (ICC)
system ............................................................. 5-19
Cup holders..................................................... 2-46
Curtain side-impact air bag system .................. 1-46
D
Daytime running light system .......................... 2-37
Defroster switch, Rear window and outside
mirror defroster switch .................................... 2-33
Dimensions ....................................................... 9-8
Display cleaning ................................................ 4-6
Display controls (See center multi-function
control panel) .................................................... 4-3
Dot matrix liquid crystal display....................... 2-21
Drive belts ....................................................... 8-17
Drive positioner ............................................... 3-26
Driving
All-wheel drive (AWD)................................ 5-42
All-wheel drive (AWD) safety precautions .... 5-6
Cold weather driving ................................. 5-52
Driving with automatic transmission.......... 5-10
Driving with manual transmission .............. 5-15
Precautions when starting and driving ........ 5-2
E
Economy, Fuel .................................................. 5-41
Elapsed time.................................................... 2-27
Emission control information label ................... 9-10
Emission control system warranty .................... 9-18
Engine
Before starting the engine .......................... 5-9
Break-in schedule...................................... 5-41
Capacities and recommended fuel/
lubricants ................................................... 9-2
Changing engine coolant ............................ 8-9
Changing engine oil and filter ................... 8-10
Checking engine coolant level .................... 8-8
Checking engine oil level............................ 8-9
Coolant temperature gauge......................... 2-8
Engine block heater .................................. 5-54
Engine compartment check locations .......... 8-7
Engine cooling system................................ 8-8
Engine oil ................................................... 8-9
Engine oil and oil filter recommendation..... 9-5
Engine oil viscosity ..................................... 9-5
Engine serial number ................................ 9-10
Engine specifications .................................. 9-7
If your vehicle overheats ........................... 6-10
Starting the engine ..................................... 5-9
Entry/exit function, Automatic drive
positioner ........................................................ 3-26
10-2
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
Event data recorders ....................................... 9-20
Exhaust gas (Carbon monoxide)......................... 5-2
F
F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label........... 9-10
Filter
Air cleaner housing filter ........................... 8-19
Changing engine oil and filter ................... 8-10
Flashers (See hazard warning flasher
switch) ............................................................ 2-40
Flat tire.............................................................. 6-2
Flat towing ....................................................... 9-16
Floor mat cleaning ............................................. 7-5
Fluid
Automatic transmission fluid (ATF) ............ 8-12
Brake fluid ................................................ 8-13
Capacities and recommended fuel/
lubricants ................................................... 9-2
Engine coolant............................................ 8-8
Engine oil ................................................... 8-9
Power steering fluid .................................. 8-12
Window washer fluid................................. 8-14
FM-AM-SAT radio with Compact Disc (CD)
changer ........................................................... 4-40
Fog light switch ............................................... 2-39
Four-wheel active steer (4WAS) system ............ 5-52
Four-wheel active steer (4WAS) warning light ... 2-15
Front passenger air bag and status light.......... 1-43
Front power seat adjustment.............................. 1-2
Front seat adjustment ........................................ 1-2
Fuel
Capacities and recommended fuel/
lubricants ................................................... 9-2
Fuel economy ............................................ 5-41
Fuel octane rating ....................................... 9-3
Fuel recommendation.................................. 9-3
Fuel-filler cap ............................................ 3-20
Fuel-filler door .......................................... 3-20
Gauge......................................................... 2-9
Fuses............................................................... 8-22
Fusible links .................................................... 8-22
G
Garage door opener, HomeLink Universal
Transceiver ...................................................... 2-59
Gas cap ........................................................... 3-20
Gauge................................................................ 2-6
Engine coolant temperature gauge.............. 2-8
Fuel gauge.................................................. 2-9
Odometer.................................................... 2-7
Speedometer .............................................. 2-7
Tachometer................................................. 2-8
Trip computer............................................ 2-27
General maintenance......................................... 8-2
Glove box ........................................................ 2-48
H
Hands-Free Phone System, Bluetooth ............ 4-58
Hard-disk drive audio system (Music Box) ....... 4-46
Hazard warning flasher switch......................... 2-40
Head restraints................................................... 1-5
Headlights
Aiming control (See adaptive front lighting
system (AFS)) ............................................ 2-37
Bulb replacement...................................... 8-26
Headlight switch ....................................... 2-35
Xenon headlights ...................................... 2-34
Heated seats.................................................... 2-41
Heater
Automatic climate control.......................... 4-25
Engine block heater .................................. 5-54
HomeLink Universal Transceiver..................... 2-59
Hood release .................................................... 3-17
Hook, Coat hooks............................................. 2-51
Horn ................................................................ 2-40
I
Ignition switch
Ignition switch (Push-button) ...................... 5-7
Automatic transmission models ................. 5-10
Manual transmission models ..................... 5-15
Immobilizer system .......................................... 2-31
In-cabin microfilter ........................................... 4-31
Indicator lights................................................. 2-18
Indicator, Dot matrix display ............................ 2-21
INFINITI Vehicle Immobilizer System ................. 2-31
INFINITI voice recognition system ..................... 4-81
Inside mirror.................................................... 3-24
Inspection/maintenance (I/M) test ................... 9-19
Instrument brightness control.......................... 2-39
Instrument panel ............................................... 2-4
Intelligent cruise control (ICC) system .............. 5-19
Intelligent cruise control (ICC) system, Preview
function............................................................ 5-41
Intelligent Key system ....................................... 3-8
Battery replacement.................................. 8-23
Key operating range ................................... 3-8
10-3
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
Key operation ............................................ 3-10
Warning light............................................. 2-16
Warning signals......................................... 3-12
Intelligent Key warning light ............................ 2-16
Interior light control switch .............................. 2-57
Interior light replacement ................................ 8-26
Interior lights................................................... 2-56
Interior trunk lid release .................................. 3-19
ISOFIX child restraint ........................................ 1-18
J
Jump starting .................................................... 6-8
K
Keyless entry (See remote keyless entry
system) ............................................................ 3-14
Keys (Intelligent Key) ......................................... 3-2
Keys, For Intelligent Key system ........................ 3-8
L
Labels
Air bag warning labels .............................. 1-49
Air conditioner specification label .............. 9-11
Emission control information label ............ 9-10
Engine serial number ................................ 9-10
F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label .... 9-10
Tire and Loading Information label ... 8-30, 9-11
Vehicle identification number (VIN) ............. 9-9
LATCH system ................................................... 1-18
License plate, Installing front license plate ...... 9-12
Light
Air bag warning light................................. 1-49
Bulb replacement...................................... 8-25
Fog light switch ........................................ 2-39
Headlight switch ....................................... 2-35
Headlights bulb replacement .................... 8-26
Indicator lights .......................................... 2-18
Interior light control switch ....................... 2-57
Interior lights ............................................ 2-56
Map lights ................................................ 2-56
Personal lights .......................................... 2-57
Replacement ............................................. 8-25
Trunk light ................................................ 2-58
Vanity mirror lights ................................... 2-58
Warning/indicator lights and audible
reminders.................................................. 2-14
Xenon headlights ...................................... 2-34
Lights, Exterior and interior light
replacement .................................................... 8-26
Loading information (See vehicle loading
information) ..................................................... 9-13
Lock
Door locks................................................... 3-5
Glove box lock.......................................... 2-48
Power door lock .......................................... 3-5
Trunk lid.................................................... 3-18
Low tire pressure warning light........................ 2-16
Low tire pressure warning system (See tire
pressure monitoring system (TPMS)).................. 5-3
General maintenance .................................. 8-2
Indicators for maintenance (dot matrix)..... 2-25
Inside the vehicle ....................................... 8-3
Maintenance precautions ............................ 8-5
Maintenance requirements.......................... 8-2
Outside the vehicle..................................... 8-2
Seat belt maintenance ............................... 1-15
Under the hood and vehicle ....................... 8-4
Malfunction indicator light (MIL)....................... 2-19
Map lights ....................................................... 2-56
Memory storage, Automatic drive positioner.... 3-28
Meter, Trip computer ....................................... 2-27
Meters and gauges............................................ 2-6
Meters and gauges, Instrument brightness
control............................................................. 2-39
Mirror
Automatic anti-glare inside mirror ............. 3-25
Inside mirror ............................................. 3-24
Outside mirrors ......................................... 3-25
Monitor, Rearview monitor ............................... 4-21
Music Box (hard-disk drive audio system) ....... 4-46
M
Odometer .......................................................... 2-7
Oil
Capacities and recommended fuel/
lubricants ................................................... 9-2
Maintenance
Battery ...................................................... 8-15
N
Net, Cargo net .................................................. 2-51
New vehicle break-in ........................................ 5-41
O
10-4
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
Changing engine oil and filter ................... 8-10
Checking engine oil level............................ 8-9
Engine oil ................................................... 8-9
Engine oil viscosity ..................................... 9-5
Operation, Indicators for operation (dot
matrix)............................................................. 2-23
Outside mirrors................................................ 3-25
Overheat, If your vehicle overheats .................. 6-10
Owner’s Manual/Service Manual order
information...................................................... 9-20
P
Parking
Brake break-in .......................................... 5-46
Parking brake operation ............................ 5-16
Parking on hills......................................... 5-44
Personal lights................................................. 2-57
Phone
Bluetooth Hands-Free Phone System....... 4-58
Car phone or CB radio .............................. 4-58
Power
Front seat adjustment ................................. 1-2
Power door lock .......................................... 3-5
Power outlet ............................................. 2-44
Power steering fluid .................................. 8-12
Power steering system .............................. 5-45
Power windows ......................................... 2-52
Power window switch finisher ..................... 7-5
Pre-tensioner seat belt system......................... 1-48
Precautions
All-wheel drive (AWD) driving safety............ 5-6
Audio operation ........................................ 4-32
Braking precautions .................................. 5-45
Child restraints .......................................... 1-16
Cruise control ............................................ 5-17
Maintenance ............................................... 8-5
Seat belt usage........................................... 1-8
Supplemental restraint system .................. 1-35
When starting and driving........................... 5-2
Preview function .............................................. 5-46
Preview function (for Intelligent cruise control
system) ............................................................ 5-41
Push starting ................................................... 6-10
Push-button ignition switch ............................... 5-7
R
Radio...................................................... 4-32, 4-56
Car phone or CB radio .............................. 4-58
FM-AM-SAT radio with Compact Disc (CD)
changer .................................................... 4-40
Readiness for inspection/maintenance (I/M)
test (US only) ................................................... 9-19
Rear armrest pocket ........................................ 2-50
Rear door lock, Child safety rear door lock ........ 3-7
Rear power point ............................................. 2-44
Rear window and outside mirror defroster
switch.............................................................. 2-33
Rearview monitor ............................................. 4-21
Recorders, Event data...................................... 9-20
Registering your vehicle in another country....... 9-9
Remote keyless entry system ........................... 3-14
Reporting safety defects (US only) ................... 9-18
Roadside assistance program ............................ 6-2
Rollover ............................................................. 5-5
S
Safety
Child seat belts ......................................... 1-10
Reporting safety defects (US only)............. 9-18
Seat adjustment
Front power seat adjustment ....................... 1-2
Front seats .................................................. 1-2
Seat belt(s)
Child safety ............................................... 1-10
Infants........................................................ 1-11
Injured persons .......................................... 1-11
Larger children ........................................... 1-11
Pre-tensioner seat belt system .................. 1-48
Precautions on seat belt usage ................... 1-8
Pregnant women......................................... 1-11
Seat belt cleaning ....................................... 7-5
Seat belt extenders .................................... 1-15
Seat belt maintenance ............................... 1-15
Seat belt warning light and chime............. 2-18
Seat belts ................................................... 1-8
Shoulder belt height adjustment ................ 1-15
Small children ............................................ 1-11
Three-point type......................................... 1-12
Seat(s)
Driver-side memory................................... 3-26
Heated seats ............................................. 2-41
Seats........................................................... 1-2
Synchronization function, Automatic drive
positioner ................................................. 3-27
Secondary trunk lid release ............................. 3-20
Security system (INFINITI Vehicle Immobilizer
System), Engine start ....................................... 2-31
Security system, Vehicle security system......... 2-29
10-5
w 06.9.14/V36-D X
Selector lever, Shift lock release ...................... 5-14
Servicing air conditioner (See automatic
climate control)................................................ 4-25
Servicing climate control .................................. 4-31
Shift lock release, Transmission ....................... 5-14
Shifting
Automatic transmission ............................. 5-10
Manual transmission ................................. 5-15
Shoulder belt height adjustment....................... 1-15
Side-impact air bag system.............................. 1-46
Snow mode switch .......................................... 2-42
Spare tire .......................................................... 9-8
Spark plugs ..................................................... 8-18
Speedometer ..................................................... 2-7
Starting
Before starting the engine .......................... 5-9
Jump starting.............................................. 6-8
Precautions when starting and driving ........ 5-2
Push starting............................................. 6-10
Starting the engine ..................................... 5-9
Status light, Front passenger air bag ............... 1-43
Steering
Four-wheel active steer (4WAS) system ..... 5-52
Power steering fluid .................................. 8-12
Power steering system .............................. 5-45
Steering-wheel-mounted controls for
audio ........................................................ 4-56
Tilting telescopic steering column ............. 3-22
Storage ........................................................... 2-46
Sun visors ....................................................... 3-23
Sunglasses holder........................................... 2-48
Sunroof............................................................ 2-54
Automatic sunroof..................................... 2-54
Supplemental air bag warning labels ............... 1-49
Supplemental air bag warning light......... 1-49, 2-18
Supplemental restraint system ......................... 1-35
Precautions on supplemental restraint
system....................................................... 1-35
Supplemental side-impact and curtain
side-impact air bag system .............................. 1-46
Switch
Autolight switch ........................................ 2-35
Fog light switch ........................................ 2-39
Hazard warning flasher switch .................. 2-40
Headlight switch ....................................... 2-35
Ignition switch automatic transmission
models ...................................................... 5-10
Ignition switch manual transmission
models ...................................................... 5-15
Power door lock switch ............................... 3-7
Rear window and outside mirror defroster
switch ....................................................... 2-33
Snow mode switch.................................... 2-42
Turn signal switch..................................... 2-39
Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) off
switch ....................................................... 2-42
T
Tachometer ....................................................... 2-8
Temperature gauge, Engine coolant temperature
gauge ................................................................ 2-8
Theft (INFINITI Vehicle Immobilizer System),
Engine start...................................................... 2-31
Three-way catalyst ............................................. 5-3
Tilting telescopic steering column.................... 3-22
Tire pressure, Low tire pressure warning
light ................................................................. 2-16
Tires
Flat tire....................................................... 6-2
Low tire pressure warning system............... 5-3
Spare tire ................................................. 8-38
Tire and Loading information label ... 8-30, 9-11
Tire chains ................................................ 8-35
Tire dressing ............................................... 7-3
Tire pressure ............................................ 8-28
Tire pressure monitoring system
(TPMS) ................................................. 5-3, 6-2
Tire rotation.............................................. 8-36
Types of tires............................................ 8-34
Uniform tire quality grading....................... 9-17
Wheel/tire size ........................................... 9-8
Wheels and tires....................................... 8-28
Top tether strap child restraints....................... 1-20
Touch screen system ......................................... 4-5
Towing
Flat towing ................................................ 9-16
Tow truck towing ....................................... 6-11
Towing a trailer ......................................... 9-16
Towing load/specification chart................. 9-16
TPMS, Tire pressure monitoring system ...... 5-3, 6-2
Trailer towing................................................... 9-16
Transceiver, HomeLink Universal
Transceiver ...................................................... 2-59
Transmission
Automatic transmission fluid (ATF) ............ 8-12
Driving with automatic transmission.......... 5-10
Driving with manual transmission .............. 5-15
Transmission selector lever lock release.... 5-14
Transmitter (See remote keyless entry
system) ............................................................ 3-14
10-6
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
Traveling or registering your vehicle in another
country.............................................................. 9-9
Trip computer .................................................. 2-27
Trip odometer .................................................. 2-27
Trunk
Interior trunk lid release............................ 3-19
Light ......................................................... 2-58
Pass-through ............................................... 1-7
Secondary trunk lid release ...................... 3-20
Trunk lid.................................................... 3-18
Trunk net ................................................... 2-51
Turn signal switch ........................................... 2-39
U
Underbody cleaning........................................... 7-3
Uniform tire quality grading ............................. 9-17
V
Vanity mirror lights.......................................... 2-58
Variable voltage control system ....................... 8-17
Vehicle
Dimensions................................................. 9-8
Identification number (VIN) ......................... 9-9
Loading information .................................. 9-13
Recovery (freeing a stuck vehicle).............. 6-15
Security system ........................................ 2-29
Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) off
switch ....................................................... 2-42
Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) system....... 5-50
Vehicle information and settings
(display) ..................................................... 4-9
Ventilators ....................................................... 4-25
Voice command (See Bluetooth Hands-Free
Phone System) ................................................. 4-71
Voice command (See INFINITI voice
recognition system) ................................. 4-12, 4-81
Voice recognition system ................................. 4-81
W
Warning labels, Air bag warning labels ............ 1-49
Warning light
Air bag warning light ........................ 1-49, 2-18
All-wheel drive (AWD) warning light........... 2-14
Anti-lock braking system (ABS) warning
light .......................................................... 2-14
Brake warning light ................................... 2-14
Four-wheel active steer (FWAS) warning
light........................................................... 2-15
Intelligent Key warning light...................... 2-16
Low tire pressure warning light ................. 2-16
Seat belt warning light and chime............. 2-18
Warning lights.................................................. 2-14
Warning, Dot matrix display ............................. 2-21
Warning, Hazard warning flasher switch.......... 2-40
Warning, Tire pressure monitoring system
(TPMS)........................................................ 5-3, 6-2
Warning, Warning/indicator lights and audible
reminders......................................................... 2-13
Warranty, Emission control system warranty .... 9-18
Washer switch, Windshield wiper and washer
switch.............................................................. 2-32
Washing ............................................................ 7-2
Waxing .............................................................. 7-2
Wheel/tire size.................................................. 9-8
Wheels and tires ............................................. 8-28
Cleaning aluminum alloy wheels ................. 7-3
Wheels, Four-wheel active steer (4WAS)
system ............................................................. 5-52
Window washer fluid........................................ 8-14
Window(s)
Cleaning ..................................................... 7-3
Power windows ......................................... 2-52
Windshield wiper and washer switch ............... 2-32
Wiper
Windshield wiper and washer switch ........ 2-32
Wiper blades ............................................. 8-19
X
Xenon headlights............................................. 2-34
10-7
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
MEMO
10-8
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
GAS STATION INFORMATION
FUEL RECOMMENDATION:
INFINITI recommends the use of unleaded
premium gasoline with an octane rating of
at least 93 AKI (Anti-Knock Index) number
(Research octane number 98).
If unleaded premium gasoline is not available, you may use unleaded regular gasoline with an octane rating of at least 87
AKI number (Research octane number 91),
but you may notice a decrease in performance.
CAUTION
O
Using a fuel other than that specified
could adversely affect the emission control systems, and may also affect warranty coverage.
O
Under no circumstances should a leaded
gasoline be used, since this will damage
the three way catalyst.
O
Do not use E-85 fuel in your vehicle. Your
vehicle is not designed to run on E-85
fuel. Using E-85 fuel can damage the fuel
system components and is not covered
by the INFINITI vehicle limited warranty.
ties and recommended fuel/lubricants” in
the “9. Technical and consumer information” section.
ENGINE OIL RECOMMENDATION:
O
Engine oil with API Certification Mark
O
Viscosity SAE 5W-30
See “Capacities and recommended fuel/
lubricants” in the “9. Technical and consumer information” section for engine oil
and oil filter recommendation.
COLD TIRE PRESSURES:
See Tire and Loading Information label affixed to the driver’s side center pillar.
NEW VEHICLE BREAK-IN
PROCEDURES RECOMMENDATION:
During the first 1,200 miles (2,000 km) of
vehicle use, follow the recommendations
outlined in the “Break-in schedule” Information found in the “5. Starting and driving” section of this Owner’s Manual.
Follow these recommendations for the future reliability and economy of your new
vehicle.
For additional information, see “Capaci-
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
1. Engine oil (P.8-9)
2. Meters and gauges (P.2-6)
3. Hood release (P.3-17)
4. Seat (P.1-2)
5. Seat belt (P.1-8)
6. Door lock (P.3-5)
7. Engine coolant (P.8-8)
8. Windshield washer fluid (P.8-14)
9. Battery (P.8-15)
10. Air conditioner (P.4-25)
Audio system (P.4-32)
11. Fuel-filler door release (P.3-20)
Fuel recommendation (P.9-3)
12. Spare tire (P.6-2)
STI0512
w 06.7.27/V36-D X
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertising